II PUC

1. ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 333 – 364

2. ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 365 – 395

3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY 396 – 423

4. MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 424 – 451

5. MAGNETISM AND MATTER 452 – 470

6. ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 471 – 491

7. ALTERNATING CURRENT 492 – 514

8. ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 515 – 529

9. RAY OPTICS AND OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS 530 – 565

10. WAVE OPTICS 566 – 592

11. DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER 593 – 616

12. ATOMS 617 – 638

13. NUCLEI 639 – 659

14. SEMICONDUCTOR ELECTRONICS 660 – 686

Electric charges and field

CHAPTER ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELD

Electric charges and their conservation. Coulomb’s law-force between
two point charges, forces between multiple charges; superposition principle and

1
continuous charge distribution. Electric field, electric field due to a point charge,
electric field lines; electric dipole, electric field due to a dipole; torque on a dipole
in a uniform electric field. Electric flux, statement of Gauss’s theorem and its
applications to find field due to infinitely long straight wire, uniformly charged
infinite plane sheet and uniformly charged thin spherical shell (field inside and
outside).
PAST NEET PAPERS SUBTOPIC LEVEL ANALYSIS
NEET 2016 NEET 2016 Forecasting of
Year NEET 2018 NEET 2017
PHASE-II PHASE-I NEET 2019
No of
question 1 1 1 1 1
Asked
ratio of time of comparsion of
torque action
Subtopic fall of electron graviational charge leaking pedulum bob
on a dipole
& proton &electric field

 Electric Charge: It is the inherent property of certain fundamental particles. It accompanies them
whereever they exist. Commonly known charged particles are proton and electron. The charge of
a proton is taken as positive and that of electron is taken as negative. It is represented by symbol
e. e = 1.6 × 10–19 coulomb ie., Charge of proton = +e & Charge of electron = –e
 Properties of Electric Charge
 Charges interact with each other i.e., they exert force on each other. Like charges do not like
(repel) each other while unlike charges like each other (attract).
 Total charge of an isolated system is conserved ie., conservation of Electric Charge : The
algebraic sum of electric charges in an electrically isolated system always remains constant
irrespective of any process taking place.
 Charge is quantised & It is a scalar
 Charge can be transferred : Charge can be transferred from one body to other. This occurs due
to transfer of electrons from one body to other. One of the common example of transfer of charge
is charging by friction. Frictional Electricity : When two bodies are rubbed with each other, they
are found to attract each other. This is so because, on rubbing, transfer of electrons takes place from
one body to other. One of them acquires a positive charge and other acquires a negative charge.
e–
Rubbing Transfer
A B

Neutral Neutral
 Charge is invariant : Charge of a particle is independent of speed.
 Charge cannot exist without mass, while mass can exist without charge.
 Quantization of electric Charge: Magnitude of all charges found in nature are in integral multiple
of a fundamental charge. Q = ne Where n = integer and e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
 Protons and neutrons consists of fundamental particle known as Quarks.

II PUC 333
 Objective Physics
2 1
It has two types : (i) Up quark  u    e (ii) Down quark  d    e
3 3
 Composition of proton & neutron : uud & udd
 If any body consists n1 number of proton and n2 number of electron then total charge on it is
Q   n2  n1  e .
Coulomb’s Law: ‘The electric force between two stationary point charges is directly proportional to the
product of their charges and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them’.
q1 q 2 qq
F 2
 F  k 122 Where k is proportionality constant it is known as Coulomb.s constant.
r r
 Its value depends upon two factors : (i) Unit system (ii) Medium in which the charge is placed.
1
 SI System : k   9  109 Nm 2C 2 & CGS System : k = 1
4 0
Where 0  permitivity of free space = 8.85  10 -12 C 2 N 1 m 2
It gives an expression for the force between two charged particles or particles like objects.
1 q1q 2
| F 2 1 |  | F12 | 
4 0 r 2 F12 r F21
q1 q2
 Important Points :
 If q1q2 > 0, force is repulsive.
 If q1q2 < 0, force is attractive.
 This force is central and conservative.
 This force is between two charges and is independent of the presence of other charges i.e., if some
other charges are present in the region, the force between two given charges remains same.
 The coulombian force acting between two charges is mutually interactive. The force acting be
tween two charges is equal in magnitude and opposite in direction. The ratio of electric force
between charges q1 and q 2 is 1:1.
 Coulomb’s law is applicable for the distance more than 10 15 m (nuctear distance) and it can be
applied for the point charges only.
 Charge Q is divided in charges q1 and q 2 and if the force acting between them is maximum then
Q
q1  q2  .
2
 If the force between two charges at distance r1 is F1 and at distance r2 is F2 then F1 r12  F2 r22 .
 If the force in medium of dielectric constant K1 is F1 and in dielectric constant K2 is F2 than
F1 K 1  F2 K 2 .
 If two identical sphere carry charge q1 and q2 and force acting between them is F.
They are brought in contact and then separated then the force acting between them is
2

F , q  q 
 1 2 F.
4q1 q 2
Coulomb’s Law in Vector Form
1 q1q 2 ˆ 1 q1q 2 ˆ
F12  2
i , F2 1  i
4 0 x 4 0 x 2
334 II PUC
Electric charges and field
F12 x F21
x-axis
q1 q2
 Relative Permittivity r  Or Dielectric Constant  K  :

Permittivity of medium  

Dielectric constant of medium K = Permittivity of vaccum  ; K r 
 0 0
 Coulomb’s Law In Terms of dielectric constant (K) :
1 q 1q 2
When two charges are put in a medium, the electric force between them Fm 
4  r 2
 1 q1 q2 F
But  K   K 0 Fm  2 ; Therefore Fm 
0 4 0 K r K
 For Insulator (dielectric substances) K  1 thus , Fm  F
 In vacuum K  1, For air K  1.0006  1 & For Conductor K  
 According to law of parallelogram, the resultant force on a charge due to two electric charges is,

  F2 sin 
F  F12  F22  2F1 F2 cos  where   ngle between F 1 and F 2 . Also tan   F  F cos  ,
1 2

 If F1  F2  F , then for different angle of  , magnitude of force is :

Angle  Force F
o ,
0 2F
1
30o

2 3  2
F
,

1
45o
2  2  2
F,
o
60 3F ,
90o 2F,
o ,
120 F
o 1
150

2 3  2
F,
180 o 0
ELECTRIC FIELD :The space around a charge distribution, in which the charge can exert force on other
charges is called electric field.
Electric Field Intensity : Electric field intensity at a point as the force experienced per unit charge when

F
a very small positive test charge is placed at that point. E  Limit
q 0 q
 Units : SI units of electric field intensity are (i) N/C (ii) volt/metre
 
 Force experienced by a charge q in an electric field of intensity F  qE.

II PUC 335
 Objective Physics
qE
 According to Newton.s second law F = ma .  ma  qE  a
m
Charge is in motion in electric field then,
 qE 
 Velocity after ‘t’ seconds is v  v0    t.
m
1  qE  2
 Distance travelled in ‘t’ seconds d  v0 t   t
2 m 

2hm
 Time taken to fall through a height ‘h’ is t 
qE
Electric Field due to a Point Charge (Q)
+Q P ( q )
1 Qq ˆ F 1 Q ˆ 1 Q ˆ
F i , E  i E i
4 0 r 2 2  4  2
q 4 0 r 0 r r F, E x-axis
Electric Field Intensity at O in Each Case Shown Below is zero
+Q

a a
r r
(1) +Q O +Q (2) O

+Q a +Q
+Q a +Q +Q +Q
a +Q

a a a a
O O
+Q O +Q
a a +Q +Q
(3) (4) (5) a a
a a

+Q a +Q +Q a +Q
+Q a +Q
ELECTRIC LINES OF FORCE: Invented by Faraday to visualise electric field in a region. They are
imaginary lines drawn such that
 If they are straight, they give the direction of electric field.
 If they are curved, then tangent drawn at any point gives the direction of electric field.
 Number of field lines crossing a cross-section is proportional to strength of electric field present.
Electric Lines of Force due to Various Configurations
(1) Isolated point charge (+) (2) Isolated point Charge (–)

q –q

336 II PUC
Electric charges and field
(3) Electric dipole (4) Two identical charges

–q +q
+q +q

Properties of Electric lines of force:

 They come out of a positive charge or infinity and terminate at negative charge or at infinity.
 In free space, electric lines of force are continuous curves i.e., do not have sudden breaks.
 Two field lines do not intersect each other, as at point of interaction, we will get two different
diretions of electric field which is not possible.
 They contract longitudinally on account of attraction between opposite charges.
 They exert lateral pressure on each other on account of repulsion between like charges.
 Following pattern of lines of force are not possible

1. +q 2. 3. 4.

ELECTRIC DIPOLE
p
A system of two equal and opposite charges separated by a very distance. –q +q
2a
Dipole Moment
 Dipole moment is a vector quantity directed from negative to positive charge. It is represented by
p . Its magnitude is p = (2a) × q
 Units : C-m [coulomb-metre] The most practical example of an electric dipole is a water molecule.
p

p
Hydrogen 105° Hydrogen

Oxygen

Ideal Dipole
 An ideal dipole is a short dipole with large value of q and negligible value of 2a.

In c.g.s. system, units of dipole moment is Debye. For an electron and a proton separated by 1Å.
p = 1.6 × 10–19 C × 10–10 m. p = 1.6 × 10–29 C-m
1Å
–e +e

II PUC 337
 Objective Physics
Electric Field due to an Electric Dipole
Q
Eequatorial

–q +q
O Eaxial
(–a, 0) (a, 0) P
r
 For a point P on axial line
 
 2pr 
E axial  For an ideal dipole (r2 – a2  r2) 2p
E axial 
4  0 ( r 2  a 2 ) 2 4 0 r 3
 For a point Q on equatorial line
 
 p  p
E equatorial  For an ideal dipole (r2 + a2  r2) E equatorial 
4 0 (r 2  a 2 )3 / 2 4 0 r 3
For an ideal dipole (r2 + a2  r2)

  E axial
 For an ideal dipole E equatorial 
2
 Electric Field at any point in the plane of a short dipole, P is a point in x-y plane at a distance r
from the centre of dipole, such that OP makes an angle  with dipole moment.
p sin  Enet
Eeq  3
4 0r
2 p cos 
y-axis P  Eax 
4  0 r 3
Enet
r

s
co
p  Eeq 
 
O Eax
p x-axis
p sin P

1 p E eq 1 1
(a) Enet  1  3 cos 2  (b) tan   E  2 tan   tan   tan 
4 0 r 3 ax 2
(c) The net electric field makes angle  + with dipole moment.
(d) When E  p + = 90°    tan 1 2
Electric Dipole Placed in a Uniform Electric Field (Torque on dipole in uniform electric field)
 Case 1 : p | | E Case 2 : p | | ( E )
E

p p
–qE qE –qE
–q +q +q q E –q

(a) Net force = q E  q E  0 (a) Net force = q E  q E  0

(b) Net torque = Zero (b) Net torque = Zero
338 II PUC
Electric charges and field
 Case 3 : p  E Case 4 : p makes an angle  with E

E +q qE E
+q
qE
2a
2a –qE
 2a sin
–qE –q
–q

(a) Net force = Zero (a) Net force = Zero

(b) = qE × 2a = pE (b)   p  E or  = p E sin 
In vector form   p  E
Potential Energy of Dipole
 The external work required to change the orientation from 1 to 2 is Wext = – pE[cos2 – cos1]
 Change in potential energy of dipole is U2 – U1 = –pE[cos2 – cos1]
 Potential energy of dipole is U = –pE cos 
ELECTRIC FLUX
 It is defined as the number of field lines that pass through a surface in a direction normal to the
surface.
 N- m 2
 Mathematically,   E . A (If E is uniform) In general,   E . d A  Units :
C
or, V-m

 Important cases :
 E || A    E  A      E and A make angle 
A
A E
E A 

 
E
 = EA  =0
 = EA cos
E

R
R

 A 
R
A
h E
E
 Base  E . A  E  R 2 Base = 0
 lateral = –E × R2 ( field lines enter through curved surface) curved = 0 (Total flux that enters=
1  2
2 R
Total flux that leave) φ entered  E   2 πR  & leaving  E 
  2
E

R
 base  E  R 2
A O curved  E  R 2

II PUC 339
 Objective Physics
 1 
GAUSS LAW : The total electric flux through a closed surface enclosing a charge is equal to   
 0
q
times the magnitude of the charge enclosed. ie., E  where  o is permittivity of free space.
o
 It is applicable for closed surface only & is applicable for surface of any shape, any size and enclos
  q
enc
ing any number of charges.   E . dA  
0


=0

R
q
(1) q  sphere  (2)
Sphere 0

q
 sphere 1   sphere 2  –q +q
(3) q
 0 (4)
1 2
Sphere 1
Sphere 2

Surface 3
q q
Electric flux through sphere 1: 1  ,Electric flux through sphere 2: 2  & Electric flux through
0 0
surface 3: 3 = 0
Application of Gauss Law
 Electric Field Due a Point Charge: The field due to a point charge is spherically symmetric. So if
we draw a gaussian sphere around the charge, the strength of electric field will be same every

E
E

r
E
q
1 q dA
where. Using above formula E  4 0 r 2

E E
Gaussian sphere
 Field Due to a Uniformly Charged Spherical Shell (r > R)
Q
E (outside)
4 0 r 2

340 II PUC
Electric charges and field
E
E
r

O
R dA E
Q
E
Gaussian sphere
 A charged spherical shell behaves as if whole charge is concentrated at the centre of shell.
 At any point inside the shell, if we draw a gaussian sphere, the charge enclosed = zero
 E . d A  0  E = 0 (inside)

E=0

Gaussian sphere
 If we draw a graph showing variation of electric field with distance from centre, it will be like this.
 Expression for electric field at any point inside the sphere due to non-conducting solid sphere
having uniform volume charge distribution (sphere of charge)

qr qr
E  . In vector form E 
4 0 R 3 4 0R 3

r
R
4  r
Gaussain If we put q   R 3  , E  3 
Surface 3  0

 Electric field due to linear charge distribution :

 Electric field at distance r due to an infinitely long straight uniformly charged wire,
    2 k
E r or E  r Where   linear charge distribution
2 0 r r
 Electric field due to a uniformly charged infinite plane sheet :

 Electric field due to a uniformly charged infinite plane sheet is E  .
2 0
II PUC 341
 Objective Physics
 This electric field is independent of the distance of the point from the plane. It depends only on  .
 Electric fied due to two parallel plane sheet :

1 1
For region - I E  EA  EB    A   B  For region - II E   A   B 
2 0 2 0
1
For region - III E   A   B 
2 0
If  A   &  B   th e n , For region - I E = 0


For region - II E 
0 & For region - III E = 0
Electric Flux
 Some frequently asked cases :
q
a/2
q
cube 
0
q q
1. a  square  2. q
6 0 each face 
60
a
E q
 ABCD=
F 24 0
q
q
 ABEF = 0
q q q
3. cube  cube 
C  q 4. 2 0 5. 40
B cube =
8 0
A D
Important results for fields due to different bodies (derived by Gauss Law)
kQ
 Point charge Q :
r2

kQ
 hell of charge with charge Q and radius R : (outside) zero (inside)
r2

kQr kQ
 Sphere of charge with charge Q and radius R : 2 (inside) (outside)
R r2

2k
 Infinite line of charge with linear charge density  :
r


 Infinite plane surface of charge with charge density  :
2 0


 Infinite conducting sheet of charge with charge density  : .
0

342 II PUC
Electric charges and fields
EXAMINATION CORNER

 4
1. An electron falls from rest thorugh a vertical q  2 5
 2mC
distance h in a uniform and vertically upward IE sin  2  10  0.5  2  10
directed electric field E. The direction of elec- 4. Two identical charged spheres suspended from
tric field is now reversed, keeping its magni tude a common point by two massless strings of
the same. A proton is allowed to fall from rest lengths l, areinitially at a distance d(d< < l)
in it through the same vertical distance h. The apart because of their mutual repulsion. The
time of fall of the electron, in comparison to the charges begin to leak fromboth the spheres at a
time offall of the proton is (NEET-2018) constant rate. As a result, the spheres approach
(1) 10 times greater (2) 5 times greater each other with a velocity  . Then  varies as
(3) Smaller (4) Equal a function of the distance x between the spheres,
as (NEET-I-2016)
1 eE 2 2hm 1 1
A: (3) h  t t (1)   x 2 (2)   x (3)   x  2 (4)   x 1
2 m eE
 t  m as ‘e’ is same for electron and proton. x
A: (3)   ; f e cos   mgh
 Electron has smaller mass so it will take 2l
smaller time.  x  kq 2 mgx
f e  mg.   ; 2 
2. Suppose the charge of a proton and an elec tron 2 x 2e
differ slightly. One of them is –e, the other is
mg 3 3
 e  e  .If the net of electrostatic force and kq 2  x ; q  x2
gravitational force between two hydrogen at 2l
oms placed at a distance d (much greater than dq 3 21 dx 1 1
 x .  x 2
.v  constant ; vx

2
atomic size) apart is zero, then e is of the or dt 2 dt
der of [Given mass of hydrogen
mh = 1.67 × 10–27 kg] (NEET-2017)
–20 –23 –37
(1) 10 C (2) 10 C (3) 10 C (4) 10–47 C

1 e 2 Gm 2
A: (3) Fe = Fg ;  2 ; 9 × 109  e 2 
4 0 d 2 d
= 6.67 × 10–11 × 1.67 × 10–27 × 1.67 × 10–27
6.67  1.67  1.67
e 2   10 74 ; e  10 375. Two metallic spheres of radius 2 cm and 4 cm
9
and both carry equal charges of 30 C. If two
3. An electric dipole is placed at an angle of 30 0 spheres are connected by conducting wire,
with an electric field intensity 2  10 5 N /C . It then amount of charges will be transferred
experiences a torque equal to 4 N m.The charge from one to other is
on the dipole, if the dipole length is 2 cm, is (1)20 C (2)40 C (3)10 C (4) 30 C
(NEET-II-2016) q1' q2'
(1) 8 mC (2) 2 mC (3) 5 mC (4) 7  C
A: (2)   PE sin     qIE sin  A: (3) R1 R2

II PUC 343
 Objective Physics
q1 ' R2 1 8. The point charges 3C and 4C are placed at
 
q2 ' R1 2 a separation of 7 m. The medium between
1 them is of two types as shown in figure , the
q2 '   60 C  20 C  q  q2  q2 '  10 C
3 electric force acting between them is
6. Force between two identical spheres charged
with same charge is F. If 50% charge of one
sphere is transferred to second sphere then new
force will be
3 3 3 (1) 1.75  10 3 N (2) 1.73  10 4 N
(1) F (2) F (3) F (4) F
4 8 2
(3) 0.18  10 4 N (4) 0.18  10 3 N
A: (1)As F  q1q2
A: (2) For finding air equivalent separation
F  q2 ...(i) [q1 = q2]
After transferring the 50% charge from one 1 q1q 2 1 q1q 2
We have 
sphere to another 4 0 r ' 2
40 r r 2 ;

q 3q q q 1 q 2q 2
q1'  q   ; q 2'  q   F'  4
2 2 2 2 40 r '2  r '  r r1  1.73  10 N

Hence F '  
 3q  q  3 2
    q ...(ii)
(requivalent   9  3   16  4  25m )
 2  2  4
9. Two small spheres each having the charge  Q
are suspended by insulating threads of length
3
From (i) & (ii); F '  F
L from a hook. This arrangement is taken in
4
space where there is no gravitational effect,
7. +q and -q charges are put on diametric end points
then the angle between the two suspensions
of circle of diameter d, then the force on third
and the tension in each will be
charge +q which is on the center of circle is
2 2 2 o 1 Q2 o 1 Q2
8Kq 2Kq 4Kq (1) 180 , 4 (2 L) 2 (2) 90 , 4 L2
(1) (2) (3) (4)0 0 0
d2 d2 d
o 1 Q2 o 1 Q2
A: (1)Electric force on + q electric charge (3) 180 , 4 2 L2 (4) 180 , 4 L2
0 0

F = F1 + F2 (in values) A: (1) The position of the balls in the satellite will
become as shown below
o
180
L L
+Q +Q

1 Q2
Thus angle  = 180° and Force  4  (2 L)2
0

10. The force between two charges placed in air at

a distance r apart is F. Then the force between
the same two charges if a dielectric having
kq 2 kq 2 8kq 2
F 2  2 ,F 2 k = 4 and thickness r/2 is introduced between
d d d
chages is
4 4
4 9F 9F 16 F
(1) F (2) (3) (4)
9 4 16 9
344 II PUC
Electric charges and fields
1 q1q2 Q Q
1 q1q2 F' . (1) q 0   [1  2 2] (2) q 0   [1  2 2]
A: (1) F  40 r  t  t k 2 2 3
40 r 2 &   ;
Q
(3) q 0   [1  2 2] (4) q 0  Q[1  2 2]
2 4
F'  r  4
   F Q
F  r t t k  9 A: (3) q 0   [1  2 2]
4
11. Two charges of 200 C and 200 C are 14. The electric field intensity at P and Q, in the
placed at the corners B and C of an equilateral shown arrangement, are in the ratio
triangle ABC of side 0.1 m. The force on a
charge of 5 C placed A is
(1) 1800 N (2) 1200 3N
(3) 600 3N (4) 900N

1 200 106  5 106

A: (4)  F1  F2  . 2
4 0  0.1 (1) 1 : 2 (2) 2 : 1 (3) 1 : 1 (4) 4 : 3
103 1012 kq
 9 109   9  102 N A: (3) EP  ......(i)
10 2 r2
As angle between F1 & F2 is 120°
kq k.3q kq k.3q  k q
FR  F12  F22  2 F1 F2 cos120  900 N EQ    
r 2 .....(ii)
2 2
 2r   2r  4r 2 4r 2
F1

120
EP : EQ  1 : 1
5C
15. Two point charges each of charge Q are placed
F2
0.1m 0.1m at points P(–a, 0) and Q(a, 0). Which of the
0.1m following represents variation of electric field
+200C 200C
with distance along x-axis?
12. Two long line charges of linear charge densities E E

1 and 2 respectively are fixed r distance apart

as shown. Electrostatic force per unit length on (1) P Q
x
(2) P (0, 0) Q
x

it is equal to (0, 0)

1 1 2
(1) E E

4 0 r

(2) 1  1 2
(3) P Q
x (4) P (0, 0) Q
x

2 0 r2
(0, 0)
1  1 2
(3) A: (3)
4 0 r2
16. Two identical charged pendulums are inclined
1  1 2
(4) at angle 30° and 60° from infinite sheet of
2 0 r
charge of surface charge densities 1 and 2
1 1 F 1  1 2
A: (4) F = qE  ( 2 L) ; L  2 r respectively as shown. The ratio of 1 and 2 is
2 0 r 0 1 2

13. Four equal free charges Q each are kept at four

corners of a square of side l and a charge q0 is 30° 60°

kept at its centre so that whole system is in

equilibrium. The charge q0 is
II PUC 345
 Objective Physics
(1)3 : 1 (2)1 : 3 (3) 1: 3 (4) 3 : 1 out  n   E. R 2 cos 180 o   E. R 2
A: (2) Tsin = qE & Tcos = mg
20. An infinite line charge is at the axis of a cylin
q1 tan  1  1 1 1
tan  1  ;  ;  ;
der of length 1 m and radius 7 cm. If electric
 0mg tan  2  2
3 3 2
1 : 2 = 1 : 3 field at any point on the curved surface of cyl
17. Net electric flux emerging out for the inder is 250 NC–1, then net electric flux through
Gaussian surface S is the cylinder is
+q +2q (1) 1.1  10 2 Nm 2C 1 (2) 9.74  10 6 Nm 2C 1
(3) 5.5  106 Nm 2C 1 (4) 2.5  10 2 Nm 2C 1
S
–q
A: (1) Charge enclosed is  q     1 
–2q

q q q 
(1)Zero (2) 3 2 (3) (4)  E  250
0 0 0 2 0  0.07 
A: (1) qenclosed is zero, therefore net flux emerging So,   500  0.07   0
out for Gaussian surface is also zero. Eelctric flux through cylinder
18. A charged particle of mass 4 kg and charge 2
q
C is thrown from ground with  = 30° and   500  0.07   0
0
speed v = 20 m/s in a uniform electric field E
= 1 × 10 7 V/m as shown. The horizontal
 1.1  102 Nm2C 1
21. Two wires of linear charge density  passing
range of particle will be (g = 10 m/s2)
through a sphere of radius R and a cube of
E sides R so that the flux linked with them is
v
maximum. Then the ratio of flux of sphere to

40
the cube is .......
(1)20 m (2) (3) 40 3 (4) 20 3
3 1 2 3
6 7 (1) 2 (2) (3) (4)
qE 2 10 110 2 3 2
A : (3) g eff  g   5
m 4 A: (3)The following figure shows the alignment of
R
2
u sin2


202 sin2 300   40 5m
wire gives maximum flux : flux associated with
g eff 5 sheilding,
19. A hemispherical surface of radius R is kept in
a uniform electric field E as shown in figure.
The flux through the curved surface is

q  L1 2 R
1   
0 0 0 ...(1)
(1) E2 R 2 (2) E R 2 (3) E 4 R 2 (4) Zero
flux associated with cube
A : (2) qNet  0 So Net  0 ; in  out  0

346 II PUC
Electric charges and fields
1/2 1/ 2
L 3R 1 2  2neE   neE 
2  2  ...(2)   (1)   (2)  
0 0 2 3  4 g   g 
22. The frequency of oscillation of an electric di pole 1/3 1/ 3

moment having dipole moment p and rotational  3neE   2neE 

(3)   (4)  
inertia I, oscillating in a uniform electric field E  4 g    g 
is given A: (3) mg  Eq  Ene ;
(1)  1 /2  I / pE (2)  1 /2  pE / I 1/ 3
4 3  3neE 
r g  Ene  r   
(3)  2  pE / I (4)  2  I / pE 3  4g 
26. Two parallel plane sheets 1 and 2 carry uni form
PE
1 w I  1  P.E charge densities 1 and 2 as in fig. electric
A: (2) n   
T 2 2 2 I
field in the region marked II is 1  2 
23. A spherical portion has been removed from a
solid sphere having a charge distributed 1 2 
(1) 
uniformly in its volume as shown in the figure. 20
The electric field inside the emptied space is
 12 
(1) zero everywhere (2)
2 0
(2) non–zero and uniform
(3) non–uniform 1  2 
(4) zero only at its center (3)
2 0
A: (2) Inside the cavity, field at any point is uniform
and non–zero. 1  2 
(4)
24. Three infinitely long charge sheets are placed 2 0
which charge density as shown in figure.
A: (4) Enet  E 1  E2
The electric field at point P is
z 1 
  2 ;
2 0 2 0
 z = 3a
1   2
P Enet 
2 0
 z= 0
x
– z = –a 27. The radius of gold nucleus (Z = 79) is
2 2 4 4 7  10 15 m. If the volume charge density on
(1)  k̂ (2)   k̂ (3)  k̂ (4)   k̂
0 0 0 0 nucleus is  and electric field on the surface of
A: (2)All the three plates will produce electric field nucleus is E then electric field at the centre of
at P along negative z–axis. Hence, nucleus radius is......
   2   ˆ 2 E E
Ep  
2
 0 

2  0

2  0 
 
 k    k̂
0
(1) E (2) 2 E (3)
3
(4)
2
25. There are n electrons of charge e in a drop of A: (4) Q = ne = Ze = 79  1.6  10-19 C, R = 7  10-15 m
oil of density  . It is in equilibrium in an electric Consider Gaussian surface having radius R2 to
field E. Then the radius of drop is calculate electric field at center point of nuclear
radius.
II PUC 347
 Objective Physics
 l 2  l
(3) sin  (4) sin 2 
2 0 0
A: (3) Consider two pair of subtle section having
length dx Which is at distance from 0 to x. Elec
tric charge of dx section dq =  dx.
 From force dF = qE, dF = dxE
Electric charge associated by this surface q =  V ,
3
  
4 R Q   dx  
q   ,  q  2 0 
3 2 8
perpendicular distance between two forces
 Electric field at center point,
= 2 x sin 
Kq KQ E   
E,  2    torque d   dx 
R R2 2  2 x sin 
  8  2 0 
2 4
l l
 sin 
28. A ball of mass 1 mg and charge 20 nC is sus-  total torque  = d   xdx
0 0 0
pended by a string. When a uniformly charged
large plate is brought near the ball, string makes  sin  2
 l
angle 30 o with plane of plate. Then surface 2 0
charge density on plate is 30. The electric field at a point on equatorial line of
9 9
(1) 2.5  10 (2) 1.22  10 a dipole and direction of the dipole moment
8 12
(3) 1.5  10 (4) 3.5  10 (1) Will be parallel
6 8
A: (1) m  1 mg  10 kg , q  2  10 C (2) Will be in opposite direction
According to Lami’s theorem, (3) Will be perpendicular
mg q
o
 (4) Are not related
sin 120 2 0 sin 150 o
A: (2) The direction of electric field at equatorial
mg q point A or B will be in opposite direction, as
 o

sin 60 2 0 sin 30 o
that of direction of dipole moment.
A
2 mg q 2mg 0
  ,  
3 0 3q
– +
2  10 6  9.8  8.85  10 12
  2.506  10 9 Cm 2
1.73  2  10 8 B

29. A large sheet carries uniform surface charge P

density V . A rod of length 2 l has a linear

charge density  on one half and  on the
other half. The rod is hanged at midpoint O
and makes angle T with the normal to the
sheet. The torque experienced by the rod is ....
 l  l 2
(1) cos 2  (2) cos 
0 2 0
348 II PUC
Electric charges and fields

TASK - I Q Q
1. Two point charges Q1 and Q2 exert a force F on
(3)
4

12 2  (4)
2
 1 2 2 
each other when kept certain distance apart. If the 6. Which of the following is not true about elec
charge on each particle is halved and the distance tric charge?
between the two particles is doubled, then the new (1) Charge on a body is always integral multiple
force between the two particles would be of certain charge known as charge of elec tron
F F F F (2) Charge is a scalar quantity
(1) (2) (3) (4) (3) Net charge on an isolated system is always
2 4 8 16
conserved
2. Two equally charged identical small balls kept
(4) Charge can be converted into energy and
some fixed distance apart exert a repulsive force
energy can be converted into charge
F on each other. A similar uncharged ball, af-
7. What is the amount of charge possessed by 1
ter touching one of them is placed at the mid-
kg of electrons?
point of line joining the two balls. Force experi
(1) 1.76 × 1011 C (2) 1.76 × 10–9 C
enced by the third ball is
(3) 1.76 × 10–7 C (4) 1.76 × 10–5 C
F 8. According to Coulomb’s Law, which is correct
(1) 4F (2) 2F (3) F (4)
2 relation for the following diagram?
3. Two equal point charges A and B are R dis-
tance apart. A third point charge placed on the
perpendicular bisector at a distance ‘d’ from the (1) q1 q2  0 (2) q1 q2  0
centre will experience maximum electrostatic
force when (3) q1 q2  0 (4) q1 q2  100C
9. A charge q is to be distributed on two
R R
(1) d  (2) d  conducting spheres. What should be the value
2 2 2
of the charges on the spheres so that the
(3) d  R 2 (4) d  2 2 R repulsive force between them is maximum when
4. Two equal positive charges Q are fixed at points they are placed at a fixed distance from each
(a, 0) and (–a, 0) on the x-axis. other in air?
An opposite charge –q at rest is released from
q q q 3q
point (0, a) on the y-axis. The charge –q will (1) and (2) and
2 2 4 4
(1) Move to infinity
(2) Move to origin and rest there q 2q q 4q
(3) and (4) and
(3) Undergo SHM about the origin 3 3 5 5
(4) Execute oscillatory periodic motion but not 10. A point charge q1 exerts an electric force on a
SHM second point charge q2 . If third charge q3 is
5. Four charges each equal to Q are placed at the brought near, the electric force of q1 exerted on q2
four corners of a square and a charge q is placed (1) Decreases
at the centre of the square. If the system is in (2) Increases
equilibrium then the value of q is (3) Remains unchanged
(4) Increases if q 3 is of same sign as q 1 and
Q Q
(1)
2

12 2  (2)
4

1 2 2  decreases if q3 is of opposite sign

II PUC 349
 Objective Physics
11. Three charges +4q, Q and q are placed in a straight
1 q
 (3)  (4) Zero
line of length l at points 0, and  distance away 4 0 r
2
from one end respectively. What should be Q in 17. A charge Q is placed at the centre of a square.
order to make the net force on q to be zero? If electric field intensity due to the charge at
q the corners of the square is E1 and the intensity
(1) –q (2) 4q (3)  (4) –2q
2 at the mid point of the side of square is E2 , then
12. A particle of mass m and carrying charge –q1 is E1
moving around a charge +q2 along a circular the ratio of
E2 will be
path of radius r. Find period of revolution of
the charge –q1 1 1
(1) (2) 2 (3) (4) 2
16 3 0 mr 3 8 3 0 mr 3 2 2 2
(1) (2) 18. Electric charge Q, Q and –2Q respectively are
q1 q 2 q1 q 2
placed at the three corners of an equilateral tri
q1 q 2 angle of side a. Magnitude of the electric dipole
(3) (4) Zero
16 3 0mr 3 moment of the system is
13. In a uniform electric field if a charge is fired in (1) 2Qa (2) 3Qa (3) Qa (4) 2Qa
a direction different from the line of electric field 19. An electric dipole placed in a uniform electric
then the trajectory of the charge will be a field experiences maximum moment of couple
(1) Straight line (2) Circle when the dipole is placed
(3) Parabola (4) Ellipse (1) Against the direction of the field
14. A positively charged pendulum is oscillating in (2) Towards the electric field
a uniform electric field pointing upwards. Its (3) Perpendicular to the direction of the field
time period as compared to that when it oscil (4) At 135° to the direction of the field
lates without electric field 20. Two charges of +25 × 10–9 coulomb and –25 ×
(1) Is less (2) Is more 10–9 coulomb are placed 6 m apart. Find the
(3) Remains unchanged (4) Starts fluctuating
electric field intensity ratio at points 4 m from
15. How many electrons should be removed from a
the centre of the electric dipole (i) on axial line
coin of mas 1.6 g, so that it may float in an elec-
(ii) on equatorial line
tric field of intensity 109 N/C directed up ward?
(1) 9.8 × 107 (2) 9.8 × 105 1000 49 500 49
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(3) 9.8 × 10 3
(4) 9.8 × 10 1
49 1000 49 500
16. ABC is an equilateral triangle. Charges +q are 21. The electric force on a point charge situated on
placed at each corner. The electric field inten the axis of a short dipole is F. If the charge is
sity at the centroid of triangle will be shifted along the axis to double the distance,
the electric force acting will be
F F F
(1) 4F (2) (3) (4)
2 4 8
22. An electric dipole is placed at an angle 60° with
an electric field of strength 4 × 105 N/C. It expe-
riences a torque equal to 8 3Nm. . Calculate the
1 q 1 3q
(1)  2 (2)  2 charge on the dipole, if dipole is of length 4 cm
4 0 r 4 0 r
(1) 10–1 C (2) 10–2 C (3) 10–3 C (4) 10–4 C

350 II PUC
Electric charges and fields
23. Figure shows electric lines of forces due to 29. An electron is rotating around an infinite posi-
charges Q1 and Q2. Hence tive linear charge in a circle of radius 0.1 m, if
the linear charge density is 1  C/m, then the
velocity of electron in m/s will be
(1) 0.562 × 107 (2) 5.62 × 107
(3) 562 × 107 (4) 0.0562 × 107
30. For two infinitely long charged parallel sheets,
the electric field at P will be
(1) Q1 and Q2 both are negative
(2) Q1 and Q2 both are positive
(3) Q1 > Q2 (4) Both (2) & (3)
24. Figure shows electric lines of force. If Ex and Ey
are the magnitudes of electric field at points x
and y respectively, then

   
(1) 2 x  2 r  x (2) 2 x  2 r  x 
  0   0

(1) Ex  Ey (2) Ex  Ey (3)
0 (4) Zero
(3) Ex  Ey (4) Any of these
31. Select the correct statement about electric charge
25. A charge q is situated at the centre of a cube. Elec-
(1) Charge can be converted into energy and
tric flux through one of the faces of the cube is
energy can be converted into charge
q q q (2) Charge of a particle increases with increase
(1) (2) (3) (4) Zero
0 3 0 6 0 in its velocity
26. If an electric field is given by 10i  3 j  4 k , cal- (3) Charge on a body is always integral multiple
culate the electric flux through a surface of area of a certain charge called charge of electron
10 units lying in yz plane (4) Charge on a body is always positive or zero
(1) 100 units (2) 10 units 32. Figure shows electric field lines due to a charge
(3) 30 units (4) 40 units configuration, from this we conclude that
27. A charge Q is kept at the corner of a cube. Elec-
tric flux passing through one of those faces not
touching that charge is
Q Q Q Q
(1) (2) (3) (4)
24 0 3 0 8 0 6 0
28. A pith ball of mass 9 × 10–5 kg carries a charge
of 5C . What must be charge in another pith (1) q1 and q 2 are positive and q2  q1
ball placed directly 2 cm above the given pith (2) q1 and q2 are positive and q1  q 2
ball such that they are held in equilibrium ?
(3) q1 and q2 are negtive and q1  q2
1) 3  2  10 11 C 2) 7  84  10 12 C
3) 1 2  10 13 C 4) 1 6  10 19 C (4) q1 and q2 are negtive and q 2  q1

II PUC 351
 Objective Physics
33. Figure shows three concentric metallic spheri- 37. Which of the following is not true about electric
cal shells. The outermost shell has charge q2 , charge?
the inner most shell has charge q 1 , and the (1) Charge is a scalar quantity
middle shell is uncharged. The charge appear (2) Charge on an isolated system is always
ing on the inner surface of outermost shell is conserved
(3) A particle having nonzero rest mass can have
zero charge
(4) A particle having zero rest mass can have
non zero charge
38. Two positive point charges of unequal magni-
q2 tude are placed at a certain distance apart.
(1) q1  q2 (2) (3) q1 (4) Zero
2 A small positive test charge is placed at null
34. Six point charges are placed at the vertices of a point, then
hexagon of side 1m as shown in figure. (1) The test charge is in unstable equilibrium
Net electric field at the centre of the hexagon is (2) The test charge is in stable equilibrium
(3) The test charge is in neutral equilibrium
(4) The test charge is not in equilibrium
39. Three particles are projected in a uniform elec-
tric field with same velocity perpendicular to
the field as shown. Which particle has highest
charge to mass ratio?
6q q q
(1) Zero (2) (3) (4)
4 0  0 4 0
35. A proton and an  -particle having equal ki-
netic energy are projected in a uniform trans
verse electric field as shown in figure
(1) Proton trajectory is more curved + + + + + + (1) A (2) B (3) C
+++
(4) All have same charge to mass ratio
(2)  -particle trajectory is more curved
40. A small conducting sphere is hanged by an in-
(3) Both trajectories are equally curved but in
sulating thread between the plates of a parallel
opposite direction
plate capacitor as shown in figure. The net force
(4) Both trajectories are equally curved and in
on the sphere is
same direction

36. Electric field in a region is uniform and is given


by E ai bj ck E  ai  b j  ck .. Electric flux asso

ciated with a surface of area A   R 2 i is (1) Towards plate A (2) Towards plate B
(1) a R 2 (2) 3a R 2 (3) 2abR (4) acR (3) Upwards (4) Zero

352 II PUC
Electric charges and fields
TASK - II PQ = 5 cm and QR = 10 cm. 10 nC and 20 nC
1. Two point charges placed at distance of 20 cm charges are placed respectively on point P and
in air attracts each other with certain force. Q. If, due to this charges, the force acting on
When a dielectric slab of thickness 8 cm and 1 C charge placed at point Q is 18 x mN , ,
dielectric constant K is introduced between
then x =........
these two charges force of interaction becomes
(1) 3 (2) 2 (3) 11 (4) 5
half of its previous value. Then the magnitude
7. The linear charge density on the circumference
of K is
of a circle of radius a varies as   0 cos 2  .
(1) 1 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 2
The total charge on it is .......
2. Two particles of mass 5 g and charge 10 7 C are
2
placed on horizontal table at distance 10 cm.
 
 Hint :-  cos 2 d   
When both the particle are in equilibrium  0 
position, the co-efficient of static friction (1) Infinite (2) Zero
s  (3) 2 a (4)  a0
(1) 0.15 (2) 0.19 (3) 0.18 (4) 0.2 8. As shown in figure the linear charge density
3. Two point charges q and 2q are placed in air at on the rim of the semi-circular wire is
distance d. If third electric charge Q is kept on    where   constant. Then the total
the line joining two charges such that the re- charge on a semi-circular wire is .......
sultant force on q and 2q becomes zero, then
the distance of charge Q from charge q is
d
(1)
2 1
(2)  
2 1 d

d a2
(3)
3 1
(4)  
3 1 d (1)
a 
(2) (3) a   (4)
2a 
2 2 2
4. Two point charges q1 and q2 are kept at dis-
9. Mass of a bob of simple pendulum is 80 mg and
tance 3 m.
the charge on it is 20 nC . It is suspended by a
string in a horizontal electric field of intensity
If sum of these charges is 20 C and repulsive
force between them is 0.075 N, the magnitude 2  10 4 NC 1 .
of each charge is In equilibrium, the angle made with vertical di
(1) 12 C , 8 C (2) 14 C , 6 C rection and tension force arising in string is
(3) 16 C , 4 C (4) 15 C , 5C (1) 30 o , 2.4  10 2 N (2) 45 o , 1.57  10 3 N
-3
5. The similar spheres of mass 10 kg are sus-
pended by silk strings of length 0.5 m. When (3) 27 o , 8.8  10 4 N (4) 35 o , 4.5  10 4 N
both the spheres are equally charged, they re- 10. If a particle of mass 1 g and charge 5 C is
pel each other at 0.2 m distance, then the elec-
moved with velocity 20 ms 1 in direction op-
tric charge on the each sphere is
(1) 1.53  10 3 C (2) 2.15  10 6 C posite of electric field of internsity 2  10 5 NC 1
(3) 9.43  10 8 C (4) 2.36  10 6 C then how much distance is travelled by the
 particle before coming to rest ?
6. In right angled triangle PQR, PQR= . . Also (1) 1 m (2) 0.4 m (3) 10 cm (4) 0.2 m
2
II PUC 353
 Objective Physics
11. Electric field intensity at the centre of electric 16. A hollow cylinder of radius 1 cm is placed
dipole is ...... in a uniform electric field of magnitude
  
K p 2K p E  2  10 4 NC 1 in such a way that its axis is
(1) 3 (2) Infinite (3) Zero (4) 3 parallel to electric field, then flux linked with
a a
12. Two electric dipole of same dipole moment cylinder is
6.2  10 3 C cm are placed on a line in such a (1) 2  10 4  Vm (2) 2  10 2  Vm
way that their axes are is same direction. If the (3) 0.02  10 3 NC 1 (4)zero
distance between the centre of both dipole is 17. The electric field in a region is given by the fol-
10 8 m , then electric force between them is 
3  4  3 1
(1) 21  10 39
N (2) 2.1  10 34
N lowing equation : E   i  j   2  10 NC
5 5 
37 17
(3) 21  10 N (4) 2.1  10 N The flux passing through a rectangular of 0.2
13. An electric dipole coincides with X-axis and its m2 area placed in yz plane inside the electric
midpoint is placed at the origin O. A point P is field is ( Nm 2C 1 . )
2
20 cm away from the origin and OP makes an (1) 240 (2) 120 (3) 2.4  10 (4) 3  10
3

 18. As shown in figure the component of electric

angle with the x-axis. If the electric field near
3 field produced due to a charge inside a
1
the point P makes an angle  with axis, then
cube is Ex  600 x 2 , Ey  0 and Ez  0 then
the magnitude of  is
the charge inside the cube a ......
 3
(1) (2)
3 2

1 3  3
(3) tan (4)  tan 1
2 3 2
14. An electric dipole having dipole

moment P  10 5i  j  2 k Cm placed in a
  (1) 600 C (2) 60 C (3) 7  C (4) 6  C
7

 19. An infinitely long wire of linear charge distri-

7   
uniform electric field E  10 i  j  k 
Vm 1

bution  is passing through any side of cube of
then magnitude of torque is......Nm. length ‘’a’’, then the total flux passing through
(1) 8.6 (2) 5 (3) 7.6 (4) Zero cube is.......
15. An electric dipole consists of charges
a a a a
 10 C , each separated by a distance 5 mm. (1) (2) (3) (4)
0 2 0 4 0 6 0
The electric field intensity at the points 15 cm
20. Two pith balls each of mass 30 mg are
distance on axis and 15 cm distance on equa tor
suspended by two threads from a support.
is ..... NC 1 .
When charged identically, the two pith balls
5 5
(1) 2.66  10 , 1.33  10 move apart by 0.08 m, the threads making angle
(2) 4.4  10 5 , 2.2  10 5 60 with each other. The charge on each pith
ball is
(3) 2.44  10 5 , 1.22  10 5 (1) 10.9 nC (2) 11.9 nC
5
(4) 4.6  10 , 2.3  10 5 (3) 4.9 nC (4) None

354 II PUC
Electric charges and fields
21. Two charges of same magnitude but opposite Neglecting the effect of gravity, the kinetic energy
in sign are placed at point A and B on xaxis of the charged particle after ‘t’ second is
as shown in the figure. The direction of the 2E 2 t 2
Eq 2 m E2q2 t 2 Eqm
electric fields of points C, D and E, respectively (1) (2) (3) (4)
2t 2 mq 2m t
are
26. Electric field due to an infinite sheet of charge
having surface charge density  is E. Electric
field due to an infinite conducting sheet of same
(1)  ,  ,  (2) , , 
surface density of charge is
(3)  ,,  (4) ,,
22. Equal charges q are placed at the vertices A E
(1) (2) E (3) 2E (4) 4E
and B of an equilateral triangle ABC of side 2
a . The magnitude of electric field at the point 27. Find the total flux due to charge q associated
C is with the given hemi spherical surface

q 2q 3q q (1) (2)
(1) 4 a 2 (2) 2 (3) 2 (4) 2 q q
0 40 a 40 a 2  0a
(3) q (4) q
23. Figures below show regular hexagons, with q
charges at the vertices. In which of the (5)
following cases the electric field at the centre is Q Q Q Q Q Q
not zero (1) 2 , 0,  , 0, 0,  (2)  , 0, 2 , 0, 0, 
0 0 0 0 0 0

Q Q Q 2Q Q Q
(3) 2 , 0, 2 , 0, 0, 2 (4)  , 0,  , 0, 0, 
0 0 0 0 0 0
(1) (2)
28. The electric flux through a Gaussian surface
that encloses three charges given by q1 = 14
nC, q2 = 78.85 nC, q3= –56 nC
(1) 103 Nm2 C1 (2) 103 CN1 m2
(3) (4) (3) 6.32  103 Nm2 C1 (4) 6.32  103 CN1m–2
29. A charge q is placed at the centre of the open
end of cylindrical vessel. Find the flux of the
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4)4
electric field through the surface of the vessel
24. Charges q, 2q, 3q and 4q are placed at the
corners A, B, C and D of a square as shown in q q q
(1) 2  (2)  (3) 3 (4) Zero
the following figure. The direction of electric 0 0 0

field at the centre of the square is along 30. If a charge q is placed at the centre of a
hemispherical body as shown below then the
flux linked with the circular surface is

(1) AB (2) CB (3) BD (4) AC

25. A charged particle of mass m and charge q is
q q 2q q
released from rest in a uniform electric field E. (1)  (2) 2 (3)  (4) 2
0 0 0 0
II PUC 355
 Objective Physics
31. Find the flux due to the electric field through 36. Equal charges q are placed at the four corners
the curved surface (R is radius of curvature) A,B,C, D of a square of length a . The magnitude
of the force on the charge at B will be
3q 2 4q 2
(a) (b) (1) (2)
40 a 2 40 a 2

 1 2 2  q2  1  q2
(3)  2  4 a 2 (4)  2   2
  0  2  4 0a

(c) 37. A non conducting solid sphere of radius R has

0 r
charge density   at the distance r, where
R
(1) a – 0, b – 0, c - 2R2E 0 is a constant. The total charge is
(2) a - R2E, b – 0, c – 2 R2E
(3) a – 0, b – 0, c – 0 R 4
(1) 0 (2) R2 r0 (3) r3 0(4) R3 0
(4) a – R2E, b – R2E, c – 2R2E r
32. The length of each side of a cubical closed surface 38. A and B are two metal plates arranged as
is L metre. If charge 48 C is situated at one of shown. A small particle having a mass m and
the corners of the cube, Find the flux passing a negative charge q is held at rest at P. A
through the cube. (In volt-meter) uniform electric field E exists in between the
6 3 48 8 plates. The particle is now released. The path
(1)  (2)  (3)  (4)  of the particle as it falls down can be best
0 0 0 0
represented by the curve
33. A charge Q is uniformly distributed over a rod
of length L. Consider a hypothetical sphere of
radius L with its centre at one end of the rod.
The minimum flux of the electric field through
the spherical surface is
Q Q Q Q
(1) 4 (2) 3 (3)  (4) 2
0 0 0 0

34. The magnitude of the electric field at a point 4 (1) (2) (3) (4)
5 1
cm away from a line charge is 9  10 NC .
The linear charge density is 39. A conducting shell of radius R has a charge 
(1) 5  106 C m1 (2) 4  106 C m1 Q. A point charge +Q is placed at the centre.
(3) 3  106 C m1 (4) 2  106 C m1 The electric field E changes with distance r(from
35. Two large conducting plates are parallel to each the centre of the shell) as
other and carry equal and opposite charges
with surface density  as shown
(1) A electric field at the left of the plates is zero

(2) the electric field in between the plates is 2  (1) (2)
0


(3) the electric field at the right of the plates is 2 
0

(4) the electric field in nonzero everywhere

356 II PUC
Electric charges and fields
Q2 F
Q2'  '
& r = 2r Then &  F1 
2 16
2. (3) First case :

(3) (4)
KQ 2
F1  F  .....(i)
r2
40. Tw o point charges q 1 = 2 C and q2 = 1 C are
placed at distance b = 1 cm and a = 2 cm from
the origin of y and x axes as shown in the figure.
The electric field vector at point p(a, b) will
subtend on angle  with the xaxis given by FNet  F2  F1
(1) tan  = 1 (2) tan  = 2
(3) tan  =3 (4) tan  = 4
KQ 2 4 KQ 2 4 KQ 2
  F
KEY 4.r 2 2r 2 r2
Force remain’s constant
TASK - I
1 4 2 3 3 1 4 4 5 2
6 4 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 3
11 1 12 1 13 3 14 2 15 1
16 4 17 3 18 2 19 3 20 1 3. (1)
21 4 22 3 23 4 24 1 25 3
26 1 27 1 28 2 29 2 30 4
31 3 32 2 33 3 34 3 35 2 KQ 2
F1  F2 
36 1 37 4 38 1 39 3 40 4  2 R 2  ; F  F cos   F cos 
d  4  N 1 2
TASK - II  
1 2 2 3 3 2 4 4 5 3  2F1 cos  
6 4 7 4 8 2 9 3 10 4
11 1 12 2 13 4 14 1 15 1 KQ 2 d 1
FN  2. .
16 4 17 1 18 3 19 3 20 1  2 R2   2 R 2 2

d   d 
21 1 22 3 23 2 24 4 25 3  4   4 
26 3 27 1 28 1 29 1 30 2 dF
31 2 32 1 33 3 34 4 35 1 If F = Maximum than 0
d"d'
36 3 37 4
38 39 2 1 40 2
R
HINTS & SOLUTION So we get  
TASK - I 2 2
KQ1Q 2
1. (4) Given F  ......(i)
r2
' Q1
if, Q1  ;
2 4. (4)

II PUC 357
 Objective Physics
In question Net force on q is not proportional 10. (3) Electric force between ‘2’ charge do not
to (x) as F   X  [For SHM] ; but Net force depend on the ‘3’rd charge.

K q. Q x K .4q 3 KQq.4
F 11. (1) FNet on q is; F  
on q is
1
l2 l2
x 2
 a2  2

This is condition for periodic motion

5. (2) Net force on Q due to other corner charge is

If F = 0 then; Q = -q

mv 2 1 q1 q 2
12. (1)  
r 4 0 r 2

1
 1 q1 q 2  2
F123  F3  F12  F22 v 
 4 0 rm 
KQ 2 2 kQ 2
 F3  2 F1   2 r 1
2l 2 l2 For 1 trip ; T   2 r  4 0 mr   q1q 2  2
v
Force on Q1 due4 to centre charge - q
KQq
F4  2 16 3 0mr 3
l2 T
If net force on corner charge Q is zero q1 q 2

Q
Then F123  F4  0 So q   1 2 2
4 
6. (4) A rest charge cannot be converted into en
ergy. 13. (3)

7. (1)  me  9.1  10 31 kg ; q e  1.6  10 19 C

So charge due to 1 kg electron
 qE 
19 F  qE  m ax ; ax   
1.6  10 m
Q 31
 1.76  10 11 C
9.1  10
1 2
8. (1) Both charge should be unlike charge Then, x  0  ax t ...(i)
2
q1  Q , q2  Q ; So q1q 2  Q2
y 1 qE y 2
So q1 q 2 = Negative; So q1 q2  0 But y  ux t then t  ; So, x  
ux 2 m u2
K Q q  Q So x  y 2 for parabola
9. (1) Force4 between both is; F 
r2 14. (2) Effective g decreases.
dF q mq
If F = Maximum then;  0 ; So Q  15. (1) qE = mg; neE = mg; Use n 
dQ 2 eE
q q 1.6 103  9.8
So both charge be , n  9.8  107
2 2 9
10 1.6 10 19
358 II PUC
Electric charges and fields
16. (4) FN  0   
A  10i ; So,   E.A  100 unit
1 Q2
17. (3) E1  .......(i) q
4 0 l 2 27. (1) Net  Of 3 surface 
8 0
1 Q4 E1 1
E2  2 ; E2  2 E1 ;
 q
4 0 l E2 2 QOne surface 
24 0

9 q2
28. (2)F = mg  9  10  mg
r2
18. (2)
9 105  9.8  4  104
q  q = 7.84 x 10-12
9 109  5 106
P1  Q.a ; P2  Q.a
mv 2 mv 2 
29. (2)  qE ;  e.
P  P12  P22  2 P1 P2 cos  ; PN  3Q.a r r 2 0r
19. (3)   PE sin  ; For   90 o ;   Max v  5.62  107 m / s
k.2 Pr  
Eaxial  30. (4) EN  E1  E2   0
20. (1) .....(i)
 r 2  l2  2
2 0 2 0
31. (3) Quantization of charge.
k. p 32. (2) (i) Electric field lines originates from positive
Eeq  3
......(ii) charge.
 r 2  l2  2

(ii) Higher the number of field lines originating

E
axial 1000 from positive charge, greater is magnitude of
Find E  49 charge.
eq
33. (3) Suppose a guassian surface passes through
1  1 conducting shell with radius (r3) Flux through
21. (4) F  F  r 3 
r2   it well be zero. So, net charge enclosed must be
F zero.
If r1  2 r Then force become
8
22. (3)   PE sin 
8 3  q  4  10 2   4  10 5 sin 60 o
 q 1  q '  0 ; q '  q 1
find q  10 3
23. (4) conceptual
24. (1) conceptual
q 34. (3)
25. (3) Total  of 6 suraface  =
ε0
Electric field at O due to each charge is
q
One surface =
6ε0 1 q
E
 4 0  1  2 So, net eelctric field  Enet  is,
26. (1) E  10i  3 j  4 k

II PUC 359
 Objective Physics
2
 Enet  E 2  E2  2E 2 cos 120 o  2 E 2

2   0.2   0.2  0.08  0.08 K 
q  0.08  0.12  0.08 K
 Enet  4E  
0
0.16
35. (2)  -particle has more charge than proton  K , K4
0.08
 Strong electric force on ƒÑ-particle and more 2. (3) Electric force = Friction force
curved path.
  kq 2 kq 2
36. (1)   E. A  a R 2   s mg ,   s 
r2 r 2 mg
37. (4) Charge is always associated with mass
 particle with zero rest mass can never have 9  109  10 14
s  2 ; s  00.1836  0.18
a charge. 10  5  10 3  9.8
3. (2) Suppose, Q electric charge are placed
38. (1)
from q to x distance.
When charge is displaced above, it gets repelled
and move away from null point. Hence, un
stable equilibrium.
39. (3) Charge with maximum curved path has
highest charge to mass ratio. d d
 x 
2q 2 1
1
q

40. (4)
 2 1 d
x   
2 1 d
Net force on sphere will be zero.
 2 1  2 1 
TASK - II kq1q2 Fr 2 0.075  9
1. (2) Force on electric charges in air 4. (4) F   q q
1 2  
r2 k 9  10 9
kq1q 2  q1q 2  7.5  10 11
F ...(1)
r2
and q 1  q 2  20  10 6 C  2  10 5 C ...(1)
When putting a slab of t thickness and K di- Now, (q1 - q2)2 = (q1 - q2)2 - 4q1 - q2
electric constant between two electric charges, = (2  10-5)2 - 4  7.5  10-11 = 10-10
the force is  q1 - q2 = 10-5 C ...(2)
kq1q 2 F From equation (1) and (2), q1 = 15  10-6 C
F'  2 , But F ' 
2 = 15  C & q2 = 5  10-6 C = 5  C
r  t  t K 
F kq1q 2
  2
2 ...(2)

r tt K 
Taking ratio of equation
2 (1) and (2), 5. (3)
F r  t  t K 

F r2 2

2 
 2r 2  r  t  t K  ;

360 II PUC
Electric charges and fields
1 9. (3) m = 80 mg = 8  10-5 kg, q = 20nC
 2q 2l  3 2q 2 l
3
= 2  10-8 C, E = 2  104 NC-1,
x  , x 
 4 o mg  4 o mg

x 3 4 o mg
Put value in x2 =
2l
In equilibrium condition
6. (4) q2 = 20 nC = 2  10-8 C,
q1 = 10 nC = 10-8 C,
q3 = 1 mC = 10-6 C, Tsin  = qE and T(cos)  = mg
-2 -1
r1 = 5  10 m, r2 = 10 m
T sin  qE 2  10 8  2  10 4
  
T cos  mg 8  105  9.8
 tan   0.5102,    27 o
qE
Now , T sin   qE  T 
sin 
2  10 8  2  10 4
 o
 8.8  10 4 N .
kq1q3 9  10 9  1  10 8  10 6 sin 27
F1   ;
r12 25  10 4 10. (4) F = qE = 5  10-6  2  105 = 1N
The particle moving in opposite direction of
F1  0.36  10 1  36  10 3 N electric field,

kq 1q 2 9  10 9  2  10 8  10 6 F 1
F2   So, a =   3  10 3 ms 2
r22 10 2 m 10
Now according to formula of constant accel
= 18  10-3 N,
erated motion
 resultant force
v 2  v02  2 ad

F  F12  F22  2 F1 F2 cos ;  0  400  2  10 3  d ,  d  0.2 m
2
11. (1) Electric field at y distance on equinoctial
F  36 2   18 2  10 3 line of electric dipole

F  18  2 2   18 2  10 3 ;   kP
Ey  3
,At center point y = 0
F  4  1 18  10 , F  18 5 mN 3 y 2
 a2  2

Compare with F = 18 x with mN, x = 5  kP
 Ey  3
7. (4) a
8. (2) length of arc dl = ad , 12. (2) p1= p2 = p = 6.2  10-3 Cm
 total electric charge on arc dq = a d 2
6 kp1 p2 6  9  10 9   6.2   10 10
 total electric charge on semicircle F 
r4 10 32
 
 2 
 = 2075.76  1031
a 2
Q   a d  a   d  a    = 2.08  1034 = 2.1  1034 N
0 0  2 0 2

II PUC 361
 Objective Physics
1
1
13. (4) from tan = tan  , E1  600 x 2  189.73 NC 1
2
Electric field associated with surface distanced
 1  3
tan      tan  by 0.2 m from starting point is
 3 2 3 2
E2  600 0.2  268.32 NC 1
 3
   tan 1 Now, According to gauss’s theorem,
3 2
  q
i j k  .da 
E from  q   E2  E1  A 0
   o
  P  E  5 1 2
14. (1)  Q = 78.59  0.1  0.1  8.85  10-12
1 1 1
 6.95  10 12 C , Q  7 C
 i  1  2   j  5  2   k  5  1   3i  7 j  4 k 19. (3) Linear electric charge density of a given wire
 2 2
 | |  3    7    4   8.6 Nm
2 is .  q   a is an electric charge of wire with
15. (1) Electric field on axis of dipole
P  q 2 a  10 5  5  10 3  5  10 8 Cm
2 kp having length to cube of a.
EZ   2  a
Z3
this electric charge en closed by other three cube.
2  9  109  5  10 8
 ; q
 0.15 3 Now, flux associated with 4 cube =
EZ = 2.66  105 N|C
o

q
 flux associated with 1 cube =
4 o
16. (4)

total flux associated with whole cylindrical

     
   E.da    .da   E.da 20. (1)
Surface Circular of leftside of right side sur
face
    Eda cos 180 o    da cos 10   Eda cos 90 o T

F

W
sin 90 sin150 sin120
  E  da  E  da  0 ;   E r 2  E r 2  0
T F w
 
 3 4   1 sin 30 0
sin 600
 j   2  10 3 NC A  0.2 m2 i
1
17. (1) E   i 
5 5 
F
  3 tan    F  w tan   mg tan 
   E. A   2  10 3  10.2  240 Nm 2C 1 w
5
F  30  106  10 3
18. (3) Electric field associated with surface dis
tanced by 0.1 m from starting point is

362 II PUC
Electric charges and fields
1 q2 F r2 1 1 q 2E2 2 q 2E2 t 2
F  q 2
 KE  mv 2  m 2
t ; K  E 
4 o r 2 1 2 2 m
 2m
4 o
q
6
26. (3)Due to infinite sheet   
300 3  10  0
q2   q  10.9 nC
9  109 ch arg e q
  ; q = s ´A
21. (1) Near the negative charge electric field is Area A

directed towards it. Therefore at ‘c’ electric field q

If two surfaces are conducting then   2   ;
0
is tow ards A . A t D the net electric field d  to
+q and q is directed towards A At E electric 2q 2A 2
EA  ; EA  
0 0 0
field is directed away from +q
q
27. (1) (a) flux through given hemisphere  2
0

(b) total  enter  left =  +  = 0 &(c) T

= enter + left = 0
q
22. (3) E  E A  EB  2 E A EB cos  (d) T = enter + left =  +  = 0 & (e)   
0
q
  600 ; E A  EB then, E  3 E  3 28. (1) q  14 nC q2
4 o a 2
= 78.85 Nc, q3 = –56 nC;
23. (2)
14nC 78.85nC 56nC
   3
0 0  0 ;  = 10 C

29. (1) Flux of the electric field through the surface

q
of vessel  2 
0

30. (2)   EAcos180 ;   EA ;   E  A ;

According to Gauss law Total flux
q q
= 2 ;   2 ;
0 0

q
E  A 
2 0

31. (2) (i)   EAcos  ;   Curved   base

  EAcos90  EA  cos180 ;   E  R 2
(ii)   Curved  Base ;
24. (2) EA = E, EB = 2E, EC = 3E, ED = 4E ;ER is along CB.   EAcos90  EAcos90  0
qE qE (iii)   Curved  Base  E  A cos 0  EA cos90
25. (3) a  ; v  at  t ;
m mk = EA;   E  2R 2 ;   2R 2 E

II PUC 363
 Objective Physics
32. (1) To close the charge we need to arrange 1 2
cubical blocks 3 surrounded charge at base, 4 38. (2) y = 2 at , y   constant  ; path is straight line
surrounded at upper. inclined towards +ve plate
q 1 Q
Charge through each block = 8 &
0
39. (1) E  4  r 2 for r  R
0

q E2
Flux through given face  8 q
40. (2) E E 2  2  E1 ; tan   2
0
r2 E1
48 6
Given q= 48 C,   8  
0 0

33. (3) Sphere encloses entire rod hence charge Q

too. According to gauss law flux through
Q
spherical surface is 
0

r ***

q L + q
34. (4) E  2 o l   where  
o l

 6 1
E = 2 ;   E  2 o   2 10 C  m
0

35. (1) Qne = Q  Q = 0

Qnc
EA =   0 ; E = 0 ;
0


At centre E = E1 + E2 = 
0

 
36. (3) Fnet = Fnet  FAC  FD ; FAr  Fc2  FD

 1  q2
FNet =  2  
 2  4 0a 2

37. (4) dq = du

q q
 r  r
 
dq   o  4r 2 dr ; q   dq    0  4r 2 dr
R
  0 0 R 

40  R4 
q   ; q =  0 R3
R  4 

364 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor

CHAPTER Electric Potential & Capacitor

Electric potential, potential difference, electric potential due to a point
charge, a dipole and system of charges: equipotential surfaces, electrical potential

2
energy of a system of two point charges and of electric diploes in an electrostatic
field. Conductors and insulators, free charges and bound charges inside a
conductor. Dielectrics and electric polarization, capacitors and capacitance,
combination of capacitors in series and in parallel, capacitance of a parallel plate
capacitor with and without dielectric medium between the plates, energy stored
in a capacitor,Van de Graaff generator.
PAST NEET PAPERS SUBTOPIC LEVEL ANALYSIS
NEET 2016 NEET 2016 Forecasting of
Year NEET 2018 NEET 2017
PHASE-II PHASE-I NEET-2019

No of
question 1 2 1 1 1
Asked
electrostatic force equipotential capacitor dielectric
mixed dielctric
Subtopic acting on parallel surface & charging & medium in
plate capactitor electrostatic energy medium
dischaarging capacitor

 Electric Potential :
The work required to be done in bringing a unit charge q from infinite distance to a given finite
point in the electric field is called Electric Potential(V) .
 Electric Potential at a point at a distance r in the given electric field i.e. integration of electric field
r
 
from infinite distance to distance r against the field is given by V   E  dr 


 Electric Potential at infinite point is zero.

Work done(W) W
 Electric Potential V   V  W  qV . The SI unit = JC 1 or Volt (V)
Charge(q) q
q1
Potential due to a point charge Q at a distance r is V  KQ . r1
r
r2 P
 
Potential due to system of charge VP   Kq1  Kq2  Kq3  . q2
r3
 r1 r2 r3 
q3
x2
If V and E are functions of x, then V2  V1   E dx .

x1
Electric Potential Difference (V)
 It is the work done against electric field in moving a unit positive charge from one point to other.
2
 


That is V2 – V1 =  E .dr .
1

1 1
 V for two points at a distance r1 and r2 from a point charge Q V2 – V1 = V = KQ  r  r 
 2 1

 Kinetic energy gained by ‘q’ when moved across V is U = q.V.

II PUC 365
 Objective Physics
 V between two points in electric field does not depend on path.
 Positive potential : The work done against electric field in bringing unit positive charge from infinity
to a point in electric field, then potential of that point is called Positive potential.
 If the material has resultant positive charge, then also potential is taken positive.
 If a positively charged particle is connected to earth, then electrons from earth flow into that particle.
In such situation also, potential is considered positive.
 Negative potential : The work done in direction of electric field in bringing a unit positive charge
from infinity to a point in electric field, then potential at that point is called Negative Potential.
 If the resultant charge of particle is negative, then potential is considered negative.
 If a negatively charged particle is brought in contact with earth, then electrons from particle will
flow in to earth. In such situation also, potential is considered negative.
 The direction of positive potential is from higher charge to a lower charge while that of negative
potential is from lower charge to higher charge.
 Generally in practice, potential of positive charge is considered positive while potential of negative
charge is considered negative.
 Graph showing variation of potential :

Relation between Electric Field and Potential

r2
  r
 
 In general, (a) V2 – V1 = – 
r1
E . dr (b) V = –  E. dr


V V V
 Ex   , Ey   , Ez   .
x x z
dV
 If V is a function of single variable r, E  
dr
  V  V  V 
 Ingeneral (In cartesian co-ordinate system) E    i j k 
  x y z 
 Work done in electric field : The work done to move a charge q from point P having potential
V1 to point Q having potential V2 is, W  q V  W  q V2  V1 
1
 Now, kinetic energy of charge q due to potential difference. K  qV  mv 2  qV
2
2qV
  v  Momentum of electrically charged particle is P  2qVm .
m

366 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
 dV 
 Electric Potential gradiant :   The potential difference per unit length is known as Electric po
 dr 
tential gradiant. Its SI unit is Vm 1 . .
1 P cos 
 Electric Potential due to electric dipole is given by V  r  
4 0 r 2
1 P
Potential on axis of dipole :   0 or     V  
4 0 r 2

 , V  0
Electric Potential at equator : At a point on equator,  
2
 
 At any point, potential depends upon the angle between r and P.

1
 The potential produced due dipole decreases with distance as .
r2
 Potential due to a spherical shell having equal charge distribution :

(i) Potential at distance r from a shell having radius R and total charge on sphere is
1 q
q, V 
4 0 r Where r > R.
1 q
(ii) On the surface of shell V  Where r  R .
4 0 R
(iii) Inside the shell, charge is zero. So work done to move that charge inside the shell is zero. Thus,
1 q
all points are equipotential. So potential is, V  where r  R.
4 0 R
 Equipotential Surface: An equipotential surface is a surface with a constant value of potential
at all points on the surface.
Electric lines of force are always perpendicular to equipotential surface.
 The potential difference between any two points on equipotential surface is zero.
 The work done to move a charge on equipotential surface is always zero.
 Equipotential surfaces never intersect each other.
 The surface of any charged conductor can be considered as equipotential surface as charge is
equally distributed on it.s surface.
 Shape of equipotential surface

Point charge Concentric spheres

Line charge Co-axial cylinders
Uniform field Plane parallel to each other
Electric Potential Energy
r Kq1q2
 For a two point charge system q U q3
1 q2 r
1  q1q2 q2q3 q3q1  r31 r23
 For a three point charge system U    
4 0  r12 r23 r31 
q1 q2
r12

II PUC 367
 Objective Physics
CONDUCTORS: Conductor contain large amount of mobile charge carriers.
 Properties :
 Inside a conductor, electrostatic field is zero.
 At the surface of charged conductor, electrostatic field must be perpendicular to the surface at
every point.
 The charge density will remain zero in interior of conductor static situtation.
 Conductor is equipotential

 Electric field at surface of charged conductor is  .
0

 If conductor has a cavity with no charge inside the cavity then electric field inside cavity is zero,
whatever be the charge on or outside conductor (Electrostatic shielding).
CAPACITANCE: Capacitance of a conductor is measure of ability of conductor to store electric charge
and hence electric energy on it. When charge is given to a conductor its potential increases. It is
found that V  Q or Q  V ; Q = CV where C is the capacitance and its unit is farad (F).
 Capacitance of Isolated Spherical Conductor
C = 40r
Capacitance of Earth Ce = 40Re = 711 F r
CAPACITOR
It is a device used to store electric energy in the form of electric field.
When an earthed conductor is held near an isolated conductor,
a capacitor is obtained.
Working of Capacitor A B
If some charge is given to conductor A its potential increases, and soon
becomes maximum. If some more charge is given to it, it leaks out. Now
if an earthed conductor B is placed near A opposite charges induces on B,
hence more charge can be given to A.
 Capacitance of a Parallel Plate Capacitor
+Q –Q
Q  + –
 Electric field in between plates E = 
A 0  0
+ –
E
Qd d
 Potential difference between the plates = A   + –
0 0

0 A + –
 Capacitance =
d d
Plate area = A
Q 2 A QE
 Force of attraction between the plates = 2 A  2  2
0 0

 Parallel Plate Capacitor with Dielectric Slab

1
(a) Induced charge Qi  Q 1   , K is dielectric constant.
 K

(b) Capacitance, C  0 A .
t
(d  t ) 
K

368 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
0 A
(c) For conducting slab, K =   Qi = – Q and C 
d t
(d) The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor is C.
If its plates are connected by an inclined conducting rod,

the new capacitance is infinity. C   M

 Spherical Capacitor
b  a L
 Potential difference between plates V  KQ   r P
 ba  a
KQ
 Electric field at any point P between plates E  b
r2
KQ KQ
 Potential at any point P between plates V  
r b
4 0ab
 Capacitance C 
ba
4 0b 2
 Important : If the inner surface is grounded, capacitance C 
ba
COMBINATION OF CAPACITORS C1 C2 C3
 Capacitors in series (three capacitors)
Q Q Q
V1  , V2  and V3 
C1 C2 C3 V1 V2 V3
V = V1 + V2 + V3 V
1 1 1 Q 1 1 1 1
V  Q   V    

 C1 C2 C3  Ceq ; Ceq C1 C2 C3
C1 C2
 Two Capacitors in Series
Q Q 1 1 1 V
V1  V2   
C1 C2 ; Ceq C1 C2
V1 V2
CC
Ceq  1 2 Q=C V
C1  C2 eq

C2 C1
V1  V V2  V (Potential dividing rule)
C1  C2 C1  C2 C1 Q1

 Capacitors in parallel
C2 Q2
Q1 = C1V, Q2 = C2V, Q3 = C3V ; V
 Q = C1V + C2V + C3V C3 Q3

 C1   C2 
Electric charges are Q1    Q and Q2    Q.
 C1  C 2   C1  C 2 
Q = (C1 + C2 + C3)V and Q = CeqV ; Ceq = C1 + C2 + C3
 n capacitors of equal capacitance connected in parallel the equivalent capacitance C max  nC and
when connected in series equivalent capacitance is
C C max C
C min    n2  P
n C min CS
 Special Case : As shown in figure Where n is number of capacitors connected in parallel, if capaci
tance of each capacitor is ‘C’ then.

II PUC 369
 Objective Physics

1
Equivalent Capacitance C AB  2C Equivalent Capacitance C AB  n  n  1 C
2
 If we want to get equivalent capacitance ‘C ‘ at voltage ‘V’, then .n. capacitors of equal
CV 2
capacitance .C’. and voltage .V’. should be connected, where n 
C 'V '2
 When air is the medium between two plates of the parallel plate capacitor, then the force acting on
Q2 1 CV 2
them is F  
2 0 A 2 d
 Combining Charged Drops
When n droplets of radius r0 having equal charge Q0 colasce to form a bigger drop of radius R.
4 3 4
 n r0  R 3  R  n1/ 3r0
3 3
 C=n 1/3 C
0

 Total charge = nQ0 R

nQ0 nQ
 V  1/ 3 0  n 2 / 3V0
C n C0
1 Q2 (nQ0 )2
 Total energy = 2 C  = n5/3 U0
2n1/ 3C0
 System of Two Metal Balls a b
4 0
Capacitance C 
1 1 2
    d
a b d 
 Dielectric Polarisation
When a dielectre glab is placed between the plates of capacitor it’s polarisation take place. Thus
a charge –Qi, appear on its left face and +Qi appears on its right face.
+Q –Qi +Qi –Q

 1
Qi  Q  1  
 k 
Q
E0 
A 0

370 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
 Effective Capacitance in Some Important Cases

Behaviour : Series connection Parallel connection

,  K1K 2  0
equivalent capacitance C   0 A   C,   K 1 A1  K 2 A2 
 K 1 d2  K 2 d1  d
d A
Special case : If d1  d2  then if A1  A2  then
2 2

 0 A  2 K1K2   2K1  K2   0 A  K1  K 2   K1  K 2 
C,   C C,   C
d  K 1  K 2   K 1K 2  d  2   2 
 Mediums of different dielectric constant between the plates :

Resultant capacitor
0A
C=
d1 d2 d3
 
K1 K2 K3

 In dielectric slab of different dielectric constant and different thickness insert between two plates
of Capacitor then.

0 A
C, 
t t t 
d   t 1  t 2  t 3  .....   1  2  3  ..... 
 K1 K2 K3 
II PUC 371
 Objective Physics
 Conducting slab of thickness t between two plates :

, 0A
equivalent Capacitance C 
 d  1
 Energy Stored in a Capacitor: Energy stored in a capacitor of capacitance C, charge Q and potential
1 Q2 1
difference V across it is given by U  CV 2   QV
2 2C 2
 Special cases:
 As shown in figure, if at equal distance ‘d’, ‘n’ plates are placed, then it is considered as (n - 1)
capacitor connected in parallel.

0 A
 Equivalent capacitance C ,   n  1   n  1C.
d

 Sharing of Charge
 Case 1 : Two capacitors charged to potentials V1 and V2 are connected end to end as shown

(a) Final common potential V  C1V1  C2V2

C1  C2

C1C2
(b) Charge flown through key  (V1  V2 )
C1  C2

C1C2
(c) Loss of energy = (V1  V2 )2
2(C1  C2 )
V1
 Case 2 : If positive terminal is connected to negative terminal

(a) Final common potential V  C1V1  C2V2

C1  C2

C1C2 V2
(b) Loss of energy = (V1  V2 )2
2(C1  C2 )
 Between two plates of parallel plate Capacitors a medium of dielectric constant K is insert and
battery
Physical quantity in air medium removed Connected
electric charge Q Q,  Q Q ,  KQ
E
Electric field E E,  E,  E
K
Capacitance C C ,  KC C ,  KC
V
electric potential V,  V, V
K
U
Energy stored U,  U ,  KU
K

372 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
EXAMINATION CORNER

1. The electrostatic force between the metal plates (3) Minimum work is required to move q in
of an isolated parallel plate capacitor C having figure (a).
a charge Q and area A, is (NEET-2018) (4) Maximum work is required to move q in
(1) Proportional to the square root of the dis- figure (b).
tance between the plates A: (2)Work done w = qv
(2) Linearly proportional to the distance be-
v is same in all the cases so work is done will
tween the plates
be same in all the cases.
(3) Independent of the distance between the
3. A capacitor is charged by a battery. The battery
plates
is removed and another identical uncharged
(4) Inversely proportional to the distance be-
capacitor is connected in parallel. The total
tween the plates
electrostatic energy of resulting system
A: (3)For isolated capacitor Q = Constant
(NEET-2017)
2
Q (1) Increases by a factor of 4
Fplate 
2 A 0 (2) Decreases by a factor of 2
F is independent of the distance between plates. (3) Remains the same
2. The diagrams below show regions of (4) Increases by a factor of 2
equipotentials. (NEET-2017) A: (2)

Charge on capacitor ; q = CV
when it is connected with another uncharged
capacitor.

q1  q2 q0 V
Vc   ; Vc 
C1  C 2 C  C 2
1
Initial energy U i  CV 2
2
A positive charge is moved from A to B in each Final energy
diagram. 2 2
1 V  1 V  CV 2
(1) Maximum work is required to move q in Uf  C    C  
2 2 2 2 4
figure (c).
(2) In all the four cases the work done is the same.
II PUC 373
 Objective Physics
CV 2 1  2V 
2
Loss of energy = Ui – Uf  A: (4) Q=2V Ui   V2
4 2 2
i.e. decreases by a factor (2)
4. A parallel-plate capacitor of area A, plate sepa-
ration d and capacitance C is filled with four
dielectric materials having dielectric constants 1 64V 2
k1 , k2 , k3 and k4 as shown in the figure below.  Vy 
2 25  8
If a single dielectric material is to be used to
have the same capacitance C in this capacitor,
then its dielectric constant k is given by 2V  q q 1 4V 2
 
(NEET-II 2016) 2 8 2 25  2  8V  4q  q

5V 2 V 2 8V
Uf    q
25 5 5
4 v2
Energy dissipated
5
(1) k  k1  k2  k3  k4
2
(2) k   k1  k2  k3   2 k4
3
2 3 1
(3)  
k k1  k2  k3 k4
4 v2
 % energy Dissipated =  100 =80%
1 1 1 1 3 5v2
(4)    
k k1 k2 k3 2 k4 6. Find the electric potential at centre of the ring.
++
A: (3) k1 , k2 and k3 are in parallel so Arithmetic mean. ++
+
+
k1  k2  k3 +
k eq  +
3 +
+
+
keq is in series with k4 . So harmonic mean. +
q + + +q
2 1 1 2 3 1 1 q 1 q q
      (1) 4 R (2)  4 R (3)Zero (4) 
k keq k4 k k1  k2  k3 k 4 0 0 0

A: (3) V = zero
5. A capacitor of 2  F is charged as shown in the 
7. Electric field in a region is E  30 x 2 i , then po
diagram. When the switch S is turned to
tential difference VA  V0  ......Where V0  Po
position 2, the percentage of its stored energy
tential at origin point. VA  Potential at point
dissipated is: (NEET-I 2016)
A located at x = 2m
(1) 80 V (2) -80 V (3) 120 V (4) -120 V
 A 2 2
2   2
A: (2) VA  Vo    E.dr    30 x dxi. i  30  x dx
0 O O

2
(1)0% (2)20% (3)75% (4)80%  x3 
 VA  Vo  30    80 V
 3 0
374 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
8. As shown in figure A, B and C are concen-  
1  108 2  108 3  108 2  108 
tric shells of radius a, b and c respectively. V .   
4 0  1 1 1 1 
(a < b < c). Their surface charge densities are  2 2 2 2 
 ,  and  respectively. What is the electric
 9  109  4  108  2   360 2V
potential on the surface of shell A ?
10. Figure shows a set of equipotential surfaces.
The direction of electric field that exists in the
region is y

45°
x

15 V 10 V 5V 0V

(1) 45° with –x axis (2)45° with x axis

 
(1) a  b  c (2)  a  b  c  (3) 60° with x axis (4) 60° with –x axis
0 0
A: (2)Electric field is perpendicular to
  equipotential surface from high potential to
(3) b  a  c  (4) a  b  c
0 0 lower potential.
11. An oil drop carrying charge ‘Q’ is held in
A: (4) Electric charge on shell A is q A  4 a2
equilibrium by a potential difference of 600V
Electric charge on shell B is qB  4 b 2 between the horizontal plates. In order to hold
Electric charge on shell C is qC  4 c 2 another drop of twice the radius in equilibrium
a potential drop of 1600V had to be
Shell A is inside the shell B and C.
maintained. The charge on the second drop is
1  q A qB qC 
So VA     Q 3Q
4 0  a b c  (1) (2) 2Q (3) (4) 3Q
2 2
1  4 a 2 4 b 2 4 c 2 
  
4 0  a b c 

 a  b  c qV
0 A: (4) mg  qE 
d
9. Four charges 108 ; 2  10 8 ; 3  10 8 and 2  108
coulomb are placed at the four corners of a
 4 3 
square of side 1m the potential at the centre of  qV  m  R 3  m   R 
the square is  3 
3 3
(1) zero (2) 360 volt q1V1  R1  Q  600   R1 
   ;   
(3) 180 volt (4) 360 2 volt q2V2  R2  q2  1600   2 R1 
 q2  3Q
12. Two dipoles each of moment 5  10 12 C m form
a cross with their axis (-to +) along the
1 q coordinate axes. The potential at a point 20cm
A: ;V  .
40 r away from their centre in a direction making
an angle of 300 with axis is
(1) 1.12 (2) 2.12V (3) 2.4 V (4) 1.536V
II PUC 375
 Objective Physics
A: (4)Potential due to system of two dipoles 16. The equivalent capacitance between A and B is
B
2 F
2 F

2 F
2 F
p cos 1 p cos 2
V  2 F
40 r 2 40 r 2 2 F

2 F

A
3 1
5 102  9  109  5  1012 109  16 16 8 16
V 2  2  1.536V (1) F (2) F (3) F (4) F
17 19 21 21
400 104 400 104
13. A capacitor works as the charge storing A: (4) C  16 F
eff.
21
device in
17. Seven metallic plates each of surface area A
(1)AC circuits (2)DC circuits
are placed at a distance d from each other as
(3) Both (1) & (2) (4)Neither (1) nor (2)
shown. The resultant capacitance will be
A: (2)
d
14. A plate of a parallel plate capacitor is being
taken away with a constant velocity relative
to other. If the rate of change of capacitance
with time t is N, then graph between
magnitude of N and time (t) is  A  A  A
(1) 7 0 (2) 6 0 (3) 3 0 (4) Zero
N N d d d
A: (2) Equivalent circuit
(1) (2)
O t O t
N N

(3) (4)
O t O t
A0 A0 dC 1 18. A dielectric of thickness 5cm and dielectric
A: (3)  C     2
d vt dt t constant 10 is introduced between the plates of
15. Two circuits and graph are shown below. a parallel plate capacitor having plate area 500
Select the correct alternatives. sq. cm and separation between the plates 10cm.
C1 The capacitance of the capacitor with dielectric
q
12 2

slab is  0  8.8  10 C / N  m
2

1 2
(1) 4.4 pF (2) 6.2 pF
V 1 (3) 8 pF (4) 10 pF
C2 0 A 8.8  1012  500 10 4
2
V A: (3) C  
t 5  102
d t  10  102  5  102 
V k 10
(1)C2 > C1 (2)C2 < C1
8.8  5 1014 2
(3)C1 = C2 (4) C2 C1 = 1 C  8 pF
5  12
A: (1) Slope of (2) > Slope of (1) C2 > C1
376 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
19. A parallel plate air capacitor has capacity C, E2  E1  21% E1  1.21E1
distance of separation between plates is d and 2
1.21E1  q  2  q2
potential difference V is applied between the     1.1   q  20C
plates. Force of attraction between the plates E1  q  q
of the parallel plate air capacitor is 22. Four capacitors of each capacity 3  F are
connected as shown in the figure. The ratio of
C 2V 2 C 2V 2 CV 2 CV 2
(1) (2) (3) (4) equivalent capacitance between A and B and
2d2 2d 2d d
between A and C will be
A: (3) Force between the plates
q2 1 1 V 1 V2
F  qE F  CV  C
2 A 0 2 2 d 2 d
20. Find equivalent capacitance of the capacitor
Dielectric constants are k 1, k2, k3 and k 4 and
area of plates is A (dielectrics are of same (1) 4 : 3 (2) 3 : 4 (3) 2 : 3 (4) 3 : 2
size). 3 3 3
A: (1) CAB = 3 + = 4, CAC = + = 3
d/2 3 2 2
k1 = k4 = 2k C AB : C AC = 4 : 3
k1 k4 A/2 k2 = k3 = k 23. Two condensers, one of capacity C and other
k2 k3
of capacity C/2 are connected to a V-volt bat
tery, as shown. The work done in charging fully
d both the condensers is
3  Ak 3  Ak 4  0 Ak 2  0 Ak
(1) 0 (2) 0 (3) (4)
2 d 4 d 3 d 3 d
C1 C2

Ceq
A: (1)
1 2 1 2 3 2
C3 C4 (1) CV (2) 2CV 2 (3) CV (4) CV
2 4 4
K1  K 2 2 K  K 3
K12    K
2 2 2
K  K 4 K  3K 3 A: (4) ;
K 34  3   K
2 2 2
1 1C 2 3
 3  3  W  CV 2  V ; W  CV 2
2  K  K  2 22 4
2 K12  K 34 2  2  3
K eff     K 24. A parallel plate capacitor has a uniform electric
K12  K 34 3 3  2 field E in the space between the plates. If the
 K K
2 2 
distance between the plates is d and area of
3 o A each plate is A. The energy stored in the
Ceff 
2 d capacitor is
21. If the charge on a body is increased by 2C, the
energy stored in it increases by 21%. The 1 2 1 2
E 2 Ad
(1)  0 E Ad (2)  0 EAd (3)  0 E (4)
original charge on the body in coulombs is - 2 2 0
(1) 10 (2) 20 (3) 30 (4) 40 1
2 A: (1) Energy density = 0 E2
q 2 E2 q 2 2
A: (2) E   E  q2 ;  ; q2  q  2 2
1
2c E1 q 1
so energy stored =  0 E 2 Ad
II PUC 2 377
 Objective Physics
25. The distance between two parallel plates of area tion of n2 capacitors is C P  n2C 2
A is d. A copper sheet is placed above a dielec- Energy stored in parallel connection
tric slab of dielectric constant K = 2. The equiva 1 1
lent capacitance of this arrangment is U P  C PV 2   n2C 2 V 2 ;
2 2
1 8C 1 16C 1
UP  US  2 n2C 2  n , C 2  n n
1 1 2

27. As shown in figure 2  F capacitor is charged.

A 0 2 A 0 3A 0 5A 0 When switch S is in position-2 the percentage
(1) (2) (3) (4) loss of stored energy of capacitor is
d d d d
A: (2) Given arrangement shows series connection
of three capacitors.
2 A 0 6 A 0
C1  
d d (1) 0 % (2) 20 % (3) 75 % (4) 80 %
3
KA 0 3K 0 A 0 3 A 0
C2   C3  
d d & d d A: (4)
3 3
1 1 1 1
    1 1
C C1 C2 C 3 Ui  CV 2   2  V 2  V 2
2 2
1 d d d qi  2V , When Switch S connect at point 2 then,
   
C 6 0 A 3KA 0 3 0 A
2V  q q 8V
But for cupper K=    q
2 8 5
1 d d 2 A 0  energy l
  O C
C 6 0 A 3 0 A d
2  64V 2 4V 2  4V 2
26. n1 capacitors of capacitance C 1 are connected costs= V    
 2  25  8 2  25  2  5
in series with a battery of 4 V and are charged.
n2 capacitors of capacitance C 2 are connected  0.8 V 2  80%V 2  80%.V 2
in parallel with a battery of 1V volt. If the en 28. An uncharged parallel plate capacitor having
ergy stored in both type connection is same then a dielectric of constant K is connected to a simi-
C 2  ...... lar air cored parallel capacitor charged to a po-
2C 1 16n2C 1 2n2C 1 16C 1 tential V. The two capacitors share charges and
(1) (2) (3) (4) the common potential is V’. The dielectric con
n1 n2 n1 n1 n1 n2
stant K is
A: (4) The equivalent capacitance for series con
V ' V V ' V V ' V V V'
C1 (1) (2) (3) (4)
nection of n capacitors is C S  V ' V V' V V'
1 n1
Energy of this series connection
1 2 8C
US  C S  4   1
2 n1 A: (4)
The equivalent capacitance for parallel connec

378 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
 KC  0   C V  V '  CV
V' ;
KC  C KC  C
V V '
KV ' V '  V ; KV '  V ' V ' ; k 
V'
TASK - I
29. A parallel-plate capacitor of area A, plate
1. The value of electric potential at any point due
separation d and capacitance C is filled with four
dielectric materials having dielectric constants to any electric dipole is
     
K1 k2 , K3 and K 4 as shown in the figure below. If p r pr p.r p.r
a single dielectric material is to be used to have (1) k. 2 (2) k. 3 (3) k. 2 (4) k. 3
r r r r
the same capacitance C in this capacitor, then 2. Charges 5 C, 2 C, 3C and 9 C are placed
its dielectric constant k is given by at corners A, B, C and D of a square ABCD of
side 1m. The net electric potential at centre of
square is
(1) –27 kV (2) 27 2 kV
(3) 90 kV (4) zero
3. An electric charge 103 C is placed at origin
(0, 0) of x-y co-ordinate system. Two points A
(1) k  k1  k 2  k3  3k 4
and B are situated at  
2, 2 and (2, 0)
2 respectively. The potential difference between
(2) k   k1  k2  k3   2 k 4
3 A and B will be
2 3 1 (1) 9V (2) zero (3) 2V (4) 4.5 V
(3) k  k  k  k  k
1 2 3 4 4. Two parallel plates separated by a distance of
1 1 1 1 3 5 mm are kept at p.d. of 50 V.
(4) k  k  k  k  2 k A particle of mass 10 -15 kg and charge 1011 C
1 2 3 4
enters in it with a velocity of 10 7 ms 1 . The
A: (3) k1 , k 2 and k3 are in parallel so arithmetic mean. acceleration of particle is
k1  k2  k3 (1) 108 ms2 (2) 5  105 ms2
k eq  k
; eq is in series with k4 .
3 (3) 105 ms2 (4) 2  103 ms2
So harmonic mean. 5. The electric potential (V) in volts varies with
2 1 1 2 3 1 X(in metre) according to relation V = 5 + 4x2.
     
k k eq k 4 k k1  k2  K 3 k4 The force experienced by a negative charge of
30. 80 C charge is applied on the upper plate of 2 C located at x = 0.5 m is
4 C capacitor as shown in figure. In steady (1) 2  106 N (2) 4  106N
circuit the charge on upper plate of 3  F ca (3) 6  106 N (4) 8  106 N
pacitor is ....... C . 6. The variation of electric potential with distance
‘d’ from a fixed point is as shown in figure. The
electric intensity at d = 5m is

(1) 80 (2) 40 (3) 48 (4) 32

A: (3)

II PUC 379
 Objective Physics
(1) 2.5 Vm1 (2) –2.5 Vm1 10 V
(3) and in ve x-direction
(3) 0.4 Vm 1
(4) –0.6 Vm 1 9 m
7. The electric potential decreases uniformly from (4) and in +ve x-direction
120 V to 80 V as one moves on x-axis from x = 13. If electric potential ‘V’ at any point (x, y, z) all
1 cm to x = 1 cm. The electric field at origin is in metres in space is given by V = 4x 2 volt.
(1) must be equal to 20 V/cm Calculate electric field at point (1m, 0m, 2m)
(2) may be equal to 20 V/cm (1) 8xiˆ (2) 8xiˆ (3) 4xiˆ (4) 4xiˆ
(3) may be greater than 20 V/cm 14. To obtain 3 F capacity form three capacitors
(4) may be less than 20 V/cm of 2 F each, they will be arranged
(1) all the three in series
8. A charge of 5C experiences a force of 500 N
(2) all the three in parallel
when it is moved in uniform electric field. The
(3) two capacitors in series and the third in
p.d. between two points separated by distance
parallel with the combination of first two
of 1 cm is
(4) two capacitors in parallel and the third in
(1) 10 V (2) 250 V (3) 1000 V (4) 2500 V series with the combination of first two
9. Two charges 12 C and 6 C are separated by 15. A parallel plate air capacitor has a capacitance
a distance of 20 cm. The net electric potential is of 1.3 pF. The separation between the plates is
zero on the line joining them doubled and wax fills the space between them.
(1) At a distance of 6.7 cm from 6 C in The new capacitance is 2.6 pF. The dielectric
between charges constant of wax used is
(2) At a distance of 0.2 cm from 6 C outside (1) 3.5 (2) 7 (3) 4 (4) 5
the charges 16. When a metal plate is introduced between the
(3) both above (4) None plates of parallel plate capacitor its capacitance
10. Three charges +q, +q and q are kept at vertices increases by 4.5 times. If d is the separation
of equilateral triangle at 10 cm side. between the two plates of the capacitor, the
thickness of the metal plate introduced is
The potential at the midpoint in between +q
(1) d/3 (2) 5d/9 (3) 7d/9 (4) d
and +q if q = 5 C
17. A capacitor of capacitance C is charged to a
(1) 12.8  105 V (2) 103 V
potential V and then disconnected from the
(3) 1 V (4) 10 V
battery. The air in between the plates of the
11. A positively charged oil drop of charge 8  10 capacitor is replaced by a dielectric constant K.
5
C remains stationary in electric field between The fractional decrease in the energy of the
two horizontal plates separated by distance 2
capacitor is
cm and having p.d. of 6 V. Mass of oil drop is
1 1 1
(1) 24  1014 kg (2)23  1016 kg (1) (2) k (3) 1  (4) 2
k k k
(3) 12  1014 kg (4) 6  1014 kg
18. Two parallel plate capacitances are connected in
12. The potential at a point x due to some charges
parallels and charged to a potential difference V.
20 The battery is then disconnected and the space
situated on x-axis is given by V  x   2 volt .
x 4 between the plates of capacitor C is completely
Then intensity at x = 4 m is given by filled with a material of dielectric constant K. The
5 V potential difference across the capacitors now
(1) and in ve x-direction
3 m becomes (Given: the capacitances are C and 2C)
5 V V 2V 3V 3V
(2) and in +ve x-direction (1) (2) (3) (4)
3 m K 1 K2 K2 K3
380 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
19. Two identical capacitors 1 and 2 are connected (1) CAB = 4 F, V = 40 V
in series to a battery as shown in figure.
(2) CAB = 8 F, V = 80 V
Capacitor 2 contains a dielectric slab of
(3) CAB= 8 F, V = 40 v
dielectric constant K as shown. Q1 and Q2 are
the charges stored in the capacitors. Now (4) CAB = 4 F, V = 80 V
dielectric slab is removed and the corresponding 23. A capacitor has a capacitance C1 = 1.0F. It can
charges are Q '1 and Q' 2 . Then withstand a maximum voltage of V1 = 6.0 kV. A
second capacitor of capacitance C2 = 2.0 F can
withstand a maximum voltage of V2 = 4.0 kV. If the
capacitors are connected in series, the combination
can withstand a maximum voltage of
(1) 10 kV (2) 3 kv (3) 8 kV (4) 6 kV
24. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is
Q1 K  1 Q2 K  1
(1) Q  K (2) Q  2 charged to a potential difference V by
1 2
connecting it to a battery. Another capacitor of

Q1 K  1 
Q2 K capacitance 2 C is similarly charged to a
(3) Q  2K (4) Q  2
2 1 potential difference 2 V. The charging battery
20. Five capacitors are connected to each other as is then disconnected and the capacitors are
shown below. What is the potential drop and connected in parallel to each other in such a
charge across 4 F Capacitors? way that the positive terminal of one is
connected to the negative terminal of the other.
The final energy of the configuration is
3 25 9
(1) zero (2) CV 2 (3) CV 2 (4) CV 2
2 6 2
25. Two capacitors C 1 and C 2 are charged to
(1) 3 V, C (2) 10 V, 30 C
potentials 300 V and 100 V and then they are
(3) 3 V, 20 C (4) 10 V, 40 C
connected in parallel. The potential difference
21. The equivalent capacitance between A and B of the parallel combination is 250 V. The ration
in the given diagram is of C2 to C1 is
(1) C2 : C1 = 1 : 3 (2) C2 : C1 = 3 : 1
(3) C2 : C1 = 1 : 3 (4) C2 : C1 = 3 :1
26. A parallel palate air filled capacitor has a
A A A 3 A capacitance of 2 F. It is half filled with a
(1) 2 0 (2) 0 (3) 0 4 0
d d 2d d dielectric with K = 3. Its capacitance is,
22. In the circuit shown, the potential difference
across the 3 F capacitors is V and the
equivalent capacitance between A and B is CAB.

(1) 4 F (2) 3 v (3) 1.5 F (4) 0.5 F

27. A capacitor has a capacitance 2 mF. It is initially
Then charged to a potential difference of 5 V, and
the battery is disconnected. If a dielectric slab

II PUC 381
 Objective Physics
of dielectric constant K = 6 is inserted the dielectric is (K is the dielectric con stant)
completely between the plates what is the final 0A 2 0A 2
(1) V (2) V
electrostatic potential energy? 2Kd 2K 2d
(1) 4.17 J (2) 3.17 J (3) 2.17 J (4) 1.17 J
0A  1 0A  1 
28. The force acting on a charged particle kept in (3)  1   V2 (4)  1  2  V2
2d  K  2d  K 
between the plates of parallel plate capacitor is
33. A parallel plate capacitor with air as dielectric
F. If one of the plates of the capacitor is
is charged or a potential V1. It is then connected
removed, the force acting on the particle
to identical uncharged parallel plate capacitors
changes to
with a dielectric having dielectric constant K.
(1) F/2 (2) 2F (3) F (4) zero
If the common potential of both the capacitors
29. A capacitor is charged by connecting it to a
battery which is later disconnected. The energy is V2, then
stored in the capacitor is E. If the separation V  V2 V  V2
(1) K 1 (2) K 1
between the plates is doubled, the energy stored V1  V2 V2
in the capacitor becomes
V1 V1  V2
(1) E/2 (2) E (3) E/A (4) 2E (3) K  V  V (4) V
1 2 2
30. A capacitor is connected to a battery and a 34. Figure below shows some equipotential line
dielectric slab is inserted between the plates distribute in space. A charged object is moved
with the battery being connected to it. During
from point A to B.
this process,
(1) no work is done
(2) work is done at the cost of the battery
(3) work is done at the cost of the energy already
stored in the capacitor (i) (ii)
(4) work is done a the cost of both capacitor
and the battery
31. Two identical capacitors connected in parallel
are charged to a potential V and then
disconnected. They are then joined in series i.e.,
the positive plate of one is connected to the
negative plate of the other. Then (iii)
(1) the charges on the free plates connected
together are destroyed
(2) the charges on the free plates increase
(1) The work done in fig (i) is the greatest
(3) the energy stored in the system gets doubled
(2) The work done in fig (ii) is the least
(4) the energy stored in the system remains
(3) The work done is the same in fig (i), fig (ii)
constant
and fig (iii)
32. A parallel plate capacitor is charged to a poten-
tial V using a battery which is latter disconnected. (4) The work done in figure (iii) is greater than
A dielectric slab is inserted between the plates fig (ii) but equal to that in fig (i).
such that it completely fills the space be tween 35.Four condensers each capacity 4  F are
the plates. If A is the area of the plates and d is connected as shown in figure VP – VQ = 15
the plate separation, the work done in inserting volts. The energy stored in the system is

382 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
39. An air capacitor consists of two parallel plates
A and B as shown in the figure.
Plate A is given a charge Q and plate B is given
a charge 3Q. P is the median plane of the
capacitor. If C 0 is the capacitance of the
(1) 240× 10–6 J (2) 180× 10–6 J
capacitor, then (VP, VA and VB are potential at
(3) 360× 10–6 J (4) 540× 10–6 J
P, A and B respectively)
36. An infinite number of identical capacitors Q 3Q
each of capacitance 1mF are connected as in
adjoining figure. Then the equivalent
capacitance between A and B is

A P B
Q Q
(1) V P  V A  (2) V P  V A 
4C 0 2C 0
Q Q
(3) V P  V A  (4) VP  VB 
C0 4C 0
40. A point charge q is placed inside a conducting
(1) 1  F (2) 2  F spherical shell of inner radius 2R and outer
(3) 0.5  F (4)   F radius 3R at a distance of R from the centre of
the shell. The electric potential at the centre of
37. Three plates A, B, C each of area 50 cm 2 have
separation 3mm between A and B and 3mm 1
shell will be 4 times (potential at infinity is
between and The energy stored when the 0
plates are fully charged is zero)
q 4q 5q 2q
(1) (2) (3) (4)
A 2R 3R 6R 3R
B
C 12V
TASK - II
1. The electric potential at a point (x, 0, 0) is given
(1) 1.6  109 J (2) 2.1 109 J
1000 1500 500 
(3) 5  10 J
9 (4) 7  10 J 9 by V    2  3  then the electric
 x x x 
38. Three point charges q, –2q and –2q are placed field at x = 1 m is (in volt/m)
at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side (1) 5500i (2) 5500i
a. The work done by some external force to (3) 5500i (4) zero
slowly increase their separation to 2a will be 2. A uniform electric field of strength 60 V/m
2 2
1 2q q exists in X-Y plane making an angle 120° with
(1) . (2)
4 0 a 4 0 a positive x-axis. The potential difference
between points P(–2, 3) and Q(4, 1) is given by
1 3q 2
(3) . (4) zero (1) 60(3  3) V (2) 60(3  3) V
4 0 3R
(3) 30(3  3 ) V (4) 30(3  3) V

II PUC 383
 Objective Physics
B
3. A field of 100 Vm–1 is directed at 30° to positive 2Q
x-axis. Find VBA if OA = 2m and OB = 4m Q
A
R
2R

Q Q 3Q 3Q
(1) (2) (3) (4)
4 0 R 8 0 R 4 0 R 8 0 R
8. Three point charges q, –2q and –2q are placed
at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side
(1) 100  3  2 V 
(2) 100 2  3 V a. The work done by some external force to be
slowly increase their separation to 2a will be
(3) 100  2  3  V (4) 200  2  3  V
1 2q 2 q2
4. Two concentric spheres of radii r1 and r2 carry (1) . (2)
4 0 a 4 0 a
charges q1 and q2 respectively. If the surface charge
density () is the same for both spheres, the electric 1 3q 2
potential at the common centre will be (3) . (4) zero
4 0 3R
 r1  r2 9. A unit positive charge has to be brought from
(1) . (2) .
 0 r2  0 r1 infinity to a midpoint between two charges
20C and 10C separated by a distance of 50
 
(3) r1  r2  (4) r1  r2  m. How much work will be required?
0 0
(1) 10.8 × 104 J (2) 10.8 × 103 J
5. Figure shows three spherical and equipotential (3) 1.08 × 106 J (4) 0.54 × 105 J
surfaces 1, 2 and 3 round a point charge q. The 10. Find the reading of spring balance as shown
potential difference V1 –V2 = V2 –V3. If t1 and t2
in figure. Here  is the charge density of the
be the distance between them. Then capacitor of plate area A and separation d
3

2 d
+ 
1
q
t1
t2 A

Thin sheets

(1) t1 = t2 (2) t1 > t2 (3) t1 < t2 (4) t1 t2

2A 2A
12
6. Two dipoles of dipole moment 5  10 Cm are (1) 3 0
(2) 2 0
placed in such a way that their axis are parallel
2A
to co ordinate axis and intersect at the origin, (3)  (4)Zero
0
Then potential at point 20 cm away and
making an angle 30° with axis is 11. At t=0 switch is closed, reading of ideal
2 1 F
(1) 1.536 V (2) 1.12 V (3) 1.25 V (4) 2.12 V
7. In the figure shown, conducting shells A and B
A
ammeter is S 10V
have charges Q and 2Q distributed uniformly
over A and B .Value of VA – VB is 1
10V
(1) 0 A (2) 5 A (3) 10 A (4) 15 A
384 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
12. Four capacitors C1 = 1 F, C2 = 2 F, C3 = 3 17. Figure shown in five capacitors connected
F and C4 = 4 F are connected as given in across a 12 V power supply. What is the
figure. The potential of junction O is potential drop across the 2F capacitor?
10 V 20 V 6F 6 F

C1 C2 1 F 2 F 3 F

O
C3 C4 12 V

(1) 2 V (2) 4 V (3) 8 V (4) 10 V

5V 30 V 18. Four plates of the same area of cross-section
(1) 16.5 V(2) 18 V (3) 15.5 V (4) 18.5 V are joined as shown in the figure. The
13. The potential at point M is distance between each plate is d. The
2 F 1 F equivalent capacity across AB will be
M
A B
N
4 F 2 F

10 V

20 10 10 20
(1) V (2)  V (3) V (4)  V 2 0 A 3 0 A 3 0 A 0 A
3 3 3 3 (1) (2) (3) (4)
14. For the given circuit, the potential v M – v N d d 2d d
between points M and N is equal to zero, when 19. The capacity of the capacitors are shown in
C M1 C 2 the adjoining fig. The equivalent capacitance
between the points A and B and the charge
C N3 C 4

on the 6F capacitor will be

V

C1 C1  C2
(1) C1C4 = C2C3 (2) 
C3 C3  C4

C2 C1  C2
(3)  (4) All of these
C4 C3  C4
15. The capacitor of capacitance 4F and 6F
are connected in series. A potential difference
of 500 volts is applied to the outer plates of (1) 27F, 540C (2) 15F, 270C
the two capacitor system. Then the charge (3) 6F, 180 C (4) 15F, 90C
on each capacitor is numerically- 20. Two condensers of capacities 2C and C are
(1) 6000 C (2) 1200C
joined in parallel and charged upto potential
(3) 1200 C (4) 6000C
V. The battery is removed and the condenser
16. For the circuit shown in the adjoining figure,
of capacity C is filled completely with a
the charge on 4 F capacitor is
medium of dielectric constant K. The p.d.
1F across the capacitor will now be-
4F
5F 3V 3V
(1) (2)
3F 10V K2 K

(1) 30 C (2) 40 C (3) 24 C (4) 54 C V V

(3) (4)
K2 K

II PUC 385
 Objective Physics
21. In the following circuit, the resultant 25. A slab of copper of thickness b is inserted in
capacitance between A and B is 1F. Then between the plates of parallel plate capacitor
value of C is & as shown in figure.
d
The separation between the plates is d if b  ,
2
then the ratio of capacities of capacitors after
and before inserting the slab will be
d

32 11 23 32
(1) F (2) F (3)  F (4) F
11 32 32 23
22. In the circuit shown in the figure, the
b
potential difference across the 4.5F (1) 2 : 1 (2) 2 : 1 (3) 1 : 1 (4) 1 : 2
capacitor is
26. The following arrangement consists of five iden-
tical metal plates parallel to each other. Area
of each plate is A and separation between the
successive plates is d. The capacitance between
P and Q is

8
(1) volts (2) 4 volts (3) 6 volts (4) 8 volts
3 5 0 A 7 A 4 0A 5 0 A
(1) (2) 0 (3) (4)
23. Five identical plates each of area A are joined d 3 d 3 d 3 d
a shown in the figure. The distance between 27. Two similar conducting balls having charges
the plates is d. The plates are connected to a +q and –q are placed at a separation d from
p.d. of V volts. The charge on plates 1 and 4 each other in air. The radius of each ball is r
and the separation between their centres is d(d
>>r). Calculate the capacitance of the two ball
system
will be-

 0 AV 2 0 AV  0 AV 2 0 AV
(1) , (2) ,
d d d d
(1) 4 0 r (2) 2 0 r
 0 AV 2 0 AV  0 AV 2 0 AV
(3) , (4) ,  0r r
d d d d (3) 4 log e (4) 4 log e
d d
24. A capacitor of capacitance 4 F is charged to 28. A capacitor is half filled with a dielectric (K =
80 V and another capacitor of capacitance 6
2) as shown in figure A. If the same capacitor
F is charged to 30 V. When they are connected is to be filled with same dielectric as shown,
together, the energy lost by the 4 F capacitor
what would be the thickness of dielectric so that
is
capacitor still has same capacity?
(1) 7.8 mJ (2) 4.6 mJ (3) 3.2 mJ (4) 2.5 mJ
386 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
33. If the area of each plate is A and the successive
separation are d, 2d and 3d. Then find the
equiva lent capacitance across A and B in the
given figure.
(1) 2d/3 (2) 3d/2 (3) 3d/4 (4) 4d/3 d
A
29. In a parallel-plate capacitor of capacitance C, 2d
a metal sheet is inserted between the plates, A
3d
parallel to them. The thickness of the sheet is
half of the separation between the plate. The 0 A 3 0 A 0 A 4 0 A
capacitance now becomes (1) (2) (3) (4)
4d 4d d d
(1) 4C (2) 2C (3) C/2 (4) C/4 34. In the arrangement shown all the plates have
30. If the dielectric constant and dielectric equal area A and spacing d between them. The
strength be denoted by K and k respectively, equivalent capacitance between point P and Q
then a material suitable for use as a dielectric will be,
in a capacitor must have P
(1) Low K and low k (2) Low K and high k
(3) High K and low k (4) High K and high k
31. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is
charged with a battery of potential V. The
battery is then disconnected and Q
electromagnetic waves are incident on negative 0 A 0 A 0 A 2 0 A
(1) (2) (3) (4)
plate of the capacitor. As a result the negative d 3d 2d d
plate starts emitting electrons towards the 35. Find the charge on capacitor C 3
positive plate. The current which flows between
the plates remains constant till time t1 and then
starts decreasing. The potential difference
between the plates at time t1 is (Assume plates
of capacitor are close to each other)
(1) V (2) V/2 (3) 2V (4) zero
Given, that C1  C 2  C and C3  C 4  3C .
32. Four conducting plates are placed parallel to
each other. Separation between them is d and 3 CV
(1) CV (2) (3) 3CV (4) 2CV
2 2
area of each plate is A. Plate number 1 and 3
36. A parallel plate capacitor has two layers of
are connected to each other and plate number
dielectrics as shown in figure. This capacitor is
2 and 4 are connected to a battery of emf .
connected across a battery, then the ratio of
Charge flowing through the battery is
1
potential difference across the dielectric layers is
2
3
 K 1=2 K2 =6
4
0 A 3 0 A 2 0 A 2 0A
(1)  (2)  (3)  (4)  d 2d
d 2 d d 3 d
(1) 4/3 (2) 1/2 (3) 1/3 (4) 3/2

II PUC 387
 Objective Physics
37. Two identical metal plates are given positive +q
C D
O I –q
charges Q1 and Q2 (< Q1) respectively. N E
L
D E
If they are brought close together to form a U C
C T
parallel plate capacitor with capacitance C, the T R
O I
potential difference between them is R C
O x
d 2d 3 d 4d 5d
Q1  Q 2 Q1  Q 2
(1) (2)
2C C V
V

Q1  Q2 Q1  Q2
(3) (4)
C 2C (1) (2)
38. Three unchanged capacitor of capacitance 1F, O x O d 2d 3d 4d 5d
x
d 2d 3d 4d 5d
2F and 3F are connected as shown in figure.
If potentials at point P, Q and R are 1V, 2V, 3V V V
respectively. Then potential at O is
P
(3) (4)
1 F
x O x
O d 2d 3d 4d 5d d 2d 3d 4d 5d

O KEY
3 F
2 F
TASK - I
R Q 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 1 5 4
18 11 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 10 1
(1) V (2) V
11 18 11 1 12 3 13 1 14 3 15 3
(3) 5 V (4) none of these 16 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 20 4
39. Consider the situation shown in the figure. The 21 1 22 1 23 2 24 2 25 1
capacitor A has a charge q on it whereas B is un 26 1 27 1 28 1 29 4 30 2
charged. The charge appearing on the capacitor
31 3 32 3 33 2 34 3 35 2
B a long time after the switch is closed is
q
36 2 37 2 38 4 39 2 40 3
+ – TASK - II
+ – 1 2 2 2 3 1 4 4 5 3
+ –
+ – 6 1 7 2 8 4 9 2 10 2
+ –
+ –
11 1 12 4 13 1 14 4 15 3
+
A
– B 16 3 17 2 18 2 19 3 20 1
q 21 4
22 23 4 24 3 1 25 2
(1) zero (2) (3) q (4) 2q 26 4
27 28 2 29 1 2 30 4
2
40. The distance between plates of a parallel plate 31 4
32 33 4 34 1 3 35 1
capacitor is 5d. The positively charged plates is 36 4
37 38 4 39 1 2 40 2
at x = 0 and negatively charged plate is at x = HINTS & SOLUTION
5d. Two slabs one of conductor and the other TASK - I

of a dielectric of same thickness d are inserted p.r
1. (4) V  K. 3
between the plates as shown in figure. Potential r
(V) versus distance x graph will be 2. (2) V = V 1
+ V2 + V3 + V4

388 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
1 1 0.4 + 2y = y; y = 0.4 m
V
40

1
5C  2C  3C  9C It is at 0.6 m from 6 C outside the charges
2 10. (1) V = V1 + V2 + V3

 9  109  2  3 106 ; V  27 2 kV V

1 q

1 q

1 q
40 5 40 5 40 5 3
3. (2) OA = 2 cm, OB = 2 cm
1
1 103 C 1 103 C Put q  5C 4  9  10
9
VA  VB  0
4 0 2 4 0 2
Put these values in above equation
VA VB = 0
Then we get V = 12.8  105 V
4. (1) Given d = 5  103, M = 10-15 kg, q2 = 10-11 C,
11. (1) Fe = mg; Eq = mg
Eq  Vq 
V = 10 ms ; q 
7 -1 
m  md  m
Eq
E
V
g d
dv d
5. (4) E      5  4x 2  6 600
dx dx E   300 Vm 1
2
E = 8x; F = Eq 2  10 2
F = (8x) 2C; x = 0.5 m 300  8 105
m  240  105 ; m = 24  104 kg
F = –8  0.5  2  106; F = 8  106N 10
dV  0.4   5 1 dv d  20 
6. (1) E      ; E      2.5 Vm 12. (3) E   ; E  2
dx  6  4  2
  dx dx  x  4 

dV d 1
7. (1) E   E  20  x 2  4 
dx dx
120  80 40 1 4  x
E    20 V / cm E  20   2x E 
11 2 ; 2 2
 x  4
2
 x2  4
W F S
8. (1) V   10 V
q Put x = 4 m then
9 m
Given F = 5000 N, S = 102 m, q = 5 C
5000  102 dv
V  103 102  101 V 13. (1) W.K. T E  
5 dr
9. (2) If two opposite charges are placed at a dV d
distance ‘d’ then The point where potential due
Ex  
dx

dx
4x 2  8x 
to charges is zero is in between charges or dV d
Ey  
dy

dy
4x 2  0  
q1 q2
outside charges At P1  
y  y
dV d
Ez      4x 2   0
q q dz dz
P2  1  2 ; 12C  5C
x x 
x 0.2  x E  Exiˆ  E y ˆj  E z kˆ ; E  8xiˆ
0.4 14. (3) Conceptual
0.4  2x = x; 3x = 0.4 ; x   6.7 cm
3
It is at 6.7 cm from 6 C in between charges 15. (3) C   o A & C   o KA ; C2  K K  2  C 2
2
d 2d C1 2 C1
12C 6C

9 0.2  y
II PUC 389
 Objective Physics
0 A The maximum charge that the second capacitor
oA
16. (3) C  and C   d  t  ; Given C  4.5  C can hold is
d
Q2 = C2V2 =2  106  4000
1 Q2 1 Q2 1  Ui  1  1 = 8  103 C
U
17. (3) i  . U
& f  . ;
2 C 2 KC Uf K We know that in a series combination, the charge
' Q on each capacitor is the same. Now the first
18. (3) V  ; C = C + 2C = 3C; Q = 3CV
C1 capacitor cannot hold a charge of 8  103C; it
C = KC + 2C = (K + 2)C can hold a maximum charge of 6  103 C.
19. (3) Let C be the capacity without slab. Then Therefore, the charge on the second capacitor
after removing the slab, net capacity is C/2. must also be 6  103C. Hence, the voltage across
the second capacitor is
CE
Q1  Q2  (Where E is emf of the battery)
2 6 103 C
V2   3000 volt  3 kV
Before the slab is removed, C1 = C and C2 = KC 2  106 F
 K  24. (2) Q1 = CV and Q2 = (2C)  (2C) = 4 CV. Since
 C net   C
 K 1  the capacitors are connected in parallel such
 KCE   Q1  K  1 that the plates of opposite polarities are
 Q1  Q 2   
 K  1  Q2 2K
connected together, the common potential is
20. (4) (i) C2C3C4 are in parallel
Q2  Q1 4CV  CV
 C = 6 + 4 + 8 = 18 F V   V
C1  C2 C  2C
C1, C, C5 are in series
Equivalent capacitance C = C + 2C = 3C.
1 1 1 1 Therefore, the final energy of the configuration
   ; C  6F
C 18 18 18
1 2 1 2 3 2
Now charge across 4 F capacitor is U  CV   3C  V  CV
2 2 2
Q4F = CV = 4  10 = 40 C
25. (1) If capacitors C 1 and C 2 are charged to
21. (1)
potentials V 1 and V 2 , and then they are
connected in parallel, the common potential
C1V1  C 2 V2
Vcom is given by Vcom  C1  C 2
Dividing, the numerator and the denominator
2 A of the RHS by C1 we get
C12 = C43 = C; Cp = C p  o 
d V1   C2 / C1  V2
Vcom 
22. (1) 3 F and 6 F are in series and their 1   C2 / C1 
equivalent capacitor is in parallel with 2 F Letting Vcomm = 250 V, V1 = 300 V
3 6 and V2 = 100 V
 C AB   2  4F
36
250V 
 300V    C2 / C1 100V 
1   C2 / C1  ;
Potential difference across 3F is
60 C2 C 2 1
V  2  40 V Simplifying for C , C  3 or C 2 : C1  1: 3
3 1 1
23. (2) The maximum charge the first capacitor
can hold is Q1 = C1V1 = 1  106  6000
390= 6  103 C II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
26. (1) If A is the area of each plate, the capacitance 31. (3) When the two capacitors of capacitance C
of the air-filled capacitor shown in figure (i) is charged to a potential V each are joined in series,
the effective capacitance Cs becomes C/2.
0 A
C0  where C0 = 2F (given). But the net potential difference across the
d
combination gets doubled. V  = 2V. The energy
The capacitance of air capacitor in figure (ii) is
stored
0 A / 2 0 A C 0
C1    1 1C 2 1
d 2d 2 E  Cs V2    2V  ; E  2  CV 2  2E
The capacitance of dielectric filled capacitor in 2 2 2 2

k0 A / 2 k 0 A kC0 1 2
figure (ii) is C 2    Where E  CV is the energy stored initially
d 2d 2 2
in the capacitor
Since C1 and C2 are in parallel, the capacitance
C of the capacitor shown in figure (ii) is 32. (3) The energy stored in the capacitor,
C0 KC0 C0 2F 1 1 0 A 2
C  C1  C2    1 K  1 3  4F E  CV 2  V .
2 2 2 2 2 2 d
27. (1) The initial charge on the capacitor will be When a dielectric of dielectric constant K is
introduced, the capacitance becomes
Q0 = C0V0 = (2 F) (5V) = 10 C
After the dielectric slab is introduced between 0 A
KC  K and the potential decreases to
the plates, the capacitance becomes K times the d
V = (1/K)V.
original value. 2
1 0 A  V  A
 The new capacitance is The energy stored E      0 V2 .
2 d  K  2Kd
C = C0K = (2F)6 = 12 F
0 A  1 2
Since, the battery is disconnected, the charge Work done  E  E  1   V
2d  K 
on the capacitor plates will remain the same
q1  q 2
 Electrostatic potential energy is 33. (2) The common potential V2  C  C where
1 2
2
1 Q20 1 10C  q1 and q2 are the initial charges stored in the
U   4.17 J
2 C 2 12 F  capacitor. But the second capacitor is initially
uncharged. Therefore q 2 = 0. But q 1 = C 1V 1
q 
28. (1) F   ; F  2 q C1V1
o o where V1 is the potential of C1. V2  C  KC .
1 1
1 1C The capacitance C2 of the second capacitor is
29. (4) E  CV ; E   2V 2
2 22
V1  V2
  C   KC1. Therefore, K  V2
 C  , V  2V  ; E  2E
 2  34. (3) Among three cases VA = 20 V, VB = 40 V, So
30. (2) When dielectric slab is introduced between equipotential surface exists.W = Q(VB – VA) = 0
plates, capacitance increases K times. But 35. (2) Total capacitance of given system]
potential remains same due to presence of
1 5 8
1 C
= ; CR = F
8 5
battery  E   KC  V
2 R
2
1 1 8
 Energy increases K times So excess energy Energy stored = CRV2 = × × 10–6 × 225
2 2 5
can be drawn from the battery = 180 × 10–6 joule
II PUC 391
 Objective Physics
36. (2) This combination forms a G.P.,  1  3   
1 1 1 2. (2) E  60   i  60 j ; E  30 i  30 3 j
Sum = S = 1 + + + +........... 2 2
2 4 8
a 2 3
Sum of infinite G.P. is S =
1 r  dv    30 4 dx  3 3  dY 
1 
where a = first term = 1 & r = common ratio
   30(6)  30 3(3  1) 
1  
=
2
 180  60 3  60(3  3 ) volt
1
S = = 2 Therefore CR = 2
1  1/ 2
37. (2) There are two capacitors parallel to each
2 0 A
other. Total capacitance 
d
Energy stored 3. (1)
12
1  2 0 A  2 8 . 86  10  50  10 4 2
 12
  V   2 . 1  10  9 J
2 d  3  10  3
38. (4)
VBA  VA  VB  VA  V0  V0  VB
Ui 
q  2q   q  2q    2q  2q   
4 0 a =0  Ex i OA  E y j . BO
      
Uf 
q  2q   q  2q    2q  2q   0   E cos i  . 2  0  i   E sin   j.  0  4  j
4 0 2a 
Wext = U = 0  100  cos 30  2   100  sin 30  4 

Q 3Q  3 1
 100    2   100    4  ;
 2  2
–Q
2Q
Q 2Q
39. (2) VBA  100  32 V 
A P B q1 q2
4. (4) Vcommon   ;
Q Q Q 4 0 r1 4 0 r2
VB  V A  ; VB  VP  & VP  VA 
C0 2C0 2C 0
q1 q
 2
 22
1 q q q  1  5q  4r1 4r2
40. (3) VC = 4  R  2 R  3R  = 4  
0   0  6R 
TASK - II 1  q1 r1 q r  
Vcommon =  2
 2 22   r1  r2 
0  4r1 4r2   0
  V ˆ V  V 
1. (2) E   i j k
 x y z  1 1  r  r 
5. (3) V1  V2  Kq     Kq  2 1 
  1000 2  1500 3  500    r1 r2   r1r2 
  i   2   
  x x3 x 4   so, r2  r1   r1r2 [

1000 3000 1500    potential difference is constant]

 iˆ  2  3  4  at x = 1, E  5500 iˆ
 x x x   t2 > t 1

392 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
VO VO V 5
7.5    10  VO  10  O 
4 2 3 3
5 VO VO V  3  6  12  4 
17.5  20     V0  O    VO
3 4 2 3  12 
6. (1)
 VO  18.6V
2 CV 2  10 20
13. (1) V1  C  C  VMB   V
1 2 21 3
1 P cos 
from, V  , C C
4 0 r 2 1
14. (4) C  C
2

3 4

1 P cos 30 o C1C 2
V1   0.974 V
4 0  0.2  2 15. (3) CR = C  C = 2.4 F
1 2

1 P cos 300 o Charge flown through the circuit = 2.4 × 500

V2   0.562 V × 10–6 C = 1200 C
4 0  0.2  2
q1 q1
 V  V1  V2  1.536 V
4F 6F
q2 q1 q1
1  Q 2Q  1 2Q 16. (3)   10 ; q1  24 μC
7. (2) V A      3F 10V 4 6
4 0  R 2 R  4 0 R
6F 6F 6F
1 3Q Q
VB  , V A  VB 
4 0 2 R 8 0 R
17. (2)

q  2q   q  2q    2q  2q 
8. (4) U i =0 12V
4 0 a
1 F, 2 F and 3F are in parallel and their

Uf 
q  2q   q  2q    2q  2q   0 equivalent capacitance is 6F.
4 0 2a  Hence, each 6 F capacitor has potential
Wext = U = 0 difference of 4V.
9. (2) Work done in taking unit positive charge 18. (2) The arrangement shown in the figure is
equivalent to three capacitors in parallel
from infinity to that point = potential at that
3 0 A
point hence resultant capacitance =
d
6 6
 20  10 10  10  9  18
 9  10 9    J 19. (3) Ceq =
9  18
= 6F
 25 25 
 10.8  10 3 J
  
10. (2)F = (E) × (q)   2   A
 0
11. (1) There is no potential difference

12. (4)
VAC . C AC = C CB . VCB and VAC + VCB
30 VO V0  20 VO 10 VO  5 = 90  VAC = 30V , hence q6 = 30 × 6
q1  q2  q3  q4    
4 2 1 3 = 180C
20. (1) q1 = 2CV , q2 = CV

II PUC 393
 Objective Physics
Now condenser of capacity C is filled with 0 A 0 A d
dielectric K, therefore C2 = KC 25. (2) C1  , C2  , t b
d d  t  2
As charge is conserved,    q1 + q2
= (C2 + 2C) V C2 2
given  
3CV
C1 1
3V
 V '= =
(K  2)C K2
21. (4) 12F and 6F are in series and again are
in parallel with 4F.
26. (4)
Therefore resultant of these three will be
12  6
= + 4 = 8F,
12  6
This equivalent system is series with 1F , its
8 1 8
equivalent capacitance = = F .....(1)
81 9
Equivalent of 8F, 2F and 2F
48 32 8
= = = F .....(2) 5C
48 12 3 C net 
(1) and (2) are in parallel and are in series with C. 3

32
C
8 8 32 9
  = and Ceq = 1 = 32 
9 3 9
C 27. (2)
9

32 32
9
+ C =
9
C kq k  q   kq kq
VA   ; VB   ;
r dr r dr
32 32 32 9 32
 C–C= C= × = F 2 kq 2 kq 2q  1 1 
9 9 9 23 23 V  VA  VB    
r d  r 4 0  r d  r 

1 10
22. (4)Total capacity of the combination =
C 45 q  d  2r  q
V   ; d >> r ; V 
1 10  5 1 2 0   r  d  r   2 0 ;
+ = =  C = 3F
9 45 3
q
The charge through the circuit  2 0 r  C
= 3 × 12 = 36C V
 Potential difference across 4.5F capacitor
q 36 28. (1)
= = = 8 volts
C 4.5
k  1 A 0
23. (3) C1V1  C 2V2 C net 
2 d
24. (1) Vcommon   50V
C1  C 2 A 0 A 0
1 2 1 2 Cnet  
For 4 F capacitor Ei  C1V , E f  C1VC 1 t
2 2 d  1  1   d 
 2 2
1
Energy loss  Ei  E f 
2
 
C V 2  VC2  3 A 0

A 0
3 A 0 t 3t
C net  ; 2d d  ; 3d  2  2 d ;
7.8  10–3 J 2d 2

394 II PUC
Electic potential and Capacitor
3t 2d 1 1 1 1 4 C  A
d ; t     C   0
2 3 Ceq 2C C 2C 2C ; eq 2 2d
d C C

A A
=
29. (2)
d/4 d/2 d/4 d/4 d/4
35. (1) Cnet  2C , q = 2CV
0 A
Before the metal sheet is inserted, C =
d
After the sheet is inserted, the system is q1 1 CV
 3q  q 2 ; q1  q 2  2CV ; q1 
equivalent to two capacitors in series, each of q2 3 ; 1 2
0 A
capacitance C    4C . The equivalent 3CV
( d / 4) ; q2 
2
capacity is now 2C.
30. (4)
K 1=2 K 2 =6
31. (4) The current starts decreasing when the
potential difference between the plates becomes 36. (4) E1 E2

zero. d 2d
Electric field in dielectrics are E1 and E2

1 2 2 3 3 4 V1 Ed 3  E1 K 2 
32. (4)  1    E  K  3 
V2 E2 2d 2  2 1 

There are three capacitors C 1 2 ,
C 2 3, C 3 4 37. (4) Within the plates electric fields due to
charges Q1 and Q2 are
2 0 A
equivalent capacitance is . Q1 Q
3 d E1  and E 2  2
2 0 A 2 0 A
2 0 A
So charge flown through battery is  1
3 d E  E1  E 2  (Q1  Q2 )
2 0 A
0 A 0 A 0A
33. (1) C1  , C2  and C 3  d Q  Q2
d 2d 3d (Q1  Q2 )  1
V = Ed =
2 0 A 2C
d
A P 1V
2d
A
3d 1 F

C2 is short-circuited. C1 and C3 are in series. O

38. (1) 3 F
C1C 3 2 F
Hence, C AB 
C1  C 3 R 3V Q 2V
7
 A 1v  1  2v  2  3v  3  0 ; v  V
Substituting the values, we get C AB  0 6
4d 39. (1) When switched is closed, inner plates of two
capacitor get connected with each other. But
1
2 1 3 4 4 5
P
2 P Q outer plates are not connected. It means circuit
P
3 is not completed. Therefore, no current will flow
4 2 3 6 5
34. (3) 0 A or no charge will appear on B.
5 C
6 d 40. (2) E = – slope of V-x graph E inside a conductor = 0
Q

II PUC 395
 Objective Physics

CHAPTER Current Electricity

Electric current, flow of electric charges in a metallic conductor, drift velocity and mobility,
and their relation with electric current; Ohm’s law, electrical resistance, V-I characteristics (liner

3
and non-linear), electrical energy and power, electrical resistivity and conductivity. Carbon resistors,
colour code for carbon resistors; series and parallel combinations of resistors; temperature dependence
of resistance. Internal resistance of a cell, potential difference and emf of a cell, combination of cells in
series and in parallel.Kirchhoff’s laws and simple applications. Wheatstone bridge, metre bridge.
Potentiometer-principle and applications to measure potential difference, and for comparing emf of
two cells; measurement of internal resistance of a cell.(Solving equivalent circuits with symmetric &
wheatstone’s bridge)

PAST NEET PAPERS SUBTOPIC LEVEL ANALYSIS

NEET 2016 NEET 2016 Forecasting of
Year NEET 2018 NEET 2017
PHASE-I PHASE-II NEET-2019

No of
question 3 2 2 2 2
Asked
colour co de potentiometer & potentiometer
resistor,series cells & resistivity, pd electric power&
Subtopic graph between current &
heat produced in
equivalent circuit
& equivalent
number o f cells
using KVL resistor circuit
ELECTRIC CURRENT
 The rate of flow of electric charge across any cross-section is called electric current.

(a) Instantaneous electric current I  dq (b) Average electric current Iav  q

dt t
Electric Charge Q ne nev
Electric Current = I   nef 
time t t 2 r
dQ
Electric Current, I= , dQ  I dt & Electric charge Q   dQ   I dt
dt
(c) Unit : ampere or A (SI)
 Although electric current is denoted with direction in dc circuits but it is a scalar quantity. Direction
merely represents the sense of charge flow.
Factors on which Current Depends
 Free Charge Density : Number of free electrons per unit volume (n). (in case of conductors, charge
carriers are free electrons only)
 Drift Velocity : Average velocity with which electrons drift from low potential end to high
 e 
potential end of the conductor (vd). Drift velocity is given by v d   E
m
(in terms of applied electric field)
I
vd  (in terms of current through the conductor)
neA
From second relation
I = neAvd. where A is the area of cross-section and “Avd” represents the rate of flow.
vd v e
The term is called mobility of charge carriers, represented by   d  . (here   mean
E E m
1
relaxation time depends on temp.   , T  absolute temperature of the conductor)
T

396 II PUC
Current Electricity
OHM’S LAW
V 1
 R  V  IR. where Resistance R   , where  = Resistivity of material of wire
I A
Il
 Electrical Resistivity and conductivity V  IR   J l , but V  El  E  J 
A
1
Conductivity,   unit of conductivity is m 1 or siemen m 1

   
 Current Density  Electric Field i.e., J  E or J  E
where  is a constant of proportionality called Conductivity (unit –1m–1 or mho/m or siemen/
m). Hence according to Ohm’s law when R is constant I V  I~V curve is a straight line (at
constant temperature)
 Ohmic conductors are those for which I-V curve is a straight line or Rs = Rd and Non-ohmic
conductors are those for which Rs  Rd at every point on I-V curve
Limitations of ohm.s law
 In practice, for some devices, V - I relationship are nonlinear e.g. diode, transistor

 Relation of V and I depends on sign of V.

 The relation between V  I is not unique. i.e. there is more than one value of V for same current (I).

Current Density
 Current flowing per unit area through any cross-section is called current density.

I A

I
J= Unit : A/m2. It is a vector quantity and directed along the motion of positive charge.
A
   
I = J .A = JA cos (where  is the angle between J & A )

II PUC 397
 Objective Physics
I
 Electric current density, J   nevd ;  E  nevd
A
1  Ee   1 m
E  ne         Resistivity,  =
 m   ne 2
vd 
 Mobility for material,    And conductivity   ne . SI unit of mobility is m 2 v 1 s 1 .
E ne
Colour Code for Resistors
Colour Digit Multiplier Tolerance
Black 0 1 -
Brown 1 10 -
2
Red 2 10 -
3
Orange 3 10 -
4
Yellow 4 10 -
5
Green 5 10 -
6
Blue 6 10 -
7
Violet 7 10 -
First Digit
8
Second Digit Gray 8 10 -
Multiplier 9
White 9 10 -
Tolerance
Gold - 0.1 5%
Silver - 0.01 10%
No Colour - 20%
Colour code : B B ROY Great Britain Very Good Wife
Electrical Resistance and Resistivity
l ml
 Resistance of a conductor is given by R   where  is resistivity. Its units is  m.
A ne 2 A
m
 Resistivity of a conductor,  = (where m is mass of an electron, n is number density of
ne 2 
electrons,  is average relaxation time).
 Resistivity is the property of material and does not depend on the dimensions of conductor but
depends on nature and temperature of conductor.
 For a hollow cylinder of inner radius r1 and outer radius r2, length l and material of resistivity 

l r1 r2
R
( r22  r12 )

Dependence of Drift Velocity

 For same strength of current, v d  1 [I = neAvd = constant]

A
1
 For same potential difference, v d  [It is independent of area]
l

398 II PUC
Current Electricity
 Temperature Dependence of Resistivity
 For Conductors : t = 0(1 + t), where ‘’ is temperature Coefficient of resistivity. As R   
R = R0(1 + t)
At temperature t1, R1 = R0 (1 + t1) & At temperature t2, R2 = R0 (1 + t2)
R2  R1 R2  R1 R2  R1
  = R (t  t ) , R0 = (t  t ) ,  = R t  R t
0 2 1 2 1 12 2 1

 For Semiconductors : Their resistivity decreases exponentially with temperature.

 For Insulators : Their resistivity is very high and does not vary appreciably with change in
temperature.
R11  R2 2 R1 2  R21
(a) In series  s  (b) In parallel  p 
R1  R2 R1  R2
 Effect of Current in Human Body
 The resistance of a normal human body is 10 k2.Current of the order of 0.1 A are fatal.
 Cause of death on receiving a shock is not the heating effect, but interfering of electrical signals
with human nervous system.
Variation of Resistance with Dimensions of Conductor
l
 Variation with length: R = 
A
(a) If a wire is cut to alter its length, then area remains same. R  l
(b) If a wire is stretched or folded, area varies but volume remains constant.  R  l2
R 2l
For small percentage changes in length by stretching or folding, then, =
R l
 Variation with area of cross-section or thickness :
1 1
(a) If area is increased / decreased but length is kept same. R  or R  2 (r = radius /
A r
thickness)
1 1
(b) If area is increased / decreased but volume remains same. R  2 or R  4
A r
(c) A resistance wire has a resistance R. Half of this wire is stretched to double its length and half

is twisted to double its thickness, then R    R   4  R  1  65R

2 2 16 32
GROUPING OF RESISTORS (SERIES AND PARALLEL COMBINATION)
 Series Grouping
R1 R2 R3 RS = R1 + R2 + R3

 Parallel Grouping
R1

R2 Rp
1 1 1 1
   
Rp R1 R2 R3
R3
 Illustrations :
R
nR/n + 1
1. 
nR

II PUC 399
 Objective Physics
R1 R1 R2
R1 + R2
2. 
R2

R1

R2 R3 R2 Rp
3.  
A R1 B R3 1 1 1 1
Rp R1 R2 R3
 Cause of flow of Current
The cause of flow of current through a conductor is potential difference applied across its ends.
This is achieved by connecting a source of electric energy (or emf) across the conductor, called cell.
CELL
 Primary cell :
(a) A cell in which electric energy is produced due to chemical reaction in it during the use of cell.
(b) Chemical reactions are irreversible.
(c) These cannot be charged (exception  lithium cells are primary cells but can be charged)
(d) Examples : Daniel cell, Leclanche cell, Dry cell.
 Secondary cell :
(a) A cell in which electric energy is first stored in the form of chemical energy and this chemical
energy converts into electrical energy during the use of cell.
(b) Chemical reactions are reversible. (c) These are charged before use.
(d) These are also known as storage cells.
(e) Examples : Lead-acid accumulator, Ni-Fe alkaline accumulator.
Cell Terminology
 EMF (E) : The potential difference across the terminals of a cell when no current is being drawn from it.
 Internal Resistance (r)
The opposition of flow of current inside the cell. It depends on (i)Distance between electrodes (r
 1
 d) (ii) Area of electrodes  r   (iii) Concentration of electrolyte (r  conc.) (iv) Temperature
 A
 Terminal Potential Difference
I R I
The potential difference across the terminals of a cell when current is
supplied by it.
E = IR + Ir, V = IR V
E – V = Ir .... (i)

E r
 E V 
r =  V R from (i) when r = 0, E = V Cell
 
Here E is emf and V is potential difference. Clearly V < E when the cell
supplies current.
Grouping of Cells (Series and Parallel Combination)
 Series grouping : (b) requivalent = r1 + r2 + r3 + ...... rn
(a) Eequivalent = E1 + E2 + E3 + ....... En E1 E2 E3
+ – r1 + – r2 + – r3 n cells

(c) Current i   Ei
i
r  R i

400 R II PUC
Current Electricity
nE
(d) (s) If all cells have equal emf E and equal internal resistance r then i 
nr  R
E nE
Cases : (i) If nr >> R  i  (ii) If nr << R  i 
r R
 Parallel Grouping :
E1 E2 E3 E1 r1
   ......
r r2 r3 1
(a) Eequivalent = 1 (b) requivalent = 1 1 1 E2
1 1 1 r2
   ........    ......
r1 r2 r3 r1 r2 r3
(c) If all cells have equal emf. E and internal resistance r then E3 r3
r
Eequivalent = E & requivalent =
n
n cell
E i
 Current i  r
R
n
r r
Cases : (i) If  R  i  nE
E
(ii) If << R  i 
n r n R R
 Note : If polarity of m cells are made reverse in the series combination of n identical cells then
I R1 R2 I
equivalent emf Eequivalent = (n – 2m)E and internal resistance requivalent = nr
Illustrations : V1 V2

E 1 ER 2 1 1 ER V R
 I = R  R , V1 = IR1 = R  R , V2 = R  R  V  R
1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2
E, r = 0
E E
 E = I1R1 = I2R2; I1 = R , I2 = R  If cell is ideal, I1 and I2 are independent of each other.
1 2 I1 R1
R nR
E
 I= , I 1R 1 = I 2R 2, I = I 1 + I 2 I
R1R2 V V
r 1 2

R1  R2 V I2 R2
I1 R
IR2 IR1 I1 R2
 I1 = R  R , I2 = R  R   I I
1 2 1 2 I 2 R1
nR
E, r = 0
I2
V nV R1
 V = V1 + V2, V1 = , V2 = I1
n 1 n 1
I I1 I2
nI I I I E
 I = I1 + I2, I1 = ,I = V R1
n 1 2 n 1 I2 R2 R2
r
E
 I , V = E – Ir ; I1  V , I2  V
R1R2 R1 R2
r
R1  R2
E, r  0
If R2 is increased, I will decrease, I2 will decrease, V will increase, I1 will increase.
KIRCHHOFF’S LAWS
 Junction Rule : It is based on conservation of charge.

I I1
I = I1 + I2
I2

 Loop Rule : It is based on conservation of energy.

II PUC 401
 Objective Physics
(a) For any closed loop, total rise in potential + total fall in potential = 0.
(b) For any open part from a point A to point B, if VA is potential at A and VB is potential at
B, then as we move from A to B.
VA + total rise in potential + total fall in potential = VB.
 By convention rise in potential is taken as positive and fall in potential is taken as negative.
Principle of Wheatstone Bridge
I1 R1 A R2
V V
I1  , I2 
R1  R2 R3  R4
R1 R3 R1 R2
Hence if R  R or R  R or R1R4 = R2R3, then
2 4 3 4
No current through R so I2 R3 B R4
R1 R2 R1 R2
V
R 
R3 R4 R3 R4
METER BRIDGE : Based on Wheatstone bridge principle. It is used to find unknown resistance.
 When there is no deflection in G bridge is called balanced Unknown
R X
R X
and for balanced bridge P  R ,
D

Q S l 100  l G

 100  l  l 100 – l
 Unknown X  R   A B C
 l  E
( )
INSTRUMENTS
 Ammeter R I
A
(a) Ammeter is a current measuring device.
(b) It is connected in series in the branch in which
current is to be measured. (c) An ideal ammeter has zero resistance.
 Voltmeter
(a) Device to measure potential difference. V
(b) Connected in parallel in between the points between which potential R
difference is required.
(c) An ideal voltmeter has infinite resistance.
 Potentiometer
It can measure potential difference without drawing a current from the
circuit. Thus it gives accurate reading and it can measure emf of a cell. AB = Potentiometer
wire of resistance R and length L. EP r Rh
(It has two properties high resistivity and low ) ( )
Any two point C and D are separated by length ‘l’.
L
A I
 EP  R iR i VAB B
Potential gradient x       C D
 r  R  Rh  L L A L l
(here  - resistivity and A - Area of cross section of potentiometer wire)
 Potentiometer

 The current flowing through potentiometer circuit, I  Where, L  =Resistance of po
R  L  R
tentiometer wire
  
 emf of battery measured with potentiometer, Vl   l
 R  L  r 
402 II PUC
Current Electricity
Vl 
 Potential gradient of potentiometer wire,    .
l R  L  r
 1 l1
 Comparison of emf of two cells,  .
 2 l2
 1 l3  l4
 For constructive and destructive combination of cells 
 2 l3  l4

   1 R   l1  l2  R
 Internal resistance of cell by potentiometer, R     l 
V  2 
Applications
 Find the emf of a Cell or comparison of emf of two cells
EP r Rh
( )

l1
A B
l2
E1

E2 (< E1)
E1 l1 l 
 If one of the emf is known then unknown E2   2 E1
E2 l 2
 l1 
 Find Internal Resistance of a Cell
Case I : Key K is kept open, balance point is at length l1.  E  l1
EP r Rh
( )

l1
A B
E,r G (No deflection)

Rext
K
E l1
Case II : Key K is closed, balance point is at length l2. V  l2  
V l2

 E V  l l 
 internal resistance of given cell is   V  Rext   1 2  Rext
   l2 
EP r Rh
( )

l2
A B
E1r
G
Rext K

II PUC 403
 Objective Physics
 Sensitivity of a potentiometer
VAB
 Smaller the potential drop per unit length better is the sensitivity. i.e.,  x should be small.
L
This can be achieved by increasing the length of potentiometer wire or decreasing the current
through it.
HEATING EFFECT OF CURRENT
 Joule’s Law
When I current is passed through a device having resistance R, then the amount of heat produced in
time t
I 2Rt
H = I2Rt in joules  H  in calories where J = mechanical equivalent of heat = 4.186 or 4.2 J/cal
J
 Electric Power
Let a charge dq flows through a device from a to b, (from higher potential to lower potential).
Decrease in potential energy dU = Vdq = VIdt V
dU I
Power associated with this flow =  VI Device
dt a b
Rate of electrical energy transferred to the device = VI
Unit of power is volt-ampere (V × A). r
 1 watt = 1V × A
 Rating of an Appliance : A device is rated as P watt, V volts. E
This means that when the device is connected to V volt, it will consume a power P.
V2
 Resistance of the device R  is constant, while both P and V are variable.
P
Generally if a voltage more than the rated voltage is applied, the device may get destroyed (like a
bulb may fuse).
 Power in a D.C. Circuit
 V = Potential difference across the device & I = Current through the device
 Results I
Device
 Total power supplied by the cell = EI
(equals to rate of consumption of chemical energy)
 Source of power is chemical energy stored in the cell. I
 Rate of heat loss inside the cell = I2r E r
 Net power output = EI – I 2 r = (E – Ir) I = VI V
 Power delivered to device = VI
 When the device is purely resistive like a bulb, then
V2 I
V = IR,  P = VI = I 2 R =
R R1 R2 R3
 Applications
 Series combination V
P 1 = I 2 R 1, P 2 = I 2 R 2, P 3 = I 2 R 3 r=0
 P1 : P2 : P3 :: R1 : R2 : R3
V2
PTotal = P1 + P2 + P3 = I2 [R1 + R2 + R3] =
R1  R2  R3

nV 2
For n identical resistors, PTotal 
R

404 II PUC
Current Electricity
 Parallel combination
R1
V2 V2 V2
P1  , P2  , P3 
R1 R2 R3 R2
1 1 1
P1 : P2 : P3 :: R : R : R R3
1 2 3

V2 V2 V2 1 1 1 1 1 V
PTotal =   = V 2   where   
R1 R2 R3 R  R R1 R2 R3
r=0
nV 2
For n identical resistors, PTotal 
R
R R R
 Short circuit
V
(a) When switch ‘S’ is open I  S
3R V
2
V
Total power =
3R
V2
Power dissipated in each resistor is
9R
(b) When switch S is closed (third resistor’s short circuited)
R R R
V
I
2R V2
Total power = V S
2R
V2
Power dissipated in each resistor is
4R
Maximum Power Transfer Theorem
 In an electrical circuit, the maximum power can be drawn from the battery when external
resistance is same as the internal resistance of the battery. Power drawn in the external resistor
is
E r
E 2R dP 2 I
2 2 (R  r )  2R (R  r )
P I R    E 0
(R  r ) 2 dR (R  r ) 4
R=r R
 Results :
E2
 Power in external resistor is .
4r
E2
 Dissipated power in internal resistance is .
4r P
E2 Pmax
 Total power supplied by the cell is .
2r
 Efficiency of the circuit is 50 %.
 Fuse Wire
r=R R
 Made of lead and tin alloy.
 Has low melting point.
2 r3
 Current capacity (current at which it blows) I 

1
(a) I  r3/2, (b) I , (c) I is independent of length of fuse wire.

 Time taken to melt the fuse wire t  A2 or t  r4, ‘t’ is also independent of length.
 A fuse wire is connected in series with main supply.

II PUC 405
 Objective Physics
EXAMINATION CORNER

1. A carbon resistor of (47 ± 4.7) k   is to be

marked with rings of different colours for its
identification. The colour code sequence will be
(NEET 2018)
(1) Yellow – Green – Violet – Gold
(3) (4)
(2) Yellow – Violet – Orange – Silver
(3) Violet – Yellow – Orange – Silver
(4) Green – Orange – Violet – Gold
n 
A: (2)(47 ± 4.7) k  = 47 × 103 ± 10% A: (2) I  
nr r
 Yellow – Violet – Orange – Silver
So, I is independent of n and I is constant.
2. A set of ‘n’ equal resistors, of value ‘R’ each,
are connected in series to a battery of emf ‘E’
and internal resistance ‘R’. The current drawn
is I. Now, the ‘n’ resistors are connected in
parallel to the same battery. Then the current 
drawn from battery becomes 10 I. The value of
‘n’ is (NEET 2018) 4.
A potentiometer is an accurate and versatile
(1) 20 (2) 11 (3) 10 (4) 9 device to make electrical measurements of
E E.M.F, because the method involves :
A: (3) I  ... (i)
nR  R (NEET 2017)
E
10 I  (1) Cells
R .... (ii)
R (2) Potential gradients
n
(3) A condition of no current flow through the
10 
 n  1 R
galvanometer
Dividing (ii) by (i), 1 
  1 R (4) A combination of cells, galvanometer and
n 
resistances
After solving the equation, n = 10
A: (3) Reading of potentiometer is accurate because
3. A battery consists of a variable number ‘n’ of
identical cells (having internal resistance ‘r’ during taking reading it does not draw any
each) which are connected in series. The termi current from the circuit.
nals of the battery are short-circuited and the 5. The resistance of a wire is ‘R’ ohm. If it is melted
current I is measured. Which of the graphs and stretched to ‘n’ times its original length, its
shows the correct relationship between I and new resistance will be (NEET-2017)
n? (NEET 2018) R R
(1) nR (2) (3) n 2 R (4) 2
n n
R2 I 22 n2 I12 R2
A: (3)   ;  n2 ;
R1 I 12 I12 R1
(1) (2)
R2  n 2 R1

406 II PUC
Current Electricity
6. The potential difference VA  VB  between the 2
 dH  i 2 Rdt   a  2bt  R dt
points A and B in the given figure is
a
(NEET-II 2016) b
2
H    1  2bt  R dt
0

a
3 3
(1) -3V (2) +3V (3) +6V (4) +9V  a  2bt  R b
1  a 3
   a  2 b    a   R
A: (4) 3  2 b  b  b 
0

1  3 a3 R
   a   a3  R ; H 
VA  VB   2  2   3   2  1  6b   3b
= 4 + 3 + 2 = 9V 9. A potentiometer wire is 100 cm long and a
7. A filament bulb (500 W, 100 V) is to be used in constant potential difference is maintained
a 230 V main supply. When a resistance R is across it. Two cellsare connected in series first
connected in series, it works perfectly and the to support one another and then in opposite
bulb consumes 500 W. The value of R is direction. The balance points areobtained at 50
(NEET-II 2016) cm and 10 cm from the positive end of the wire
(1) 230  (2) 46  (3) 26  (4) 13  in the two cases. The ratio of emf’s is :
(NEET-I 2016)
P 500
A: (3) I    5 A (1)5 : 1 (2)5 : 4 (3)3 : 4 (4)3 : 2
V 100
A: (4)
Voltage across resistance R will be
230 - 100 = 130 V
130 E1  E2   50
R  26
5 E1  E2   10  E1  E2  5E1  5E2
8. The charge flowing through a resistance R varies
with time t as Q  at  bt 2 where a and b are 3 E1
6E2  4E1 ; 2  E
positiveconstants. The total heat produced in 2
R is (NEET-I 2016) 10. Current i in the wire varies with time as
a3b a3 R a3 R a3 R i  3 A  2 At . where A is ampere. How
(1) (2) (3) (4)
6b 3b 2b b many coulombs of charge pass a cross section
of the wire between t = 0 and t = 4 s?
 a
2  t  0,
A: (1) Q  at  bt   (1)14 C (2)11 C (3)28 C (4)22 C
 b
dq 4 4

dq  a  A: (3) i   q   idt   (3  2t ) dt  28C

dt
i  a  2 bt ; Note: i is +ve t   0,  0 0
dt  2b 
11. Figure shows a current carrying conductor of
non uniform cross section. Current I is
 a a
And i is – ve t   ,  flowing from left to right as shown. Which of
 2b b 
the following relation is correct? (Symbols
Positive current means current one direction
have usual meaning)
and negative current means current in oppo-
I
site direction. A B

II PUC 407
 Objective Physics
(1)  A  B (2) E A  EB (1) 25% (2) 200% (3) 300% (4) 20%
(3) vd A  vd B (4)All of these A : (3)On stretching R  l 2
A: (4) 2 2
12. A potential difference of 5 V is applied across a R2  l2   2l 
        4  R2  4 R1
conductor of length 10 cm. If drift velocity of R1  l1   l 
electrons is 2.5 × 10 –4 m/s, then electron R  R1 3R
 2  100%  1 100%  300%
mobility will be R1 R1
–4
(1) 5 × 10 m V s2 –1 –1 –6
(2) 5 × 10 m V s2 –1 –1 17. A wire has a resistance of 10 ohm. Its resistance if
–2
(3) 5 × 10 m V s2 –1 –1
(4) Zero it is stretched by one-tenth of its original length is
(1)12.1  (2) 7.9  (3) 11  (4) 9 
VD 2.5  10 4  0.1
A: (2)   ;   ; 2
E 5 1 2  11  121
A : (1) R  n R    R  100  12.1
  5  10 6 m 2V 1s 1  10  100
13. A certain piece of copper is to be shaped into a 18. The temperature coefficient of a wire is
conductor of minimum resistance. Its length 0.00125°C–1. At 300 K its resistance is one ohm.
and diameter should respectively be The resistance of the wire will be 2  at
(1) 1154 K (2) 1100 K
D L D
(1) L, D (2) 2L , (3) , 2D (4) L , (3) 1400 K (4) 1127 K
2 2 2
2 1 R R
A: (3) For (L / 2, D), resistance is minimum A: (4)   R t  t when t1  20C and
1 2 1
14. A carbon resistor has coloured strips as shown
in figure. What is its resistance?
R  R1
 2 when t > 20°C
R1t2  R2 t1 1

here t1 = 30 – 273 = 27°C > 20°C

R2  R1 2 1
   125  105 
R1t2  R2t1 1 t2  2  27
(1) 410   2% (2) 470   5% 1
t2  54   800
125  105
(3) 420   3% (4) 405   2%
 t2  854C  T2  854  273  1127 K
19. Time taken by a 836 W heater to heat one litre
of water from 10°C to 40°C is:
A: (2) (1) 50 s (2) 100 s (3) 150 s (4) 200 s

W
15. If a copper wire is stretched to make its radius A: (3) P   heat H  W  pt & ms  pt
t
decrease by 0.1%, then the percentage increase
in resistance is nearly Density of water   103 kg / m3 ,
(1) 0.1% (2) 0.8% (3) 0.4% (4) 0.2% Volume V = 1 lit = 10–3 m3
A: (3)For x% decrease in radius, increase in resis Mass m = V  103  10 3  1kg
tance is 4x%  0.4 % Specific heat of water = 4200 J/kg/°C,
16. The length of a wire of resistance 100  is   40  10  30C & P = 836 W
doubled on stretching itself. The percentage of 1 4200  30  836  t ; t = 150 sec
increase of its resistance is
408 II PUC
Current Electricity
20. Three electric bulbs of 40W, 60W and 100W A: (1) Potential difference across capacitor
have the tungsten wire of the same diameter. 2 20 2
= 10   V V
Then the longer wire is used by 30 30 3
2
(1) 60W (2) 100W  q = 6  C = 4C
3
(3) 40W 24. What could be value of R for which current
(4) All use the same length
through R is zero?
1 2 6
A: l  R   Lower power, higher length
P R 18 
6
21. The charge stored in each capacitor C1 and C2
in the circuit shown below are
10 V
(1)4  (2)40  (3)10  (4)All of these
A: (4) It is a balanced Wheatstone Bridge, current
through R will be zero for any arbitrary value.
(1) 6  C, 6  C (2) 6  C, 3  C 25. The reading of ammeter in the circuit shown
9V 3
(3) 3  C, 6  C (4) 3  C, 3  C
E 12
A : (1) i    1A 6 12 
Reff 6  3  3 A
Potential difference across the capacitors is
V = 12 – i × 3 = 12 – 1 × 3 = 9V 3
(1)1 A (2)3 A (3) A (4)Zero
7
2 1
 Charge Q = [ Ceff ] V   9  6C 9
2 1 A: (1) i = = 1 A ; 12  resistor will be short
9
As they are connected in series
26. Ten 50 W bulbs are operated on an average for
Q1 = Q2 = Q  6C
10 hours a day. The energy consumed in kWh
22. The current in 20  resistor is
in one month of 30 days is
(1) 50 kWH (2) 100 kWH
15 V 30  20  (3) 150kWH (4) 200 kWH
A : (3) Energy consumed in kwh = no. of units
10 
3 2 
 Npt
(1) A (2)1 A (3) 0.5 A (4) A 3.6 106
2 3
15 i 1
A: (3) i   1 A  i1   A 10  50   30  10  60  60 
15 2 2 U  kwh =150 kwh
23. The charge on the shown capacitor in steady 3.6 106
state is 27. A bulb rated 60W, 220V is connected across
6 F
110V mains line. The power consumed is
(1) 10W (2) 15W
10  20 
(3) 20W (4) 25W
2 2
 Vapp   110 
A: (2) PC  Pr    60   15W
2V  Vr   220 
(1)4 C (2)8 C (3)12 C (4)Zero

II PUC 409
28. A piece of wire is cut into four equal parts and
the pieces are bundled together side by side to
form a thicker wire. Compared with that of the
original wire, the resistance of the bundle is TASK - I
(1) The same (2)1/16 as much 1. In an electrolyte 3.2  1018 bivalent positive ions
(3)1/8 as much (4)1/4 as much
drift to the right per second while 3.6  1018
monovalent negative ions drift to the left per
second. Then the current is
R (1) 1.6 amp to the left
A: (2) Rnet 
16 (2) 1.6 amp to the right
(3) 0.45 amp to the right
29. A current of 2 A flows in a system of conduc (4) 0.45 amp to the left
tors shown in figure. The potential difference 2. A material B has twice the specific resistance
VA– VB will be of the material A. A circular wire made of B
has twice the diameter of the wire made of A.
Then, for the two wires to have the same
resistance, the ratio lA/lB of their respective
lengths must be

(1) +2 volt (2) –1 volt 1 1

(1) (2) 2 (3) 1 (4)
(3) +1 volt (4) –2 volt 4 2
3. A wire is drawn such that its radius changes
from r to 2r. The new resistance is

A: (3) (1) 1 times (2) 4 times

1
(3) 8 times times
(4)
VA+ 2 – 3 = VB; VA– VB= 1 16
30. Reading of the ammeter in the circuit below is 4. If a 0.1 % increase in length due to stretching,
the percentage increase in its resistance will be
(1) 0.2 % (2) 2 % (3) 1 % (4) 0.1 %
5. The specific resistance of a wire is  , its volume
is 3 m 3 and its resistance is 3 ohms, then its
length will be
(1) 16 A (2) 3 A
(3) 4 A (4) 12 A 1 3 1 1
(1) (2) (3) 3 (4) 
24    3
A: (2) Rnet  8  ; i  ; i  3A
8 6. Two wires A and B of same material and same
mass have radius 2rand r. If resistance of wire
A is 34 , then resistance of B will be
(1) 544 (2) 272 (3) 68 (4) 17 
7. Masses of 3 wires of same metal are in the ratio
1 : 2 : 3 and their lengths are in the ratio 3 : 2 : 1.
The electrical resistances are in ratio

410 II PUC
Current Electricity
(1) 1 : 4 : 9 (2) 9 : 4 : 1 15. The resistance of the series combination of two
(3) 1 : 2 : 3 (4) 27 : 6 : 1 resistances is S. When they are joined in
8. The ratio of masses of three wires is 1 : 2 : 3 and parallel, the total resistance of P. If S = nP, then
that of their lengths is 3 : 2 : 1. If the wires are the minimum possible value of n is
made of same material, the ratio of their (1) 4 (2) 3 (3) 8/9 (4) 2
resistances will be 16. The potential difference between points A and
(1) 1 : 1 : 1 (2) 1 : 2 : 3 B of adjoining figure is
(3) 9 : 4 : 1 (4) 27 : 6 : 1
9. If a wire of resistivity  is stretched to double
its length, then its new resistivity will
(1) be half (2) be 4 times
(3) be double (4) not change
10. Two wires of equal diameters, of resistivities
1 and 2 and lengths l1 and l2, respectively, are
joined in series. The equivalent resistivity of the
combination is 2 8 4
(1) V (2) V (3) V (4) 2 V
3 9 3
1l1  2 l2 1l2  2 l1
(1) l  l (2) l  l 17. Equivalent resistance between A and B will be
1 2 1 2

1l2  2 l1 1l1  2 l2
(3) l1  l2 (4) l1  l2
11. A copper wire of length 1 m and radius 1 mm
is joined in series with an iron wire of length 2
m and radius 3 mm and a current is passed
through the wires. The ratio of the current
density in the copper and iron wires is
(1) 18 : 1 (2) 9 : 1 (3) 6 : 1 (4) 2 : 3 (1) 2 ohm (2) 18 ohm
12. When the current i is flowing through a (3) 6 ohm (4) 3.6 ohm
conductor, the drift velocity is v . If 2i current 18. The effective resistance between the points A
is flowed through the same metal but having and B in the figure is
double the area of cross-section, then the drift
velocity will be
(1) v / 4 (2) v / 2 (3) v (4) 4v
13. The resistance of bulb filament is 100  at a
temperature of 100C. If its temperature
coefficient of resistance be 0.005C1, its resistance
will become 200  at a temperature of
(1) 500C (2) 200C (3) 300C (4) 400C (1) 5 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
14. The resistance of a wire is 5 at 50C and 6 at 19. A current of 2 A flows in a system of
100C. The resistance of the wire at 0C will be conductors as shown. The potential difference
(1) 3 (2) 2 (3) 1 (4) 4 (VA  VB ) will be

II PUC 411
 Objective Physics
2Rr 8R  R  r 
(1) (2)
Rr 3R  r
5R
(3) 2r + 4R  2r
(4)
2
24. To verify Ohm’s law, a student is provided with
a test resistor RT, a high resistance R1, a small
(1) 2V (2) 1V (3) 1V (4) 2V resistance R 2 , two identical galvanometer G1
20. In the network of resistors shown in the and G2 and a variable voltage source V. the
adjoining figure, the equivalent resistance correct circuit to carry out the experiment is

between A and B is

(1) (2)

(1) 54 ohm (2) 18 ohm (3) 36 ohm (4) 9 ohm

21. In the figure shown, the total resistance between (3) (4)

A and B is
25. Find the equivalent resistance across AB

(1) 12 (2) 4 (3) 6 (4) 8

22. The current from the battery in circuit diagram (1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4

shown is 26. The current through the cell is

(1) 2A (2) 1A (3) 1.5A (4) 0.5A

27. The magnitude and direction of the current in
(1) 1 A (2) 2 A (3) 1.5 A (4) 3 A
23. The effective resistance between points P and the circuit shown will be
Q of the electrical circuit shown in the figure is

412 II PUC
Current Electricity
7 (1) increasing R by 2 
(1) 3 A from a to b through e
(2) increasing Q by 10 
7 (3) increasing S by 20 
(2) A from b to a through e
3 (4) making product RQ = 22200 ()2
(3) 1A from b to a through e 32. Each of the resistances in the network shown
(4) 1A from a to b through e in figure equals R. Find the resistance between
28. In the balanced Wheatstone’s bridge circuit as two terminals A and C
shown in the figure, when the key is pressed,
what will be the change in the reading of the
galvanometer?

R
(1) 2RW (2)  (3) RW (4) R2 W

33. A constant voltage is applied between the two
(1) remains same (2) increased ends of a uniform metallic wire. Some heat is
(3) decreased (4) none of these developed in it. The heat developed in it. The
29. Three resistances P, Q, R each of 2 and an heat developed is doubled, if
unknown resistances S form the four arms of a (1) both the length and radius of wire are halved.
Wheatstone’s bridge circuit. When a resistance (2) both length and radius of wire are doubled
of 6  is connected in parallel to S, the bridge (3) the radius of wire is doubled
gets balanced. What is the value of S?
(4) the length of the wire is doubled
(1) 2  (2) 3  (3) 6  (4) 1 
34. A 25W-220 V bulb and a 100W-220V bulb are
30. The equivalent resistance between A and B of
joined in series and connected to the mains.
the circuit is
Which bulb will glow brighter?
(1) 25 W bulb
(2) 100 W bulb
(3) First 25 W bulb and then 100 W bulb
(4) Both will glow with some brightness
13 8 4 35. An electric bulb is rated 220 V-100 W. The
(1)  (2)  (3) 8 W (4) 
12 3 3 power consumed by it, when operated on 110
31. The given figure shows a balanced V, will be
Wheatstone’s network. Now, it is distributed (1) 25 W (2) 50 W
by changing P to 11 . Which of the following (3) 75 W (4) 40 W
steps will not bring the bridge to balance again? 36. A heater coil is cut into two equal parts and
only one part is now used in the heater. The
heat generated will now be
(1) doubled (2) four times
(3) one fourth (4) halved

II PUC 413
 Objective Physics
37. A wire, when connected to 220 V mains supply 4. Two batteries, one of emf 18 volts and internal
has power dissipation P1. Now the wire is cut resistance 2 and the other of emf 12 volt and
into two equal pieces which are connected in internal resistance 1 , are connected as shown.
parallel to the same supply. Power dissipation The voltmeter V will record a reading of
in this case is P2. Then P2 : P1 is
(1) 1 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 3
38. A cell of e.m.f. E is connected with an external
resistance R , then p.d. across cell is V . The
internal resistance of cell will be
(E  V)R (E  V)R
(1) (2) (1) 15 volt (2) 30 volt (3) 14 volt (4) 18 volt
E V
5. If the length of potentiometer wire is increased,
(V  E)R (V  E)R
(3) (4) then the length of the previously obtained
V E balance point will
39. A 50V battery is connected across a 10 ohm (1) Increase (2) Decrease
resistor. The current is 4.5 amperes. The internal (3) Remain unchanged (4) Become two times
resistance of the battery is 6. Resistance in the two gaps of a meter bridge
(1) Zero (2) 0.5 ohm(3) 1.1 ohm(4) 5.0 ohm are 10 ohm and 30 ohm respectively. If the
resistances are interchanged the balance point
40. The potential difference in open circuit for a
shifts by
cell is 2.2 volts. When a 4 ohm resistor is
(1) 33.3 cm (2) 66.67cm
connected between its two electrodes the (3) 25 cm (4) 50 cm
potential difference becomes 2 volts. The 7. A potentiometer wire is 10 m long and has a
internal resistance of the cell will be resistance of 18 . It is connected to a battery
(1) 1 ohm (2) 0.2 ohm(3) 2.5 ohm(4) 0.4 ohm of emf 5 V and internal resistance 2 . Calculate
TASK - II the potential gradient along the wire.
1. Two identical cells send the same current in 2 (1) 0.65 Vm1 (2) 0.45 Vm1
1
resistance, whether connected in series or in (3) 0.35 Vm (4) 0.25 Vm1
parallel. The internal resistance of the cell 8. A potentiometer wire is supplied a constant
should be voltage is 3 V. A cell of emf 1.08 V is balanced
1 by the voltage drop across 216 cm of the wire.
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3)  (4) 2.5 Find the total length of the potentiometer wire
2
2. When a resistance of 2 ohm is connected across (1) 300 cm (2) 400 cm (3) 600 cm (4) 500 cm
the terminals of a cell, the current is 0.5 A. When 9. In metre bridge, the null point is found at a
the resistance is increased to 5 ohm, the current distance of 60.0 cm from A. If now a resistance of
is 0.25 A. The e.m.f. of the cell is 5 is connected in series with S, the null point
(1) 1.0 V (2) 1.5 V (3) 2.0 V (4) 2.5 V occurs at 50 cm. Determine the values of R and S.
3. A cell of internal resistance 1.5 and of e.m.f.
1.5 volt balances 500 cm on a potentiometer
wire. If a wire of 15 is connected between
the balance point and the cell, then the balance
point will shift
(1) To zero (2) By 500 cm
(1) 25 (2) 15 (3) 35 (4) 45
(3) By 750 cm (4) None of the above

414 II PUC
Current Electricity
10. In the circuit shown, a meter bridge is in its 17. Equal potentials are applied on an iron and
balanced state. The meter bridge wire has a copper wire of same length. In order to have
resistance 0.1 ohm/cm. The value of unknown the same current flow in the two wires, the ratio
resistance X and the current drawn from the r (iron)/r (copper) of their radii must be
battery of negligible resistance is (Given that specific resistance of iron
= 1.0  107 ohm m and specific resistance of copper
= 1.7  108 ohm-m)
(1) About 1.2 (2) About 2.4
(3) About 3.6 (4) About 4.8
18. A nichrome wire 50 cm long and one square
(1) 6 , 5 amp (2) 10 , 0.1 amp millimetre cross-section carries a current of 4A
when connected to a 2V battery. The resistivity
(3) 4 , 1.0 amp (4) 12 , 0.5 amp
of nichrome wire in ohm metre is
11. In a meter bridge, the balancing length from
(1) 1 × 106 (2) 4 × 107
the left end (standard resistance of one ohm is
(3) 3 × 107 (4) 2 × 107
in the right gap) is found to be 20 cm. The value
19. A copper wire of length 1 m and radius 1 mm
of the unknown resistance is
is joined in series with an iron wire of length 2
(1) 0.8 (2) 0.5 (3) 0.4  (4) 0.25 
m and radius 3 mm and a current is passed
12. When current flows through a conductor, then
through the wires. The ratio of the current
the order of drift velocity of electrons will be
density in the copper and iron wires is
(1) 1010 m / sec (2) 10 2 cm / sec
(1) 18 : 1 (2) 9 : 1 (3) 6 : 1 (4) 2 : 3
(3) 104 cm / sec (4) 101 cm / sec
20. A current I is passing through a wire having
13. A source of e.m.f. E = 15 V and having negligible
two sections P and Q of uniform diameters d
internal resistance is connected to a variable
and d 2 respectively. If the mean drift velocity
resistance so that the current in the circuit
of electrons in sections P and Q is denoted by
increases with time as i = 1.2 t + 3. Then, the total
vP and vQ respectively, then
charge that will flow in first five second will be
(1) 10 C (2) 20 C (3) 30 C (4) 40 C 1
(1) vP = vQ (2) vP = vQ
14. The specific resistance of manganin is 2
50 10 8 ohm  m . The resistance of a cube of 1
(3) vP = vQ (4) vP = 2 vQ
length 50cm will be 4
(1) 106 ohm (2) 2.5 105 ohm 21. What is the resistance of a carbon resistance
8 4
(3) 10 ohm (4) 5 10 ohm which has bands of colours brown, black and
15. A wire of length 5 m and radius 1 mm has a brown
resistance of 1 ohm. What length of the wire of the (1) 100  (2) 1000 
same material at the same temperature and of (3) 10  (4) 1 
radius 2 mm will also have a resistance of 1 ohm 22. A current of two amperes is flowing through a
(1) 1.25 m (2) 2.5 m (3) 10 m (4) 20 m cell of e.m.f. 5 volts and internal resistance 0.5
16. When the length and area of cross-section both ohm from negative to positive electrode. If the
are doubled, then its resistance potential of negative electrode is 10V, the
(1) Will become half (2) Will be doubled potential of positive electrode will be
(3) Will remain the same (1) 5 V (2) 14 V (3) 15 V (4) 16 V
(4) Will become four times
II PUC 415
 Objective Physics
23. The external diameter of a 5 metre long hollow 31. The number density of electrons in copper is
tube is 10 cm and the thickness of its wall is 5 8.5  1028 m–3. A current of 1 A flows through
mm. If the specific resistance of its wall is 5 mm. a copper wire of length 0.24 m and area of cross-
If the specific resistance of copper be 1.7  10–5
section 1.2 mm2, when connected to a battery
ohm-metre, then determine its resistance
of 3 V. The electron mobility is
(1) 2.7  10–5  (2) 3.7  10–5 
(3) 5.7  10–5  (4) 4.7  10–5  (1) 1.2  10–4 m2 V–1 s–1
24. The resistivity of a conductor in which a current (2) 4.9  10–6 m2 V–1 s–1
density of 2.5 Am–2 is found to exist, when an (3) 2.3  10–2 m2 V–1 s–1
electric field of 15 Vm–1 is applied on it. (4) 9.4  10–6 m2 V–1 s–1
(1) 2  (2) 6  (3) 4  (4) 8  32. The temperature coefficient of a, resistance wire
25. A metal wire of specific resistance 64  10–8  is 0.0012. 5°C–1. At 300 K, its resistance is 1 .
m and length 1.98 m has a resistance of 7 .
At what temperature the resistance of the wire
Its radius
will be 2 
(1) 2.4  10–4 m (2) 4.8  10–4 m
(3) 1.2  10–4 m (4) 2.4  10–2 m (1) 1217 K (2) 1127 K
26. The electric field in a copper wire of cross – sectional (3) 1721 K (4) 2172 K
area 2.0 mm2 carrying a current of 1 A is 33. A 5  resistor is connected in series with a parallel
(The resistivity of copper = 1.7  10-8) m combination of n resistors of 6  each. The
(1) 1.85  10–2 Vm–1 (2) 0.85  10–4 Vm–1 equivalent resistance is 7 . The value of n is
(3) 2.85  10–2 Vm–1 (4) 0.85  10–2 Vm–1 (1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 5
27. A wire of resistance 5  is uniformly stretched
34. The equivalent resistance of the circuit between
until its new length becomes 4 times the original
the points P and Q is. Each resistor has a
length. Its new resistance.
(1) 80  (2) 40  (3) 20  (4) 60  resistancer
28. The conductivity of a wire of resistance 0.01 ,
area of cross- section 10–4 m2 and length 0.1 m is
(1) 103 Sm1 (2) 102 Sm1
(3) 105 Sm1 (4) 107 Sm1
29. The resistivity of copper at room temperature
is 1.7  10–8 m. If the free electron density of
r r r r
copper is 8.4  1028 m–3, the relaxation time for (1) (2) (3) (4)
2 3 4 6
the free electrons of copper.
35. In the given current distribution what is the
Given me = 9.11  10–31 kg and e = 1.6  10–19 C
(1) 1.36  10– 12 s (2) 2.48  10– 16 s value of I
(3) 4.28  10– 14 s (4) 2.49  10– 14 s
30. A potential difference of 4.5 V is applied across
a conductor of length 0.1 m. If the drift velocity
of electrons is 1.5  10– 4 ms –1 , the electron
mobility is
(1) 2.36  106 m2V1s1 (2) 1.23  102 m2V1s1
(1) 3A (2) 8 A (3) 2A (4) 5A
(3) 3.33  106 m2V1s1 (4) 1.16  106 m2V1s1

416 II PUC
Current Electricity
36. The value of I2 in the given circuit is KEY
TASK - I
1 2 2 4 3 4 4 1 5 2
6 1 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 1
11 2 12 3 13 3 14 4 15 1
16 3 17 4 18 2 19 2 20 4
21 4 22 1 23 1 24 3 25 1
7 13 22 12 26 2 27 4 28 1 29 2 30 2
(1) A (2) A (3)  A (4)  A
31 4 32 3 33 2 34 1 35 1
13 7 37 24
37. The current I3 is equal to 36 1 37 2 38 2 39 3 40 4
TASK - II
1 2 2 2 3 4 4 3 5 1
6 4 7 2 8 3 9 2 10 3
11 4 12 2 13 3 14 1 15 4
16 3 17 2 18 1 19 2 20 3
21 1 22 2 23 3 24 2 25 4
(1) 5 amp (2) 3 amp
26 4 27 1 28 3 29 4 30 3
(3) 3amp (4) 5 / 6amp
31 2 32 2 33 1 34 2 35 3
38. The current in the given circuit is
36 1 37 4 38 1 39 4 40 1
Hints and Solutions
TASK - I

1. (2) Net current i net  i(  )  i(  )  n (  )q (  )  n ( ) q ( )

t t
n n
(1) 0.1 A (2) 0.2 A  (  )  2e  (  )  e
(3) 0.3 A (4) 0.4 A t t
39. The emf of a cell is 1.5 V. On connecting a 14  = 3.2  10  2  1.6  10–19
18

resistance across the cell, the terminal p. d. falls + 3.6  1018  1.6  10–19
to 1.4 V. Calculate the internal resistance of the = 1.6 A (towards right)
cell lA lB
2. (4) Given RA = RB ; A D2 / 4  B D2 / 4
(1) 4 (2) 3 (3) 2 (4) 1 A B

40. The potential difference between the terminals 2

lA B D A2 2  1  1
of a battery of emf 6.0 V and internal resistance  .   
lB A DB2 1  2  2
1  drops to 5.8 V when connected across an
3. (4) When radius increases from r to 2r, area of
external drops to 5.8 V when connected across
cross-section increases from A to 4A and length
an external resistor. The resistance of the
decreases from l and l/4
external resistor is
(1) 29  (2) 18  (3) 16  (4) 20  R l A l / 4 A 1 1
    .   R  R
R l A l 4A 16 16
R 2l
4. (1) R  l2  
R l
II PUC 417
 Objective Physics
R 0 J1 i1 r22
 %  2  0.1  0.2% i i  
R 11. (2) Current density J   2
A r J 2 i 2 r12
3
5. (2) Volume  Al  3  A  But the wires are in series,
l
so they have the same current, hence i1  i 2 .
l   l l 2
2 9 3
l   J1 r22
Now R   3 
    9 :1
A 3/ l 3 So
J 2 r12
l
6. (1) R   and mass m = volume (V)  density J
A 12. (3) v d   v d  J (current density)
(4) = (A l) d ne
Since wires have same material so  and d is i 2i i
J1  and J 2    J1 ;  (vd )1  (v d )2  v
same for both. A 2A A
Also they have same mass  Al = constant R  R1 200  100
13. (3) t 2  t1  2 
2 4 R 1 100  0.005
1 R 1 l1 A 2  A 2   r2 
 l      
  
A R 2 l2 A1  A1   r1  t2 = 200 + t1 = 200 + 100 = 300C
14. (4) Rt  R0 =  R0  50  R50  R0 = R0  100
4
34  r  On dividing, we get
     R 2  544 
R 2  2r 
R 50  R 0 50 5  R0 1
 ; 
l2 l12 l22 l32 R 100  R 0 100 6  R 0 2
7. (4) R   R 1 : R 2 : R 3  : :
m m1 m 2 m3 10  2R0 = 6  R0 or R0 = 4
9 4 1 R 1R 2
 R1 : R 2 : R 3 
: :  27 : 6 :1 15. (1) In series R1 + R2 = S; In parallel, R  R  P
1 2 3 1 2
8. (4) Mass = Volume  density = Ald
R 1R 2
m l l l 2d But S = nP  R 1  R 2  n R  R
or A  R      1 2
ld A m / ld m For n to be minimum R1 = R2 = R (Say)
2
l RR
i.e., R  R  R  n or 4R 2  nR 2 or n  4
m RR
Given m1 : m2 : m3 = 1 : 2 : 3 and l1 : l2 : l3 16. (3) The given circuit can be redrawn as follows
=3:2:1
32 22 12 1
 R1 : R 2 : R 3 
: :  9 : 2 : = 27 : 6 : 1
1 2 3 3
9. (4) Resistivity depends on the nature of the
material and not on the dimension of the
conductor.
1l1 l For identical resistances, potential difference
10. (1) R1  and R 2  2 2 . In series
A A distributes equally among all. Hence potential
R eq  R 1  R 2 2
difference across each resistance is V, and
eq. (l1  l2 ) 3
1l1 2 l 2  l  l
   eq  1 1 2 2 4
A A A l1  l 2 potential difference between A and B is V.
3

418 II PUC
Current Electricity
17. (4) The circuit reduces to 1 1 1 1 1 1 Rr
     
9  6 9  6 18 R PQ 4R 4R 2r 2R 2r 2Rr
R AB     3.6
9  6 15 5 2Rr
18. (2) Giveen circuit is equivalent to or R PQ 
Rr
24. (3) G1 behaves as voltmeter by connecting it in
series with high resistance R1 and applying it
across RT in parallel. G2 behaves as ammeter by
shunting it with small resistance R 2 and
connecting in series with RT.
So the equivalent resistance between points A
63
and B is equal to R   2
63
19. (2) Current through each arm DAC and 25. (1)
DBC = 1A
VD  VA  2 and VD  VB  3  VA  VB  1V
22
20. (4) The network can be redrawn as follows R AB   1
22
26. (2) The series combination of 4 and 2 is in
parallel with 3 resistor
 R eq  9
21. (4) The last two resistance are out of circuit. 63 V 2V
R   3 ; I    1A
Now 8 is in parallel with (1  1  4  1  1) . 63 R 2

8
 R  8 || 8   4  R AB  4  2  2  8
2
22. (1) The given circuit can be simplified as follows
27. (4)

Since E1 (10 V )  E2 (4V )

So current in the circuit will be clockwise.

On further solving equivalent resistance Applying Kirchoff’s voltage law

R  15   1  i  10  4  2  i  3i  0
15  i  1 A( a to b via e)
Hence current from the battery i   1A
15 V 10  4
 Current    1.0 ampere
R 6
28. (1) As the Wheatstone bridge is balanced, the
23. (1)
pressing of key K makes no effect. The reading
of the galvanometer G remains the same
If a potential differences is applied between P
29. (2) The fourth term arm has resistance S and 6
and Q, no current will flow in arms AB and
 in parallel with equivalent resistance
BC. The resistances is arms AB and BC are
ineffective. The equivalent circuit then takes the 6S
 
form as shown below 6 S
II PUC 419
 Objective Physics
For the balanced Wheatstone bridge, 34. (1) In the series circuit, same current flows
P R 2 2  6  S through each bulb. But the 25 W bulb has a
 or 
Q 6S 2 6S higher resistance (R = V2/P).
6S It produces more heat per second (P = I2R) and
or 3S = 6 + S or S = 3 hence glows brighter than 100 W bulb
30. (2) The circuit is a balanced Wheatstone bridge,
V 2 220  220
2 4 35. (1) R    484 
because  P 100
2 4 When operated on 110 V
The 7 resistance is ineffective
V2 110 110
 Resistance of the upper arms = 2 + 2 = 4 P    25 W
R 484
Resistance of the lower arms = 4 + 4 = 8 
V2 V2
These two resistances are in parallel H
36. (1) 1  t, H 2  t ;
R R/2
4  8 32 8
 R AB     H2
4  8 12 3  2 or H 2  2H1
31. (4) When S is increased by 20 , we have H1

11 20 V2
 That is the bridge is not balanced 37. (2) P1  When the wire cut into two equal
100 220 R
32. (3) The network shown in figure is the pieces, the resistance of each part becomes R/ 2.
equivalent network of the given network Effective resistance when the two parts are
connected in parallel will be
R R
. V2 P
R2  2 2  P2   4P1 or 2  4
R R R P1
 4
2 2
It is a balanced Wheatstone bridge because
R R V
 38. (2) Let the current in the circuit  i 
R R R
Hence the points B and D must be at the same Across the cell,
potential. The resistance R in arm BD is EV EV  EV
ineffective E  V  ir  r  i  V / R   V  R
 
Total resistance along ADC = R + R = 2 R 
50 50 5
Total resistance along ABC = R + R = 2 R  39. (3) i   r  10   1.1
Rr 4.5 4.5
These two resistances form a parallel
1
combination. 40. (4) (4  r)i  2.2 ......(i) and 4i  2  i 
2
 Effective resistance between A and C
Putting the value of i in (i), we get r = 0.4 ohm.
2R  2R
  R
2R  2R TASK - II
V2 V2 V2 2E
P   1. (2) In series, I1  & In parallel,
33. (2) R l l
  2 or 2  2r
A r
V 2  r 2 r2 E 2E
P i.e., P  I2  
r 4r
l l 2
2
When both l and r are doubled, P gets doubled
420 II PUC
Current Electricity
2E 2E R 50
Since I1 = I2    r  2 In second case ,  ….(ii)
4  r 2  2r S  5 50
 E  S 5 3
2. (2) i    , we get On dividing (i) by (ii), 
Rr S 2
or 2S + 10 = 3S; or S = 10 
E E
0.5  ......(i) 0.25  .....(ii) 3 3
2r 5r and R  S  10  15
2 2
5r
Dividing (i) by (ii), we get 2   r  1
2r
E 10. (3)
 0.5   E  1.5V
2 1
3. (4) Balance point has some fixed position on Resistance of the part AC
potentiometer wire. It is not affect by the R AC  0.1  40  4 and RCB  0.1  60  6
addition of resistance between balance point
X 4
and cell. In balanced condition   X  4
6 6
4. (3) Reading of voltmeter
Equivalent resistance Req  5
E1r2  E 2 r1 18 1  12  2
 E eq    14V
r1  r2 1 2 5
so current drawn from battery i   1A .
5. (1) When the length of potentiometer wire is 5
increased, the potential gradient decreases and X 20 1
the length of previous balance point is increased. 11. (4) 1  80  X  4   0.25 
 100  l  12. (2) Order of drift velocity
6. (4) S    .R
 l   104 m / sec  102 cm / sec
 100  l  dQ
Initially, 30     10  l  25cm 13. (3) i   dQ  idt
 l  dt
t2 5
 100  l   Q   t i dt  0 (1.2t  3) dt
Finally, 10     30  l  75cm 1

 l 
So, shift = 50cm.  1.2t 2 
5

7. (2) Here l = 10 cm, R = 18 ,  = 5 V, r = 2    3t   30C

 2 0
Current through the potentiometer wire, l 50  102
8
14. (1) R   50  10  2 2
 106 
 5 5 1 A (50 10 )
I    A
R  r 18  2 20 4
l
IR 1 18 15. (4) R 
 Potential gradient     0.45 Vm 1 r2
l 4 10 2
R 1 l1 r22 1 5 2
8. (3) Here  = 3 V, 1 = 1.08 V, l1 = 216 cm, l = ?    2       l2  20m
R 2 l2 r1 1 l2  1 
 l  3  216
As   l  l    l1  1.08  600 cm l 2l l
1 1 1 16. (3) R 1   R2  i.e.R 2 
A 2A A
R 60 3  R 1 =R 2
9. (2) In first case,   …(i)
S 40 2

II PUC 421
 Objective Physics
riron iron 1 107 RA V A V / l E 15
   2.4   .     6m
17. (2) r copper 1.7 108 l I l I / A j 2.5
Copper

l l
V l 2 50  102 25. (4) As R  
18. (1) R        A r 2
i A 4 (1 103 ) 2
l 64 108 1.98  7
  1 10 m .6 r2    5.76  108 m 2
R 22  7
i i J1 i1 r22 r = 2.4  10–4 m
19. (2) Current density J   2   
A r J 2 i 2 r12 V IR Il I 11.7 108
26. (4) E    
But the wires are in series, so they have the same l l lA A 20 106
= 0.85  10–2 Vm–1
J1 r22
current, hence i1  i 2 . So J  r 2  9 :1 1
2 1 27. (1) R    5
A
20. (3) Drift velocity
i 1 1 4l l
vd   vd  or vd  2 R'  16  16R  16  5  80
neA A d A/4 A
2 2 1 1
v d  d/2 1 1 28. (3) Conductance, G    100S
 P  Q      v P  vQ R 0.01
vQ  d P   d  4 4 Conductivity ,
21. (1) 1 l 0.1
   4
 105 Sm 1
 RA 0.0110
Significant Figures Multiplier 29. (4) Relaxation time,
31
Brown Black Brown m 9.11 10
 2 e  19 2
e n 1.6 10   8.4  10 1.7 10
28 8

1 0 101
= 2.49  10– 14 s
V 4.5V
1 30. (3) E    45Vm1
 R = 10  10 = 100  l 0.1m
22. (2) V2  V1  E  ir  5  2  0.5  4volt d 1.5 104 ms1
 V2  4  V1  4  10  14 volt &   1
 3.33  106 m 2 V 1s 1
E 45Vm
23. (3) The cross-sectional area of the tube is V
31. (2) I  enAE  enA.
A  r  r
2
2 1
2
 l

= 3.14  [(15  10–2)2 – (4.5  10–2)2] Il 1 0.24

  
= 14.9  10–4 m2 enAV 1.6  10  8.5  1028  1.2 106  3
19

Also,  = 1.7  10–8 m, l = 5 m = 4.9  10–6 m2 V–1 s–1.

 Resistance, 32. (2) 300 K = 300 – 273 = 27°C
8
l 1.7 10  5
R   = 5.7  10–5   R27 = R0 (1 +   27) = 1
A 14.9 104
24. (2) Here j = 2.5 Am–2, E = 15 Vm–1 And Rt = R0 (1 +   t) = 2

Resistivity, 1  t 2
  ; 1 + t = 2 + 54 
1  27 1

422 II PUC
Current Electricity
t
1  54  1  54  0.00125
  854  C 38. (1) Applying Kirchoff’s voltage law in the loop
 0.00125
= 854 + 273 = 1127 K.

6
33. (1) Total resistance  5   7 So n = 3
n
34. (2) Two resistances along each side of triangle
are in parallel .The equivalent resistance of each
rr r 10i  5  20i  2  0  0.1A
side  
r2 2 V  1.5  1.4 
39. (4) r  R    14    1
The given network of resistance reduces to the  V   1.4 
equivalent circuit shown
rV 1 5.8 5.8
The resistances in arms BA and AC are in series. 40. (1) R    V  6.0  5.8  0.2  29
Their equivalent resistance = r / 2 + r / 2 = r.
This resistance is parallel with the resistance
***
r / 2 along BC.
 Effective resistance between point P and Q
r   r / 2 r
 
r  r / 2 3

35. (3) From Kirchoff’s junction Law

 4  2  i  5 3  0  i  2A
36. (1) By Kirchhoff’s junction rule

I3 = I1 + I2 …(i)

From upper loop, 3 I2 – 4I1 = 2 – 1 = 1 …(ii)

From lower loop 2I2 + 2I3 = 4 – 1 = 3 …(iii)

On solving equations (i), (ii) and (iii),

7
we get I2  A
13
37. (4) Suppose current through different paths of
the circuit is as follows.
After applying KVL for loop (1) and loop (2)

1
We get 28i1  6  8  i1   A
2

1
and 54i 2  6  12  i 2   A
3
5
Hence i3  i1  i2   A
6
II PUC 423
 Objective Physics
Magnetic Effects of Current and Magnetism
CHAPTER Concept of magnetic field, Oersted’s experiment. Biot-Savart law and
its application to current carrying circular loop. Ampere’s law and its applications

4
to infinitely long straight wire, straight and toroidal solenoids. Force on a moving
charge in uniform magnetic and electric fields. Cyclotron. Force on a current-
carrying conductor in a uniform magnetic field. Force between two parallel
current-carrying conductors-definition of ampere. Torque experienced by a
current loop in a magnetic field; moving coil galvanometer-its current sensitivity
and conversion to ammeter and voltmeter.
PAST NEET PAPERS SUBTOPIC LEVEL ANALYSIS
NEET 2016 NEET 2016 Forecasting of
Year NEET 2018 NEET 2017
PHASE-I PHASE-II NEET-2019

No of
question 2 1 2 2 2
Asked
force acting on a circular coil & galvanometer
current flowing in a
magnetic field rectangular frame frequency of
Subtopic rod & resistance of into voltmeter
in a conductor & ampers's circuital oscillation of
galvanometer
law charged particle & circular coil

BIOT-SAVART LAW:
 Biot Savart.s Law is used to determine the magnetic field any point due to a current carrying
conductor. Magnetic field due to current carrying wire is given by
dB

r P

dl
 0 idl sin   i (dl  r )
dB  ; dB  0 .
4 r 2 4 r3
i

  0 I dl sin  
For entire conducting wire, B  dB   n
4  r 2
The SI unit of B is Wbm 2 or Telsa

 If   0 or  sin   0  B  0
 If   90 o sin 90o  1  B maximum

Magnetic Field Due to Straight Current Carrying Wire

2
 i
Magnetic field at P; B  0 (cos 1  cos  2 ) or B   0 i (sin   sin )
4 r 4r i 
r
 P
  i
 For an infinite long wire 1 = 2 = 0 or     , B  0 ‘r’
2 2π r
1
0 i
 For semi infinite long wire 1 = 0°, 2 = 90°, B 
4r

424 II PUC
Moving Charger Magnetism
CIRCULAR LOOP
 0 idl sin 90 0i 0i
 At the centre of a current loop dB 
4r 2 ; B
4r 2  dl 
4r 2
 2r

dl i i

0i r
B (Outward) i
2r

(Outward field) (Inward field)

 On the axis of a loop

R
 2  I  R 2  2M
I B (towards B  0 2 2 3 / 2
 0
x right) 4 (R  x ) 4 ( R  x 2 ) 3 / 2
2

For x >> R, B   0 2M [Current carrying loop acts as an magnetic dipole]

3 4 x

w here M = I × R2 is called magnetic moment & M  I A units (A-m2)

3
BCenter  x2 2
The ratio of magnetic field at center of ring and at any point on axis of ring  1 2 
BAxis  a 
 Applications

to  b
I I
r P
1. 2. 3. I  4. a O I
 
P 
r
r P
 0I  0I  0I 8 0I a2  b 2
B0  [sin ] BP  [sin   sin ] BP  [sin   1] B0 
4 r 4r 4r 4r ab
8 2  0I
when a = b B0 
4a
i

r
i i
5. O 6. O
i
 0i
B0 
4r
3 0 i
Magnetic field at O B0 
a
i i1
i
b
O
a
i
7. O 8. i2
 0i  1 1 
B0     B0 = 0
4  a b
II PUC 425
 Objective Physics

i
I
i 3
i/3
i O i1 r1 O r2 i2
i r r i
3
r
9. i 10. 11. 12.  r

At the centre of O
cube, B = 0 At O, B = 0 At O, B = 0, such that
i i r  0I 
r1  1 r ; r2  2 B0  
i1  i 2 i1  i 2 2r 2
I
I
r
r
13. I 14
O O I
I
I
 0I  0I  0I
B0   B0 
2r 4r 4r
AMPERE CIRCUITAL LAW
It states that the line integral of magnetic field over a closed path is equal 0 the times the algebraic
sum of the current threading the closed path in free space. Ampere's circuital law has the form
Upward Inward
Current Current

i1 i2
dl
B  B.dl   0 i enc

 B .d i   0 ( i1  i 2 )


Here B. dl implies the integration of scalar
product B. dl around a closed loop called an Amperian loop. The current ienc is the net current
encircled by the loop.
Applications of Ampere's Circuital Law
 Magnetic field due to a long thin current carrying wire

dl Amperian loop
 i
or B  0 B B
2 r

426 II PUC
Moving Charger Magnetism
 Magnetic field inside a long straight current carrying conductor
i

i R

r Amperian loop
Amperian loop r
dl , B dl
R
B

 0 ir
 B i.e. Bin  r
2R 2
 Graphical variation of magnetic field
 – 0 i ˆ
At a point in x-y plane, B  K for | x |  R
2x
i y-axis B
 –  ix
B 0
Kˆ for | x |  R
2R 2
SOLENOID –R
x-axis x
R
I
 A long solenoid having number of turns/length ‘n’ carries a current I.
P
 0 nI
 The magnetic field B is given by, BP = 0nI (in between) & Bend  (near one end)
2
 Force on a Moving Charge in Magnetic Field
F

B

F  q (v  B )  F = qvB sin  F is perpendicular to both v & B .
v

 If there are electric field E and magnetic field B both present in a region, then Lorentz force is
given by F  q [E  (v  B )] .When E   (v  B ) , net force because zero. In this situation, the particle
can pass undeviated through the region.
    
 
If charge is negative F  q v  B  q B  v  F  Bqv sin   
Force on charged particle will be zero
 (1) If B = 0 (2) If particle is neutral then q = 0 (3) If charge particle is static then v = 0
(4) If charge particle moving parallel or anti parallel to magnetic field then   0 or 
MOTION OF CHARGED PARTICLE IN A UNIFORM MAGNETIC FIELD B.
 Case 1 : v  B
×v × × ×
F v
× ×
r
× ×
O mv 2 mv 2mE
× × ×F × F  qvB   r   (E is kinetic energy)
F r qB qB
× × × v×

II PUC 427
 Objective Physics
 Results
1. Speed is constant 2. Kinetic energy is constant 3. Work done by the magnetic force is zero
4. Velocity and momentum change continuously in direction, not in magnitude.

5. T  2r  2m (Independent of speed and radius) 6. Frequency f  qB (Cyclotron frequency)

v qB 2m
 Case 2 : v is not perpendicular to B . Let be the ‘’ is angle between v and B .
The particle moves
v in a helical path such that

v sin 
r

B mv sin  2m
v cos 
r  ,T  , Pitch = v cos  × T
qB qB
pitch

 Case 3 : If charge particle is moving parallel or antiparallel to field B then force is zero and it
moves in a straight line × × ×

 Applications × × ×

2r O × × ×
mv
 r  × × ×
qB v
q × × ×
Time spent in magnetic field
× × ×
× × ×
m v
t
qB × × ×

× × ×
mv O
 r  r
qB × × ×

Time spent in magnetic field × × ×

q, v  × × ×
2m
t r
qB 
q, v O
2
mv (2  2) m v
 r  ,t 
qB qB

O × × ×
r
× × ×

 To prevent the charge from hitting the screen, r × × ×

Screen
d > r where ‘r’ is radius of circular path × × ×
× × ×
q v
i.e., d  mv or B  mv × d× × O × × × v
qB qd r

d dqB × × ×
 sin   
r mv
Deflection y = r – r cos  = r (1 – cos ) × × × y
q 
v d
× × ×
Cyclotron
The cyclotron is a machine used to accelerate charge particle (like proton, deutron, -particle). It
uses both electric & magnetic field. Speed of particle is increased by electric field.

qB q 2B 2 Rmax
2
Cyclotron frequency  & K max 
2m 2m
To accelerate electron Betatron and Synchrom are used.

428 II PUC
Moving Charger Magnetism
 Force on a current carrying conductor in uniform field
I


l
B
F  IBl sin  ; F  I ( l  B )

Bsin
 Some Important Cases
F = BI(2R)
BI(2R)
× × × × × × × ×
× × × × F = BIl I I
L
×
i × × × × × × × × × O × ×
(1) (2) (3) R (4) T
I O R
× × × × l
L × × × × × × × ×
× × i × ×

× × × × × × × × ×
BI(2R)
Net F = 0
T = BIR
(tension)
( F  2iBL )
Torque on a Current Carrying Loop B
 
 Case 1 : M  IA M
 
Here M  B
   I
  M  B  MB (maximum) I
 
Potential energy U   M . B  0
 
 Case 2 : Here M || B M
B

  
  M  B  0 (minimum) (a)
Potential energy = –MB (minimum) (b)
M
(a) If  = 0° (Stable equilibrium) I 
B
(b) If  = 180° Potential energy = MB (maximum)
I
 Unstable equilibrium
 
(c)
(c) Here angle between M and B is  = MBsin, U = –MBcos
Work done in rotating from 1 to 2 is W = MB (cos1 – cos2)
FORCE BETWEEN TWO CURRENT CARRYING WIRES
to 
 0I1I 2
 F (force/unit length) is given by F  .
2r
The force on a segment of length ‘l’ is F F
I1 I2 I1 I2
Attraction Repulsion
 0I1I 2 r
 l to 
2r
MOVING COIL GALVANOMETER
 Principle : When a current carrying coil is placed in a magnetic field, torque acts on it. In moving
coil galvanometer radial field is used which is obtained from magnet having concave shape poles.
In this type of field plane of the coil is always parallel to the magnetic field so maximum torque
acts on it.

II PUC 429
 Objective Physics

Pointer Scale

g
p rin
S
N Coil
S
 = NIAB [ = 90° due to radial field]
Soft iron
core

Cylinder
= C where  is angle formed by the pointer and C is restoring

C  NBA
torque/twist in the suspension wire. I  ,  current sensitivity
NBA I C

 NBA   NBA
 current sensitivity  & voltage sensitivity  
I C V IR CR

 Conversion to Ammeter
 An ammeter is connected in series in an electric circuit. A small resistance called shunt S is
connected in parallel with the galvanometer. ig
i
ig Full scale deflection current G
ig × G = (i – ig) S i – ig
G S
S
 S   i 
ig   i ;   1
S G   ig  Ammeter
 
G
 
To convert a galvanometer’s range by n time I  nI g necessary shunt S 
n1
 G 
Current passing through shunt I s  I  
G S 

 S 
Current passing through galvanometer I g  I   where, I  net current
SG 
 An ideal ammeter has zero resistance.
Conversion to Voltmeter
 A voltmeter is connected in parallel across the device whose potential difference is to be measured.
A high resistance R is connected Voltmeter
ig R
in series with the galvanometer. G
V = ig (G + R)
V
R G
ig V

To increase voltage capacity by n times, necessary series resistance Rs   n  1  G

An ideal voltmeter has infinite resistance.

430 II PUC
Moving charges and Magnetism
EXAMINATION CORNER

1. A metallic rod of mass per unit length 0.5 kg

m 1 is lying horizontally on a smooth inclined
plane which makes an angle of 30 o with the
horizontal. The rod is not allowed to slide down
by flowing a current through it when a mag-
netic field of induction 0.25 T is acting on it in
the vertical direction. The current flowing in 0 I 2
0 I 2 2 0 I 2 2 0 I 2
the rod to keep it stationary is (NEET-2018) (1) (2) (3) (4)
2 d d d 2 d
(1) 14.76 A (2) 5.98 A
A: (4)Force between BC and AB will be same in
(3) 7.14 A (4) 11.32 A
magnitude.
A: (4)For equilibrium,

0 I 2
FBC  FBA 
2 d

mg sin 30 o  I / B cos 30 o 0 I 2 0 I 2
F  2FBC  2 ; F 
mg 0.5  9.8 2 d 2 d
I tan 30 o   11.32 A
lB 0.25  3 4. A long wire carrying a steady current is bent
2. Current sensitivity of a moving coil into a circular loop of one turn. The magnetic
galvanometer is 5 div/mA and its voltage field at the centre of the loop is B. It is then bent
sensitivity (angular deflection per unit voltage into a circular coil of n turns. The magnetic field
applied) is 20 div/V. The resistance of the at the centre of this coil of n turns will be
galvanometer is (NEET-2018) (NEET-II 2016)
(1) 250  (2) 25 (3) 40  (4) 500  (1) nB (2) n 2 B (3) 2nB (4) 2 n 2 B

NBA 0 I
A: (1)Current sensitivity I S  A: (2) B  ,
C 2r
when made n turns radius becomes r’
NBA
Voltage sensitivity VS  r
CRG n  2 r '  2 r  r ' 
n
So, resistance of galvanometer
0 nI I
I 51 5000 Now, B '   n2 0  n2 B
RG  S  3
  250 2r ' 2r
VS 20  10 20
5. An electron is moving in a circular path under
3. An arrangement of three parallel straight wires the influence of a transverse magnetic field of
placed perpendicular to plane of paper carry 3.57  10 2 T If the value of e/m is
ing same current ‘I’ along the same direction is 1.76  10 11 C / kg the frequency of revolution of
shown in Fig. Magnitude of force per unit length the electron is (NEET-II 2016)
on the middle wire ‘B’ is given by (NEET-2017)
II PUC 431
 Objective Physics
(1) 1 GHz (2) 100 MHz  1 2
a 
(3) 62.8 MHz (4) 6.28 MHz  B.dl cos 0=μ0  πa 2 .π  2  
 
qB 1.76  10 11  3.57  10 2
A: (1) f   I   a   0 I 0 I
2 m 2  3.14 B dl=μ0 ; B  2     ; B
4   2  4 4 a
 10 9 Hz  1GHz
Outside the wire,
6. A square loop ABCD carrying a current i, is
I 0 I I
placed near and coplanar with a long straight B'  0   0 So , B  1.
conductor XYcarrying a current I, the net force 2 r 2  2 a  4 a B'
on the loop will be: (NEET-I 2016) 8. Two electrons move parallel to each other with
equal speed v . The ratio of magnetic and elec
trical forces between them is
(1) v / c (2) c / v (3) v 2 / c 2 (4) c 2 / v 2
1 e2
A: (3)Electrostatic force Fe  
4 0 r2
Magnetic force
2 o Ii o Ii 2 o IiL o IiL
(1) (2) (3) (4) 0  e 2 v 2  Fm 2 v2
3 2 3 2 Fm      0 0 v  2 .
4  r2  Fe c
0 IiL 0 Ii  IiL  o Ii
F1   2 0  9. Wires 1 and 2 carrying currents i1 and i2 respec-
A: (1) L  ; 3L 3
2 2 tively are inclined at an angle  to each other.
2 2
What is the force on a small element dl of wire
2 at a distance of r from wire 1 (as shown in
figure) due to the magnetic field of wire 1

i1
i2
r
dl

2 0 Ii
 Fnet  F1  F2 ; Fnet 
3  0 0
(1) i1i2 dl tan  (2) i1i2 dl sin 
7. A long straight wire of radius a carries a steady 2 r 2 r
current I. the current is uniformly distributed 0 0
over its cross-section. The ratio of the magnetic (3) i1i2 dl cos  (4) i1i2 dl sin 
2 r 4 r
a
fields B and B ' , at radial distance and 2a
2 i1 dl cos 
respectively, from the axis of the wire is: i2
(NEET-I 2016) r 
 0i1i2
1 1 A: (3) dl F  dl11 
(1) (2) (3)1 (4)4 2r

4 2
Inside the wire   0i1i2
A: (3)
By ampere's law ;  B.dl=μ0 i en closed   dl11  dl cos    dl cos 
2r

432 II PUC
Moving charges and Magnetism
10. The magnetic field due to current carrying 14. Two linear conductors AOB and COD are
wire at point A is mutually perpendicular. Currents passing
through them are I 1 and I 2 respectively.
Point P lies at perpendicular distance a from
I 45° A
45° point 0 of ABCD plane. Magnetic field inten
sity at point P is.......
d 0 0
0 I 0I 0I 0 I (1)  I1  I2  (2)  I1  I 2 
(1) (2) (3) (4)
2 a 4 a
2 d 2 2d 4 d
4 2d
0 1/2 0 1/2

A: (2)BA =
0 I  I
sin 45  sin 45  0 2 
0 I (3)
2 a
 I1 2  I 2 2  (4)
2 a
 I1 2  I 2 2 
4d 4 d 2 2d
11. A north pole of strengt  A m, is moved around
a circle of radius 10 cm which lies around a
long straight conductor carrying a current of
10 A. The work done is nearly A: (3)
(1) 4  J (2) 40  J (3) 400  J (4)0.4  J

i
Fm  mB Due to the electric current passing through AOB
B and COD wire, the magnetic fields produced
A: (2) dl at point P at distance a from O is.
0 I 1 I  
B1  and B2  0 2 and B1  B2 ,
2 a 2 a
 dW  Fm dl  mBdl ; W   mB dl  mB  2r  So, resultant magnetic field
 0 i  0 2 2 21
 
  dl  2r ; W  m    2 r   m0 i
 2 r 
B  B12  B22 
2 a
 I1  I 2 
15. A horizontal wire carries 200 amp current be-
  4 107  10  40  J    10 
2

low which another wire of linear density

1
12. A current of 4 A is flowing in a long straight 20  103 Kg m1 carrying a current is kept at 2
conductor. The line integral of magnetic cm distance. If the wire kept below hangs in
induction around a closed path enclosing the air, what is the current in this wire
current carrying conductor is (1) 100A (2) 9.8 A
(3) 98 A (4) 48A
(1) 4  107 Wb/m (2) 10 7 Wb/m
A: (3) Given the weight of the second wire is bal-
(3) 16 2  10 7 Wb/m (4) zero
anced by the force per unit length on each wire.
7 1  o i1 i2 m  ii
A: (2) Bdl   0i  4 10 
  107 wb / m So, mg  l  g 0 1 2
4 2 r l 2 r
13. A vertical wire carrying a current in the up m
ward directions is placed in a horizontal mag Given that  20  10 3 Kgm1 ; i1  200 A and
l
netic field directed towards north. The wire will r  2  10 2 m
experience a force directed towards
4  107 200  i2
(1) north (2) south (3) east (4) west  20  103  9.8  
2 2  102
A: (4) west
On solving we get, i2  98 A .
II PUC 433
 Objective Physics
16. Magnetice field is B1 at centre of current car 18. A long straight wire carrying a current of 30A
rying coil of radius a and B2 at a distance a on is placed in an external uniform magnetic field
of induction 4  104 T .
B1
its axis from centre, then ratio  The magnetic field is acting parallel. to the
B2 direction of current. The magnitude of the
(1) 2 :1 (2) 1:2 2 resultant magnetic induction in tesla at a point
2 cm away from the wire is
(3) 2 2 :1 (4) 1 : 2 [   4  10 7 Hm 1 ]
0
A: (3) Magnetic field near center of the ring (1) 104 T (2) 3  104 T
0 I (3) 5 104 T (4) 6  104 T
B1  . Magnetic field at distance a from
2a
i
center of the ring.
0 Ia 2 0 Ia 2 A: (3)
B2   x B2
B1
3 3
2  a2  a 
2 2
2  2 a2  2
The magnetic field B2 produced by the
3 conductor is into parallel to the plane
B1 0 I 2  2 a  2 2 2
2

  .   BR  B12  B22 ;
B2 2 a 0 Ia 2 1
0i 7 30 4
17. A thin straight vertical conductor has 10amp B1   2 10   3  10 T
2r 2  102
current flows vertically upwards. It is present
2 2
at a place where BH  4  106 T . Arrange the 
 BR  3  104  4 10 4  5  104 T   
net magnetic induction at the following points
19. Two concentric circular coils A and B have radii
in ascending order
25 cm and 15 cm and carry currents 10A and
(a) at 0.5m on south of conductor
15A respectively. A has 24 turns and B has 18
(b) at 0.5m on west of conductor
turns. The direction of currents are in opposite
(c) at 0.5m on east of conductor
order. The magnetic induction at the common
(d) at 0.5m on north-east of conductor
centre of the coil is
(1) a,b,c,d (2) a,b,d,c
(3) a,c,b,d (4) b,a,d,c (1) 120  0 T (2) 480  0 T
N

B 450
BH
w (3) 420  0 T (4) 1500  0
P4 E
s  o n1i1   24  10
BH
BH
A: (3) B1   o  4800 &
P2
B 2r1 2  25  102
i P3
A: (4) ni  18  15
B B2  o 2 2   o  900 0
BH
2r2 2  15  102
P1 B i1

(1) BR  B 2  BH2 (2) BR  B  BH i2 r1

0 r2
2 2  1 
(3) BR  B  BH  2 BBH  
 2
bad c B  B2  B1  420 0T

434 II PUC
Moving charges and Magnetism
20. Two long parallel conductors are placed at right The loop is in equilibrium for same magnetic
angles to a metre scale at the 2cm and 6 cm field F4'  F4 cos   F2
marks, as shown in the figure
F4''  F4 sin   F3  F1 , F4'  F4'
2
 F4  F22   F3  F1 
22. A rectangular loop carrying current i is
They carry currents of 1 A and 3 A respectively. situated near a long straight wire such that
They will produce zero magnetic field at the the wire is parallel to one of the side of the
(ignore the earth’s magnetic field) loop and is in the plane of the loop. If steady
current I is established in the wire as shown,
(1) 5 cm mark (2) 3 cm mark
i
(3) 1 cm mark (4) 8 cm mark
A: (2) For null point B1  B2 I
the loop will
0i1 0i2
 (1)Rotate about an axis parallel to long wire
2  x  2  2  6  x 
(2)Move away from the wire
1 3 (3)Move towards the wire
   6  x  3 x  6  x  3cm
x2 6 x (4)Remain stationary
i  1A i  3A
A: (3)Loop will experience net attractive force
1 2

towards the wire hence would move towards

P the wire.
x-2
x 23. As shown in the figure 20 A, 40 A and 60 A
6-x

0 2cm 6cm
current are passing through very long straight
wires P, Q and R respectively in the direction
21. A close loop PQRS carrying a current is placed
shown by the arrows. In this condition the di
in a uniform magnetic field. If the magnetic
rection of the resultant force on wire Q is ......
force on segment PS, SR
and RQ are F1 , F2 and F3
respectively and are in
the plane of the paper
and along the directions
shown, the force on the (1) towards left of wire Q
segment QP is ..... (2) towards right of wire Q
2
(3) normal to the plane of paper.
(1)  F3  F1   F2 2 (2) F3  F1  F2
(4) in the direction of current passing through Q
2 A: (1) Left side F  I1 I2 and current flow from P
(3) F3  F1  F2 (4)  F3  F1   F22
and Q are equal.
 attractive force produced.
 FQR  FPQ Current passing thnough R and Q
are in opp Q sit.
A: (4)  Force acting on Q is left side.
24. A rectangular loop of wire of size 4cm 10cm
carries a steady current of 2A. A straight long
II PUC 435
 Objective Physics
wire carrying 5A current is kept near the loop S G 10 100
 : :1  : :1  1:10 :11
(as shown in fig).If the loop and the wire are GS GS 110 110
coplanar, find the net force on the loop 27. If only 2% of the main current is to be passed
through a Galvanometer of resistance G, the re
sistance of shunt should be
(1) G/50 (2) G/49 (3) 50G (4) 49G
I gG 0.02 IG  0.02  G
A: (2) S  I  I  I  0.02 I   0.98  G  49
g

(1) 3.2  10 5 N (2) 1.6 105 N 28. A milliammeter of range 10 mA has a coil of
resistance 1 . Top use it as a voltameter of
(3) 0.4  105 N (4) 4  105 N
     range 10V, the resistance that must be con
A: (2) As FAB   FDC , FAB  FDC  0 nected in series with it is
(1) 99  (2) 9  (3) 1000  (4) 999 
 2I I  I 10 mA , G 1 , V  10V ;
FAD  km  1 2   AB  A: (4) g   
 a  V 10
R  G   1  999

10 7
N / A   2  5 A  2 A 10cm 
 2  105 N
Ig 10  10 3
1cm  29. With a resistance R connected in series with a
galvanometer of resistance 100 , it acts as a
Similarly, FBC  0.4  10 5 N ,
voltmeter of range 0 - v. To double the range a
5
Thus Fnet  FAD  FBC  1.6  10 N resistance of 1000 is to be connected in series
( towards right) with R. Then the value of R is
(1) 1000 (2) 1100 (3) 800 (4) 900
25. A galvanometer has range 0 – V volt and it
has resistance R. When the series resistor of V V
A: (4) R  I  G  R  I  100
resistance R is connected, the range becomes g g

0 – V. Then V
R  100  ............. (1)
(1)V = 2V (2)V = 3V Ig
(3)V = 1.75V (4)V = 1.5V When the range of the matter is doubled
V V
A: (1) R  I ; Resistance in series, Rs   R 2V 2V
g Ig
R  1000   100 ; R  1100  ...........(2)
Ig Ig
V V
R  R  R   2  V  = 2V
V V (1) R  100 1
26. A galvanometer of coil resistance 100  is Equation (2)  R  1100  2
connected to a shunt of resistance 10  . The 2 R  200  R  1100  R  900 
current through the galvanometer is i1 , the 30. A voltameter can read up to V volt. When the
current through the shunt is i2 and the total series resistance used in the voltmeter is
current into the combination is i3 , then the ratio doubled, range of voltameter is
i 1 : i 2 : i 3 is (1) V (2) 2V
(1) 1 : 10 : 11 (2) 10 : 1 : 11 (3) less than 2V (4) more than 2V
(3) 11 : 10 : 1 (4) 10 : 11 : 1 V V
A: (3) R  I  G  R  I
 S   G  g g
A: (1) ig    I and is   I
GS  GS   When R is doubled then range of the voltme
i1 : i2 : i3  I g : I s : I ter will be less than 2V.

436 II PUC
Moving charges and Magnetism

TASK - I Its magnetic dipole moment is “M”. Now the

1. The scale of a galvanometer is divided into 150 coil is unwound and again rewound in to a
equal division. The galvanometer has the circular coil of half the initial radius and the
current sensitivity of 10 divisions per mA and same current is passed through it, then the
the voltage sensitivity of 2 divisions per mV . dipole moment of this new coil is
How the galvanometer can be designed to read (1) M / 2 (2) M / 4 (3) M (4) 2 M
(1) 6A / division and (2) 1V / division ? 6. A wire of length 6.28 m is bent into a circular
5
(1) S  8.3  10 , R  9995 coil of 2 turns. If a current of 0.5A exists in the
coil, the magnetic moment of the coil is, in Am 2 :
(2) S  8.3  102 , R  995
 1
(3) S  4.3  105 , R  9950 (1) (2) (3)  (4) 4
4 4
(4) R  8.3  105 , S  995 7. A proton and an  -particle enter a uniform
2. A circular current loop of magnetic moment M magnetic field at right angles to the field with
is in an arbitrary orientation in an external same speed. The ratio of the periods of 
 particle and proton is
magnetic field B . The work done to rotate the
loop by 300 about an axis perpendicular to its (1) 1:1 (2) 1:4 (3) 1:2 (4) 2:1
plane is : 8. A charged particle, having charge q accelerated
through a potential difference V enters a
MB MB
(1) MB (2) 3 (3) (4) zero perpendicular magnetic field in which it
2 2 experiences a force F. If V is increased to 5 V,the
3. Three long straight conductors are kept particle will experience a force
perpendicular to the plane of paper. (1) F (2) 5 F (3) F/ 5 (4) 5F
Currents 2 A, 3 A are passing through the two 9. A proton is rotating along a circular path with
conductors into the plane of paper in first two kinetic energy K in a uniform magnetic field
conductors and 5 A current passes through B.If the magnetic field is made four times, the
third conductor, directed out of the paper. A kinetic energy of rotation of proton is
closed loop encloses the conductors, then the (1) 16K (2) 8K (3) 4K (4) K
10. A proton moving in a perpendicular magnetic
value of  B.dl over the closed loop is (assume
field possesses kinetic energy E. The magnetic
current into the paper as negative and out of
field is increased 8 times. But the proton is
the paper as positive)
constrained to move in the path of same radius.
(1) 20 (2) zero (3) 0 (4)  0 The kinetic energy will increase
4. The field normal to the plane of a coil of n turns (1) 1/8 times (2) 8 times
and radius r which carries a curent i is measured (3) 16 times (4) 64 times
on the axis of the coil at a small distance h from 11. Electrons accelerated by a potential difference
the centre of the coil. This is smaller than the V enter a uniform magnetic field of flux density
field at the centre by the fraction B at right angles to the field. They describe a
3 h2 2 h2 3 r2 2 r2 circular path of radius ‘r’. If now V is doubled
(1) (2) (3) (4) and B is also doubled, the radius of the new
2 r2 3 r2 2 h2 3 h2
circular path is
5. A circular coil of wire of “n” turns has a radius
(1) 4r (2) 2r (3) 2 2r (4) r / 2
“r” and carries a current “i”.
II PUC 437
 Objective Physics
12. A beam of protons enters a uniform magnetic
 o i  3 2  o i  3 2
field of 0.3 T with a velocity of 4  105 m / sec in (1)    (2)   
a direction making an angle of 600 with the 4  2a b  4  4a b 
direction of magnetic field, the pitch of the helix
 o i  3 1  oi  1 1 
will be (3) 2   4a   (4) 
 2b  4  a b 
(1) 4.7m (2) 0.47m (3)0.047m (4) 0.0047 m
13. A uniform conducting wire ABC has a mass of 17. Three very long straight conductors are
10g. A current of 2A flows through it. the wire arranged parallel to each other in a plane and
is kept in a uniform magnetic field B = 2T. The have resistances in the ratio 1:2:3. They are
acceleration of the wire will be connected in parallel to a battery of negligible
internal resistance such that the currents in all
three wires are in the same direction. The
distance between the first two conductors is x
and the distance between the second and third
conductors is y. If the middle conductor is in
(1) Zero (2) 12 ms-2 along y-axis
equilibrium, the ratio x : y is
(3) 1.2  10 3 ms 2 along y-axis
(4) 3 2 along y-axis (1) 1 : 3 (2) 3 :1 (3) 1: 3 (4) 3 :1
0.6  10 ms
14. Two long parallel wires are separated by a 18. A non conducting disc of radius R, charge q is
distance of 2 m. They carry a current of 1A rotating about an axis passing through its centre
each in opposite direction. The magnetic and perpendicular to its plane with an angular
induction at the midpoint of a straight line velocity  charge q is uniformly distributed
connecting these two wires is over its surface. The magnetic moment of the
-7
(1) zero (2) 2x10 T disc is
(3) 4x10-5 T (4) 4x10-7 T
15. A rectangular coil of wire carrying a current is 1 2 1
(1) q R (2) q R
suspended in a uniform magnetic field. The 4 2
plane of the coil is making an angle of 30° with 1 2
the direction of the field and the torque (3) q R (4) q R
2
experienced by it is  1 and when the plane of
19. A hollow sphere has charge ‘q’ which is
the coil is making an angle of 60° with the
uniformly distributed over its surface and
direction of the field the torque experienced by
rotationg about its diameter with angular
it is  2 . Then the ratio  1 :  2 is
velocity ‘  ’. The magnetic moment of the
(1) 1 : 3 (2) 3 :1 (3) 1 : 3 (4) 3 : 1
sphere is
16. The magnetic induction at O due to a current
in conductor shaped as shown in fig. is qr 2 qr 2 2
qr 2
(1) (2) (3) qr  (4)
2 3 4
20. A voltmeter of 250 mV range having a resis-
tance of 10 is converted into an ammeter of
250 mA range. The value of necessary shunt is
(nearly)
(1) 2 (2) 0.1 (3) 1 (4) 10

438 II PUC
Moving charges and Magnetism
21. A circular loop and a square loop are formed 25. Two wires A and B are of lengths 40 cm and
from two wires of same length and cross sec 30cm. A is bent into a circle of radiu s r and B
tion. Same current is passed through them. into an arc of radius r. A current i1 is passed
Then thhe ratio of their dipole moments is through A and i2 through B. To have the same
2 4 magnetic inductions at the centre, the ratio of
(1) 4 (2) (3) 2 (4) magnetic inductions at the centre, the ratio of
 
22. A long curved conductor carries a current I (I i1 : i2 is
us a vector). A small current element of length (1) 3 : 4 (2) 3 : 5 (3) 2 : 3 (4) 4 : 3
  
dl, on the wire induces a magnetic field at a 26. Dipole moment of a coil is 2i  3 j  5k. If the
point, away from the current element. If the coil is suspended in the uniform magnetic field
position vector between the current element and having magnitude 5 k T torque acting on it will
the point is r, making an angle with current be
element then, the induced magnetic field den (1) 35 (2) 117 (3) 25 (4) 135
sity; dB (vector) at the point is (  0 = permeabil 27. A circular coil having N turns is made from a
ity of free space) wire L meter long. If a current of I is passed
 0 Idl  r through this coil suspended in a uniform mag
(1) (perpendicular to the current ele-
4 r netic field of B tesla, the maximum torque that
ment dl)
can act on this coil =.....
 0 I  r  dl
(2)
4 r 2
( perpendicular to the current ILB BIL2 BIL2
(1) (2)zero (3) (4)
element dl) 2 N 4 N 8 2 N
0 I  dl 28. A galvanometer has a resistance of 400  . The
(3) (perpendicular to the plane contain- value of shunt so that its sensitivity is to be re
r
duced by 1/50 times
ing the current element and position vector r)
(1) 6.16  2) 7.16  3) 8.16  4) 9.16 
0 I  dl 29. A galvanometer of resistance 20  is to be
(4) (perpendicular to the plane con-
4r 2 shunted so that only 1% of the current passes
taining current element and position vector r) through it. Shunt connected is
23. A proton, a deutron and an  - particle having (1) 99/20  (2) 9/20 
the same momentum, enters a region of uni- (3) 20/99  (4) 2/99 
form electric field between the parallel plates 30. A galvanometer of coil resistance 100  is
of a capacitor. The electric field is perpendicu- connected to a shunt of resistance 10  . The
lar to the initial path of the particles. Then the current through the galvanometer is i1 , the
ratio of deflections suffered by them is current through the shunt is i2 and the total
(1) 1 : 2: 8 (2) 1 : 2 : 4 current into the combination is i3 , then the ratio
(3) 1 : 1 : 2 (4) None of these i 1 : i 2 : i 3 is
24. Two concentric coils of 10 turns each are placed (1) 1 : 10 : 11 (2) 10 : 1 : 11
in the same plane. Their radii are 20 cm and (3) 11 : 10 : 1 (4) 10 : 11 : 1
31. A voltmeter has an internal resistance of
40cm and carry 0.2 A and 0.3 A current re-
1000  and gives full scale deflection when 2
spectively in opposite directions. The magnetic
V is applied across the terminals. Now a
induction (in T) at the centre is
resistance of 4000  is connected in series with
3 5 7 9 it. Then it gives full scale deflection with
(1)  0 (2)  0 (3)  0 (4)  0
4 4 4 4 (1) 8 V (2) 10 V (3) 6 V (4) 4 V
II PUC 439
 Objective Physics
32. A galvanometer of resistance 25 ohm is 37. A current i  2 A be flowing in each part of a
connected to a battery of 2 V along with a wire frame as shown in fig. The frame is a
resistance in series. When the value of this combination of two equilateral triangles ACD
resistance is 3000  a full scale deflection of and CDE of side 1m. It is placed in uniform
30 units is obtained in the galvanometer. In magnetic field B=4T acting perpendicular to the
order to reduce this deflection to 20 units, the plane of frame. The magnitude of magnetic
resistance in series will be force acting on the frame is
(1) 4513 ohm (2) 5413 ohm
(3) 2000 ohm (4) 6000 ohm.
33. A voltmeter has range 0  V with a series
resistance R. With a series resistance 2R, the
range is 0  V'. The correct relation between
v and v' is
(1) v1=2v (2) v1>2v (1) 24 N (2) Zero (3) 16N (4) 8N
1
(3) v <2v 1
(4) v >>2v 38. Magnetic field induction t the centre of a circu-
34. A galvanometer has resistance G and Current lar coil of radius 5 cm and carrying a currnet
I g produces full scale deflection. S1 is the value 0.9 A is (in SI units) ( 0 = absolute permittivityy
of the shunt which converts it into an ammeter of air in SI units; velcity of light = 3 × 108 ms–1)
of range 0 - I and S 2 is the value of shurnt for 1 1016 0
(1) (4) 1016  0
the range 0 - 2I. The ratio of S1 and S 2 is 0 1016 (2) 0 (3)
1016
1  I  Ig  2I  I g 39. A circular loop of radius 20cm is placed in a
(1)   (2) 
2  2 I  ig  I  Ig uniform magnetic field B  2T in X-Y plane.
the loop carries a current 1A in the direction
(3) 1/2 (4) 2
shown in figure. The magnitude of torque
35. Three very long straight thin wires are
acting on the loop is nearly
connected parallel to each other through a
battery of negligible internal resistance. The (1) 0.25 N-m
resistance of the wires are 2,3 and 4 . The 0.25
ratio of distances of middle wire from the first (2) N-m
2
and third wires if resultant magnetic force on (3)0.75N-m
the middle wire is zero is
0.75
(1) 2 : 1 (2) 3 : 4 (3) 2 : 3 (4) 3 : 5 (4) N-m
2
36. PQ is a uniform rod of length  and mass m
40. Two long parallel conductors carry currents
carrying current i and is suspended in uniform
 i1  3 A and i2  3 A both are directed into the
magnetic field of induction B acting inward as
plane of paper. The magntidue of resultant
shown in figure. The tension in each string is
magnetic field at point ‘P; is

(1) mg  Bi (2) mg  Bi

mg  Bi mg  Bi
(3) (4) (1) 12 T (2) 5T (3) 13T (4) 7  T
2 2
440 II PUC
Moving charges and Magnetism
TASK - II 7. The number of turns per unit length of a long
1. Biot-Savart law indicates that the moving elec- solenoid is 10. If its average radius is 5 cm and
trons (velocity v) produce a magnetic field B such it carries a current of 10 A, then the ratio of
that flux densities obtained at the centre and at the
(1) B is perpendicular of v (2) B is parallel to v end on the axis will be
(3) it obeys inverse cube law (1) 1 : 2 (2) 2 : 1 (3) 1 : 1 (4) 1 : 4
(4) it is along the line joining the electron and 8. In a toroid the number of turns per unit length
point of observation 1
is 1000 and current through it is ampere.
2. When equal current is passed through two coils, 4
equal magnetic field is produced at their cen The magnetic field produced inside
tres. If the ratio of number of turns in the coils (in weber m 2 ) will be
is 8 : 15, then the ratio of their radii will be  1 10 2  2  10 3  3  10 4  4  10 7
(1) 1 : 1 (2) 15 : 8 (3) 8 : 15 (4) 1 : 2 9. A conducting circular loop of radius r carries a
3. The radius of a circular current carrying coil is constant current i. It is placed in uniform mag-
R. At what distance from the centre of the coil netic field B, such that B is perpendicular to the
on its axis, the intensity of magnetic field will plane of the loop. The net magnetic force act
1 ing on the loop is
be times that at the centre? (1) irB  2  2  riB (3) Zero  4   riB
2 2
10. A circular loop of radius R is kept in a uniform
3R R
(1) 2R 2  3 R  4 magnetic field pointing perpendicular into the
2 2 plane of paper. When a current I flows in the
4. A current i ampere flows in a circular arc of
loop, the tension produced in the loop is
3
wire which subtends an angle radian at its
2
center, whose radius is R. The magnetic field B
at its center is
0 i 30 i 3 0i 30 i
 1 2  3 4
R 2R 4R 8R
5. At what distance on the axis, from the centre
of a circular current carrying coil of radius r, BIR
 1  BIR 2 (3) 2BIR (4) Zero
the magnetic field becomes 1/8th of the mag 2
netic field at centre? 11. If two straight current carrying wires are kept
 1 2r  2  2 3/2 r  3  3r  4  3 2r perpendicular to each other almost touching,
then the wires
6. A current i flows in a thin wire in the shape of
(1) Attract each other (2) Repel each other
a regular polygon with n sides. The magnetic
(3) Remain stationary
induction at the centre of the polygon when
(4) Become parallel to each other
n   is (R is the radius of its Circumcircle)
12. Connecting wires carrying currents in opposite
0 ni  0 ni  directions are twisted together in using electri
 1 tan 2 tan
2 R 6 2 R n cal appliances in order to reduce
i (1) Electrical effect (2) Magnetic effect
3 0 (4) Zero
2R (3) Seebeck effect (4) Peltier effect
II PUC 441
 Objective Physics
13. A rectangular loop carrying a current i is situ 17. The force per unit length of two parallel con
ated near a long straight wire such that the wire ductors separated by r1 is 5  10 7 Nm1 . They
is parallel to one of the sides of the loop and is are moved closer so then the separation is r2
in the plane of the loop. If a steady current i is force per unit length is 8  10 7 Nm1 . The value
established in the wire,the loop will of r1 : r2 is
(1) 5:5 (2) 5 : 4 (3) 8 : 5 (4) 1 : 1
18. Choose the correct statement
(1) It is possible for a current loop to stay with
out rotating in a uniform magnetic field
(1) Rotate about an axis parallel to the wire (2) If a uniform magnetic field exists in a cubi-
(2) Move away from the wire cal region and zero outside then it is not pos
(3) Move towards the wire sible to project a charged particle from outside
(4) Remain stationary into the field so that it describes a complete circle
14. A wire carrying a current i is placed in a mag in the field
netic field in the form of the curve (3) A moving charged particle can be acceler-
ated by a magnetic field
x  (4) All of these
y  a sin   0  x  2 L. Force acting on the
 L  19. A charged particle enters a uniform magnetic
wire is field perpendicular to it. The magnetic field
(1) Increases the speed of the particle
(2) Decreases the kinetic energy of the particle
(3) Changes the direction of motion of the par
ticle (4) Both (1) & (3)
iBL
 1  2  iBL  3  2iBL  4  Zero 20. A neutron, a proton, an electron and an

  particle enters a uniform magnetic field
15. The magnetic field existing in a region is given
with equal velocities. The field is directed along
  x the inward normal to the plane of the paper.
by B  B0  1   k. A square loop of edge l and
 I Which of these tracks followed are by   par
carrying a current i, is placed with its edge par ticle.
allel to the x-y axes. Find the magnitude of the
net magnetic force experienced by the loop
1
 1 iB0 I  2  Zero  3  iB0 I  4  2iB0 I
2
16. Two concentric circular coils A and B have ra-
(1) A (2) B (3) C (4) D
dii 25 cm and 15 cm and carry currents 10A + + +2
21. Three ions H , He and O having same kinetic
and 15A respectively. A has 24 turns and B has
energy pass through a region in whcih there is
18 turns. The direction of currents are in oppo
a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to their
site order. The magnetic induction at the com
velocity, then :
mon center of there coils is
(1) H+ will be least deflected
(1) 120 0 T (2) 480  0 T
(2) He+ and O+2 will be deflected equally.
(3) 420  0 T (4)  0 T
(3) O+2 will be deflected most
(4) all will be deflected equally.
442 II PUC
Moving charges and Magnetism
22. A charged particle moves in a magnetic field 28. A rectangular coil of length 0.12 m and width
   
B  10 i with initial velocity u  5 i  4 j . The path 0.1 m having 50 turns of wire is suspended ver-
of the particle will be tically in a uniform magnetic field of strength
(1) straight line (2) circle 0.2 Weber/m2. The coil carries a current of 2
(3) helical (4) none A. If the plane of the coil is inclined at an angle
23. A proton and an   particle enter in a uniform of 30° with the direction of the field, the torque
magnetic field with the same velocity. The pe required to keep the coil in stable equilibrium
riod of rotation of the   particle will be will be
(1) four times that of the proton (1) 0.12 Nm (2) 0.15 Nm
(2) two times that of the proton (3) 0.20 Nm (4) 0.24 Nm
(3) three times that of the proton 29. A proton and an alpha particle both enter a re-
(4) same as that of the proton gion of uniform magnetic field B, moving at right
24. A proton, a deuteron and an  -particle are angles to the field B. If the radius of circular
accelerated by the same potential difference. orbits for both the particles is equal and the ki-
Their velocities will be in the ratio of netic energy acquired by proton is 1 MeV, the
(1) 1 : 2 :1 (2) 1 :1 : 2 energy acquired by the alpha particle will be
(1) 1 MeV (2) 4 MeV
(3) 2 : 1 : 1 (4) 1 : 1 : 1 (3) 0.5 MeV (4) 1.5 MeV
25. A changed particle would continue to move 30. Two identical long conducting wires AOB and
with a constant velocity in a region wherein, COD are placed at right angle to each other,
(a) E  0, B  0 (b) E  0, B  0 with one above other such that O is their com-
(c) E  0, B  0 (d) E  0, B  0 mon point for the two. The wires carry
(1) (a) & (b) are correct I 1 and I 2 currents, respectively. Point ‘P’ is lying
(2) (b) & (c) are correct at distance d from O along a direction perpen
(3) (a), (b) & (d) are correct dicular to the plane containing the wires. The
(4) All are correct magnetic field at the point P will be
26. A charged particle with charge q enters a re
gion of constant, uniform and mutually or-  I  
 1 0  1   2  0  I1  I2 
 
thogonal fields E and B with a velocity v per-
 2 d I
 2 2 d
 
pendicular to both E and B , and comes out   1/2
without any change in magnitude or direction 
 3  0 I 12  I 22
2 d
 4  0 I 12  I 22
2 d
 

of v . Then
31. A coil carrying electric current is placed in uni
 
  B   E form magnetic field
(1) v  E  2 (2) v  B 2
B B (1) torque is formed (2) E.M.F. is induced
  (3) both (1) and (2) are correct
  B   E (4) none of the above.
(3) v  E  2 (4) v  B  2
E E 32. The magnetic force acting on a charged par-
27. The oscillator frequency of a cyclotron is 10 ticle of charge 2 C in a magnetic field of 2 T
MHz. What should be the operating magnetic acting in y-direction, when the particle velocity
field for accelerating proton?  2i  3j   10 6
ms 1 , is :
(1) 0.156 T (2) 0.256 T (1) 4 N in z-direction (2) 8 N in y-direction
(3) 0.356 T (4) 0.656 T (3) 8 N in z-direction (4) 8 N in –z direction

II PUC 443
 Objective Physics
33. Two straight long conductors AOB and COD 38. A current i is flowing in a straight conductor of
are perpendicular to each other and carry length L. The magnetic induction at a point
currents i1 and i2 . The magnitude of the L
distant 4 from its centre will be
magnetic induction at a point P at a distance a
from the point O in a direction perpendicular 40i 0 i
(1) (2) 2L
to the plane ACBD is 5 L
  0i
(1) 20a (i1  i2 ) (2) 20a (i1  i2 ) (3) (4) Zero
2L
 2 2 1/2 0 i1i2
(3) 20a (i1  i2 ) 39. Two thick wires and two thin wires, all of the
(4) 2a (i  i )
1 2
same materials and same length form a square
 A long straight wire along the z-axis carries a
in the three different ways P, Q and R as shown
current I in the negative z direction. The
in fig with current connection shown, the
magnetic vector field  B at a point having
magnetic field at the centre of the square is zero
coordinates (x, y) in the z = 0 plane is
in cases
 o I (yˆi  xˆj)  o I (xˆi  yˆj)
(1) 2 (x 2  y 2 ) (2) 2 (x 2  y 2 )
P Q
 o I ( xˆj  yˆi )  o I ( xˆi  yˆj)
(3) 2 (x 2  y 2 ) (4) 2 (x 2  y 2 )

35. What will be the resultant magnetic field at

R
origin due to four infinite length wires. If each
wire produces magnetic field ‘B’ at origin (1) In P only (2) In P and Q only
Y
1 (3) In Q and R only (4) P and R only
i
x
i 4 2 40. A particle with charge q, moving with a
x i X momentum p, enters a uniform magnetic field
3
normally. The magnetic field has magnitude B
i
and is confined to a region of width d, where
(1) 4 B (2) 2B (3) 2 2 B (4) Zero
p
d , The particle is deflected by an angle 
36. The ratio of the magnetic field at the centre of a Bq
current carrying circular wire and the magnetic in crossing the field
field at the centre of a square coil made from    
   
the same length of wire will be  B
p    
2 2 q    
(1) (2) d
4 2 8 2    

  Bqd p
(3) (4) (1) sin  p (2) sin  Bqd
2 2 4 2
37. Two infinite length wires carries currents 8A Bp pd
and 6A respectively and placed along X and Y (3) sin  qd (4) sin  Bq
axis. Magnetic field at a point P (0, 0, d )m will be
7 10  0
(1) d0 (2) d
14  0 5
(3) d
(4) d0

444 II PUC
Moving charges and Magnetism
KEY V 150V 150V 3
TASK - I As n  V  75mV  75 103V  2  10
g
1 1 2 4 3 2 4 1 5 1
R  G  n  1  5  2  103  1
6 1 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4
11 4 12 3 13 2 14 4 15 2  5  2000  1  9995
16 1 17 2 18 1 19 2 20 3 2. (4) No work is done to rotate the loop about an

21 4 22 2 23 1 24 2 25 1 axis perpendicular to its plane as M is directed
26 2 27 3 28 3 29 3 30 1 along the axis. Work is done only when the
31 2 32 1 33 3 34 2 35 1 plane of the loop rotates.
36 3 37 1 38 1 39 1 40 3 3. (2)  B.dl   i  0  2  3  5  0
o
TASK - II 0 NI
1 1 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 3 4. (1) Field at the centre B1 
2r
6 3 7 2 8 3 9 3 10 1 Field at distance h from the centre
11 4 12 2 13 2 14 3 15 3 3
0 nir 2  h2  2

16 3 17 3 18 4 19 3 20 2 B 3/ 2
 B1 1  2 
2  r 2  h2   r 
21 2 22 3 23 2 24 3 25 3
26 1 27 4 28 3 29 1 30 4  3 h2  B 3 h 2
B  B1 1  2 
 
31 1 32 4 33 3 34 1 35 3  2r  B1 2 r 2
36 2 37 4 38 1 39 4 40 1 5. (1) M = niA
L
Hints and Solutions  nir 2  ir 2  M r
2r
TASK - I
M1 r1 1
 1mA    
1. (1) I g    150div   15mA M r 2
 10div 
6. (1) M  NI  r 2 ; l   2 r  N
 1mA 
Vg    150div   75mV  6.28  2  3.14  r  2
 2div 
1 1 
Vg  r  m  M  2  0.5   
75mV 2  4
G   5
Ig 15mA T1 m1 q2 m 2e 1 T 2
7. (4)      2 
(1) I ( current to be measured) T2 m2 q1 4m e 2 T1 1
 6A  1 2
  150div   900 A 8. (4) F  Bqv, mv  Vq
 div  2
I 900 A 900 A 4 2vq
As n  I  15mA  15 103 A  6  10 v  F  v  v  F 1  5F
g m
G 5 5 9. (4) V remains same in magnetude and hence
S    8.3  105 
 n  1  6 10  1 6 10
4 4 K 1  K ( F  V and V= constant)
(2) V ( voltage to be measured ) q2 B2 R2
10. (4) KE  ;If R = constant
2m
 1V 
  150div   150V KE  B 2  KE 1  64 KE
 div 

II PUC 445
 Objective Physics
r v B2 r V 4B r
11. (4) r  v  B 2    r2 
1 1 2

2 2 1 r2 2V B 2 i1 i2 i3
2m 2mv cos 
12. (3) p  v cos  T ; T   p 17. (2)
B2 B22 F21 F23

13. (2)Force on the wire F  Bil  2  2  3  102 y

2
f 12 10 V 1
a   12m / s along y-axis R1 : R2 : R3  1: 2 : 3 ; i  i
m 10 103 R R
perpendicular to left = AC
B1 0i1i2l  0i2i3l x i R 3
 F21  F23 ;    1  3 
2x 2y y i3 R1 1
 B2
14. (4) qvr qmvr q q
18. (1) M     L    I 
r r 2 2m 2m 2m
2 2

0i  0i mR 2
B  B1  B2   I about an axis passing through center
2  r / 2  2  r / 2  2

2  4107  1 q  MR 2  qwR 2
  4 10 7 T
 2 &  to plane M   w 
2m  2  4
1 cos 1 3
15. (2)   BAIn cos     q 3
2 cos 2 1 19. (2) M   I  where I  mR 2
i 3 2m 2
2 450
0
90 450
q 2 qR 2 
for hollow sphere M  mR 2   .
1 900 4
2m 3 3
16. (1) 5 3
20. (3) Vg  Gig  250  10  10  ig ,
3

2
ig  25 103 A

 0i  i  3  3 i G 10 10
B1      40r  2  ; B1  0 , S  3
   1
4r   8a i 250  10 9
1 3
1
ig 25  10
B2  0 ,
i   l 2 
B3  0  cos 1  cos 1    
4r M 1 1r 2 2
 2     2  16 4
21. (4) M 2 ia  l    2 
oi  1  oi    4 
B3   0   ; B5  0  4 
4b  2  4 2b

B  B1  B2  B4  B5  0 I  r  dl
22. (2) The magnetic field dB 
4r 2
30i  20i   i  3 2 23. (1) The deflection suffered by charged particle
 0   0  o   
8a  4 2b  4  2a b  in an electric field is

446 II PUC
Moving charges and Magnetism
qELD qELD qm G 400 700
y 2
 2  p  mu   y  2 28. (3) S     8.16
m p /m p n 1 50  1 49
q p m p qd md q m G 20 20
 y p : y d : y  : 2 : 2 S  
i
p 2p pd pa 29. (3)  1 100  1 99
ig
Since, p : pd : p p (given)
 S   G 
m p : md : m  1: 2 : 4 and q1 : qd : q  1:1: 2 30. (1) ig    I and is   I
GS  GS 
 yb : yd : y  1 1:1 2 : 2  4  1: 2 : 8
i1 : i2 : i3  I g : I s : I
24. (2) Two coils carry currents in opposite direc-
tions, hence net magnetic field at centre will be S G 10 100
 : :1  : :1  1:10 :11
difference of the two fields. GS GS 110 110

o i i  V  V 
i.e., Bnet  .2N  1  2  31. (2) R  G  V  1  ; 4000  1000   1
4  r1 r2   g  2 

10 0  0.2 0.3  5  V  10V

   0 32. (1) If each division gives a current x then
2  0.2 0.4  4
i1  30 x, i2  20 x
0i1 40 V i G  R2 30 x 25  R2
25. (1) For wire A, B1  where, r  i  1   
2r 2 GR i2 G  R1 20 x 25  R1
For wire B, Circumference = length nr  30
 75  3R1  50  2 R2
30 30 3 3
n     or   n   9025
r 40 / 2 2 2 3  3000  25  2R2 ; R2   4513
2
 0  i2 
 B2     But, B1  B2 ; V 
4  r  R    1 G
 Vg 
  V  1  2  V  1
1

0i1 0  i2  i1 3  
33. (3) V1  Vg Vg ;
   ; i  4 2 R    1 G 
2r 4   r  2 V 
 g 
i j k
   V 1 2V
  1
  MB  2 3 5     Vg Vg  V 1  2V
26. (2)   9i  6 j  0 k ;
0 0 3 34. (2)
 G GI g S1 I 2  I g
| | 81  36  117 S    2I  I g
I  I  Ig S2 I1  I g 
L   1 I  Ig
27. (3) L  2 RN  R   I0 
2 N
 L2 L2 35. (1) As the wires are parallel,
2
 A R   1 1 1
2 2 N 2 4 N I1 : I 2 : I 3  : :  6: 4:3
maximum torque due to current passing 2 3 4
Force between first second & second, third wires
NIB.L2 BIL2 are equal
through coil is,  = NIAB  
4 N 2 4 N
II PUC 447
 Objective Physics
F 0 I1 I 2  0 I 2 I 3  r1  I1  6  2  0i1 4 101  3

l 2 r 2r2 r2 I 3 3 1 B  B  B ; 1 2r  2 5  102
B 2
1
2
2
1

T T  1.2  105  12  106 T

Fm
36. (3)  oi2 4 107  3
B2   6
mg
2r2 2 12 102  5  10
2T  Fm  M g  2T  ilB  mg
2

T 
mg  ilB B  B12  B22  144  25  106  
2
 13  106  13T
B i TASK - II
1. (1) Biot-Savart’s law in terms of velocity &
37. (1)  
i
  o q (v  r )
charge is given by dB 
4 r3
leff  CD ; ieff  3i cross product of two vectors so B  v

F  leff ieff B  3i  CD  B  3i  2 1 4   24 N 0 n1 i 0 n2 i n1 8 r1

2. (3) B1  B2 ;   
38. (1) Magnetic field induction at the centre of cir 2r1 2 r2 ; n2 15 r2

0I 0 iR 2 1 0i
cular coil B  ....(i) 
2r 3. (3) 2 R 2  x 2 3/2 2 2 2R ;
 
1 1
c2   0  3/2
 0 0  0c2 2 2R 3   R 2  x 2  ;
2 /3

So, B 
1 I  1
2

0.9
2
2 2  R2  R 2  x 2
 0 c 2 2r 0   3  10  2  5  10
8

x2  2 R2  R 2  R 2  x  R
1 9 1
 16
 0 i  3  3 0 i
0  9  10 0  1016 4. (4) B   
2 R  2  2   8R
39. (1)   NiAB sin  cos  ,
5. (3)
2 2
N  1, A  r , r  20  10 m , 1 0 i 0 Ir 2 3/2
  r 2  x2   8r 3
L  1A, B  2T , V  0 8 2r 2  r 2  x 2 3/2
as plane & B are in XY plane   0
2 /3
  r 2  x 2    8r 3   r 2  x 2  4r 2
  11 r    2 1   400 10
2 4
2
2
 3 r2  x2  x  r 3
 3.14 10  2  0.25 N / m
6. (3) For regular polygon having n sides where n
B2 0i
B1
  will be almost a circle, So B 
2R
40. (3) i1  3 A , i2  3 A ;   0 ni
7. (2) Bcentre  0 ni n  10 ; Bend  ;
2
448 II PUC
Moving charges and Magnetism
 Fnet  F2  F1  iI  B2  B1   iI  2 B0  B0   iIB0
Bcentre  ni 2
  0 
Bend  0 ni  1
 
 2 
1
8. (3) n = 1000, I  A;
4
1
B  0 ni  4  10 7  1000   ; 16. (3) In the two coils the currents are in opposite
4
direction, so the magnetic fields produced by
4
B  10 T  the two coils are in opposite direction.
9. (3) Net force on a closed loop in uniform mag If ‘B’ is the magnetic induction at the common
netic field will always be zero. cen tre of the coils, then
10. (1)  I  dI  B  2T sin  ; I  dI  B  2T  in ni
B  B1 ~ B2  0 1 1 ~ 0 2 2
2r1 2r2
I  R  2  B  2T  ; T = BlR
  10  24 0  15  18
 0 ~  420 0T
2  25  10 2 2  15  10 2
17. (3) We know that force per unit length on con
F  0 i1 i2
ductor, 
l 2 r
From the above expression we can write
7
F 1  F1 /l  r2  r1  F2 / l  8  10  8

l r F2 /l r1 r2 F1 /l 5  10 7 5
11. (4) 18. (4)
 
19. (3) Magnetic force F  V

Due to wire AB, wire CD will experience torque  No work is done by magnetic field so speed
due to which it will become parallel to AB. and kinetic energy cannot be changed by mag-
12. (2) netic field but it can deflect the particle.
m mP me 4mP
20. (2) R  ; RP : Re : R = : : .
q q q 2q

mv
R = qB   particle has maximum R,
13. (2)
so the path followed is B.
21. (2) KEH = KEHe = KEO
  2

Force on AB and CD will be zero and for AD

and BC 2K mv 2Km
velocity of a particle = ;R= = ;
F1  F2  Loop moves away from wire. m qB qB

14. (3) I  2 L ; Now, using F = iIB  i  2 L  B M
As K & B are constant R 
q
  x
15. (3) B  B0  1  k 1 4 16
 I RH : RHe : R0 = : : ;
1 1 2
at x  0, B1  B0 k at x = l, B2  2 B0 k R He  : R O2 = 1 : 1

II PUC 449
 Objective Physics
22. (3) Path of particle will be helical 28. (3) Torque on coil   nIAB sin 60 o ;

3
  50  2   0.12  0.1   0.2  ;
2
  0.20 Nm

2mE rp mp q p Ep
23. (2) Time period T   2  r / v    2  m / q B 29. (1) r  ; 
qB r m q E
T1 m1 q 2  q  m2 
   or T2  T1   1  Ep Ep
T2 q1 m2  q 2  m1   1  1
E E
 1  1 30. (4) Since the wires are perpendicular, their
or T2  T1        2 T1
2 4 magnetic fields also are perpendicular. So the
 q p  2 q e and mp  4 me resultant field will be pythagoras of both the
24. (3) We know that velocity, fields.
31. (1) A current carrying coil has magnetic dipole
2e V e
v  or v  V is cons tant  moment. Hence a torque acts on it in magnetic
m m
field.
e e 2e 
B  2T j , V  2i  3j  10  
v1 : v2 : v3  : : 6
32. (4) q  2 C
m 2m 4m
 
1:
1
:
1
 2 :1:1 
F  2 C V  B ; 
2 2
25. (3) The Lorentz force is experienced by the single  i j k 
 
moving charge in space with some uniform elec F  2  10 6  2 3 0  106  8k
tric and magnetic fields is given by  0 2 0
F  qE  q( v  B) .  
B2
Here, force on changed particle due to electric P B1
a
A
field FE  qE. 33. (3) i 1
C D
Force on charged particle due to magnetic field, B
O i 2

Fm  q( v  B) At P : Bnet  B12  B 22
Now, FE  0 if E=0 and Fm  0 if sin   0 or
   0 or 180 2
  2i    2 i 
2
0 2 2 1/2
  0 1   0 2   (i1  i2 )
hence, B  0. Also, E = 0 and B = 0 and the re-  4  a   4  a  2 a
sultant force q E  q( v  B)  0 . In this case 34. (1)Magnetic field at P is B , perpendicular to

26. (1) As v of charged particle is remaining con OP in the direction shown in figure.
stant, it means force acting on charged partical Y
is zero. So, P B sin
 
       ExB
r
 B
q(vx B)  qE  vx B  E  v B cos
B2 y

19 X
qB  10  10 6  1.6  10  B x
27. (4) f  2  1.6  10 27 
 I
2 m So, B  B sin ˆi  B cos  ˆj ; where B  20 r
= 0.656 T
450 II PUC
Moving charges and Magnetism
y x 0 2 5 0
sin   & cos   r    10 
r 4 d d

 I 1  I(yˆi  xˆj)
 B  2  r 2 (yˆi  xˆj)  2 (x 2  y 2 ) (as r 2  x 2  y 2 )
0 0
L
L/2 5
4
35. (3) Direction of magnetic field (B1, B2, B3 and 
P
B4) at origin due to wires 1, 2, 3 and 4 are shown 38. (1) L/4

By using
in the following figure. L/2

0 2i
B1  B 2  B3  B 4  .  B.
4 x
0 i 0 i
So net magnetic field at origin O B . (sin 1  sin 2 )  B  . (2 sin  )
4 a 4  (L / 4 )
Bnet  ( B1  B3 ) 2  ( B2  B4 ) 2
L/2 2 4 0 i
Also sin    B
5 L
5L / 4 5
 (2 B) 2  (2 B) 2  2 2 B
1 39. (4) In P and R loops, currents are divided in
i 2
i i same proportion because the branches have
B4
B2
O B3 B1
equal resistance. Hence magnetic field
produced at centre due to each segment is of
4 i
3 equal magnitude but of opposite direction, so
36. (2) Circular coil & Square coil net field is zero.
i
i

i B=0 B0 B=0

r 45o
O
45o r v


i a/2
a 40. (1) q
Length L = 2 r Length L = 4a
d
Magnetic field at the centre of circular coil
d
 2i  4 2 i From figure it is clear that sin   r
Bcircular  0 .  0 .
4 r 4 L
p Bqd
Magnetic field at the centre of square coil also r  qB  sin   p
 0 8 2 i  0 32 2 i circular B 2
B square  .  . Hence B 
4 a 4 L square 8 2

37. (4) Magnetic field at P due to wire 1,

***
 0 2 (8 )
B1  .
4 d
P (0, 0, d) Y
B2
B1 
6A
X
8A 
 2 (6 )
and due to wire 2, B2  4 0 . d

2 2
  16    12 
 Bnet  B12  B22   0 .    0 . 
 4 d   4 d 

II PUC 451
 Objective Physics

CHAPTER Magnetism & matter

Current loop as a magnetic dipole and its magnetic dipole moment.

5
Magnetic dipole moment of a revolving electron. Magnetic field intensity due
to a magnetic dipole (bar magnet) along its axis and perpendicular to its axis.
Torque on a magnetic dipole (bar magnet) in a uniform magnetic field; bar
magnet as an equivalent solenoid, magnetic field lines; Earth’s magnetic field
and magnetic elements.Para-, dia-and ferro-magnetic substances, with examples.
Electromagnetic and factors affecting their strengths. Permanent magnets.

PAST NEET PAPERS SUBTOPIC LEVEL ANALYSIS

NEET 2016 NEET 2016 Forecasting of
Year NEET 2018 NEET 2017
PHASE-I PHASE-II NEET-2019

No of
question 0 2 1 1 2
Asked
workdone on a curie law &
magnetic workdone on a
Subtopic - magnetic dipole & properties of
dip relation susceptibity magnetic dipole
ferromagnetic

 A magnet has two poles north & south poles. It attracts some substances like iron, cobalt, nickel etc.
Unlike poles of magnets attracts each other & like poles of the magnets are repels each other. Attrac-
tion will be maximum at free ends of the magnet are called poles of a magnet.

N S N
S

Bar Magnet with clinged iron filings

Types of Magnet:
 Natural magnets: The magnet which is found in nature is called a natural magnet Eg: magnetite.
 Fe2O3  . Generally they are weak magnets.
 Artificial magnets: The magnets which are artificially prepared are known as artificial magnets.
These are generally made of iron, steel and nickel.
 When a magnet is freely suspended it comes to rest in north-south direction. Artificial magnets are
of different shapes like bar magnet, magnetic needle horse shoe magnet etc.
 The magnetic field is the space around a magnet within which its effect can be experienced.
 The SI unit of magnetic field is Tesla (T). 1 Tesla = 10–4 gauss, 1 gauss = 10–4 weber/m2 & 1 Tesla =
1 ampere /metre.
 The magnetic field may be uniform or non uniform, The magnetic field in a region is uniform if it has
same strengths at all the points. Earth, solenoid are examples for uniform magnetic field.
 The magnetic field in a region is non uniform if it has lift strength at different point in the regions.Bar
magnet is example for non uniform magnetic field.
Properties of magnetic field lines
 They are used to represent magnetic field in a region.
 They are closed continuous curves.
 Tangent drawn at any point gives the direction of magnetic field.
452 II PUC
Magnetism & Matter
 They can not intersect.
 Out side a magnet, they are directed from north to south pole and inside a magnet they are
directed from south to north.
B

S N

B
Magnetic Pole Strength
 It is represented by m. Its unit is A-m. It is equivalent to charge in electrostatics. When a magnetic

pole m is kept in magnetic field B, it experiences a force mB .
 
 Magnetic Flux :   B.d s . Total number of field lines crossing a surface in a direction normal to

it.
 
 Gauss Law :    B.d s  0 . Total flux linked with a closed body is zero. Reason as magnetic
s

monopoles do not exist, therefore total flux linked with a body is always zero.
MAGNETIC DIPOLE MOMENT: A magnetic dipole consists of a pair of magnetic poles of equal and
opposite strength separated by small distance. Ex. Magnetic needle, bar magnet, solenoid, coil or
loop.
 Magnetic moment of Bar magnet
Neutral point A
Magnetic -m +m
axis

S  N Cross sectional
0 view
It is an axial vector
M= m 
2
S.I. unit : - A.m
 The magnetic moment of a bar magnet is defined as a vector quantity having magnitude equal to the
product of pole strength (m) with effective length (l) and directed along the axis of the magnet from
south pole to north pole.
 M  m  2l where ‘m’ is pole strength.

B


Equatorial line or
0 M 2
for a short
B= 3 3cos  + 1 dipole only
Broad side on 4 r
position
0 M tan  = ½ tan 
B=
4 (r2 +l )
2 3/2
r r Angle between M and B is  + 
0 M
Bshort = 4 3
r

 P (axial line or
S M N end on position)
0 2Mr
2l B=
4 (r2 – l2)2
r
 0 2M
Bshort =
4 r3
II PUC 453
 Objective Physics
 B axial is parallel to M .  B equatorial is antiparallel to M .

1 1
 B  M when  +  = 90° i.e.,  = 90° – ; as tan   tan   cot   tan  or tan   2 .
2 2
TORQUE ON A BAR MAGNET IN MAGNETIC FIELD B
 = mB × 2l sin mB
N
= m × 2l × B sin 2l
 = MB sin
S 
 Results : mB
   M  B max = MB [when = 90°], min = 0 [when  = 0 or 180°]
 Net force is zero.
 U = –M.B; Umin = –MB at  = 0° & Umax = MB at  = 180°
 Work done in rotating bar magnet from angular position 1 to 2 is
 mB  cos  1  cos  2   mB  cos  2  cos  1  ; W  mB  1  cos  
 A bar magnet kept in a non-uniform magnetic field may experience a net force and also a torque.
ATOMIC MAGNETISM
 An atomic orbital electron, which doing bounded uniform circular motion around nucleus. A current
constitues with this orbital motion and hence orbit behaves like current carrying loop. Due to this
magnetism produces at nucleus position. This phenomenon called as 'atomic magnetism.

mv2 kze 2  h 
Bohr's postulates : (i) = 2 (ii) L = mvr = n  2   , where n = 1, 2,3 .......
r r  
Basic elements of atomic magnetism : v
ACW
+Ze
r  e
–

e ev e Fe
 Orbital current :- I  ef   
T 2 r 2 I(current)

 Magnetic induction at nucleus position :- As circular orbit behaves like current carrying loop, so
0 ef 0 e 0 ev 0 e 
magnetic induction at nucleus position BN =  0 I ; B N    
2r 2r 2 Tr 4 r 2 4 r
 Magnetic moment of circular orbit :- Magnetic dipole moment of circular orbit M = IA
er 2 evr e r 2
where A is area of circular orbit. M  ef  r 2    
T 2 2
Relation between magnetic moment and angular momentum of orbital electron
evr m eL
Magnetic moment M =   (angular momentumL = mvr)
2 m 2m

 eL  
Vector form M  . For orbital electron its M and L both are antiparallel axial vectors.
2m
BOHR MAGNETON (B) : According of Bohr's theory, angular momentum of orbital electron is given by
nh
L= , where n = 1, 2, 3 ........ and h is plank's constant.
2
eL eh
Magnetic moment of orbital electron is given by M = =n
2m 4 m
eh
 If n = 1 then M = , which is Bohr magneton denoted by B
4 m

454 II PUC
Magnetism & Matter
Oscillations of a Bar Magnet in Magnetic Field
 For small displacements from equilibrium position, bar magnet oscillates simple harmonically such
that
B


MB I
Angular frequency   ; Time period T  2
I MB

Some important cases are given below “

 A bar magnet of length L is,
L/2 L/2

-1
se
ca T  = T/2 T  = T/2
ca
se L
-2 I
 Cut into two halves where T  2
T=T MB

T=T
A/2
 Two bar magnets having magnetic moments M1, M2 and moment of inertias I1, I2 are joined as
shown. I1
M1

M2
1 I I
2
(a) T1  2 (M  M )B I1
1 2 I2
M1

I1  I 2 T22  T12 M1 M2
(b) T  2 
(M1  M 2 )B  T22  T12 M 2
2
I2
Terrestrial magnetism(Geo-Magnetism):
 The branch of physics dealing with the study of magnetism of the earth is known as terrestrial mag
netism.
Geographical North pole

Magnetic south pole Geographical axis or axis

of rotation or polar axis

Geographical
equator Geographic meridian
S

 BH
N BV
Magnetic
B meridian
Magnetic
Magnetic
equator
north pole
Geographical
south pole
Magnetic axis
The basic components of earth’s magnetic field at a place are shown
  = Angle of declination  = Angle of dip
 BH = B cos   BV = B sin   BH2 + BV2 = B2
BV
 tan  
BH
II PUC 455
 Objective Physics
 Apparent dip : In a vertical plane inclined at an angle  to the magnetic meridian, vertical
component of earth’s magnetic field remains uncharged while in the new inclined plane horizontal
s 1
co Apparent angle
BH
 BH of dip =  1

= True dip

BV tan  BV B
component. tan 1  (apparent dip); tan 1 
BH cos 1 cos 

 Magnetic Materials
 The property of magnetism is materials is on account of magnetic moment in the material.
PARA, DIA AND FERROMAGNETIC SUBSTANCES
 All the elements of the nature are studied under the action of magnetic field, and then classified
into three parts according to following properties.
 Magnetic Intensity (Magnetising Force) : H  Bo where B0 is magnetic field in vacuum
o
SI units = A/m
 Intensity of magnetisation : Magnetic moment developed/volume
M Pole strength  M  m  l 
I (Units A/m or oersted)  I   
V area  V  A  l 
 Magnetic Induction or Magnetic Flux Density (B) : Number of magnetic field lines crossing per
unit area normally through a magnetic substance. B = B0 + 0I
B0  applied magnetic field 
B = 0H + 0I  B = 0 (H + I)  
  0I  magnetic fielddue to magnetisat ion 
I
 Magnetic Susceptibility :  m  (no units) &
H
B
 Magnetic Permeability :    B = H
H
From above B = 0(H + I)  H = 0 (H + I)
 I
1 &  r  1  m where r = relative permeability.
0 H
Properties of Diamagnetic Substance
 Diamagnetism is universal property of the substances.
 m is small and negative
 r < 1.
I
 As  m   I is small and opposite to H.
H
 They are magnetised weakly and opposite to applied magnetic field.
 Magnetic field lines do not cross through diamagnetic materials.

N N S S
I

H

 When freely suspended, they align perpendicular to Bo .

456 II PUC
Magnetism & Matter

Bo
N S

axis
 They are repelled by magnetic field, so they move from stronger to weaker regions of magnetic
field.

N S

Some examples of diamagnetic substances are Cu, Zn, Bi, Ag, Au, Glass, NaCl.
Paramagnetic and Ferromagnetic Substances
 For paramagnetic, m is small and positive, r > 1.
 For ferromagnetic, m is large and positive, r >> 1.
 Both get magnetised in the direction of applied field.
 Magnetic field lines cross through them.

N S I N S

H
 When freely suspended, they align along the applied field.

Bo

N S

axis

 They are attracted by magnetic field, so they move towards stronger region of magnetic field.

N S

 Some examples are given below :

(a) Paramagnetic - Al, Na, Sb, Pt. (b) Ferromagnetic - Fe, Ni, Co
Curie Law
 Magnetic susceptibility of paramagnetic material is inversely proportional to its absolute
1 C
temperature.  m  or  m 
T T
Note: (a) Diamagnetic material is independent of temperature.
(b) Magnetic susceptibility of a ferromagnetic substance also decreases with increase in
temperature. At a particular temperature TC called ‘CURIE POINT’, a ferromagnetic substance is
converted into paramagnetic.

II PUC 457
 Objective Physics
 Variation of I with H
 Diamagnetic  Paramagnetic
I
H
H
I
 Ferromagnetic (Hysteresis)
OB = Retentivity (residual magnetism even after magnetising field is reduced to zero)
OC = Coercivity (reverse magnetic field required to reduce residual magnetism to zero)
Area ABCDEFA = Energy loss/cycle during magnetisation and demagnetisation.
I
A I
B

C
O H H
F

D E
Steel
(High coercivity, high retentivity) Soft iron
(Low coercivity, low retentivity)
 Note :
 Steel is used for making permanent magnets.
 Soft iron is used for temporary magnets (Electromagnet).

Ferromagnetic materials
Soft magnetic materials Hard magnetic materials
Low retentivity, low coercivity and small High retentivity, high coercivity and
hysteresis loss. suitable for making large hysteresis loss suitable for
electromagnets, cores of transformers etc. permanent magnet
Ex: Soft iron, (used in magnetic shielding) Ex: Steel, Alnico

458 II PUC
Magnetism and Matter
EXAMINATION CORNER

1. A 250-Turn rectangular coil of length 2.1 cm 4. The magnetic susceptibility is negative for:
and width 1.25 cm carries a current of 85  A (NEET-I 2016)
and subjected to a magnetic field of strength (1)diamagnetic material only
0.85 T.Work done for rotating the coil by 180° (2)paramagnetic material only
against the torque is (NEET-2017) (3)ferromagnetic material only
(1) 9.1  J (2) 4.55  J (4)paramagnetic and ferromagnetic materials
(3) 2.3  J (4) 1.15  J A: (1) Magnetic susceptibility  m is negative for
A: (1) W  MB  cso 1  cos  2  diamagnetic substance only
When it is rotated by angle 180º then 5. A bar magnet of length l, pole strength p and

W = 2MB; W = 2 (NIA)B magnetic moment m is split into two equal
l
= 2 × 250 × 85 × 10–6[1.25 × 2.1 × 10–4] × 85× 10–2 pieces each of length . The magnetic
2
= 9.1  J moment and pole strength of each piece is
2. If  1 and  2 be the apparent angles of dip ob- respectively..... & .....
served in two vertical planes at right angles to  
 P m m P 
each other, then the true angle of dip  is given (1) m , (2) , P (3) , (4) m , P
2 2 2 2
by (NEET-2017)
A: (2) If bar magnet having magnetic pole
(1) cot 2   cot 2 1  cot 2  2 strength p and length l is bisected in two equal
(2) tan 2   tan 2  1  tan 2  2 parts of length l/2, then each part act as an
independent magnet. However pole strength
(3) cot 2   cot 2 1  cot 2  2
of each of those remains unchanged while
(4) tan 2   tan 2  1  tan 2  2 magnetic dipole moment is halved.
A: (1) cot 2   cot 2 1  cot 2  2 6. If magnetic field at two points lying on equato
rial line and axis of small bar magnet are same
3. A bar magnet is hung by a thin cotton thread
then ratio of its distance from center of mag-
in a uniform horizontal magnetic field and is
net is
in equilibrium state. The energy required to ro
1 1
tate it by 60 0 is W. Now the torque required to (1) 2 3 (2) 2 3 (3) 3 (4)  3
2 2
keep the magnet in this new position is A: (4)Magnetic field on equator ilne of small
(NEET-II 2016) m
magnet B1  0 3
W 3W 2W 4 d1
(1) (2) 3W (3) (4)
3 2 3 Magnetic field on axis of small magnet
A: (2) W  PE  cos 1  cos  2  2 0 m  m 2 m
B2  3
, But B1  B2 0 3  0 3
PE 4 d2 4 d1 4 d2
W  PE  cos 0  cos 60 0  
2 d 13 1 d 1
 PE  2 W  3
  1  1 / 3  2 1 / 3
d2 2 d2 2
  PE sin   2 W sin 600  3W

II PUC 459
 Objective Physics
7. A bar magnet of length l and magnetic 10. A loop of radius 4 cm and 20 turns carries a
moment M is broken into two parts of length current 3 A. If it is placed in magnetic field of
in the ratio of 1 : 2. Both parts kept at 0.5 T, the potential energy of dipole in most
perpendicular to each other, the new stable position is in J.
magnetic dipole moment is (1) - 0.15 (2) 0.15 (3) -1500 (4) 1500
M M 5 M 5 5M A: (1) Here, m = NIA =NI r 2
(1) (2) (3) (4) 4  3014.8  114 Am 2
3 2 3 3  20  3  16  10  3.14
M Potential energy of dipole
M/3 U = -mBcos   3014.8  10 4  0.5  cos 
A: (3)
= -0.15072 = -0.15 J
2M/3
11. A bar magnet is held perpendicular to a uni-
2 2
M  2M  M 5 form field. How much angle by which it is
M      M 
 3  3  3 should be rotated so that the value of torque
8. Two magnets of magnetic moments M and becomes half of the original value of torque
M 3 are joined to form a cross (+). The (1) 30 o (2) 45o (3) 60 o (4) 75o
o
combination is suspended freely in a uniform A: (3) Initial torque  1  mB sin 90  mB
magnetic field. At equilibrium position, the Torque by deflection  2   1/2
magnet of magnetic moment M makes an mB
 mB sin  2  , sin  2  1 /2
angle  with the field, then  is 2
(1)60° (2)30° (3) 90° (4) 45° o
  2  30
B
MR
Magnet needs deflection
  900   2  900  300  600
M1
A: (1)  12. The     graph for a current carrying coil is

M2
  
M1 = M, M2  M 3 , MR  M1  M2
 
At equilibrium, MR is parallel to B .

tan   3    600 (1) (2)

9. A straight wire of length l and magnetic dipole
moment m is bent in form of a semi circle. Hence
new magnetic dipole moment is
m 2m 3m 4m
(1) (2) (3) (4)
   

A: (2) (3) (4)

A: (1)Torque on electrically charged coil is

  NIAB sin 
2 Pl 2 m The graph of    is like curve of sinq which
 m  P l  m'  P  2 r   
represents by graph A.
 
460 II PUC
Magnetism and Matter
13. A circular coil having 50 turns and radius 1
4  10 2 m carries a current of 2 A. It is placed (3) tan–1 (4) none
3
in uniform magnetic field of intensity of 0.1 tan 
2 The work done to rotate the coil from
A: (1) tan' = ; tan = tan'cos
Wbm . cos 
the equillibrium position by 180 o is in J. 1 1
= tan30°cos45° = ×
(1) 0.1 (2) 0.2 (3) 0.3 (4) 0.4 3 2
F I
A: (1) W  mB  1  cos   = NIAB (1 - cos180°)
= NIAB (1 + 1)
tan =
1
6
  = tan–1
1
6
GH JK
= 2NIAB = 2NI (  r2) B 17. The moment of inertia of magnetic needle is
= 2  50  2  3.14  (4  10-2)2  0.1= 0.1 J 8  10 6 Kgm 2 and its magnetic dipole moment
14. A plane of a dip circle is in the geographical is 10 1 Am 2 . The value of magnetic field if it per
meridian and the apparent angle of dip is 30°, if forms 10 oscillations in ten second is inTesla
dip circle is placed perpendicular to geographical (1) 3.15  10 3 (2) 1.35  10 3
meridian, the apparent angle of dip is 60°. The (3) 3.15  10 5 (4) 1.35  10 5
angle of declination at this place is I
A: (1) T  2
–1
(1)tan (2) (2)  1
tan   3 mB
 1 2
(3)tan –1(3)
1
(4) tan   4 2 I 4   3.14   8  10 6
3  B 2 
T m 12  10 1
BV
A: (4) tan 1   3.15  10 3 T
BH cos 
18. The period of oscillation of two magnets in the
BV same field are in the ratio of 2:1. If their mo-
 tan  2  ment of inertia are equal, the ratio of their mag
BH cos   Angle of declination
netic moments is
tan 1 1  tan 1 
 tan   = tan  ; (1) 1 : 2 (2) 1 : 4 (3) 2 : 1 (4) 4 : 1
tan  2  tan 2 
 1 
I I
A: (2) T  2 , T1  2
 1  tan30  
  1 mB m1 B &
= tan   = tan1  3  = tan1  
 tan60   3 3 
I T m1 B
15. The magnetic dip angle at two places are 30 o T2  2 , 2 
m2 B T1 m2 B
and 45o . Calculate ratio of horizontal compo
nents of earth’s magnetic field at the two places. 1 m1 m 1
   1 
(1) 3 : 2 (2) 1: 2 (3) 1: 2 (4) 1: 3
2 m2 m2 4
19. Rate of change of torque t with deflection  is
o
B h 1 B cos 30 3 /2 maximum for a magnet suspended freely in a
A: (1) B  B cos 45o   3: 2 
h2
1 uniform magnetic field of induction B when
2 (1)   0 (2)   45o
16. If the dip circle is set at 45° to the magnetic (3)   60 o (4)   90 o
meridian, then the apparent dip is 30°.
d
Calculate the true dip. A: (1)   mB sin    mB cos 
F1I d
(1) tan –1
GH 6 JK (2) tan –1
1
2  d 
  for maximum cos  1,    0
 d 
II PUC 461
 Objective Physics
20. A magnet freely suspended in a vibration mag 23. Two magnet of equal dipole moment are ar-
netometer is heated so as to reduce it.s mag- ranged perpendicularly at their center. The
netic moment by 36 % by doing this, its perrodic periodic time of oscillation of system at any-
time where on earth is T. Periodic time of each
(1) Increase by 36 % (2) Increase by 25 % magnet will be
(3) Decrease by 25 % (4) Decrease by 64 % 1 1 1
(1) 2T (2) 4 (3)  4 (4) 3
2 T 2 T 2 T
I 1
A: (2) T  2 T 
mB m I
A: (3) For each magnet T’ = 2
mBh
T2 m1
  m1  100 m2  100  36  64 Periodic time for mixture of both magnet
T1 m2
2I
T  2
T2 100 10 2mBh
   For maximum cos   1
T1 64 8
T, 2 1 1
 T2  1.25 T1 increment in periodic time is 25 %     1/4  T ,  2 1/4 T
T 2 2 2
21. Two magnet are held together and allowed to
24. A magnet of 1.2 Am 2 magnetic dipole moment
oscillate in earth’s magnetic field. With like
having dimension of 0.15 m  0.02 m  0.01 m.
poles together and unlike poles together peri-
odic time are 4 s and 6 s respectively. The ratio Then intensity of magnetization M is in Am 1 .
of their magnetic moment is (1) 10 4 (2) 2  10 4 (3) 4  10 4 (4) 8  10 4
(1) 6 : 4 (2) 30 : 16
m1 1.2
(3) 2.6 : 1 (4) 1.5 : 1 A: (3) m    4  10 4 Am 1
V 0.15  0.02  0.01
m1 T22  T12 6 2  4 2 52 2.6 25. A magnet has coercivity of 3  10 3 Am 1 . It is
A: (3)    
m2 T22  T12 6 2  4 2 20 1 kept in a 10 cm long solenoid with a total of 50
22. A bar magnet suspended in earth magnetic turns. How much current has to be passed
field and oscillating in horizontal plane with through the solenoid to demagnetize it ?
periodic time T. If a wooden bar having moment (1) 0.1 A (2) 0.6 A (3) 6 A (4) 10 A
of inertia equal to bar magnet is tied with bar N
magnet then periodic time of system will be A: (2) H  nI  l
l
T T T Hl 3  10 3  0.1
(1) (2) (3) 2T (4) I   0.6 A
2 3 2 N 50
I 26. The susceptibillity of a paramagnetic sub-
A: (3)Periodic time of magnet only, T = 2
mBh stance at 73 o C temperature is 6  10 3 then
T' the suseptibillity at 173 o C temprature will be
  2  T ,  2T
T (1) 1.2  10 2 (2) 1.8  10 3
Periodic time after wood contact (3) 3  10 3 (4) 4.5  10 3
2I 1 m T T
T ,  2 I 1 1
A: (1)  m  T    T   m2   m1 
2

mBh will change. M is constant. m1 2 T2

T, 273  73
  2  T ,  2T  6  10 3   1.2  10 2
T 273  173
462 II PUC
Magnetism and Matter
27. Coercivity of a magnet is 100 A/m. For
demagnetisation it is placed inside a solenoid
of length 200 cm of turns 50. The current
flowing through the solenoid is TASK - I
(1)4 A (2)2 A (3)8 A (4)6 A 1. An iron rod of length L and magnetic moment
A: (1)  H = ni M is bent in the form of a semicircle. Now its
H = Coercivity = 100 A/m magnetic moment will be
50 H 100
n=  25   i   =4A 2M M
2 n 25 (1) M (2) (3) (4) M
 
28. Correct graph for diamagnetic substance is
2. Magnetic intensity for an axial point due to a
m
m short bar magnet of magnetic moment M is

(1) T (2) T given by

0 M 0 M
(1)  (2) 
4 d3 4 d 2
m m
 0 2M  M
(3) 3 (4) 0  2
(3) (4) 2 d 2 d
T T 3. Points A and B are situated along the extended
axis of 2 cm long bar magnet at a distance x
A: (1)
29. The most appropriate magnetization M versus and 2x cm respectively. From the pole nearer
magnetising field H curve for a paramagnetic to the points, the ratio of the magnetic field at
substance is A and B will be
(1) 4 : 1 exactly (2) 4 : 1 approx.
(3) 8 : 1 exactly (4) 8 : 1 approx.
4. Ratio of magnetic intensities for an axial point
and a point on broad side-on position at equal
distance d from the centre of magnet will be or
(1) A (2) B (3) C (4) D The magnetic field at a distance d from a short
A: (1) bar magnet in longitudinal and transverse
1 positions are in the ratio
30. The   graph for an alloy of paramagnetic
T (1) 1 : 1 (2) 2 : 3 (3) 2 : 1 (4) 3 : 2
nature is shown in fig. The Curie constant is in 5. The pole strength of a bar magnet is 48 ampere-
K.
metre and the distance between its poles is 25
cm. The moment of the couple by which it can
be placed at an angle of 30o with the uniform
magnetic intensity of flux density 0.15 Newton
/ampere-metre will be
(1) 12 Newton × metre
(1) 57 (2) 67 (3) 77 (4) 97
(2) 18 Newton × metre
1  0.4
A: (1)   C ; C   57 K (3) 0.9 Newton × metre
T 1/T 7  10 3 (4) None of the above

II PUC 463
 Objective Physics
6. A magnet of magnetic moment 20 C.G.S. units 13. At a place, if the earth’s horizontal and vertical
is freely suspended in a uniform magnetic field components of magnetic fields are equal, then
of intensity 0.3 C.G.S. units. The amount of the angle of dip will be
o
w ork done in deflecting it by an angle of 30 in (1) 30 (2) 90 (3) 45 (4) 0°
C.G.S. units is 14. At a certain place, the horizontal component
B0 and the vertical component V0 of the earth’s
(1) 6 (2) 3 3 (3) 3(2  3) (4) 3
magnetic field are equal in magnitude. The total
7. A magnet of magnetic moment M is situated intensity at the place will be
with its axis along the direction of a magnetic
(1) B0 (2) B20 (3) 2B0 (4) 2B0
field of strength B. The work done in rotating it
by an angle of 180o will be 15. Two magnets of same size and mass make
(1) MB (2)  MB (3) 0 (4) 2MB respectively 10 and 15 oscillations per minute
8. A magnetic needle lying parallel to a magnetic at certain place. The ratio of their magnetic
field requires W units of work to turn it through moments is
60°. The torque required to maintain the needle (1) 4 : 9 (2) 9 : 4 (3) 2 : 3 (4) 3 : 2
in this position will be 16. The period of oscillation of a magnet in vibration
magnetometer is 2 sec. The period of oscillation
3 of a magnet whose magnetic moment is four
(1) 3 W (2) W (3) W (4) 2W
2
times that of the first magnet is
9. If a magnet of length 10 cm and pole strength
(1) 1 sec (2) 4 sec (3) 8 sec (4) 0.5 sec
40 A-m is placed at an angle of 45 o in an
17. Two normal uniform magnetic field contain a
uniform induction field of intensity 2  10–4 T,
magnetic needle making an angle 60° with F.
the couple acting on it is
(1) 0.5656  10–4 N-m (2) 0.5656  10–3 N-m F
Then the ratio of is
(3) 0.656  10–4 N-m (4) 0.656  10–5 N-m H
10. A magnet of magnetic moment 50 ˆi A-m 2 is (1) 1 : 2 (2) 2 : 1 (3) 3 :1 (4) 1: 3
placed along the x-axis in a magnetic field 18. A short magnetic needle is pivoted in a uniform
 magnetic field of strength 1 T. When another
B  (0.5iˆ  3.0ˆj) T. The torque acting on the
magnetic field of strength 3 T is applied to the
magnet is
needle in a perpendicular direction, the needle
(1) 175 k̂ N-m (2) 150 k̂ N-m deflects through an angle , where  is
(3) 75 k̂ N-m (4) 25 37 kˆ N-m (1) 30o (2) 45o (3) 90o (4) 60o
11. A bar magnet is held perpendicular to a 19. Two uniform magnetic field B and H are
uniform magnetic field. If the couple acting on perpendicular to each other at a place. When a
the magnet is to be halved by rotating it, then magnetic needle is placed in the field, it rest
the angle by which it is to be rotated is making 60 and 30 with B and H respectively.

(1) 30o (2) 45o (3) 60o (4) 90o The value of B : H is

12. Earth’s magnetic field always has a horizontal (1) 1 : 2 (2) 2 : 1 (3) 3 :1 (4) 1: 3
component except at or Horizontal component 20. Which of the following is most suitable for the
of earth’s magnetic field remains zero at core of electromagnets
(1) Equator (2) Magnetic poles (1) Soft iron (2) Steel
(3) A latitude of 60o (4) An altitude of 60o (3) Copper-nickel alloy
(4) Air
464 II PUC
Magnetism and Matter
21. If a diamagnetic substance is brought near 26. For an isotropic medium B, , H and M are
north or south pole of a bar magnet, it is related as (where B,  0 , H and M have their
(1) Attracted by the poles usual meaning in the context of magnetic
(2) Repelled by the poles material
(3) Repelled by the north pole and attracted by (1) (B  M)   0 H (2) M   0 (H  M)
the south pole (3) H   0 (H  M) (4) B  o (H  M)
(4) Attracted by the north pole and repelled by 27. The material of permanent magnet has
the south pole (1) High retentivity, low coercivity
22. The variation of magnetic susceptibility () with (2) Low retentivity, high coercivity
temperature for a diamagnetic substance is best (3) Low retentivity, low coercivity
represented by (4) High retentivity, high coercivity
28. A diamagnetic material in a magnetic field moves
(1) From weaker to the stronger parts of the field
(2) Perpendicular to the field
(1) (2)
(3) From stronger to the weaker parts of the field
(4) In none of the above directions
29. Domain formation is the necessary feature of
(1) Ferromagnetism (2) Paramagnetism
(3) Diamagnetism (4) All of these
(3) (4)
30. The magnetic susceptibility of a paramagnetic
susbtance at –73C is 0.0060, then its value at
23. A curve between magnetic moment and 173C will be
temperature of magnet is
(1) 0.0030 (2) 0.0120 (3) 0.0180 (4) 0.0045
TASK - II
1. When a piece of a ferromagnetic substance is
(1) (2) put in a uniform magnetic field, the flux density
inside it is four times the flux density away from
the piece. The magnetic permeability of the
material is
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
(3) (4)
2. The magnetic moment of a short bar magnet
placed with its magnetic axis at 30 to an
24. Relative permeability of iron is 5500, then its external field of 900 G and experiences a torque
magnetic susceptibility will be of 0.02 Nm is
(1) 5500  107 (2) 5500  10–7 (1) 0.35 A m 2 (2) 0.44 Am2
(3) 5501 (4) 5499 (3) 2.45 Am2 (4) 1.5 Am2
25. A paramagnetic substance of susceptibility 3  3. The torque and magnetic potential energy of a
104 is placed in a magnetic field of 4  104 Am1.
magnetic dipole is most stable position in a
Then the intensity of magnetization in the units 
of Am1 is 
 
uniform magnetic field B having magnetic
moment  m  will be
(1) 1.33  108 (2) 0.75  108
(1) mB, zero (2) mB, zero
(3) 12  108 (4) 14  108
(3) zero, mB (4) zero, mB
II PUC 465
 Objective Physics
4. The work done in moving a dipole from its most 11. Rate of change of torque  with deflection  is
stable to must unstable position in a 0.09 T maximum for a magnet suspended freely in a
uniform magnetic field is (dipole moment of this uniform magnetic field of induction B, when
2
dipole = 0.5 Am ) (1)   0 (2)   45 (3)   60 (4)   90
(1) 0.07 J (2) 0.08 J (3) 0.09 J (4) 0.1 J 12. The vertical component of earth’s magnetic field
5. A short bar magnet placed with its axis at 30 at a place is 3 times the horizontal component
with a uniform external magnetic field of 0.35 the value of angle of dip at this place is
T experiences a torque of magnitude equal to
(1) 30 (2) 45 (3) 60 (4) 90
4.5  102 J. The magnitude of magnetic moment
13. At a given place on earth’s surface the
of the given magnet is
horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field
(1) 26 JT1 (2) 2.6 JT1
is 2  105 T and resultant magnetic field is 4 
(3) 0.26 JT1 (4) 0.026 JT1
105 T. The angle of dip at this place is
6. A circular coil of 25 turns and radius of 12 cm
is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.5 T (1) 30 (2) 60 (3) 90 (4) 45
normal to the plane of coil. If the current in the 14. The temperature of transition from
coil is 5 A, then total torque experienced by the ferromagnetic property to paramagnetic
coil is property is called
(1) 1.5 Nm (2) 2.5 Nm (1) Transition temperature (2) Critical temperature
(3) 3.5 Nm (4) zero (3) Curie temperature (4) Triplet temperature
7. A bar magnet of magnetic moment 1.5 Am2is 15. At a certain place the horizontal component of
placed in a magnetic field of flux density 0.4 T earth’s magnetic field is B0 and the angle of dip
such that its axis is inclined at an angle 30 to is 45. The total intensity of the field at that
the field lines. The potential energy of magnet is place is
(1) –0.52 J (2) 0.52 J (3) –0.26 J (4) 0.26 J (1) 2 B0 (2) B0 (3) 2 B0 (4) 3 B0
8. A short bar magnet of magnetic moment 0.4
16. The earth’s magnetic field at a certain place has
JT–1 is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.16
a horizontal component 0.3 Gauss and the total
T. The magnet is in stable equilibrium when the
strength 0.5 Gauss. The angle of dip is
potential energy is
3 3 4 3
(1) –0.064 J (2) zero (1) tan 1 4 (2) sin 1 4 (3) tan 1 3 (4) sin 1 5
(3) –0.082 J (4) 0.064 J
17. Identify the paramagnetic substance
9. A magnet of magnetic moment M is rotated
(1) Iron (2) Aluminium
through 360° in a magnetic field H, the work
(3)Nickel (4) Hydrogen
done will be
18. An example of a diamagnetic substance is
(1) MH (2) 2 MH
(1) Aluminium (2) Copper
(3) 2  MH (4) Zero (3) Iron (4) Nickel
10. A bar magnet of magnetic moment 104J/T is free 19. The true value of angle of dip at a place is 60o,
to rotate in a horizontal plane. The work done in the apparent dip in a plane inclined at an angle
rotating the magnet slowly from a direction
of 30o with magnetic meridian is
parallel to a horizontal magnetic field of 4×10–5 T
1 1
to a direction 60° from the field will be (1) tan (2) tan 1 (2)
2
(1) 0.2 J (2) 2.0 J (3) 4.18 J (4) 2  102 J
1  2 
(3) tan   (4) None of these
 3
466 II PUC
Magnetism and Matter
20. If the angles of dip at two places are 30o and 45o 26. Two bar magnets having same geometry with
respectively, then the ratio of horizontal magnetic moments m and 2m, are first placed
components of earth’s magnetic field at the two in such a way that their similar poles are on
places will be the same side. Its period of oscillation is T1. Now
the polarity of one of the magnets is reversed.
(1) 3 : 2 (2) 1: 2
The time period of oscillation now becomes T2.
(3) 1: 3 (4) 1: 2
Then
21. Time period in vibration magnetometer will be
(1) T1 < T2 (2) T1 > T2
infinity at
(1) Magnetic equator (2) Magnetic poles (4) T1 = T2 (4) T2 = T1
(3) Equator (4) At all places 27. For ferromagnetic material, the relative
22. A solenoid has a core of a material with relative permeability (r ) , versus magnetic intensity (H)
permeability of 500. The windings of the has the following shape
solenoid are insulated from the core and carry
a current of 2A. If the number of turns is 1000
per metre, the magnetisation is (1) (2)
(1) 7.78  105 Am1 (2) 8.88  105 Am1
(3) 9.98  105 Am1 (4) 10.2  105 Am1
23. A magnetising field of 2  103 Am1 produces a
(3) (4)
magnetic flux density of 8 T in an iron rod.
The relative permeability of the rod will be
28. The magnetic susceptibility of a paramagnetic
(1) 102 (2) 1 (3) 104 (4) 103
material at –73C is 0.0075, its value is –173C
24. A solenoid has core of a material with relative will be
permeability 500 and its windings carry a (1) 0.0045 (2) 0.0030
current of 1 A. The number of turns of the
(3) 0.015 (4) 0.0075
solenoid is 500 per metre. The magnetization
29. The magnetic susceptibility of a paramagnetic
of the material is nearly
substance at 173C is 1.5  102 then its value
(1) 2.5  103 Am1 (2) 2.5  105 Am1
at 73C will be
(3) 2.0  103 Am1 (4) 2.0  105 Am1
(1) 7.5  101 (2) 7.5  102
25. Point out the best representation of relation
between magnetic susceptibility () and (3) 7.5  103 (4) 7.5  104
temperature (T) for a paramagnetic material 30. Curie-Weiss law is applicable to
(1) ferromagnetic materials above curie
temperature
(1) (2) (2) ferromagnetic materials below curie
temperature
(3) paramagnetic materials above a certain
temperature
(4) paramagnetic materials at all temperatures
(3) (4)

II PUC 467
 Objective Physics
KEY  1
TASK - I = MB [cos 0  cos 60]  MB 1  
 2
1 2 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3
MB
6 3 7 4 8 1 9 2 10 2 W ;   MBsin 
2
11 3 12 2 13 3 14 4 15 1
3  3  MB 
16 1 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 1   MBsin 60  MB  ;  3W
2  2 
21 2 22 2 23 2 24 4 25 3
9. (2)  = MB sin  = (mL) B sin 
26 4 27 4 28 3 29 1 30 2
1
TASK - II  40  0.1 2  104  = 0.5656  103 Nm
2
1 4 2 2 3 4 4 3 5 3  
6 4 7 1 8 1 9 4 10 1 10. (2)   M  B

11 1 12 3 13 2 14 3 15 3      
 50iˆ  0.5iˆ  3jˆ  50  0.5 ˆi  ˆj  50  3 ˆi  ˆj
16 3 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 1
  150 kˆ Nm
21 2 22 3 23 3 24 2 25 1
26 1 27 4 28 3 29 3 30 4 11. (3)   sin 
Hints and Solutions  sin 90
1 sin 1 
TASK - I  ;  sin 2
 2 sin 2
1. (2) New magnet moment M = m  2R 2

L 2 2 1
m  2     m  L  ; M  M sin 2   2  30
   2
Angle of rotation = 90  30 = 60
0 2M
2. (3) Ba  12. (2) At magnetic poles, the angle of dip is 90.
4 d3
Hence horizontal component
3 3
BA  X B   2x  8 BH = B cos  = 0 ;  = 90
3. (3)       
BB  X A   x  1 13. (3) BH = BV
B cos  = B sin 
Baxial 2M / d 3 2
4. (3) B   tan  = 1;  = 45
equatorial M / d3 1
14. (4) Bnet  B2H  B2v  BH  BV  B0 ;
5. (3)  = MB sin = (m  L) B sin 
= 48  0.25  0.15  sin 30 Bnet  2 B0

= 48  0.25  0.15  0.5 = 0.9 N/M I T1 M2

15. (1) T  2 MB  T  M
6. (3) W = MBH (1  cos ) = 20  0.3 [1 – cos 30] H 2 1

 3  2 3  2
 20  0.3 1    20  0.3   M1 T22 F12  10  M1 4
2   2  2   ; 
  2  M 2 T1 F2  15  M 2 9

 
W  3 2  3 cas units T1 M2 M1
16. (1) T  M ; T2  M  2 = 1 second
7. (4) Work done = MB ( cos 1 - cos 2) 2 1 2

= MB [cos 0 – cos 180] H

17. (4) tan  
= MB [1 – (1)] = 2 MB F
8. (1) W = MB [cos 1  cos 2]

468 II PUC
Magnetism and Matter
 M = 0.44 Am2
 
3. (4)   m  B  MBsin  and U = MB cos 
180
F 1 1 1
  
H tan  tan 60 3 4. (3) W       d
0

 MB  cos 1  cos 2   0.5  0.09  2   0.09 J

18. (4) B2 = B1 tan 
 4.5 102
B 5. (3) M    0.26 JT 1
tan   2 ; tan   3 ;   60 Bsin  0.35  0.5
B1
6. (4)  = MB sin = NiA sin  = 25  5  3.14  12
19. (4) B = B0 cos 60; H = B0 cos 30
 12  104  sin 90 = 0
1
B 1 3
 2  7. (1) U  MBcos   1.5  0.4   0.52 J
H 3 3 2
2 8. (1) U = MB = –0.4  0.16 = –0.064 J

20. (1) Conceptual 9. (4) W  MB  cos  1  cos  2 

21. (2) Conceptual  1  0 o and  2  360 o
22. (2) For Diamagnetic material
 is independent of temperature
W 0
10. (1) Magnetic moment of bar M  10 4 J / T
1 1
23. (2)   ; M 
T T B  4  10 5 T
 Graph is rectangular hyperbola  
Hence work done W  M.B
24. (4) r = 5500 ;  = (r  1) = 5499
 10 4  4  10 5  cos 60 o  0.2 J
25. (3)   3  104
11. (1)  = MB sin 
I Rate of change of 
H = 4  104 Am1;  
H d
 MBcos 
I  H = 12  10–8 Am1 d
26. (4) B = B0 + BM = 0H + 0M
 d 
B = 0(H + M)     max imum
 d 
27. (4) From the characteristic of B-H curve
28. (3) Conceptual When MB cos  = Maximum
29. (1) Conceptual  = 0
1 12. (3) BV  3 BH
30. (2)  
T
 tan   3,   60
  73  273 
 2   1  1    0.0060 
200
 0.0060
T  173  273  100 BH 2 105 1
 2 13. (2)  cos     ,   60
B 4 105 2
 2  0.0120
14. (3) Conceptual
TASK - II
B
B BH B  0  2 B0
1. (4)  r  B  4 15. (3) BH = B cos  B  ; 1
0 cos  2
2. (2)  = MB sin = 0.02 = M  900  104 0.5

II PUC 469
 Objective Physics
16. (3) C 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 25. (1)   ; 
B  B  B  BV  B  B  (0.5)  (0.3)  0.4
V H H T T

BV 0.4 4 4 
Now tan        tan 1   . 26. (1) The time period of bar magnet T = 2
BH 0.3 3  3 mB

17. (2) Conceptual I

27. (4)  r  1  ; as we know I dependent on H,
18. (2) Conceptual H
' tan  I
19. (2) tan   ; initially value of is smaller so value of r
cos  H
increases with H but slowly but with further
where  ' =Apparent angle of dip,
I
 = True angle of dip,  =Angle made by increases of H value of also increases i.e. r
H
vertical plane with magnetic meridian.
increases speedily. When material fully
o
tan 60 magnetised I becomes constant then with the
 tan  '  o
 2   '  tan 1  2 
cos 30
I
BH1 cos 1 increase of H ( decreases) r decreases. This
H
20. (1) BH = B cos  ; B  cos 
H2 2 is confirm with the option (4).
I m2 T1 T 
3     ,   1 
28. (3) m
T  m1 T2
 2 3  T2 
1 ; B
2
2  73  273 
1     0.0075  0.015
 173  273 
I
21. (2) T  2 MB c 1 T2 T1
H 29. (3)   T    T ;  2  1 T ;
2 1 2
At poles BH = 0  T becomes infinity
T  173  273 
22. (3) H = nI = 1000  2 = 2000  2   1  1     1.5  102  7.5 103
 T2   73  273 
r = 1 + 
N = r  1 C
30. (4) X  T  T
c
= 499
I  H
= 499  2000 = 9.98  105 Am1 ***
 H B
23. (3)  r     H   H
0 0 0

8H 4  2 107
    104
 0  2 103  0  2 103 103
24. (2) Magnetic intensity , H = nI = 500  1
= 500 Am1
1 = 1 +    = r 1 = 499
I = H = 499 x 500 = 2.5 x 105 Am-1
470 II PUC
Electromagnetic Induction

CHAPTER Electromagnetic Induction

6 Electromagnetic induction; Faraday’s law, induced emf and current;

Lenz’s Law, Eddy currents. Self and mutual inductance.

PAST NEET PAPERS SUBTOPIC LEVEL ANALYSIS

NEET 2016 NEET 2016 Forecasting of
Year NEET 2018 NEET 2017
PHASE-I PHASE-II NEET-2019

No of
question 1 2 1 1 1
Asked
LR &LC circuit &
energy stored magnetic flux in emf induced in mutual
Subtopic charge in a
in an inductor solenoid a solenoid a circular loop induction

 Electromagnetic induction is the phenomenon in which an induced emf appears instantaneously in

a circuit when the magnetic field linked with it varies.
 Magnetic flux   :The magnetic flux linked through any surface placed in a magnetic field is the
number of mag netic field lines crossing this surface normally.

 
   B  dA  BA cos  where, Angle between  and  .
 B A

 Some cases :

   
Plane Perpendicular to B Perpendicular to B Angle  with B Parallel to B
 0   180 0     900
Magnetic flux   BA   BA   BA cos  0
Flux   Maximum Maximum
and positive and negative
     
  B  A  BA cos  where B =Magnetic field , A = area vector,  =Angle between A and B .
 If coil having N turns,   NBA cos
 If coil rotating is uniform magnetic field with constant angular speed then magnetic flux linked
with coil at time t,   NBA cos t.
II PUC 471
 Objective Physics
 Magnetic flux linked with current I carrying coil laying in uniform magnetic field   NBA cos t
Faraday’s Laws of Electromagnetic Induction
 An emf is induced in a loop when the number of magnetic field lines i.e., magnetic flux passing
through the loop is changing.
 Magnitude of the emf ‘e’ induced in a conducting loop is equal to the rate at which the magnetic
flux B through that loop changes with time.
d B
 e (for a loop), for a plane coil having N turns
dt
NdB d (N B )
e  where negative sign indicates opposition (explained by Lenz’s law).
dt dt
 N 1  2  NA  B2  B1 
e When varing magnetic flux. & e  When varing magnetic field.
t t
NBA  cos  2  cos  1 
e When changing in  .
t
   NBA cos t when coil or loop rotate with constant angular speed.
dA
 If only area A is changing, then   NB cos 
dt
dB
 If only magnetic field is changing, then   NA cos 
dt
d
 If only angle  is changing, then    NBA (cos t )   NBA sin t
dt
(Induced emf is in form of AC voltage).

LENZ’S LAW
 The flux of the magnetic field due to the induced current opposes the change in flux that causes
the induced current.
Application of Lenz’s Law

Motion Motion

S N N S N S N S
Repulsion Attraction

Induced Current Induced Current

Fig. 1 Fig. 2
 If loop ABCD is brought closed, anticlockwise current is induced. (Fig. 1)
 If ABCD is moved away, clockwise current is induced. (Fig. 2)

472 II PUC
Electromagnetic Induction

 If the coil move towards I current carrying straight infinite wire or I increasing with time then
induced current anticlock wise shown in figure.

 The coil is move away from wire or current I decreases with time, the induced current in
clockwise direction.
Two coils carrying currents I 1 and I 2 ,placed with their planes parallel and approach each other

shown in figure.

 (i) If I 1 and I 2 are both clockwise (or anticlockwise) thenboth I 1 and I 2 will decrease. If the
currents I 1 and I 2 are in opposite sense both the currents will increase.
 As shown, if magnetic field starts increasing, an anticlockwise current starts flowing. Due to this,
slider AB moves leftward.
B A
× × × × × × × × ×

× × × × × × × × ×
I (induced)
× × × × × × × × ×
R
× × × × × × × × ×

× × × × × × × × × conducting rail
B
slider

II PUC 473
 Objective Physics
METHODS OF INDUCING EMF AND APPLICATIONS × × × × ×
B (Varies with time)
 Methods of Inducing

EMF
 By Changing B
 = BA = B × R2 R
d dB dB
 R 2  e   R 2 × × × × ×
dt dt dt

(a) If B increases, current is in anticlockwise direction producing outward magnetic field.

(b) If B decreases, current is in clockwise direction.
 By Changing Area × × × ×
(a) Let area changes from A1 to A2 in time t B
1 = BA1
2 = BA2
( 2  1 ) r
e
t
B( A1  A2 ) × × × ×
e
t
dr d 2 dr
(b) Radius of the loop starts increasing at rate ; e   (B  r )   B  2r
dt dt dt
(c) Moving a loop in/out of a uniform field.
× × B × ×

l v
BIl I
e = Bvl, R = resistance of loop, I  e (clockwise)
R
× × × ×
Some Important Points :
Bl  e B 2 l 2v
(a) Force required to pull the loop with constant velocity F  BIl  
R R
B 2 l 2v 2 B 2 2 2
l v
(b) Power of external force = Fv  & (c) Rate of heat loss = I 2R 
R R
 External power = thermal power dissipated
If the loop is pushed inside, current will be anticlockwise.
Applications
1. × B(+) 2. × × 3. × ×
× v
vsin v

v
l A(+)  B(–)
B(–)
A(+) O R e = Bvl sin
e = Bv(2R)
A(–)
 
e = Bvl
4. 5. 6.
A B
A(+) 
 A B B(–)
l (–) O
(+) R

1 1 2 1 2
e= Bl2 e= Br   AB = 0 eOA = Br 
× 2 × 2 × × 2 ×
×
Disc Part of Disc

474 II PUC
Electromagnetic Induction
7. 8. 9.
× × (B) × × × ×
A
A D
R
v v v
l R l
O

B C
B

A D
I =0 I
I =0
Bvl Bvl R
2BvR 2BvR Bvl

I
B C
Bvl
× × × × × I  ×
× × × × R
10.
I
v r
R1 l R2  R1 R2
Bvl

× × × × Bvl
Sliding rod also has a I 
R1 R2
resistance ‘r ’ r 
R1  R2

Self Induction: Inductance is that property of electrical circuits which oppose any change in the
currert in the circuit. Inductance is the electro-magnetic analogue of mass (m) in mechanics
Property of a coil by which it opposes any change in the magnitude of current flowing through
N
it by inducing an emf in itself. Equation : L  where N = number of turns,  = linked
I
magnetic flux per turns
dI
I = current & L = Inductance &   L . The SI unit of L is henry (H)
dt
 0 N 2 r
 Circular loop : L  N = number of turns, r = radius of coil
2
0 N 2 A
 For solenoid : L  A = cross section area of solenoid
l
 0 N 2 r
N = number of turns, l = length of solenoi For Torroid : L  r = Axial radius of torroid
2
2 2 0 N 2 a
 Current carrying square loop, L  a = length of square loop

Self induced current opposes any change in the current in a circuit.

Energy stored in induction Energy stored per unit volume of long solenoid
called magnetic energy density
1 2 B2
U LI B 
2 2 0
II PUC 475
 Objective Physics
 Mutual Induction: The Property of two coils by virtue of which each opposes any change in
the magnitude of current flowing through the other by inducing an emf in itself provided
magnetic flux of one coil is linked with other.
Let I1 is current through one coil, 2 is flux linked with other coil, then 2  I1 2 = MI1, where
d 2 dI
M is mutual induction  e   M 1 The SI unit of M is henry (H)
dt dt
 Important cases :
 0 N1N 2 A
 Mutual inductance of two solenoids : M 
l
N1 = Number of turns in one solenoid, N2 = Number of turns in other solenoid, A = Area of cross-
section of narrower solenoid & l = Length of solenoid
2
 Two loops : R >> r (a) M   0 r
2R

a r
R

I a
r
2 2 b  r b
 M
 8 a b
r 2 (c) M  0 a log  
4 ab 2  r  r b

 Ideal Inductor : A part of long solenoid having zero resistance, inductance or coefficient of self
induction
 0N 2 A
L = 0n2Al =
l l
l = length, A = area of cross-section, n = number of turns/length, N = total number of turns
 Direction of Induced emf
(a) I is increasing (b) I is decreasing
e = LdI/dt e = LdI/dt
I I

(c) I is increasing (d) I is decreasing

e = LdI/dt e = LdI/dt
I I

 Energy stored in Inductor

I 1 2 1 B2
Energy U B  LI , Energy Density =
2 2 0
 Combination of Inductors
L1 L2
 Inductor in series
(a) L = L1 + L2 (b) L = L1 + L2 ± 2M (If mutual inductance is also considered)

476 II PUC
Electromagnetic Induction
L1
1 1 1
 Inductor in parallel   (Neglecting mutual induction)
L2 L L1 L2

 Relation between Self Inductance and Mutual Inductance

M  K L1L2 M = Mutual inductance of two inductors L1 and L2, K = Coefficient of coupling.
For a tight (perfect) coupling K = 1, otherwise K < 1.
L-R- CIRCUIT WITH D.C. SOURCE
 Inductor behaves like open circuit. No current through it, as t = 0, i = 0.
E
 After long time, as t , i 0  . (Inductor behaves as closed switch)
R

R R
E

 Examaple R S R

t=0
i i
R R R R
E
E 2E
at t = 0 R R i & at t =  R R i
3R 3R

EDDY CURRENTS
 When the magnetic flux through a large piece of conducting material changes, induced currents
appear in the material. These current are called eddy currents.
 d / dt
The magnitude of eddy currents is given by i   where R is resistance of the conductor.
R R
The direction of eddy currents is given by Lenz's law or Flemming's right hand rule.
 Some of the important applications of eddy currents are: Induction motor and in diathermy i.e.,
deep heat treatment of parts of human body.
Some of the undesirable effects of eddy currents are that they oppose the relative motion, involve
loss of energy in the form of heat and reduce the life of electrical devices. To minimise eddy
currents, we use laminated cores.
 Disadvantage of Eddy Current :
 The electric energy dissipate in the form of heat energy in metallic plate due to eddy current.
 A metellic plate is allowed to oscillate like a simple pendulum between two pole pices of a strong
magnet. The oscillations of the plate is damped is calleel electromagnetic damping.
 Uses of Eddy Currents
 Induction furnace, magnetic brakes, speedometers, damping in galvanometers, dead beat
galvanometer.
DC Motor: It is an electrical machine which converts electrical energy into mechanical energy.
 Principle : A current carrying coil placed in the magnetic field experience a torque. The torque
rotates the coil.

II PUC 477
 Objective Physics
Construction and Figure :

 ABCD Armature coil R1 R2 Slipring comutator

B1 and B2 = carbon brushes N,S = Strong magnetic poles.
 Back emf: Due to the rotation of armature coil in magnetic field a back emf is induced in the circuit.
It is given by   E  IR
back emf   E  IR ,  = Applying DC Voltage, R = Resistance of armature coil &
E  NBA sin t  Induced emf back emf,    or    k (B, N and A are constant.)
 Current in the DC motor :
E   E  k E
I  When motor is just switched on   0 So e  0, Hence I   max imum .
R R R
When time starts a large current flows through the motor which may burn it out. Hence a starter is
used for starting a DC motor safely.
Pmechanical P e Back emf
 Efficiency of DC motor : Efficiency   P  out  
sup plied Pinput E SupplyVoltage
Use of DC Motors : They are used in electric locomotives, electric cars, rolling mills, electric cranes, elec
tric lifts, DC drills, fans and blowers, centrifugal pumps and air compressor etc.
C OSCILLATIONS
 A charged capacitor is connected to an inductor and switch is closed at t = 0. UE
 The charge and current vary sinusoidally as, +
+
–
– S
+ –
–
q = q0 cos t [ at t = 0, q = q0] +
+
–
–
i = i0 sin t [ at t = 0, i = 0]
Graphical representation of this variation is as shown. L
i q

t t

q0 1 1
i0  , ,  is frequency of LC oscillations
LC LC 2 LC
Some Important Points :
 If there is some resistance, there is a continuous loss of energy. Amplitude of charge or current
decays with time.
 During oscillations, voltage across capacitor at any instant = emf induced in the inductor.
 Energy stored in capacitor or inductor oscillates with frequency 2.

478 II PUC
Electromagnetic Induction
EXAMINATION CORNER

1. The magnetic potential energy stored in a cer-

 18 = 2 A
tain inductor is 25 mJ, when the current in the i 
R2 9
inductor is 60 mA. This inductor is of induc-
Note : Not correctly framed but the best option
tance (NEET-2018)
out of given is (3).
(1) 1.389 H (2) 138.88 H
3. A long solenoid of diameter 0.1 m has 2 × 104
(3) 0.138 H (4) 13.89 H
turns per meter. At the centre of the solenoid, a
A: (4)Energy stored in inductor
coil of 100 turns and radius 0.01 m is placed
1 2 1 3 2
3

U  LI ; 25  10   L  60  10
2 2
 with its axis coinciding with the solenoid axis.
The current in the solenoid reduces at a con-
6 3
25  2  10  10 500 stant rate to 0 A from 4 A in 0.05 s. If the resis-
L  = 13.89 H
3600 36 tance of the coil is 10  2  , the total charge
2. Figure shows a circuit contains three identical flowing through the coil during this time is
resistors with resistance R = 9.0   each, two (NEET 2017)
iden tical inductors with inductance L = 2.0 mH (1) 32   C (2) 16  C
(3) 32 C (4) 16  C
each, and an ideal battery with emf  = 18 V.
The current ‘i’ through the battery just after the A: (3)   N
d
switch closed is (NEET-2017) dt
 N d N N   
 ; dq  d ; Q 
R R dt R R

Q 
total

 NBA   0ni r 2
R R R
Putting values
2
(1) 2 mA (2) 0.2 A 4  10 7  100  4     0.01
 ; Q  32 C
(3) 2 A (4) 0 ampere 10 2
4. A uniform magnetic field is restricted within a
region of radius r. The magnetic field changes

dB
A: (3) with time at a rate . Loop 1 of radius R  r
dt
encloses the region r and loop 2 of radius R
is outside the region of magnetic field as
At t = 0, no current flows through R1 and R3
shown in the figure below. Then the e.m.f.
generated is (NEET-II 2016)

II PUC 479
 Objective Physics
(1) Zero in loop 1 and zero in loop 2
   200
  100  2   200 V ; I    0.5 A
dB 2 dB 2 t 2
R 400
(2)   r in loop 1 and   r in loop 2
dt dt 8. The electric current of 4 A is increasing at the
 rate of 2 A/s through a coil of inductance 6
dB 2
(3)   r in loop 1 and zero in loop 2 H. The energy stored in the inductor at this
dt
 instant changes at a rate of
dB 2 (1)48 J/s (2)24 J/s (3)12 J/s (4)6 J/s
(4)   r in loop 1 and zero in loop 2
dt
Li 2 dU  di 
A: (4) Magnetic flux linked with area of loop 1 A: (1)  U    Li    6  4  2  48 J/s
2 dt  dt 

dB 9. The magnetic flux through a coil varies with
is  r 2 So emf in loop 1 is  r2
dt time t as shown in the diagram. Which graph
Magnetic flux linked with area of loop 2 is zero best represents the variation of the e.m.f. E in
So emf in loop 2 = 0 duced in the coil with time t?
5. A long solenoid has 1000 turns. When a current
of 4A flows through it the magnetic flux linked
with eachturn of the solenoid is 4  10 3 Wb. The
self-inductance of the solenoid is (NEET-I 2016)
(1)4 H (2)3 H (3)2 H (4)1 H
A: (4)   Li
1000  4  10 3  L 4 ; 1=L (1) (2)
6. Two coil of equal surface area having turns 10
and 20 are lies in a uniform magnetic field with
its plane perpendicular to the field. If both coils
are rotates with constant angular speed 1 and (3) (4)
2 respectively. The magnetic flux linked with
2 A: (3)   A sin t ;
coils are equal at time t then   ______ .
1 d
    A cos t
1 1 1 2 dt
(1) (2) (3) (4)
3 6 4 3 10. A copper disc of radius 0.1 m is rotated about
A: (2) BAN 1 cos 1t  BAN 2 cos 2 t its centre with 10 rev/s in a uniform magnetic
 field of 0.1T with its plane perpendicular to field.
cos 2 t N 1 10 1 cos
    3 2 1 The emf induced across the radius of disc is
cos 1t N 2 20 2  cos 2 ,   6
1  
(1) volt (2) volt
7. A coil of resistance 400  is placed in a mag- 10 100
netic field. if the magnetic flux   Wb  linked 
(3) volt (4) Zero
with the coil varies with times t (s) as 1000
  50t 2  4. The current in the coil at t = 2 s is 1 
A: (2)   B R 2 , R  0.1 m , B  0.1 T , W  20
(1) 2 A (2) 1 A (3) 0.5 A (4) 0.1 A 2 s
d 1 2 
A: (3)   50t 2  4 ;    100t ;    0.1  0.1   20   volt
dt 2 100
480 II PUC
Electromagnetic Induction
11. A frame CDEF is placed in a region where a A: (3)

magnetic field B is present. A rod of length one 14. Figure shows an L-R circuit. When the switch
metre moves with constant velocity 20 m/s and S is closed, the current through resistor
strength of magnetic field is one tesla. The power
R1 , R2 and R3 are I 1 , I 2 and I 3 respectively. The
spent in the process is (take R = 0.2  and all
value of I1 , I 2 and I 3 at t  0 s is
other wires and rod have zero resistance)

(1) 1 kW (2) 2 kW (3) 3 kW (4) 4 kW

2 2
B2 I 2 v 2 1  1   20 
A: (2) P  F.V    2 kW
R 0.2 (1) I 1  I 2  I 3  0
12. In the circuit given in figure, 1 and 2 are am-
E
meters. Just after key K is pressed to complete (2) I 1  , I2  I3  0
R1
the circuit, the reading will be
E E
(3) I 1  0, I 2  , I3 
R2 R3
E E E
(4) I 1  , I2  , I3 
R1 R2  L1 R3  L3
A: (2) At t = 0, inductor offers infinite resistance
E
so I 1  , I2  I3  0
(1) Zero in 1, maximum in 2 R1
(2) Maximum in both 1 and 2 15. The switch shown in the circuit is closed at
(3) Zero in both 1 and 2 t = 0. The current drawn from the battery by
(4) Maximum in 1, zero in 2 the circuit at t = 0 and t =  are in the ratio
A: (4) At t = 0, C offers zero resistance L offers
infinite resistance
So reading of Ammeter  1  max ;
Ammeter  2   Zero
13. Ratio of initial to final current through the
battery when the switch is closed in the given
circuit is (1) 2 : 1 (2) 1 : 2 (3) 1 : 1 (4) 1 : 4
2R A: (3) At t = 0, L offers infinite resistance
At t   , C offers infinite resistance
2R

So, in both the cases, I=
R 2R
 Hence ratio is 1 : 1.
1 1 2 3
(1) (2) (3) (4)
3 2 3 2
II PUC 481
 Objective Physics
16. The network shown in figure is a part of a com- 19. A rectangular loop is being pulled at a constant
plete circuit. If at a certain instant, the current speed v through a re gion of certain thickness
i is 4 A and is increasing at a rate of d, in which a uniform magnetic field B is set
3
10 A / s. Then VB  VA will be up. The graph between position x of the right
hand edge of the loop and the induced emf e
will be

(1) –11 V (2) 11 V (3) –21 V (4) 21 V

di
A: (3)  10 3 ;
dt
So , VA   4  1   12  5  10 3  10 3   VB
 VB  VA  21V
17. The magnetic flux through a stationary loop with
resistance R varies during interval of time T as (1) (2)
  at T  t  . The heat generated during this
time neglecting the inductance of loop will be
a 2T 3 a 2T 2 a 2T a 3T 2
 1 2  3 4
3R 3R 3R 3R (3) (4)
A: (1)   at T  t   aTt  at 2

d dB
     aT  2 at  A: (4) When distance x increases, increases
dt dt
and induced emf for given condition is nega-
2 2
  aT  2 at  dB
P  tive. When loop is in fall field at that time
R R dt
T T 2 = 0, induced emf = 0.
 aT  2 at  a 2T 3
H   Pdt    dB
0 0
R 3R When loop comes out from field then de-
dt
18. Figure shows a conducting loop being pulled
 creases and emf becomes positive. So, this con-
out from a magnetic field with a velocity v.
dition describes by graph (4).
Which of the four plots shown in bellow figure
may represent the power delivered by the pull 20. A metallic ring hangs vertically from a thread
ing agent as a function of the velocity v. with its axis pointing E-W. A coil is fixed near
to the ring and co-axial with it. When current
in the coil is switch on, then the ring

(1) A (2) B (3) C (4) D W

E
2 2 2
Bvl Ring
A: (1) Power P = Fv = BIvl =  P  v2 S
R (1)Moves towards South
(2)Moves towards East
482 II PUC
Electromagnetic Induction
(3)Moves towards North
   
(4)Moves towards West (1) 2 BL sin   . gL (2) BL sin   .  gL 
2 2
A: (2)
21. When the speed of a DC motor increases the   3/2   2
(3) BL sin   .  gL  (4) BL sin   .  gL 
armature current 2 2
(1) Increases (2) Does not change A: (2) Inmean position,
(3) Decreases
v  2 gh  2 gL  1  cos  
(4) Increases and decreases continously
A: (3) As speed of dC motor increases, angular  
v  2 gL  2 sin 2  2 gL .sin
speed w increases and resulting back emf in 2 2
E  k v g 
creases. So, according to I    2 .sin
R L L 2
In mean position
Flow of armature decreases.
22. The armature of DC motor has 20  resistance. 1 1 g 
emax  BL2  B  2 .sin  L2
It draws current of 1.5 ampere, when run by 2 2 L 2
200 V DC supply. The value of back emf induced

in it will be in V.  BL gL .sin
2
(1) 250 (2) 220 (3) 170 (4) 180
25. A ring made of insulating material is rolling
Ee without slipping on a horizontal surface with
A: (3) I   e  E  IR  200   1.5  20 
R velocity of centre of mass V 0 . A conducting wire
= 200 - 30 = 170 V of length 2R (R = radius of ring) is fixed be-
23. The magnitude of earth’s magnetic field at a tween two points of the circumference. At an
place is B0 and the angle of dip is  . A hori- instant, the wire is in vertical position as
zontal conductor of length l lying magnetic shown in figure. A uniform magnetic field B
north-south moves eastward with a velocity v. exists perpendicular to the plane of the ring.
The emf induced across the conductor is The magnitude of emf induced between the
(1) Zero (2) B0 Iv sin  ends of wire is
B
(3) 0 Iv cos  (4) B0 Iv tan 
A: (2) e  B0 Iv  B0 Iv sin 
24. A simple pendulum with bob of mass m and
conducting wire of length L swings under grav-
ity through an angle 2  . The earth’s magnetic
field component in the direction perpendicular
(1) 2 BV0R (2) BV0R
to swing is B. The maximum potential differ-
(3) 3 BV0R (4) 4 BV0R
ence induced across the pendulum is
A: (1) For rolling without sliding, point B is in rest
at the instant shown
2
B  2 R 
 e  2 BR 2
2
v0
Also R=v0     e  2 v 0 BR
R

II PUC 483
 Objective Physics

TASK - I
1. A square of side x m lies in the x-y plane in a
region, where the magnetic field is given by (1) (2)

 
B  B0 3iˆ  4ˆj  5kˆ T, where B0 is constant. The
magnitude of flux passing through the square is
(1) 5B0 x2Wb (2) 3B0 x2Wb (3) (4)
(3) 2B0 x2Wb (4) B0x2Wb
2. A circular disc of radius 0.2 m is placed in a 6. A coil of area 0.4 m2 has 100 turns. A magnetic
field 0f 0.04 Wb m 2 is acting normal to the coil
1
uniform magnetic field of induction   Wb surface. If this magnetic field is reduced to zero

in 0.01 s, then the induced emf in the coil is
m2 in such a way that its axis makes an angle
 (1) 160 V (2) 250 V (3) 270 V (4) 320 V
of 60 with B . The magnetic flux linked with
7. A long solenoid with 10 turns per cm has a small
the disc is
loop of area 3 cm2 placed inside, normal to the
(1) 0.02 Wb (2) 0.06 Wb
axis of the solenoid. If the current carried by
(3) 0.08 Wb (4) 0.01 Wb
the solenoid changes steadily from 2 A to 0 A
3. A circular coil of radius 8 cm, 400 turns and
in 0.2 s, what is the induced voltage in the loop,
resistance 2  is placed with its plane
perpendicular to the horizontal component of while the current is changing?
the earth’s magnetic field. It is rotated about its (1) 4.2  108 V (2) 2.8  108 V
vertical diameter through 180 in 0.30 s. (3) 7.3  106 V (4) 3.8  106 V
Horizontal component of earth magnetic field 8. A square loop of side 12 cm and resistance 0.60
at the place is 3  105 T. The magnitude of  is placed vertically in the east-west plane. A
current induced in the coil is approximately uniform magnetic field of 0.10 T is set up across
2
(1) 4  10 A (2) 8  10 A4 the plane in north-east direction. The magnetic
2 3
(3) 8  10 A (4) 1.92  10 A field is decreased to zero in 0.6 s at a steady
4. A magnet and a coil are moved in the same rate. The magnitude of current during this time
direction with the same velocity. The interval is
(1) emf is induced in the coil (1) 2.82  103 A (2) 2.67  103 A
(2) emf is not induced in the coil (3) 3.41  103A (4) 4.21  103 A
(3) emf may be induced if the velocity is very large 9. The magnetic flux through a coil perpendicular
(4) emf may be induced if the velocity is very small to its plane and directed into paper is varying
5. The current I in an inductance coil is varying according to the relation  = (2t2 + 4t + 6) m
with time t as shown in the figure. Which one Wb. The emf induced in the loop at t = 4 s is
of the following graphs shows the variation of (1) 0.12 V (2) 2.4 V (3) 0.02 V (4) 1.2 V
voltage in the coil with time? 10. Which of the following does not use the
application of eddy current?
(1) Electric power meters
(2) Induction furnace (3) LED lights
(4) Magnetic brakes in trains
484 II PUC
Electromagnetic Induction
11. A boy peddles a stationary bicycle the pedals (1) 0.06 mV (2) 0.12 mV
of the bicycle are attached to a 200 turn coil of (3) 0.18 mV (4) 0.24 mV
2
area 0.10 m . The coil rotates at half a revolution 16. Eddy currents are produced when
per second and it is placed in a uniform (1) a circular coil is placed in a magnetic field
magnetic field of 0.02 T perpendicular to the (2) a metal is placed in a steady magnetic field
axis of rotation of the coil. The maximum (3) a metal block is placed in a varying magnetic field
voltage generated in the coil is (4) current is passed through a circular coil
(1) 1.26 V (2) 2.16 V (3) 3.24 V (4) 4.12 V 17. A jet plane is travelling west at the speed of
12. The emf induced in a straight conductor moving 1600 km h 1. The voltage difference developed
through a magnetic field does not depend on its between the ends of the wing having a span of
(1) length (2) radius of cross section 20 m, if the earth’s magnetic field at the location
(3) orientation (4) velocity has a magnitude of 5  104T and the dip angle
13. A conducting square loop of side L moves with is 30 is
a uniform speed v in a region of uniform (1) 4.1 V (2) 2.2 V (3) 3.2 V (4) 3.8 V
magnetic field acting perpendicular to the plane 18. A 2 m long metallic rod rotates with an angular
of the loop and directed into it as shown in frequency of 200 rad s1 about an axis normal to
figure. The emf induced in the loop is the rod passing through its one end. The other
end of the rod is in contact with a circular metallic
ring. A constant magnetic field of 0.5 T parallel
to the axis exists every where. The emf developed
between the centre and the ring is
BLv Bv
(1) BLv (2) (3) zero (4) (1) 100 V (2) 200 V
2 L
(3) 300 V (4) 400 V
14. A conducting rod PQ of length 1 m is moving
19. A wheel with 20 metallic spokes each of length
with uniform speed of 2 ms 1 in a uniform
0.8 m long is rotated with a speed of 120
magnetic field 4 T directed into the plane of
revolution per minute in a plane normal to the
p ap er . A cap aci t or of cap aci t y 10 F is
horizontal component of earth magnetic field
connected as shown. Then,
H at a place. If H = 0.4  104 T at the place,
then induced emf between the axle and the rim
of the wheel is
(1) 2.3  104V (2) 3.1  104 V
(4)2.9  104 V (4) 1.61  104 V
(1) current flows along PQ 20. A rectangular loop of sides 6 cm and 2 cm with
(2) qA = 80 /C, qB = 80 C a small cut is moving out of a region of uniform
(3) qA = 80 C, qB = 80 C magnetic field of magnitude 0.4 T directed
(4) qA = qB = 80 C normal to the loop. The voltage developed across
15. A rectangular loop of sides 8 cm and 2 cm is the cut if velocity of loop is 2 cm s 1 in a
moving out of a region of uniform magnetic field direction normal to the longer side is
of 0.3 T, directed normal to the loop. What is
(1) 3.8  104 V (2) 4.8  104 V
the emf developed across the point A and B if
the velocity of the loop is 1 cm s1 in a direction (3) 2.2  102 V (4) 3.2  104 V
normal to the longer side of the loop?
II PUC 485
 Objective Physics
21. As shown in the figure, a metal rod makes 26. A 2 m long solenoid with diameter 2 cm and
contact with a partial circuit and completes the 2000 turns has a secondary coil of 1000 turns
circuit. The circuit area is perpendicular to a wound closely near it midpoint. The mutual
magnetic field with B = 0.15 T. inductance between the two coils is
If the resistance of the total circuit is 3 , the (1) 2.4  104 H (2) 3.9  104 H
force needed to move the rod as indicated with
(3) 1.28  103 H (4) 3.14  103 H
a constant speed of 2 ms1 will be equal to
27. A 10 V battery connected to 5  resistance coil
having inductance 10 H through a switch
drives a constant current in the circuit. The
switch is suddenly opened and the time taken
to open it is 2 ms. The average emf induced
across the coil is
(1) 4  104 V (2) 2  104 V
(1) 3.75  103N (2) 2.75  103 N
(3) 2  102 V (4) 1  104 V
(3) 6.57  104 N (4) 4.36  104 N
28. A 100 mH coil carries a current of 1 A. Energy
22. A metal conductor of length 1 m rotates
stored in its magnetic field is
vertically about one of its ends with an angular
(1) 0.5 J (2) 0.05 J (3) 1 J (4) 0.1 J
velocity 5 rad s1. If the horizontal component
29. A current of 1 A through a coil of inductance
of earth’s magnetic field is 0.2  104 T, then the
of 200 mH is increasing at a rate of 0.5 A s1.
emf developed between the ends of the
The energy stored in the inductor per second is
conductor is
(1) 0.5 J s1 (2) 5.0 J s1
(1) 5 V (2) 5 mV (3) 50 V (4) 50 mV
(3) 0.1 J s1 (4) 2.0 J s1
23. An air cored solenoid with length 20 cm, area
30. By a change of current from 5 A to 10 A in 0.1
of cross section 20 cm2 and number of turns 400
s, the self induced emf is 10 V. The change in
carries a current 2 A. The current is suddenly
the energy of the magnetic field of a coil will be
switched off with in 103 s. The average back
(1) 5 J (2) 6 J (3) 7.5 J (4) 9 J
emf induced across the ends of the open switch
TASK - II
in the circuit is (ignore the variation in magnetic
1. A coil of mean area 500 cm2 and having 1000
field near the ends of the solenoid)
turns is held perpendicular to a uniform field
(1) 2 V (2) 4 V (3) 3 V (4) 5V
of 0.4 gauss. The coil is turned through 180 in
24. An electromagnet has stored 648 J of magnetic
energy when a current of 9 A exists in its coils. 1
second. The average induced emf is
10
What average emf is induced if the current is
reduced to zero in 0.45 s? (1) 0.02 V (2) 0.04 V (3) 1.4 V (4) 0.08 V
(1) 320 V (2) 620 V (3) 260 V (4) 230 V
25. A pair of adjacent coils has a mutual inductance 2.
of 2.5 H. If the current in one coil changes from
0 to 40 A in 0.8 s, then the change in flux linked
with the other coil is
(1) 125 Wb (2) 120 Wb (1) (2)
(3) 200 Wb (4) 250 Wb

486 II PUC
Electromagnetic Induction
10. In an AC generator, a coil with N turns, all of
the same area A and total resistance R, rotates
with frequency  in a magnetic field B. The
(3) (4)
maximum value of emf generated in the coil is
(1) N. A. B (2) N. A. B. R
3. A conductor is moving with the velocity v in (3) N. A. B.  (4) N. A. B. R. 
the magnetic field and induced current is I. if 11. A coil of resistance 400  is placed in a magnetic
the velocity fo conductor becomes double, the field. If the magnetic flux  (Wb) linked with
induced current will the coil varies with time t (sec) as  = 50t2+ 4.
(1) 0.5 I (2) 1.5 I (3) 2 I (4) 2.5 I The current in the coil at t = 2 sec is
4. A piece of metal wire is pulled across the gap (1) 0.5 A (2) 0.1 A (3) 2 A (4) 1 A
between the pole pieces of a magnet in 0.5 s. 12. A rectangular coil of 300 turns has an average
The magnetic flux between the pole pieces is area of average area of 25 cm 10 cm. The coil
found to be 8  104 Wb. The emf induced in rotates with a speed of 50 cps in a uniform
the wire is magnetic field of strength 4  102 T about an
(1) 1.6 V (2) 0.16 V (3) 1.6 mV (4) 1.6 V axis perpendicular of the field. The peak value
5. Current in a coil of self inductance 100 mH of the induced e.m.f. is (in volt)
changes from 0.1 A to 0.5 A in 0.01 s. The (1) 3000 (2) 300 (3) 30 (4) 3
induced emf is 13. A coil having 500 square loops each of side 10
(1) 0.3 V (2) 3 V (3) 4 V (4) 6 V cm is placed normal to a magnetic flux which
6. Magnetic flux through a coil changes from 1000 increases at the rate of 1.0 tesla/second. The
Wb to 100 Wb in 1 minute. The induced emf is induced e.m.f. in volts is
(1) 150 V (2) 50 V (3) 15 V (4) 5V (1) 0.1 (2) 0.5 (3) 1 (4) 5
7. The magnetic flux through a surface varies 14. A rectangular coil of 100 turns and dimensions
with time according to the relation  = 5t2 + 4t 0.1 m  0.05 m is placed perpendicular to a
magnetic field of 0.1 T. The induced emf when
+ r. Here  is in milli weber and t is in second.
the field drops by 0.05 T in 0.05 s is
The induced emf at t = 2 s is (1) 0.5 V (2) 1.0 V (3) 1.5 V (4) 2.0 V
(1) 14 mV (2) 24 mV (3) 15 mV (4) 18 mV 15. A conducting capacitor loop is placed in a
8. The magnetic field B makes an angle  with the uniform magnetic field of 0.04 T with its plane
normal to the surface of the surface of the perpendicular to the magnetic field. The radius
of the loop starts shrinking at 2 mm/s. The
conductor. The flux  passing through the rea
induced emf in the loop when the radius is 2
A of the conductor is given by
  cm is
(1) = BA (2)   B  A (1) 1.6   V (2) 3.2   V
 (3) 4.8   V (4) 0.8   V
B  
(3)    (4)   B.A 16. A conducting circular loop is placed in a uniform
A
magnetic field, B = 0.025 T with its plane
9. The magnetic flux linked with a coil, in webers,
perpendicular to the loop. The radius of the loop
is given by the equations   3t 2  4t  9 . Then
is made to shrink at a constant rate of 1 mm s1.
the magnitude of induced e.m.f. at t = 2 second
The induced emf when the radius is 2 cm, is
will be
(1) 2 volt (2) 4 votl (3) 8 volt (4) 16 volt 
(1) 2  V (2)   V (3) V (4) 2V
2
II PUC 487
 Objective Physics
17. The direction of induced current in the coils A (1) will increase in each loop
and B in the coils A and B is the situation shown (2) will decrease in each loop
in the figure is (3) will remain same in each loop
(4) will increase in coil A and decrease in the coil B
22. A axle of a car is 1 m long. The car is moving
due south at a speed of 40 m s1. The vertical
component of the earth’s magnetic field is 60
T. The potential difference developed between
(1) p to q in coil A and x to y in coil B
(2) q to p in coil A and x to y in coil B the ends of the axle in milli volt is
(3) p to q in coil A and y to x in coil B (1) 0.24 (2) 2.4 (3) 0.024 (4) 0.0024
(4) q to p in coil A and y to x in coil B 23. A rectangular loop of sides 6 cm and 2 cm with
18. In the given figure current form A to B in the a small cut is moving out of a region of uniform
straight wire is decreasing. The direction of magnetic field of magnitude 0.4 T directed
induced current in the loop is normal to the loop. The voltage developed across
the cut if velocity of loop is 2 cm s 1 in a
direction normal to the longer side is
(1) 3.8  104 V (2) 4.8  104 V
(3) 2.2  102 V (4) 3.2  104 V
(1) clockwise (2) anticlockwise 24. Two solenoids of equal number of turns have
(3) changing (4) nothing can be said their lengths and the radii in the same ratio 1 :
19. A copper rod of length l rotates about its end with 2. The ratio of their self inductances will be
angular velocity  in a uniform magnetic field B. (1) 1 : 2 (2) 2 : 1 (3) 1 : 1 (4) 1 : 4
The emf developed between the ends of the rod if 25. If the self inductance of 500 turns coil is 125
the field is normal to the plane of rotation is mH, then the self inductance of the similar coil
of 800 turns is
1 1
(1) Bl2 (2) Bl 2 (3) 2 Bl2 (4) Bl 2 (1) 48.8 mH (2) 200mH
2 4
(3) 290 mH (4) 320 mH
20. A circular copper disc 10 cm in diameter rotates
26. Two circular coils can be arranged in any of
at 1800 revolution per minute about an axis
three situations as shown in the figure. Their
through its centre and at right angles to disc. A
mutual inductance will be
uniform field of induction B of 1 Wb m –2 is
perpendicular to disc. What potential difference
is developed between the axis of the disc and
the rim?
(1) 0.023 V (2) 0.23 B (3) 23 V (4) 230 V
21 .Two identical coils, each carrying the same
(1) maximum in situation (i)
current I in the clockwise direction as shown
(2) maximum in situation (ii)
infigure are moved towards each other with the
(3) maximum in situation (iii)
same speed. Then the current
(4) same in all situations
27. A 50 mH coil carries a current of 2 ampere. The
energy stored in joules is
(1) 1 (2) 0.1 (3) 0.05 (4) 0.5

488 II PUC
Electromagnetic Induction
28. The momentum in mechanics is expressed as 2
d  2  400  3  10h  5  3.14   8 102 
m  v . The analogous expression in electricity
is dq  6  400  3.14  64  10 9 dq
; i  8  104 A
(1) I  Q (2) I  V (3) L  I (4) L  Q 2 dt
29. The self inductance L of a solenoid of length l 4. (2) No relative velocity
and area of cross-section A, with a fixed number d
of turns N increases as 5. (3) e  
dt
(1) l and A increase
d d
(2) l decreases and A increases 6. (1) e    NBA 
dt dt
(3) l increases and A decreases
dB 0.04
(4) both l and A decrease  NA  100  4  101  = 160 V
dt 0.01
30. The current in a coil changes from 1 mA to 5
mA in 4 milli seconds. If the co-efficient of self- d d dB
7. (4) e      BA    A
inductance of the coil is 10 mH the magnitude dt dt dt
of the “self-induced” emf is d di
 A  0 ni   0nA
(1) 10 mV (2) 5 mV (3) 2.5 mV (4) 1 mV dt dt
KEY 2
 4 107  1000  3  104  = 3.768  106 V
TASK - I 0.2
1 1 2 1 3 2 4 2 5 3 e 1  d  1 dB
6 1 7 4 8 2 9 3 10 3 8. (2) i     A cos 
R R  dt  R dt
11 1 12 2 13 3 14 2 15 4
144 104 0.1
16 3 17 2 18 2 19 4 20 2 i   cos 45 =2.828  103 A
0.6 0.6
21 1 22 3 23 2 24 1 25 1
d
26 2 27 4 28 2 29 3 30 3 9. (3) e  ; e   4t  4  ;
dt
TASK - II t = 4s; e = 20 mV= 0.02 V
1 2 2 2 3 3 4 3 5 3 10. (3)
6 3 7 2 8 4 9 4 10 3 11. (1) e  NBAW  NBA2h
11 1 12 3 13 4 14 1 15 2 1
 200  0.02  0.1 2     1.26 A
16 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 2
21 2 22 2 23 2 24 1 25 4 12. (2) e = Blv
26 1 27 2 28 3 29 2 30 1 13. (3) No change in magnetic flux
Hints and Solutions 14. (2) e = Blv = 4  1  2 = 8
TASK - I
  q = CV = 10 F  8 = 80 C
 2
 
1. (1)   B. A  B0 3iˆ  4ˆj  5kˆ . x kˆ  5B0 x Wb
2
qA = 80 C , qB = –80 C
2. (1)   B.A  BA cos  15. (4) e = Blv = 0.3  8  10-2  1  10-2 = 2.4  10-4 V
1 1 e = 0.24 mV
   0.2  0.2   0.02 Wb
 2 16. (3)
d 17. (2) e = Bvlv = B sin q lv
3. (2) dq 
R
1 5
d = NBA (cos 1  cos 2) = 2 NBA  5  104   20  1600  = 2.2 V
2 18
II PUC 489
 Objective Physics
1 2 1 di 2
18. (2) e  Br    0.5  4  200  200 V eL  10   1 104 V
2 2 dt 2 103
1 2 1 2 1 2 1
19. (4) e  Br   Br  2R 
3 2
28. (2) U B  Li   100  10  1  0.05 J
2 2 2 2
1 1 2 dU B 1  2di 
  4 105  8  8 102  2 29. (3) U B  Li ;  L 
2 2 dt 2  dt 
= 1607  107 = 1.6  104 V
1
20. (2) e = Blv = 0.4  6  10-2  2  10-2   2  200 103  0.5
2
= 4.8  10-4 V = 100  103= 0.1 Js1


e
B l 
 Blv  Bl  B2l 2 v di  5 
21. (1) F = iBl   30. (3) e  L ; 10  L   ; L = 0.2 Lit
R R R dt  0.1 
2 2


 0.15    0.5  2
= 3.75  103 N
1
 1

U  L   i 2   L  i2 
2 2 2
1 2 1 1
2
22. (3) e  Br w   2 10  1  5
5   0.2   i 22  i12 
2 2 2
= 5  105 = 50  106 V = 50 V 1
  0.2  102  52   7.5 J
N 2
23. (2) B   0 ni   0 i
L TASK - II
400   
 4 107  2
 2  160 105 1. (2) e   2 1
20 10 t t
d  dB  d
e  NBA  NA   2. (2) e  
dt  dt  dt
 400  20  109 160 105 Initially when magnet moves inside the coil,
= 401.2  102= 4V Flux increases, which produces emf in opposite
director and Vice Versa
1 2 2U 2  648
24. (1) U B  Li ; L  2 B   16 H
e Blv
2 i 81 3. (3) i   ; i  v;  i also doubles
R R
di 9
e L  16  = 320 V
dt 0.45 d 8 104
4. (3) e   = 16  104 = 1.6 mV
dt 0.5
di1 40 25  40
25. (1) 2  M  2.5   125 Wb
 di  0.4
dt 0.8 8 3
5. (3) e  L    100  10  =4V
 dt  0.01
 0 N1 N 2
26. (2) M  A
2 d 1000  100 900
6. (3) e     15 V
dt 60 60
4 107  2000 1000   10 4

2 d
7. (2)    5t  4t  9  mwb ; e 
2

= 42  105 = 39  105 = 3.9  104 H dt

V 10 d
27. (4) As current is constant i1    2A
R 5

dt
 5t 2  4t  9 ; e  10t  4
i2 = 0, dt = 2 mS = 2  103 S e t  2  10  2   4  24 mV

490 II PUC
Electromagnetic Induction
 
8. (4) Definition   B.A 1 1800
 1 25 104  2 = 0.23 V
2 60
d d
9. (4) e  
dt

dt
 
3t 2  4t  9    6t  4  21. (2)
22. (2) e  Bvlv = 60  106  1  40
e   6(2)  4  16  | e |  16 volt
= 2400  106
10. (3) Maximum value of generated emf e0 = NBA
= 2.4  103 = 2.4 mV
d
11. (1) Induced emf      100t  23. (2) e = Blv
dt
Induced current i at t = 2 sec = 0.4  6  102  2  102 = 4.8  104 V

 100  2 L1 A1 l2 r12 l2 1 2 1
   0.5 Amp 24. (1) L  A  l  2    
R 400 2 2 1 r2 l1 4 1 2
12. (3) Peak value of emf  e0  NBA  2NBA  N2 
2

 2 50  300  4  102  (25  10 2  10  10 2 ) 25. (4) L  N ; L2  

2  L1
 N1 
 30  volt 2
 800 
 B     125 mH ; L2 = 320 mH
13. (4) | e |  N   .A cos   500 
 t 
26. (1) Conceptual
2 2
 500 1  (10 10 ) cos0  5V. 27. (2) Energy stored
d d dB 1 1
14. (1) e    NBA   NA E  Li2   50 103  4  0.1 J
dt dt dt 2 2
 0.1  0.05  28. (3) Magnetic flux   LI
 400  5  103    = 0.5 V
 0.05  By analogy, since physical quantities mass (m)
15. (2) Magnetic flux linked with circular loop is and linear velocity (v) are equivalent to electrical
 
given by   B.A  BA cos  quantities inductance (L) and current (I)
respectively. Thus magnetic flux   LI is
or   B  r  cos0    0
2

equivalent to momentum p  m  v .
d dr 0 N 2 A A 1
Also    2r [cos 0 = 1] 29. (2) L  ; L ; LA; L
dt dt l l l
or || = 2  0.04    2  102  2  103
Ldi 10  10   5  1  10 A
3 3
or || = (3.2   106) volt = 3.2   V 30. (1) e    10 mV
dt 4 103
dv d d
16. (2) e    NBA    NBr 2 
dt dt dt
 dr  ***
 NB 2r  
 dt 
 1 0.025 2  2 102  103  V
17. (2)
18. (2)
19. (2)
1 2
20. (2) e  Br 
2

II PUC 491
 Objective Physics

CHAPTER Alternating Currents

Alternating currents, peak and rms value of alternating current/ voltage;

7
reactance and impedance; LC oscillations (qualitative treatment only), LCR
series circuit, resonance; power in AC circuits, wattles current. AC generator
and transformer.

PAST NEET PAPERS SUBTOPIC LEVEL ANALYSIS

NEET 2016 NEET 2016 Forecasting of
Year NEET 2018 NEET 2017
PHASE-I PHASE-II NEET-2019

No of
question 1 0 1 1 1
Asked
power phase
power loss in impedance of
Subtopic - dissipated in difference in
LCR circuit LCR circuit
capacitor LCR circuit

Direct current
 If the magnitude and direction of current do not change with time then it is called direct current
(DC).
Example : Current drawn from the cell. Frequency of DC is Zero, Graph is as shown in Figure.

I
t

 AC GENERATOR : An electrical machine used to convert mechanical energy into electrical en-
ergy is known as ac generator/alternator. It was developed by Nikola Tesla.
 Principle : Electro magnetic induction
 Construction : A coil having N turns will rotates about it axis which is parallel to its palne and
perpendicular to uniform magnetic field is setup.
 The two end of the coil are connected to an external circuit by means of slipring and brushes.
When the coil rotates in the uniform magnetic field. It cuts the magnetic lines of force and flux
linked with the coil changes accorded to cos t  At time t  0,   0  ,
Vm
The emf induced V  BAN sin t  Vm sin t & Current I  I m sin t Where I m 
R
 Hence the induced emf and induced current in the coil varies with time as per the function of sine.
Here voltage obtain between brushes is called AC voltage.
 AC voltage or current increases-decreases and its direction change with time according to the
func tion.

492 II PUC
Alternating Current

ALTERNATING CURRENT
 A time varying, periodic current is called an ac when its amplitude is constant and alternate half
cycles are positive and negative.

The alternating emf E at any instant may be expressed as E = E0 sin t

where  is angular frequency of alternating emf and E 0 is the peak value or amplitude of
alternating emf.
The frequency of alternating emf, f = /2 and time period of alternating emf., T = 1/f = 2/.
The alternating current in a circuit, fed by an alternating source of emf may be controlled by
inductance L, resistance R and capacitance C. Due to presence of elements L and C, the current is
not necessarily in phase with the applied emf. Therefore alternating current is, in general expressed
as I = I0 sin (t + ) where  is the phase which may be positive, zero or negative depending on
the value of reactive components L and C.
AVERAGE AND RMS VALUE OF AC
t t
1 1
 
0

Mean or Average value for time ‘t’ E mean  t Edt , Imean  t Idt
0

 Root Mean Square (RMS) Value: RMS value of ac is equal to that value of dc, which when passed
through a resistance for a given time will produce the same amount of heat as produced by the
ac when passed through the same resistance for same time. RMS values are also known as virtual
or effective value.
t t
2 1 2 2 1 2
 
0

Cases : E rms  t E dt , Irms  t I dt
0

II PUC 493
 Objective Physics
 Imean = 0 for t = T I
2I 0 I0 Sine curve
Imean = for t = T/2

I0 t
Irms = for t = T T/2 T
2
I0
Irms = for t = T/2 Case-1
2

I0
 Imean = t=T
 I Sine curve
2I 0
Imean = t = T/2

I t
Irms = 0 for t=T T/2 T
2
I0
Irms = for t = T/2 Case-2
2
2I 0
 Imean = for t = T
 I Sine curve
2I I0
Imean = 0 for t = T/2

I0 t
Irms = for t = T T/2 T
2 I
I0 Square wave
Irms = for t = T/2 I0 Case-3
2
 Imean = 0 for t = T t
T/2 T
Imean = I0 for t = T/2
–I0
Irms = I0 for t = T
Irms = I0 for t = T Case-4
Phasor diagram
 A vector rotating in anticlockwise direction with angular velocity ‘’.
y-axis y-axis
E = E0 sin  t
' ' I = I0 sin ( t +  )
I0
E0
E0
E0sin t 
t t
x-axis x-axis

 Its length is equal to amplitude of alternating quantity.

 Projection of vector on y-axis gives the instantaneous value of alternating quantity.
Different ac Circuits R
 Resistive Circuit
I = I0 sin t
E = E0 sin wt
E0 L
I0 
R
Generator
 Inductive Circuit
I = I0 sin (t – /2)
E0
I0  , where XL = L = 2fL
XL E = E0 sin  t
 Capacitive Circuit
 I = I0 sin (t + /2)

494 II PUC
Alternating Current
+ –
E0 –
1 1 + –
 I0  , where XC =  +
+
–
–
XC C 2 C I L C I R I + –

SERIES LCR CIRCUIT

E = E0 sin  t
E0 V1 V2
 V  = rms value of applied voltage
2
V
V1 = rms voltage across L-C = VL – VC
V2 = rms voltage across R = VR
Phase Relationship E = E0 sin  t
 I and VR are in same phase.
VL leads I by 90°.
VL – VC V
VC lags behind I by 90°.
 Case 1 : VL > VC  V leads I by  
VR
V  VC X L  XC I
where tan   L & tan  
VR R
1
Phasor diagram where XL > XC i.e., 
LC
 Case 2 : VL < VC i.e., V lags behind I by  I VR
V  VL X  XL 
tan   C  C
VR R VL – VC
1 V
Here XC > XL i.e.,  
LC Phasor diagram
In both cases V  VR2  (VL  VC )2  I R 2  ( X L  X C )2

R R
(a) Impedance = Z  R 2  ( X L  X C )2 & (b) Power factor = cos   
Z R  ( X L  X C )2
2

X L  XC 1
 Case 3 : tan   ; VL = VC i.e., XL = XC i.e.,   [Resonance]
R LC
In this case
E0
(a) V2  V  (b) V1 = VL – VC = 0 (c) tan  = 0, or  = 0
2
(d) cos  = 1 (e) Z = R (minimum) (f) Power consumed is maximum
(g) Graphs :

I
R3 < R2 < R1 Z
Q3 > Q2 > Q1
Q3
Q2
R3 Zmin = R
Q1 R2
R1 
 1
1 r =
r = Series LCR circuit LC
LC
(Acceptor Circuit)
Series LCR circuit
(h) In a series LCR circuit,
 When voltage leads current, then to bring resonance state, either L or C should be decreased.

II PUC 495
 Objective Physics
 If voltage lags behind current, then to bring resonance state either L or C should be increased.
 Quality factor Q represents the sharpness of tuning at resonance
1 L 1
Q i.e., Q 
R C R L R
 Case 4 : Series LR Circuit VL VR
V
(a) Z  R 2  X L2 , V  VR2  VL2 , I 
Z
V
R X
(b) cos   , tan   L . Voltage leads current
2 2
R  XL R

 Case 5 : Series CR Circuit

VC VR
V
(a) V  VR2  VC2 , Z R  2
X C2 , I
Z
R R XC V
(b) cos    , tan   . Voltage lags behind current
Z R 2  X C2 R

 Case 6 : Series LC Circuit L C

V
(a) V = VL – VC, Z = XL – XC , I 
Z
 
(b)   (XL > XC),   (XL < XC) Z
2 2
(c) When XL = XC, Z = 0
1
i.e.,  
LC 
1
r =
LC

1 L CR
  1  Zmax   Minimum current of circuit : I min  Vmax 
Ymin CR L
1 1
 Susceptance S: SL  SC  X  X  impedence X  
L C

1 1
2 
1 R CR 1 R2
 Resonant frequency : 0   Q factor 
LC L2 LC L2
 If inductance has no resistance, if R = 0 then circuit becomes parallel LC circuit as shown in figure.

496 II PUC
Alternating Current
V V
Here condition of resonance : IC  I L  X  X  XL  XC
C L

POWER CONSUMED IN AN A.C. CIRCUIT

T
1 E I E I
 Pav  EIdt . If E = E sin t and I = I sin (t + ) . Pav  0 0 cos   0 . 0 cos   Ev Iv cos 

T 0 0 2 2 2
0

[Ev = Virtual or rms voltage, Iv = Virtual or rms current]

 Some Important Points :
E0 I0
 For pure resistor  = 0, Pav   E rms I rms
2
 For pure inductor or capacitor, Pav = 0 [Non resistive circuit]
 Power consumed is independent of Ivsin. This is called wattless component.
R
 cos  = Power factor 
Z

Ev2
 In a series LCR circuit Pav = EvIv cos   cos   Iv2 R Wattless current Iv sin
Z
1
 At resonance i.e., at r  ,Z=R power is maximum
LC

1
 At frequencies other than r  , power consumed is less.
LC
2
 At  = 1 or 2, power = half the maximum power then r  1 2 ; Pmax  Imax R
2 2
I max R  Imax 
P1/ 2     R
2  2 

Imax Ev E I max
i.e., when I  , power is half Imax  , Iv  v ; I   Z R 2
2 R Z 2

R 1
( X L  X C )2  R 2  R 2  X L  X C  R cos      = 45º
Z 2

r 1 L R
 Quality factor Q   &   2  1 
2  1 R C L
I

Imax

Imax Imax
I= I=
2 2


1 r 2
half power half power
frequency frequency

II PUC 497
 Objective Physics
LC oscillating :

 In given circuit when key (A) is closed and key (B) is open the cell charges the capacitor, then on
removing key (A) and key (B) closed the charged capacitor connected to L and circuit behaves L-
C circuit mention in figure. Here, resistance of inductor is zero (Ideal Inductor) for this circuit.
d 2Q Q 1
Diffrential equation,  & Angular frequency 0 
dt 2
LC LC
Equation for charge at time t, Q  Q0 cos 0 t where Q0  Change on C , initially
Equation for charge at time t I  Q00 sin 0 t
Here charge oscillating within time according to function cosine.
Q2 T
 The electric energy of capacitor reduced to 0 from in time t  0 to t 
2C 4
1 2 T
 The magnetic energy in inductor is increasing from zero to maximum LI in time t  0 to t 
2 4
 The current and voltage varing with time shown in below graph.

 Transformer : A device in which AC voltage can be increased or decreased.

 Principle : Electro magnetic induction.

 This devices could not change the frequency of AC voltage. The coil which is connected with AC
source is called primary coil (P) and out put voltage obtain between two ends of coil is called sec-
ondary coil (S). The phase different between VS and VP is  .

498 II PUC
Alternating Current
 The resistance is infinite between primary and secondary coil.
 s N s Vs I P
T is transformation ratio :   N  V  I  T ; T > 1 step-up transformer more out put voltage &
p P P s

T< 1 step-down transformer less out put voltage.

 For ideal transformer :  Pin    Pout  Input power I PVP = Output power I SVS
Pout VS I S
 Efficiency of transformer     P  100  V I  100 Efficiency of ideal transformer is 100 %
in P P

 Output   Loss 
 For practically used transformer: Pin  Pout  Ploss Input-Power   Power    Power 
   
Here power lost in transformer due to heating of coil, leakage of magnetic flux of eddy current
 Uses : Voltage regulator, Induction furnace, power transmission etc.
 Equivalence between the Mechanical and Electrical Quantities :

II PUC 499
 Objective Physics
EXAMINATION CORNER

1. An inductor 20 mH, a capacitor 100  F and a (1)Current I(t), legs voltage V(t) by 90 o
resistor 50   are connected in series across a (2)Over a full cycle the capacitor C does not
source of emf, V = 10 sin 314 t. The power loss consume any energy from the voltage source
in the circuit is (NEET-2018) (3)Current I(t) is in phase with voltage V(t).
(1) 2.74 W (2) 0.43 W (4)Current I(t) leads voltage V(t) by 180 o
(3) 0.79 W (4) 1.13 W A: (2) In capacitor current leads the voltage.
2 Average power dissipated in capacitor is zero
 VRMS 
A: (3) Pav    R 5. The value of impendence Z for given below cir-
 Z 
cuit at a source voltage frequency of 50 Hz will
2 be........  .
2 1 
Z  R   L    56
 C 

 
10
P    50  0.79 W
 av 
  2 56 

2. Which of the following combinations should be
selected for better tuning of an L-C-R circuit (1) 10 (2) 100 (3) 50 (4) 5
used for communication? (NEET-II 2016) 2
R 2  XL  XC 
(1) R = 20  ,L = 1.5 H,C = 35  F A: (1) For given circuit, |Z| 2
 XL  XC   R2
(2) R = 25  ,L = 2.5 H,C = 45  F
2
(3) R = 15  ,L = 3.5 H,C = 30  F 100  7850  6369 
  10 
(4) R = 25  ,L = 1.5 H,C = 45  F  7850  6369 2  100
R
6. In a series RLC circuit, the r.m.s. voltage across
A: (3) Better tuning means low bandwidth 
L the resistor and the inductor are respectively
3. The potential differences across the resistance, 400 V and 700 V. If the equation for the ap-
capacitance and inductance are 80 V, 40 V and plied voltage is   500 2 sin t , then the pea
100 V respectively in an L-C-R circuit. The voltage across the capacitor is
power factor of this circuit is (NEET-II 2016)
(1) 0.4 (2) 0.5 (3) 0.8 (4) 1.0
R VR 80
cos    
A: (3) z V 2 2
80   100  40 

80
  0.8 (1) 1200 V (2) 1200 2 V
100
4. A small signal voltage V  t   V0 sin t is (3) 400V (4) 400 2 V
applied across an ideal capacitor C:
(NEET-I 2016)

500 II PUC
Alternating Current
A: (4)   500 2 sin t , VR  400 V ,VL  700 V f1 f
 f2  , taking f1  f , f 2 
4 4
 0 500 2
 rms    500 V 9. A step down transformer is used to reduce the
2 2 main supply of 220 V to 10 V. If the primary
 rms  VR2  VL  VC 
2 draws 5 A and secondary 88 A current, calcu
late the efficiency of the transformer
2 2 2
 500    400   VL  VC  (1) 8.8 % (2) 80 % (3) 88 % (4) 8 %

250000  160000  VL  VC 

2 output power Pout ES IS
A: (2) efficiency   
2
input power Pin EP I P
90000  VL  VC 
10  88 880
VL  VC  300 , VC  700  300 ;     0.8  80%
220  5 1100
VC  400 V V0  Vrms 2  400 2 V 10. A transformer is used to step up 6.6 kW, 220 V
7. In an LCR circuit, the resonating frequency is to 4.4 kV with 80% efficiency. If primary coil
500 kHz. If the value of L is doubled and value have 1000 turns then number of turns and
current in secondary coil are ...... and .......
1
of C is decreased to times of its initial values, (1) 2  10 3 , 12 A (2) 2  10 4 , 12 A
8
then the new resonating frequency in kHz will (3) 2  10 4 , 1.2 A (4) 2  10 3 , 1.2 A
be
(1) 250 (2) 500 (3) 1000 (4) 2000 ES 4400
A: (3) NS   NP   1000  20, 000
A: (3) f 1  500  10 3 Hz , EP 220

1 1 1 Pout  Pin 0.8  6600

L'  2 L , C '  C f  f IS     1.2 A
8 2 LC CL ES ES 4400
11. Switch is in position A for long time. At time
1
 2L   C  t = 0 it is shifted to position B. Find the maxi
f1 L2C 2 8 
  mum charge that will accumulate on capacitor
f2 L1C 1 LC

f1 1
  f 2  1000 kHz
f2 2
8. The resonant frequency of a circuit is f. If the
capacitance is made 16 times the initial values
then the resaonant frequency becomes
E E
(1)
f
(2) 2f (3) 4f (4)
f (1)  LC  R
(2)
 LC R
2 4
1  L E  C E
A: (4) Here , f  (3)   (4)  
C  C R  L R
2
f1 C1 C1 1 E 1 2 qmax
    A: (1) I max   LI max 
f2 C2 16C 1 4 R 2 2C
 qmax  Imax LC
II PUC 501
 Objective Physics
12. Which of the voltmeters read zero if the circuit (1) 3.2 mA, 0.16 A (2) 0.16 A, 3.2 mA
shown is in resonance? (3) 3.2 mA, 3.2 mA (4) 0.16 A, 0.16 A
EP N P IS 120 500
A: (1)    
ES N S I P ES 10
 ES  2.4 V
2.4 N I
 IS   0.16 A  P  S
RL NS I P
(1) V1 only (2) V4 only
500 0.16
(3) Both V3 and V4 (4) Both V1 and V2    I P  3.2 mA
10 IP
A: (2) At resonance VL – VC = V4 = 0
13. An LC series circuit has an oscillation frequency 16. In an LC circuit shown in figure, if the switch
f. Two isolated inductors, each with inductance is closed at t = 0, find the equation for instanta
L and two capacitors each with capacitance C, neous current in mA
all are connected in series and circuit is com Qmax  100 C , L  40 mH , C  100  F
pleted. The oscillation frequency is
f f
(1) (2) (3) f (4) 4 f
4 2
1 1
f  ,f, f
2 LC C
A: (3) 2  2 L    (1) I = –50 sin(500 t) mA (2) I = –50 sin(500 t)  A
2
14. An alternating current of 1.5 mA with angular (3) I = 100 sin(500 t) mA (4) I = 100 sin(500 t)  A
frequency 100 rad/s flows through a 10 k  A: (1)
resistor and a 0.50  F capacitor in series. The 17. An AC source of frequency  when fed into a
rms potential drop across the capacitor is RC series circuit, current is recorded to be I. If
(1) 4.8 V (2) 30 V (3) 15 V (4) 190 V

now frequency is changed to (keeping volt-
A: (2) Given irms = 1.5 mA 4
age same), the current is found to I/2. The ra
  100 rad / s ; R  10 k
tio of reactance to resistance at original fre
 VR rms  irms  R  15 volt ; c  0.50  F quency  is
1 1 1
 Xc   20 k (1) 2 (2) (3) (4) None
C 2 2
 z  R 2  X c2  5  10 4  A: (2)
18. The resonance curve for series LCR circuit is
 Vnet rms    irms  z  15 5 volt . shown for three different resistances. Then
2
Also Vnet rms   VR2  Vc2
2
 Vc   15 5    15 
2
 30V
15. A transformer has 500 primary turns and 10
secondary turns. If Vp is 120 V (rms) and a re-
sistive load of 15  is connected across the sec- (1) R1 > R2 > R3 (2) R1 < R2 < R3
ondary, the currents in the primary and sec (3) R1 = R2 = R3 (4) None of these
ondary coil of transformer are A: (2)

502 II PUC
Alternating Current
19. An AC voltage source of variable angular 22. In the LC circuit, at this time
frequency  and fixed amplitude V 0 is
connected in series with a capacitance C and
an electric bulb of resistance R (inductance
zero).  When is increased
(1) The bulb glows dimmer
(2) The bulb glows brighter (1) I is increasing and Q is increasing
(3) Total impedance of the circuit is unchanged (2) I is increasing and Q is decreasing
(4) Total impedance of the circuit increases (3) I is decreasing and Q is increasing
A: (2) As  is increased, impedance of circuit de- (4) I is decreasing and Q is decreasing
creases. A: (2) Energy of capacitor is decreasing resulting
in increase in the energy of inductor.
23. The ideal meter shown in figure read rms cur-
rent and voltage. The average power delivered
to the load is

 Current increases  Bulb glows brighter.

20. Phase relationship between current (I) and
applied voltage (E) for a series LCR circuit is (1) Definitely equal to V × I
shown here. 0 = Resonant angular frequency (2) Definitely more than V × I
of the circuit and  = Applied angular (3) Possibly equal to V × I even if the load
frequency. contains an inductance and a capacitor
(4) Definitely less than V × I
A: (3) The power delivered will be V × I.
24. The resonance frequency of a certain RLC series
circuit is 0 . A source of angular frequency 2 0 is
(1)   0 inserted into the circuit. After transients die out,
(2)   0 ,exact relation can’t be computed the angular frequency of current oscil lation is
(3)   0 , exact relation can’t be computed 0
(4) 2  30 (1) (2) 0 (3) 20 (4) 1.50
2
A: (2) As voltage is ahead of current. So VL> VC A: (3) At resonance, the frequency of circuit is
1 equal to the frequency of source.
hence XL > XC. Thus      0 . 25. In a series RLC circuit, if the frequency is in-
2 LC
creased to a very large value, what value does
21. A charged capacitor and an inductor are con-
the phase angle between current and voltage
nected in series. At time t = 0, the current is zero
approach?
but the capacitor is charged. If T is the period of
(1) 90º (2) 0º (3) 30º (4) 45º
resulting oscillations, then the time after which
A: (1) When the frequency of AC source becomes
current in the circuit becomes maximum, is
very high. Then source voltage across the in-
T T T 
(1) T (2) (3) (4) ductor which is ahead of current by .
4 2 6 2
A: (2) When charge on the capacitor is zero then
current in the circuit becomes maximum.
II PUC 503
 Objective Physics

TASK - I 100
1. If I0, Irms and Imean are the peak values of, rms (1) V,50 Hz (2) 100 V, 25 Hz
2
and mean currents of ac then
100
2 (3) 100 2V,50Hz (4) V,25Hz
(1) I0 = Irms = Imean (2) Irms  I  I mean
2
0
2
8. If the rms current in a 50 Hz ac circuit is 5 A,
 I I
(3) I0  2I rms  Imean (4) I mean  rms 0 the value of the current 1/300 seconds after its
2 2
2. In an a.c. circuit, the current is I = 100 sin 200 value becomes zero is
t. In this circuit, the current rises from zero to 3 5
(1) 5 2A (2) 5 A (3) A (4) 5 2 A
peak value in time 2 6
1 1 1 1 9. Alternating current can not be measured by dc
(1) s (2) s (3) s (4) s
300 400 100 200 ammeter, because
3. The potential difference V across the instrument (1) ac cannot pass through ac ammeter
and current I flowing in it are given by V = 5 (2) ac changes direction
cos t and I = 2 sin t. The power dissipated in (3) average value of current of complete cycle is zero
the instrument is (4) ac ammeter will get damaged
(1) 10 W (2) 2.5 W (3) 15 W (4) zero 10. A 300  resistor and inductance of 1.0 henry
4. The root mean square value of the voltage in has a source of an alternating voltage of
frequency (300/2) hertz. The phase difference
an ac circuit with peak voltage V0 is
between the voltage and current in the circuit is
(1) 0.637 V0 (2) 0.707 V0
(1) 30 (2) 45 (3) 60 (4) 90
(3) 2 V0 (4) 2V0 11. If the angular speed  of rotation of the
5. An ac generator has an emf V = V max sin armature in an ac generator is doubled, then
the induced emf in the armature will be
   3 
 t  4  and current I = Imax sin  t  4  . The (1) twice the initial value
   
(2) four times the initial value
time t1 and t2 at which the emf and currents in
(3) same as the initial value
the generator become maximum are respectively
3 5 3 10 (4) half the initial value
(1) t1  and t 2  (2) t1  and t 2  12. An inductor of reactance 1  and a resistor of
4 4 4 3
2  are connected in series to the terminals of a
2 8 2 5
(3) t1  and t 2  (4) t1  and t 2  6 V (rms) ac source. The power dissipated in
3 5 4 4
the circuit is
6. An ac voltmeter reads
(1) only the rms value of ac (1) 8 W (2) 12 W (3) 14.4 W (4) 18 W
(2) the peak ac voltage 13. A coil has resistance 30 ohm and inductive
(3) only the average value of ac reactance 20 ohm at 50 Hz frequency.
(4) both the rms and average value of ac If an ac source of 200 volt, 100 Hz, is connected
7. An alternating voltage varies with time (t) as V across the coil, the current in the coil will be
= 100 sin (50 t). The rms voltage and the
20
(1) 4.0 A (2) 8.0 A (3) A (4) 2.0 A
frequency respectively are 13
504 II PUC
Alternating Current
14. In an A. C circuit, V and I are given by V = 150 (1) inductors in parallel
(2) a capacitor and a resistor
 
sin (150 t) volt and I  150sin 150t   ampere. (3) an inductor and a capacitor
 3
(4) an inductor and a resistor
The power dissipated in the circuit is
20. The choke coil has a resistance 8 , and the
(1) zero (2) 5625 W (3) 150 W (4) 106 W inductive reactance 6,. The power factor of
15. A coil having zero resistance is connected in the coil is
series with a 90, resistance capacitance and
(1) 0.6 (2) 0.8 (3) 0.4 (4) 0.3
an inductance coil and the combination is
21. An AC generator of 220 V having internal
connected to 120 V, 60 Hz line. A voltmeter
resistance r = 10  and external generator R =
reads 36 V across the resistance and 114 V
100 . What is the power developed in the
across the coil. The self inductance of the coil is
external circuit
(1) 0.076 H (2) 0.76 H
(3) 7.6 H (4) 76 H (1) 484 W (2) 400 W (3) 441 W (4) 369 W
16. An ac voltage is applied to a circuit consisting 22. In a L-R circuit, the value of self inductance L
of a resistance R and an inductance L is 0.4/ H and that of resistance R = 30 . An
connected in series. If the potential drop across alternating emf of 200 V at 50 Hz is applied to
the resistance is 200 V and that across the this circuit. The impedance and current in the
inductance is 150 V, the applied voltage is circuit will be
(1) 11.4 , 17.5 A (2) 40.4 ,, 5 A
(1) 300 V (2) 250 V (3) 500 V (4) 350 V
(3) 50 ,, 4 A (4) 30.7 , 6.5 A
17. In series L- R circuit, if the inductive reactance
23. The power factor of an ac circuit having
is equal to 3 times the resistance, then
resistance R and inductance L (connected in
(1) the voltage leads the current by 30 (2) the series) and an angular velocity  is
voltage lags the current by 30
R R
(3) the voltage leads the current by 60
(1) (2) R 2  2 L2 1/2
(4) the voltage lags the current by 60
L  
18. A self inductance coil has a resistance of 31.4 R
L
 and a self inductance of 17 mH. The (3) (4) R  2 L2 1/2
R  2

frequency of ac at which the impendence is
24. A resistor and a capacitor are connected in
double the resistance is
series with an a.c. source. If the potential drop
(1) 5000 Hz (2) 500 Hz
across the capacitor is 5 V and that across
(3) 50 Hz (4) 250 Hz
tesistor is 12 V, the applied voltage is
19. In the circuit shown VAB = VAC. Then X is a (1) 12 V (2) 13 V (3) 17 V (4) 5 V
combination of 25. In the L  C  R circuit shown, the impedance
is

II PUC 505
 Objective Physics
(1) 500  (2) 300  (3) 100  (4) 200  The circuit contains an inductor of 0.5 H and a
26. A series combination of resistor (R), capacitor resistance of 15 . The value of C should be
(3) is connected to an A.C. source of angular (1) 20 F (2) 10 F (3) 2 F (4) 1 F
frequency ‘’. Keeping the voltage same, if the 32. At resonance, the impedance offered by the
frequency is changed to /3, the current LCR circuit is
becomes half of the original current. Then the (1) zero (2) infinity
ratio of the capacitive reactance and resistance (3) maximum (4) minimum
33. In a series LCR circuit, the current at resonant
at the former frequency is
frequency depends on the
(1) 0.6 (2) 3 (3) 2 (4) 6
(1) capacitance value (2) inductance value
27. The primary winding of transformer has 500 (3) resistance value
turns whereas its secondary has 5000 turns. The (4) both the inductance and capacitance value
primary is connected to an ac supply of 20 V, 34. The graph shows the variation of R, X and X
L C
50 Hz. The secondary will have an output of with frequency R, XL, XC for a series LCR circuit.
(1) 200 V, 50 Hz (2) 2 V, 50 Hz
Resonance occurs for
(3) 200 V, 500 Hz (4) 2 V, 5 Hz
28. A voltage of peak value 283 V and varying
frequency is applied a series L – C – R
combination in which R = 3 , L = 25 mH and
C = 400 F. Then the frequency of the source at
which maximum power is dissipated in the
above is
(1) 51.5 Hz (2) 50.7 Hz
(3) 51.1 Hz (4) 50.3Hz (1) f = fA (2) f = fB
29. In a series LCR circuit, the voltage across the (3) f = fC (4) fB  f  fC
resistance, capacitance and inductance is 10 V 35. In R  L  C series circuit, the potential
each. If the capacitance is short circuited the differences across each element is 20 V. Now
the value of the resistance alone is doubled, then
voltage across the inductance will be
P. D. across R, L and C respectively
10 (1) 20 V, 10 V, 10 V (3) 20 V, 20 V, 20 V
(1) 10 V (2) 10 2 V (3) V (4) 20 V
2 (3) 20 V, 40 V, 40 V (4) 10 V, 20 V, 20 V
30. A series LCR circuit contains inductance 5 mH, 36. The power in ac circuit in given by P = Vrms Irms
capacitance 2 F and resistance 10 . If a cos . The value of cos  in series LCR circuit at
frequency A. C. source is varied, what is the resonance is
frequency at which maximum power is
(1) 1 (2) zero (3) 1/2 (4) 1/ 2
dissipated?
37. A circuit has a resistance of 30 , in series with
5 5
10 10 an inductive reactance of 40 ,. They are
(1) Hz (2) Hz
  connected in series with an ac source. If the
2 5 5 3
peak value of current is 1 A and the voltage is
(3) 10 Hz (4) 10 Hz
  220 V, the power consumed by the circuit is
31. A capacitance C is required to make the power (1) 66 W (2) 6.6 W
factor unity in an ac circuit (f = 50 Hz). (3) 0.66 W (4) 33 W
506 II PUC
Alternating Current
38. In a series LCR circuit at resonance, the applied (1) 120 V and 100 Hz
ac voltage is 220 V. If the potential drop across 120
(2) V and 100 Hz
the inductance is 110 V, then the peak value of 2
(3) 60 V and 200 Hz
potential drop across the resistance is
(4) 60 V and 100 Hz
(1) 110 2V (2) 110 V 4. An inductor of reactance 1  and a resistor of
(3) 220 V (4) 220 2V 2  and a resistor of 2  are connected in series
39. Which of the following combinations should be to the terminals of a 6 V (rms) ac source. The
select for better tuning of a LCR circuit used power dissipated in the circuit is
for communication? (1) 8 W (2) 12 W (3) 14.4 W (4) 18 W
(1) R = 20 , L = 1.5 H, C = 35 F 5. The output of a step-down transformer is
(2) R = 25 , L = 2.5 H, C = 45 F measured to be 24 V when connected to a 12
(3) R = 15 , L = 3.5 H, C = 30 F watt light bulb. The value of the peak current is
(4) R = 25 , L = 1.5 H, C = 45 F
1
40. In the given circuit, the reading of the voltmeter (1) A (2) 2A (3) 2 A (4) 2 2A
2
V1 and V2 are 300 V each
6. The r.m.s. value of potential difference V shown
in the figure is

The reading of the voltmeter V3 and ammeter

A are respectively (1) V0 (2) V0 / 2 (3) V0/ 2 (4) V0 / 3
(1) 100 V, 2.0 A (2) 150 V, 2.2 A 7. Determine the rms value of the emf given by
(3) 220 V, 2.0 A (4) 220 V, 2.2 A
TASK - II E(in volt) = 8 sin (t) + 6sin (2 t)
1. An alternating voltage given by V = 140 sin 314t (1) 5 2 V (2) 7 2V (3) 10 V (4) 10 2V
is connected across a pure resistor of 50 , the 8. An inductor of 30 mH is connected to a 220 V,
rms current through the resistor is 100 Hz ac source. The inductive reactance is
(1) 1.98 A (2) 5.63 A (3) 8.43 A (4) 2.39 A (1) 10.58  (2) 12.64 
200 (3) 18.85  (4) 22.67 
2. An ac source of peak voltage V, 50 Hz.
2 9. Which of the following graphs represents the
1 correct variation of inductive reactance XL with
The value of voltage after s from the start frequency ?
600
is
200
(1) 220 V (2) V (3) 100 V (4) 50 V (1) (2)
2
3. The relation between an ac voltage source and
time in SI units is V = 120 sin (100 t) cos (100
t) V. The value of peak voltage and frequency
(3) (4)
will be respectively

II PUC 507
 Objective Physics
10. A 44 mH inductor is connected to 220 V, 50 Hz  1000 5000
ac supply. The rms value of the current in the (1) (2) (3) 500  (4)
5000  
circuit is
16. In an a.c. circuit V and I are given by V = 100
(1) 12.8 A (2) 13.6 A (3) 15.9A (4) 19.5 A
sin (100 t) volts & I = 100 sin (100 t + /3) mA
11. A circuit is made up of a resistance 1  and
The power dissipated in the circuit is
inductance 0.01 H. An alternating voltage of
(1) 104 watt (2) 10 watt
200 V at 50 Hz is connected, then the phase
(3) 2.5 watt (4) 5.0 watt
difference between the current and the voltage
in the circuit is 17. An alternating voltage V = V0 sin t is applied
across a circuit. As a result, a current I = I0 sin
1   
(1) tan   
1
(2) tan   (t  /2) flows in it. The power consumed per
2 cycle is
1    1    (1) zero (2) 0.5 V0I0
(3) tan   (4) tan  
4 3 (3) 0.707 V I (4) 1.414 V I
0 0 0 0
12. Which of the following graphs represents the 18. In an alternating current circuit consisting of
correct variation of capacitive reactance X C elements in series, the current increase on
with frequency ? increasing the frequency of supply. Which of
the following elements are likely to constitute
the circuit?
(1) Only Resistor (2) Resistor and Inductor
(1) (2) (3) Resistor and Capacitor
(4) Only Inductor
19. A circuit containing a 20  resistor and 0.1 F
capacitor in series is connected to 230 V ac
supply of angular frequency 100 rad s1 . The
(3) (4)
impedance of the circuit is

13. An ac voltage is applied to a resistance R and (1) 105  (2) 104  (3) 106  (4) 1010 
an inductor L in series. If R and the inductive 20. A charged 30 F capacitor is connected to a 27
reactance are both equal to 3, the phase mH inductor. The angular frequency of free
difference between the applied voltage and the oscillations of the circuit is
current in the circuit is (1) 1.1  103 rad s1 (2) 2.1  103 rad s1
(1) /6 (2) /4 (3) /2 (4) zero (3) 3.1  103 rad s1 (4) 4.1  103 rad s1
14. An inductance of negligible resistance whose 21. An LCR series circuit is under resonance. If Im
reactance is 22 at 200 Hz is connected to 200 is current amplitude, Vm is voltage amplitude,
volts, 50 Hz power line. The value of R is the resistance, Z is the impedance, XL is
inductance is inductive reactance and X C is the capacitive
(1) 0.0175 henry (2) 0.175henry reactance, then
(3) 1.75 henry (4) 17.5 henry
Z Vm
15. An alternating voltage of 220 V, 50 Hz frequency (1) I m  V (2) I m  X
m L
is applied across a capacitor of capacitance 2 F.
The impedance of the circuit is Vm V
(3) I m  X (4) I m  m
C R
508 II PUC
Alternating Current
22. At resonance frequency the impedance in series The primary of the transformer has 6000 turns
LCR circuit is and efficiency of the transformer is 60%. If the
(1) maximum (2) minimum output power is 9 kW, then the input power
(3) zero (4) infinity will be
23. A series LCR circuit with R = 20 , L = 1.5 H (1) 11 kW (2) 12 kW (3) 14 kW (4) 15 kW
and C = 35 F is connected to a variable 30. In the question number 32, the number of turns
frequency 200 V ac supply. When the frequency in the secondary is
of the supply equals the natural frequency of the
(1) 20 (2) 80 (3) 120 (4) 160
supply equals the natural frequency of the
31. A power transmission line feeds input power at
circuit. The average power transferred to the
2400 V to a step down transformer with its
circuit in one complete cycle is
primary windings having 4000 turns. What
(1) 200 W (2) 2000 W (3) 100 W (4) 4000 W should be the number of turns in the secondary
24. In a series LCR circuit, the phase difference windings in order to get output power at 240 V?
between the voltage and the current is 45. Then
(1) 400 (2) 420 (3) 424 (4) 436
the power factor will be
32. A transformer is used to light 140 W, 24 V lamp
(1) 0.607 (2) 0.707 (3) 0.808 (4) 1 from a 240 V ac mains. If the main current is
25. To reduce the resonant frequency in an LCR 0.7 A, the efficiency of the transformer is
series circuit with a generator
(1) 63.8% (2) 74 % (3) 83.3% (4) 48%
(1) the generator frequency should be reduced
33. A 220 volts input is supplied to a transformer.
(2) another capacitor should be added in
The output circuit draws a current of 2.0
parallel to the first
ampere at 440 volts. If the efficiency of the
(3) the iron core of the inductor should be
transformer is 80%, the current drawn by the
removed
primary windings of the transformer is
(4) dielectric in the capacitor should be removed (1) 3.6 ampere (2) 2.8 ampere
26. In an LCR series a.c. circuit, the voltage across (3) 2.5 ampere (4) 5.0 ampere
each of the components,, L.C and R is 50 V. 34. A transformer has an efficiency of 80%. It works
The voltage across the LC combination will be at 4 kW and 100 V.If secondary voltage is 240
V, the current in primary coil is
(1) 100 V (2) 50 2V (3) 50 V (4) 0 V
(1) 0.4 A (2) 4 A (3) 10 A (4) 40 A
27. In an LCR series resonant circuit, the
35. A transformer having efficiency of 90% is
capacitance is changed from C to 4C. For the
working on 200 V and 3 kW power supply. If
same resonate frequency, the inductance should
the current in the secondary coil is 6A, the
be changed from L to voltage across the secondary coil and the
L L current in the primary coil respectively are:
(1) 2 L (2) (3) 4 L (4)
2 4 (1) 300 V, 15 A (2) 450 V, 15 a
28. In a transformer the transformation ratio is 0.3. (3) 450 V, 13.5 A (4) 600 V, 15 A
If 220 V ac is fed to the primary, then voltage 36. The primary of a transformer has 400 turns
across the secondary is while the secondary has 2000 turns. The power
(1) 44 V (2) 55 V (3) 60 V (4) 66 V output from the secondary at 1000 V is 12 kW.
29. A step down transformer converts transmission The current through the primary is
line voltage from 11000 V to 220 V. (1) 15 A (2) 12 A (3) 60 A (4) 6 A
II PUC 509
 Objective Physics
37. The magnitude of the emf induced across the Hints and Solutions
secondary of a transformer does not depend on TASK - I
(1) the magnitude of the emf applied across the  
primary 1. (3) Im  2 I rms ; Im  Iavg  I mean ;
2 2
(2) the number of turns in the primary

(3) the number of turns in the secondary  I m  2I rms  I mean
2
(4) the resistance of the primary and the secondary
2. (2) I  100sin  200t 
38. The bandwidth of a resonance curve with
If I = 100; sin (200 t) = 1
respect to a series RLC- circuit is 48 kHz. If the
quality factor is 3, the resonant frequency is  1
200t  t s
(1) 51 kHz (2) 45 kHz 2 400
(3) 144 kHz (4) 16 kHz 3. (4) V = 5 cos t
39. A transformer rated at 10 kW is used to connect  
I = 2 sin t  2sin  t  
a 5 kV transmission line to a 240 V circuit. The  2
ratio of turns in the windings of a transformer 
(1) 5 (2) 20.8 (3) 104 (4) 40  ; P = Irms Vrms cos 
2
40. A current of 5 A is flowing at 220 V in the
 
primary coil of a transformer. If the voltage cos   cos   ; cos   0  P = 0
2
produced in the secondary coil is 2200 V and
50% of power is lost, then the current in the V0
4. (2) Vrms  = 0.707 V0
secondary will be 2
(1) 0.25 A (2) 0.5 A (3) 2.5 A (4) 5 A  
KEY 5. (1) V  Vmax sin  t  
 4
TASK - I
1 3 2 2 3 4 4 2 5 1 When V = Vmax, t = t1
6 1 7 4 8 2 9 3 10 2    
sin  t1    1 ; t1  
11 1 12 3 13 1 14 2 15 2  4  4 2
16 2 17 3 18 2 19 3 20 2 3 3  5
t1  ; t 2   ; t2 
21 2 22 3 23 2 24 2 25 1 4 4 2 
26 1 27 1 28 4 29 3 30 4 6. (1) Conceptual
31 1 32 4 33 3 34 2 35 1 7. (4) V = 100 sin (50 t)
36 1 37 1 38 4 39 3 40 4 V = V0 sin ( t); V = V0 sin (2 vt)
TASK - II
On comparing V0 = 100 V
1 1 2 3 3 4 4 3 5 1
6 2 7 1 8 3 9 2 10 3 V0 100
Vrms   V ;   25 Hz
2 2
11 1 12 3 13 2 14 1 15 4
8. (2) Using I = im sin  t
16 3 17 1 18 3 19 1 20 1
Where i m  2 I rms  2  5A ;
21 4 22 2 23 2 24 2 25 2
 = 2v = 2 (50 Hz) = 100  Hz
26 4 27 4 28 4 29 4 30 3
31 1 32 3 33 4 34 4 35 2 1  1 
and t  s  I  5 2 sin 100  
300  300 
36 3 37 4 38 3 39 2 40 1
510 II PUC
Alternating Current
3 3 16. (2) V  VR2  VL2 
2
 200   150 
2
or I  5 2  5 A
2 2
9. (3) Conceptual  62500  250 V

X L L 2vL XL 3R
10. (2) tan     17. (3) tan   
R R R R R
300 tan   3 ;  = 3
2 1
 2 ; tan  = 1 ;  = 45  = 60 Voltage leads current by 60
300
18. (2) Given R 2  2 L2  2R
11. (1) e = NBA  e also doubled
R
12. (3) Using P = ErmsIrms cos f (L)2 = 3R2; L = 3 R;  3
L
2 2
E rms R R rms R E rms R 1 R
 E rms     3  31.4
f 3   500 Hz
Z Z Z 2
 R  X 2L 
2
2 L 2  3.14 17  103
2 19. (3) VBC = 0
P
 6V    2   14.4 W Given VAB = VAC  VL  VC = VAB = 0
or  2 2  1  2 
  R 6
20. (2) cos     0.75  0.7
13. (1) Given R = 30 ; XL = 20  and v = 50 Hz Z 8
21. (2) V = 200 V; r = 10 
Also, XL = L = 2vL = 2  50 Hz  L
R = 10 + 100  = 110 
or 20 = 2  50  L = 100  L
V 220
Let v, XL and I be new changes in the circuit I   2A
R  110
Therefore, v = 100 Hz; XL P = I2R = 4  100 = 400 W
= 2  100 Hz  L = 200 L 2
22. (3) Z  R 2  X 2L  R 2   2vL 
= 2(2  50  L) or XL = 2  20 = 40 
2
Now, current 2  0.4 
  30    2  50   
2
 30    40 
2

  
E rms 200V
I  
2
R  XL 2
 30    40 
2 V 200
Z = 50 ; I    4A
Z 50
I = 4A 23. (2) For RL-circuit, we have
V0 I0 R R
14. (2) P  cos   0.5  1502  cos 60  5625 W cos   or R 2  2 L2 1/ 2
2 2 R 2  2 L2  
15. (2) VR = 36 V
24. (2)
36
IR = 36; I  V  VR2  VC2  12 12  5  5  144  25  13 V
90
I = 0.4 A; VC = IXL  50 
25. (1) X L  2fL  2  1  100
Parallely = 0.4  (2  60)  L  

114 1 1
L  0.759 H XC    500
0.4 120  3.14 2fc  50 6 
 2    20  10 

II PUC 511
 Objective Physics
Z  R 2   X C  X L   3002   500  100   500 36. (1) In LCR series wkt, At resonance X L = XC
2 2

26. (1) New impedance becomes 2Z when current R R

and Zmin = R ; But cos     1
reduces to half Z R
2 1 220 3
 2Z  R 2   3XC   R 2  9X2C or 2 R 2  X2C  R 2  9XC2 37. (1)   = 66 W
2 2 5
2 2 2 2 XC 3
or 4R  4  C  R  9X C or   0.6 38. (4) At resonance, VL = VC
R 5
2
We know V 2  VR2   VL  VC 
Vs Ns Vs 5000
27. (1) V  N  20  500  Vs  200 V   VR rms  VR ;  VR rms  226
p p

Frequency remains unchanged  VR m   VR rms 2  220 2 V

1 39. (3) For better tunning LCR circuit should
28. (4) F  XL  XC 
2 LC possess high quality factor (Q-factor) of
1 1 L
 = 50.3 Hz
2 25 10  400  106
3 resonance, which is given by Q 
R C
29. (3) R = XL = XC ; V = IR = 10 For high Q, R should be low, L should be high
10 and C should be low
Z  R 2  X 2L  2R  40. (4) Given: Since voltages across L and c are equal
10 2
, the given LCR circuit is in resonance, i.e., Z =
V = IZ = IR  2  10 2
R = 100  and V1 = V2 = 300 V
1
30. (4) Using f 
2 2
2 LC
, we get Also, V   V3    V1  V2 
2

f
1  220   V3  or V3 = 220 V
2 5 10  2 10 
3 6
Let I be the current flowing through ammeter A
V3 220V
5  103 Then I    2.2
i.e., f  Hz R 100

31. (1) If cos  = 1 TASK - II
  0%  X L  XC 1. (1) V = 140 sin 314 t
 Comparing with standard equation
1  1
 20F
C 2 2
 314   V = Vm sin t; Vm = 140 V
L 2
Vm 140 I 2.8
32. (4) At resonance XL =XC; Zmin = R Im    2.8 ; Irms  m   1.98 A
R 50 2 2
33. (3) Conceptual
200
34. (2) Conceptual 2. (3) Vrms  V
2
35. (1) Since V L and V C are equal so circuit is We know Vrms = V0 sin (2rt)
resonance. On increasing the resistance circuit
200  1  200    200 1
current reduces to half so the voltage across  sin  100   sin    
2  600  2 6 2 2
resistance remain same but VL and VC become
half i.e., 10 V each
512 II PUC
Alternating Current
100 100  XL   3  
Vrms  ; Vm  Vrms  2   2  100V 13. (2) tan        1 ;  
2 2  R  3 4
3. (4) V  120sin 100t  cos 100 t  XL 22
14. (1) L    0.0175 H
2n 400  
 60 2sin 100t  cos 100t  
V = 60 [sin (200 t)] 1 1 5000
15. (4) Z  X c   6

V = 60 sin (2 (100))t c 100  2 10 
V = Vm sin (2 v)t  100
16. (3)   ; Vm  100V  Vrms  V
 Vm = 60 V; V = 10 0Hz 3 2

V2 6  6 100
I m  100mA  I rms  mA
4. (3) P    12 W 2
R 3
P = Irms  Vrms  cos 
Ps 12 1
5. (1)  Is rms  V  ;  Is rms  100 100    10 1
s 24 2  103   cos     = 2.5 W
2 2 3 2 2
1 1
 Is  m  2   Is rms  2   A  
2 2 17. (1)   ; cos   cos    0
2 2
T T
V02   O 1 1
6. (2) Vrms  2 2  V0 18. (3) X c    It must be C or RC
T 2  

7. (1) E = 8 sin (t) + 6 sin (2 t)  107 

2
2 1
E = A sin t + B sin (2 t) 19. (1) Z  R   400   
2 C 2  100 
E pear  A 2  B2  82  62  10
2 2
  20   105   105 
E P 10
E rms   5 2 V
2 2 1 1 1
20. (1)   
3 5

8. (3) XL = (2r) L = 2  100  36  10 ; 3 LC 27  10  3 10 81108
XL = 18.85  104
  1.1 103 rad / s
9. (2) X L  2 f L  X L  f 9
21. (4) Under Resonance XL = XC
10. (3)
2
 Z  R 2   XL  XC 
Vrms Vrms V 220
Irms    rms   15.92 A
XL L 2vL 314  44  103 v rms vrms
Z = R  I rms  
z R
 XL 
11. (1) tan  =   22. (2) Under Resonance Zmin = R
 R 
V 2 rms Vrms
2

 100  0.01  23. (2) Pav    X L  X C 

tan    1
 ; tan    ;   tan    z R
 1 
200  200
1   2000W
12. (3) As X c  20

1
 Graph between them will be a rectangular 24. (2) Power factor = cos  cos 45   0.707
hyperbola 2

II PUC 513
 Objective Physics
1  Ns 
25. (2) r  ; 37. (4) Es   N  E p
2 LC
 p
can be reduced by increase in C
2 f0
26. (4) VL = VC = VR = 50 V ; VLC   VL  VC  0 38. (3) Quality factor =
B
27. (4) For same frequency LC  constant f0 = (Q. F) (B. W) = 3(48 kHz) = 144 kHz
39. (2) A 5 kV has to be connected to a 240 V circuit.
C  C 
L2   1  L1    L ; L2 
L
This is a step down transformer. The ratio of
C
 2  4C  4
np
 Ns  primary to secondary coil 5000V / 240 V 
ns
28. (4) Vs   N  Vp = 0.3  220 = 66 V
 p Primary has 20.8 times the turns in the
secondary
P0 P0 9
29. (4)   P ; Pi    15 kW 40. (1) Given the power output is 50% of the input
i  0.6
power, is isVs = (1/2)ipVp; Also given ip = 5A, Vp
 VS   220  = 220 V and Vs = 2200 V
30. (3) N s   V  N P     6000 = 120
 P  11000 
1 i p Vp 1 5A  220V
is   is    0.25 A
 VS  2 Vs 2 2200V
31. (1) NS   V  N P
 P

V 
N s   s  N p  240  4000
 Vp  2400
 
***
NS = 400
P0 P0 140
32. (3)   P  V I   83.3%
i i i 240  0.7
P0 V0i0 V0i0 1
33. (4)   P  V i ; ii  V  
i i i i

440  2 10
  =5A
220 8
PP 4000
34. (4) VPIP = PP; IP  V ;  40A
P 100
P0
35. (2)   P ; P0  Pi = 0.9  3 kW
i

P0 = 2.7 kW; V0i0 = 2.7  1000

2700
V0   450 V ; ViPi = Pi
6
200  ii = 3000 ; ii = 15 A
 NS  2000
36. (3) I P   N  IS   12  60A
 P 400

514 II PUC
Electromagnetic Waves

CHAPTER Electromagnetic Waves

Need for displacement current. Electromagnetic waves and their

8
characteristics (qualitative ideas only). Transverse nature of electromagnetic
waves.Electromagnetic spectrum (radio waves, microwaves, infrared, visible,
ultraviolet, x-rays, gamma rays) including elementary facts about their uses.

PAST NEET PAPERS SUBTOPIC LEVEL ANALYSIS

NEET 2016 NEET 2016 Forecasting of
Year NEET 2018 NEET 2017
PHASE-I PHASE-II NEET-2019

No of
question 1 1 0 0 1
Asked

direction of peak value of displacement

Subtopic - -
magnetic field magnetic field current

 The theory of electromagnetic waves was developed by Maxwell in 1864. An accelerating electric
charge or an electric charge oscillating harmonically with frequency produces electromagnetic wave
of same frequency.
 The concept of displacement current has made the laws of electricity and magnetism symmetrical.
According to Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction, the magnitude of induced emf is equal to
the rate of change of magnetic flux. Now the existence of emf implies that there is electric field.
 Faraday’s law as time varying magnetic field produces an electric field. By symmetry, a time varying
electric field should produce magnetic field and this is what displacement curent does. The symme-
try of electricity and magnetism led to the existence of electromagnetic waves.
 Ampere’s circuital law
According to this law the line integral of magnetic field along any closed path or circuit is 0 times
 
the total current threading the closed circuit i.e.  B.dl   i 0

 Inconsistency of Ampere’s law

Maxwell explained that Ampere’s law is valid only for steady current or when the electric field does
not change with time. To see this inconsistency consider a parallel plate capacitor being charged by
a battery. During the charging time varying current flows through connecting wires.
  
Applying Ampere’s law for loop l1 and l2 l1
B.dl  0i But 
l2
B.dl  0
(Since no current flows through the region between the plates). But practically
 it is observed that
there is a magnetic field between tha plates. Hence Ambere’s law fails i.e. 
l1
B.dl   0i
 Modified ampere’s Circuital law or Ampere-Maxwell’s circuital law
Maxwell assumed that some sort of current most be flowing between the capacitor plates during
charging process. He named it displacement current. Hence modified law is as follows
   d E 
 B.dl  0  ic  id  or  B.dl   0  ic   0
 dt 


II PUC 515
 Objective Physics
where ic : Displacement current = current due to flow of charges in a conductor & id : Displacement
dE 

current   0  current due to the changing electric field between the plates of the capacitor
dt 
 Displacement current  id  =conduction current  ic   ic and id in a circuit, may not be continuous
but their sum is always continuous.
 Maxwells Displacement Current:
 The rate of change of electrical flux produces a current called displacement current.
 The displacement current is found between the plates of a condenser during its charging or
discharging.
 Displacement current is found between the plates of a condenser when AC is applied.
d E dE dE  q
 id 0 & id 0 A where is variable electrical field E  
dt dt dt 0 0 A
 If charge on the plates of the capacitor increases by dq in time dt then dq = I dt
dq Idt dE I
change in electric field is dE = =  =
0 A 0 A dt 0 A

dE d d E d
I = 0 A = 0 d t (EA) = 0 d t ( E = EA) Id  0 E
dt dt
 Displacement current in the gap between the condenser plates

+ E
–
+ –
I=Ic + – I=Ic
I=Id
+ –
+ –
+ –
 When a capacitor is connected across the battery through the connecting wires there is flow of
conduction current, while thorugh the gap between the plates of capacitor,there is flow of
displacement current.
dV
 When a variable potential difference is applied to the plates of a condenser of capacity i d = C .
dt
 If AC is applied to the plates of a condenser variable magnetic field with the same frequency is
V 1 dv d
produced. ic  id  ic  X  VC ; where X C   C & i c  C.  C.  V0 Sin t   C.V0  Cos t
c dt dt
MAXWELL’S EQUATIONS :
  q
net
 Gauss’ law for electricity, with the usual notation  E. d A.  --------( 1)
0
 It establishes a relation between the net charge enclosed in a closed volume to the total electric flux
associated with its surface area.
 It shows that isolated charge do exist and electric lines of force start from positive charge and terminate
at negative charge.
 
 Gauss’ law for magnetism,  B. d A.  0 -------------- (2)

516 II PUC
Electromagnetic Waves
 The right hand side of Equation (2) confirms that equal number of magnetic lines of force enter and
leave a certain volume, as they are closed curves.
  d
 It shows that isolated magnetic monopoles do not exist. Faraday’s law,  E. dl.   dtB ---------- (3)
 This law shows that a time varying magnetic field induces an electrical field.
 Ampere-Maxwell law, which relates the magnetic field induced due to the changing electric flux as
  dE
well as to the current due to flow of charges, as  B. dl.   i
0 c  0 0  0  ic  id  ----- (4)
dt
The above four equations viz., Eqns. (1) to (4) are known as the Maxwell’s equations.
 Important Points Regarding Electromagnetic Waves Characteristics
y

E0

x-axis
(direction of propagation
B0 is E × B)
B (Transverse in nature)

z
 Both electric and magnetic field vary in phase with each other.

 Ey = E0 sin (t – kx), BZ = B0 sin (t – kx), speed v 
k
1 1 c
 In vacuum, c  . In a medium v  . Refractive index     r r .
0 0  v
E E E
  0  rms = c (speed)
B B0 Brms
1 1 B02 1 1 B02
 Average energy density U aV   0E 02    0E 02 
2 2 0 4 4 0
 Poynting vector S represents instantaneous intensity at a point
E B EB
S  or S  . Here E  B represents the direction of flow of energy.
0 0
 Intensity : Average rate of flow of energy in a direction per unit time per unit area.
ErmsBrms 1 E 0B0
I = Sav =  ; I = c × Uav or U av  I
0 2 0 c
P
For a point source of power P, Intensity at a distance r from the source is I  .
4r 2
I P 1 P P E0 P 0
Now U av     0 E02   E0  ; B0  
c 4r 2 c 2 4r 2 c 2 r 2 c  0 c 2r 2 c
 Radiation pressure
(a) For perfectly absorbing surface P = I/c (b) For perfectly reflecting surface P = 2I/c
(c) For all other surfaces I/c < P < 2I/c

II PUC 517
 Objective Physics
ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM : All the known radiations form a big family of electromagnetic
waves. We call this family as the complete electromagnetic spectrum. It includes: gamma rays, X-
rays, ultraviolet light, visible light, infrared light, microwaves and radio waves.
 Electromagnetic Spectrum

APPLICATIONS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

The following are some of the uses of electromagnetic waves.
 Radio and micro wave radiations are used in radio and T.V. communication systems
 Infrared radiations are used (a) in revealing the secret writings on the ancient walls (b) in green
houses to keep the plants warm (c) In warfare, for looking through haze, fog or mist as these
radiations can pass through them. Ultraviolet radiations are used in the detection of invisible
writing, forged documents, finger prints in forensic laboratory and to preserve the food stuffs.
 The study of Infrared, visible and ultraviolet radiations helped us to know through spectra, the
structure of the molecules and arrangement of electrons in the external shells.
 X-rays can pass through flesh and blood but not through bones. This property of X-rays is used
in medical diagnosis, after X-rays photographs are made.The study of X-rays has revealed the
atomic structure and crystal structure.The study of -rays provides us valuable information
about the structure of the atomic nuclei. Electromagnetic waves of suitable frequencies are used
in medical science for the treatment of various diseases.
 Electric waves (frequency 50 to 60 Hz) are used for lighting. These are weak waves having
wavelength 5 × 106 to 6 × 106 m and can be produced from A.C. circuits.
518 II PUC
Electromagnetic Waves
EXAMINATION CORNER

1. An em wave is propagating in a medium with

 (1) 4.58 × 10 6 J / m 3 (2) 6.37 × 10 9 J / m 3
a velocity V  Vi. The instantaneous oscillating
(3) 81.35 × 10 12 J / m 3 (4) 3.3 × 10 3 J / m 3
electric field of this em wave is along +y axis.
Then the direction of oscillating magnetic field A: (1) Erms = 720
of the em wave will be along (NEET-2018) The average total energy density
(1) –y direction (2) +z direction 1 1 2
 0 Eo2  0  2Erms  0 Erms 2
(3) –z direction (4) –x direction 2 2
  
A: (2) E  B  V ; 2
 8.85  10 12   720   4.58  10 6 J / m3
 
Ej  B  Vi So, B  Bk
  5. In order to establish an instantaneous displacemet
current of 1 mA in the space between the plates
Direction of propagation is along +z direction.
of 2  F parallel plate capacitor, the potential
2. In an electromagnetic wave in free space the
difference need to apply is
root mean square value of the electric field is
(1) 100 Vs 1 (2) 200 Vs 1
Erms = 6 V/m. The peak value of the magnetic
field is (NEET-2017) (3) 300 Vs 1 (4) 500 Vs 1
(1) 1.41 × 10–8 T (2) 2.83 × 10–8 T A: (4) I d  1mA  10 3 A , C  2  F  2  10 6 F
(3) 0.70 × 10–8 T (4) 4.23 × 10–8 T
d dV
Erms I D  IC  CV   c ;
 c dt dt
A: (2)
Brms
dV I D 10 3
Therefore,    500 Vs 1
Erms 6 dt C 2  10 6
Brms   ; Brms  2  10 8
c 3  108 Therefore, applying a varying potential differ-
B ence of 500 Vs 1 would produce a displace
Brms  0 ; B  2  B ment current of desired value.
2 0 rms

6. An electromagnetic wave with frequency 

8
 2  2  10 8  2.83  10 T and wavelength  travels in the + y direction.
3. Out of the following options which one can be Its magnetic field is along + x axis. The vector
used to produce a propagating electromagnetic equation for the associated electric field
wave ? (of am plitude E0 ) is
(1) A charge moving at constant velocity
  2  
(2) A stationary charge (1)   E0 cos  t 
E yx
  
(3) A chargeless particle
  2  
(4) An accelerating charge (2) E   E0 cos  t  y x
A: (4) To generate electromagnetic waves we need   
accelerating charge particle.   2  
(3) E  E0 cos  t  yz
4. The rms value of the electric field of the light   
coming from the Sun is 720 N/C. The average   2  
total energy density of the electromagnetic wave (4) E   E0 cos  t  yz
  
is
II PUC 519
 Objective Physics
A: (3) In an electromagnetic wave electric field and 10. The energy of electromagnetic wave in vacuum
magnetic field are perpendicular to the direc is given by the relation
tion of propagation of wave. The vector equa E2 B2 1 2 1 2
(1)  (2)  0 E   0 B
tion for the electric field is 2 2 2 2
0 0
 2  

E  E0 cos  t  yz E B 2 1 2
2 B2
  (3) (4)  0 E 
 c 2 2 0
7. The average electric field of electromagnetic
1 2
B2
waves in certain region of free space is A: (4)  0 E0 is electric energy density &
2 2 0 is
9  10 4 NC 1 . Then the average magnetic field magnetic energy density.
in the same region is of the order of 1 2 B2
So, total energy   E
0 0 
(1) 27  104 T (2) 3  1012 T 2 2 0
11. A plane electromagnetic wave is incident on a
1 12
(3)    10 T (4) 3  1012 T plane surface of area A, normally and is
3
perfectly reflected. If energy E strikes the surface
A: (2) For electromagnetic waves we know that,
in time t then average pressure exerted on the
E 9  10 4 surface is (c = speed of light)
c   3  108 ms1 ;
B B (1) zero (2) E/Atc (3) 2E/Atc (4) E/c
B  3  10 12 T . E
p
8. The electric field of an electromagnetic wave A: (3) Incident momentum, c
travelling through vaccum is given by the equa- For perfectly reflecting surface with normal in
tion E  E0 sin  kx  t  . The quantity that is 2E
cidence p  2 p 
independent of wavelength is c
k p 2 E F 2E
(1) k (2) (3) k 2 (4)  F  & P 
 t ct A ctA
2 12. An electromagnetic wave travels along z-axis.
A: (2) Here, k  ,   2
 Which of the following pairs of space and time
k 2 /  1 1 varying fields would generate such a wave ?
     c   
 2  c
(1) E x , B y (2) E y , B x (3) Ez , Bx (4) E y , B z
where c is the speed of electromagnetic wave
in vacuum. It is a constant whose value is 3 × A: (1) Ex and By would generate a plane EM wave
  
106 ms 1 travelling in z-direction, E, B and k from a
9. The electric and the magnetic field associated 
right handed system k is along z-axis. As
with an E.M. wave, propagating along the +z
axis, can be represented by i  j  k  Ex i  By j  Ck
   
(1)  E  E0 i , B  B0 j  (2)  E  E0 k , B  B0 i 
i.e., E is along x-axis and B is along y-axis.
    13. Microwave oven acts on the principle of :
       
(3)  E  E0 j , B  B0 i  (4)  E  E0 j , B  B0 k  (1) giving rotational energy to water molecules
A: (1) E.M. wave always propagates in a direc- (2) giving translational energy to water molecules
tion perpendicular to both electric and magnetic (3) giving vibrational energy to water molecules
fields. So, electric and magnetic fields should (4) transferring electrons from lower to higher
be along + X– and + Y–directions respectively. energy levels in water molecule

520 II PUC
Electromagnetic Waves
A: (3) Microwave oven acts on the principle of giv 17. Match List - I (Electromagnetic wave type) with
ing vibrational energy to water molecules. List - II (Its association/application) and select
14. The electric field associated with an e.m. wave in the correct option from the choices given below
 the lists:
vacuum is given by E  i 40 cos kz  6  10 t ,
  8
List 1
where E, z and t are in volt/m, meter and seconds 1. Infrared waves
respectively. The value of wave vector k is 2. Radio waves
(1) 2 m  1 1
(2) 0.5 m (3) 6 m
 1 (4) 3 m 1 3. X-rays
A: (1) On comparing the given equation to 4. Ultraviolet rays
 List 2
E  a0 i cos t  kz  ;   6  108 z , (i) To treat muscular strain
2  8 (ii) For broadcasting
 6  10 1
k  ; k   2m (iii) To detect fracture of bones
r c c 3  10 8
(iv) Absorbed by the ozone layer of the
15. The charge on a parallel plate capacitor varies
atmosphere
as q  q0 cos 2t . The plates are very large and 1 2 3 4
close together (area = A, separation = d). The (1) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i)
displacement current through the capacitor is (2) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii)
(1) q0 2 sin  t (2) q0 2 sin 2t (3) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv)
(4) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
(3) q0 2 sin  t (4) q0 sin 2t
A: (4) (1) Infrared rays are used to treat muscular
A: (2) Displacement current, I D = conduction cur strain because these are heat rays.
rent, IC (2) Radio waves are used for broadcasting
because these waves have very long wavelength
dq d ranging from few centimeters to few hundred
   q0 cos 2t   q0 2 sin 2 t
dt dt kilometers
16. A radiation of energy ‘E’ falls normally on a (3) X-rays are used to detect fracture of bones
perfectly reflecting surface. The momentum because they have high penetrating power but
transferred to the surface is they can’t penetrate through denser medium
(C = Velocity of light) like dones.
(4) Ultraviolet rays are absorbed by ozone of
2E 2E E E the atmosphere.
(1) (2) 2 (3) 2 (4)
C C C C 18. A plane electromagnetic wave travels in free
A: (1) Momentum of light falling on reflecting sur- 
space along X-direction. If the value of B (in
E tesla) at a particular point in space and time is
face p  . As surface is perfectly reflecting so 
C 1.2 × 10 8 k . The value of E (in Vm 1 ) at that
point is
E
momentum reflect p '    (2)   (4) 
C (1) 1.2 j 3.6 k (3)1.2 k 3.6 j
 

 , E  ? From formula,
A: (4) Given : B  1.2  10 8 kT

E  Bc   1.2  10 8 T  3  10 8 ms 1   3.6Vm 1
So, momentum transferred 
B is along Z-direction and the wave propagates
E  E  2E 
along X-direction. Therefore E should be along
 p  p'    
C  C C 
Y-direction. Thus, E  3.6 jVm1
II PUC 521
 Objective Physics
19. Photons of an electromagnetic radiation has an (1) p = 0, E = 0 (2) p  0, E  0
energy 11 keV each. To which region of elec (3) p  0, E = 0 (4) p = 0, E  0
tromagnetic spectrum does it belong ? A: (2) EM waves carry momentum and hence can
(1) X-ray region (2) Ultra violet region exert pressure on surfaces. They also transfer
(3) Infrared region (4) Visible region energy to the surface so p  0 and E  0.
23. The decreasing order of wavelength of infra-
hc hc
A: (1) E   red, microwave, ultraviolet and gamma rays is
 E
(1) microwave, infrared, ultraviolet, gamma rays
34 8
6.6  10  3  10 (2) gamma rays, ultraviolet, infrared, micro-waves
   12.4 Å
11  1000  1.6  10 19 (3) microwaves, gamma rays, infrared, ultravio let
(4) infrared, microwave, ultraviolet, gamma rays
A: (1) The decreasing order of the wavelengths is
20. A plane electromagnetic wave travels in free as given below microwave, infrared, ultravio
space along x-axis. At a particular point in let, gamma rays.
space, the electric field along y-axis is 9.3 V m 1 . 24. The speed of electromagnetic wave in vacuum
The magnetic induction 2) along z-axis is depends upon the source of radiation. It
(1) increases as we move from  -rays to radio
(1) 3.1  10 8 T (2) 3  10 5 T
waves
(3) 3  10 6 T (4) 9.3  10 6 T
(2) decreases as we move from  -rays to radio
A: (1) Velocity of light
waves
E E 9.3 (3) is same for all of them
C  B  8
 3.1  10 8 T
B C 3  10 (4) is not same for all of them
21. The ratio of amplitude of magnetic field to the A: (3) Speed of EM waves in vacuum
amplitude of electric field for an electromagnetic 1
wave propagating in vacuum is equal to 
0 0 = constant
(1) the speed of light in vacuum
(2) reciprocal of speed of light in vacuum 25. When an electromagnetic waves enter the
(3) the ratio of magnetic permeability to the ionised layer of ionosphere, the motion of
electric susceptibility of vacuum electron cloud produces a space current and
(4) unity the electric field has its own capacitative
A: (2) The average energy stored in the electric displacement current, then
(1) the space current is in phase of displacement
1 2
field U E   0 E .The average energy stored in current
2
(2) the space current lags behind the
2
1B displacement current by a phase 180°.
the magnetic field  U B  ,
2 0 (3) the space current lags behind the
displacement current by a phase 90°.
According to conservation of energy U E  U B ;
(4) the space current leads the displacement
B2 B 1 current by a phase 90°.
 0 0  2 ;   0  0 
E E c A: (2)
22. A plane electromagnetic wave is incident on a
material surface.If the wave delivers momentum
p and energy E, then
522 II PUC
Electromagnetic Waves

TASK - I
(1) 3.6  108 Vs–1 (2) 3.6  109 Vs–1
1. One requires 11 eV of energy to dissociate a
carbon monoxide molecule into carbon and (3) 1.8 108 Vs–1 (4) 1.8  109 Vs–1
oxygen atoms. The minimum frequency of the 7. The force exerted by sun light of intensity 1350
appropriate electromagnetic radiation to Wm–2 reflected from a reflecting surface of an
achieve the dissociation lies in aluminum sheet of area 104 m2 is
(1) visible region (2) Infrared region (1) 0.72 N (2) 0.09 N
(3) Ultraviolet region (4) Microwave region (3) 45 N (4) 0.18 N
–2
2. Light with an energy flux of 20 W cm falls on 8. The electromagnetic energy contained in cubic
a non- reflecting surface at normal incidence. meter near the earth’s surface is (given intensity
If the surface has an area of 30 cm2, the total of sunlight under clear sky is 103 W m–2
momentum delivered (for complete absorption) (1) 3.3  10–6 J (2) 3.3 J
during 30 minutes is
(3) 3  10–3 J (4) 3.0  10–5J
(1) 36  10–5 Kg m s–1 (2) 36  10–4 Kg m s–1
9. A solar cell has a light gathering area of 10 cm2
4 –1 7 –1
(3) 108  10 Kg s (4) 1.08  10 kg ms and produce 0.2 A at 0.8 V (DC) when
3. The electric field intensity produced by the illuminated with sunlight of intensity 1000 W
radiations coming from 100 W bulb at a 3 m m–2. The efficiency of the solar cell is
distance is E. The electric field intensity (1) 8% (2) 16% (3) 23% (4) 32%
produced by the radiations coming from 50 W 10. A parallel plate capacitor made of circular
blub at the same distance is plates of radius 6 cm has a capacitance of 100
E E pF. The capacitor is connected to a 230 V ac
(1) (2) 2E (3) (4) 2E supply with a frequency of 300 rad s–1. The rms
2 2
  value of the displacement current is
4. If E and B represent electric and magnetic field
(1) 7 A (2) 0.7 A
vectors of the electromagnetic wave, the
direction of propagation of electromagnetic (3) 7 mA (4) 7 A
wave is along 11. A parallel plate capacitor consists of circular
      plates with radius 10 cm, separated by a
(1) E (2) B (3) B  E (4) E  B
distance of 0.5 mm. The capacitor is charged
5. A charged particle oscillates about its mean
by an external source such that the electric field
equilibrium position with a frequency of 109 Hz.
The electromagnetic waves produced between the plates changes at a rate 5  1013
(1) will have frequency of 2  109 Hz Vm–1s–1. The displacement current through the
(2) will have speed of 30 ms–1 capacitor is
(3) will have a wavelength of 0.3 m (1) 1.4 mA (2) 14 mA
(4) fall in the region of infrared waves (3) 14 A (4) 1.4 A
6. A parallel palate capacitor consists of two
12. The intensity of sun light at the surface of earth
circular plates each of radius 10 cm and
is 1300 Wm–2. The amplitude of electric field in
separated by 5 mm. By an external source the
sun light is
capacitor is being charged. The charging
current is 0.1 A. The rate of change of potential (1) 1 V m–1 (2) 10 V m–1

difference between the plates is nearly (3) 100 Vm–1 (4) 1000 V m–1

II PUC 523
 Objective Physics
13. An observer is 1.8 m from an isotropic point 20. Out of the four Maxwell’s equations above,
source of light of power 250 W. The rms value which one shows non-existence of monopoles?
of the electric field at the position of the observer (1) (i) and (iv) (2) (ii) only
is nearly (3) (iii) only (4) none of these
–1 –1
(1) 5 Vm (2) 50 Vm 21. The waves related to telecommunication are
–1 –1
(3) 500 Vm (4) 0.5 V m (1) infra red (2) visible light
14. The amplitude of the electric field in a parallel (3) microwaves (4) ultraviolet rays
–2
beam of light of intensity 8 W m is 22. The frequencies of x-rays, -rays and ultraviolet
–1 –1
(1) 77.6 N C (2) 38.8 N C rays are respectively a,b and c. Then:
(3) 7.76 N C–1 (4) 3.88 N C–1 (1) a < b, b < c (2) a > b, b > c
15. A point source of electromagnetic radiation has (3) a > b, b > c (4) a < b, b > c
an average power output of 800 W. The rms 23. Maxwell’s equations describe the fundamental
value of electric field at a distance 4 m from the laws of
source is (1) electricity only (2) magnetism only
(1) 57.8 V m–1 (2) 56.72 V m–1 (3) mechanics only (4) both (1) and (2)

(3) 64.7 V m–1 (4) 54.77 V m–1 24. Total energy of EM waves in free space is given by
16. In an electromagnetic wave E2 B2  0 E 2 0 B 2
(1) E and B are parallel to each other (1)  (2) 
2 0 2 0 2 2
(2) E is parallel to the direction of propagation
(3) Speed is independent of the nature of medium E 2  B2 0E2 B2
(3) (4) 
(4) Speed decreases with increase in dielectric C 2 2 0
constant of the medium 25. Electromagnetic waves are transverse in nature
17. The electromagnetic waves do not transport is evident by
(1) energy (2) charge (1) polarization (2) interference
(3) momentum (4) information (3) reflection (4) diffraction
18. Displacement current is continuous 26. A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 40
(1) when electric field is changing in the circuit MHz travels in free space in the X-direction. At
(2) when magnetic field is changing in the circuit some point and at some instant, the electric field
(3) in both types of fields. has its maximum value of 750 N/C in Y
direction. the magnitude and direction of
(4) through wire and resistance only
magnetic field will be
19. The Maxwells four equations are written as
(1) 2.5 T in X-direction
  q0   (2) 2.5 T in Y-direction

(i) E.dS 
0 
(ii) B.dS  0
(3) 2.5 T in Z-direction
  d   (4) none of these
(iii) 
 E.dl  dt  B.dS 27. The sun radiates electromagnetic energy at the
  rate of 3.9  1026 W. Its radius is 6.96  108 m.
d  
(iv) 
dt 
 B.dl   0 0 E.dS The intensity of sunlight at the solar surface will
be (in W/m2)
The equations which have sources of and are
(1) 1.4  104 (2) 2.8  105
(1) (i), (ii), (iii) (2) (i), (ii)
(3) 4.2  106 (4) 5.6  107
(3) (i) and (iii) only (4) (i) and (iv) only
524 II PUC
Electromagnetic Waves
28. A parallel plate capacitor of plate separation 2 5. The electromagnetic radiation used in the long
mm is connected in an electric circuit having distance photography is
2
source voltage 400V. If the plate area is 60 cm , (1) UV – radiation (2) IR – radiation
then the value of displacement current for will be (3) visible radiation (4) gamma- radiation
2
(1) 1.062 amp (2) 1.062  10 amp 6. Green house effect is mainly due to
(3) 1.062  103 amp (4) 1.062  104 amp (1) Visible radiation (2) Ultraviolet radiation
29. A parallel plate capacitor consists of two (3) Infrared radiation (4) X -rays
circular plates each of radius 12cm and 7. X –rays are generated by
separated by 5.0 mm. The capacitor is being (1) an electrical L- C circuit
charged by an external source. The charging (2) heating an object to a very high temperature
current is constant and is equal to 0.15 A. The (3) slowing down high energy electrons on
rate of change of potential difference between colliding with an object
the plates will be (4) nuclear fission
(1) 8.173  107 Vs1 (2) 7.817  108 Vs1 8. The ratio of contributions made by the electric
field and magnetic field components to the
(3) 1.873  109 Vs1 (4) 3.781  1010 Vs1
30. The sun delivers 103 Wm2 of electromagnetic intensity of an EM wave is
flux to the earth’s surface. The total power that (1) c : 1 (2) c2 : 1 (3) 1 : 1 (4) c :1
is incident on a roof of dimensions 8m  20 m 9. An EM wave radiates outwards from a dipole
will be antenna, with E0 as the amplitude of its electric
3 4
(1) 6.4  10 W (2) 3.4  10 W field vector. The electric field E 0 which
5
(3) 1.6  10 W (4) none of these transports significant energy form the source
TASK - II falls off as
1. In electromagnetic wave if ue and um are mean
1 1
electric and magnetic energy densities, then (1) 3 (2) 2
r r
(1) ue = um (2) ue > um 1
1 (3) (4) remains constant
2 2 r
(3) ue < um (4) u e  u m
2 10. A plane electromagnetic wave propagating
2. If the speed of gamma rays, X-rays and
along x-direction can have the following pairs
microwaves in free space are v g, vx, and vm
of E and B
respectively, then the correct relation is
(1) vg > vx > vm (2) vg = vx = vm (1) Ex, By (2) Ey, Bz (3) Bx, Ey (4) Ez, Bx
(3) vg < vx < vm (4) vg > vx < vm 11. The source of electromagnetic waves can be a
3. A radio wave has a maximum magnetic field of charge
–4
10 T on arriving at a receiving antenna. The (1) moving with a constant velocity
maximum electric field intensity of such a wave is (2) moving in a circular orbit
(1) 3 104Vm–1 (2) 5.8  10–9 Vm–1 (3) at rest (4) in an electric field
–13
(3) 3.3  10 Vm –1
(4) zero 12. At every instant the ratio of the magnitude of
4. Electromagnetic waves travel in a medium with the electric field to the magnetic field in an
–8 –1
a speed of 2  10 m s . If the relative electromagnetic wave in vacuum is equal to
permeability of the medium is 1, then the (1) the speed of radio waves
relative permittivity is: (2) the speed of -rays
(1) 1 (2) 1.5 (3) 2 (4) 2.25 (3) the speed of light (4) all of the above
II PUC 525
 Objective Physics
13. The potential difference between the plates of 20. In a plane electromagnetic wave, the electric
a parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 5 F field oscillates sinusoidally at a frequency of
varies at the rate of 300 k Vs –1 . The 2  10 10 Hz and amplitude 48 Vm 1 . The
displacement current between the plate is amplitude of oscillating magnetic field will be
(1) 1 A (2) 0.6 A (3) 1.66 A (4) 1.5 A
1
14. The maximum radiation pressure exerted by (1) ×10-8 Wb/m 2 (2) 16×10-8 Wb/m 2
16
sunlight outside earth’s atmosphere on a black
flat surface is (solar constant = 1350 Wm–2) 1
(3) 12×10-7 Wb/m 2 (4) ×10-7 Wb/m 2
(1) 2.22  10–5 Pa (2) 0.06 Pa 12
(3) 0.09 Pa (4) 4.5  10–6Pa 21. A point source of electromagnetic radiation has
15. The amplitude of electric field in an an average power output of 800W, The
electromagnetic wave is 10 V m–1. The frequency maximum value of electric field at a distance
of wave is 5  1014 Hz. The wave is propagating 3.5 m from the source will be 62.6 V/m, the
along z-axis, the average energy density of maximum value of magnetic field will be
electric field is (1) 2.09  105 T (2) 2.09  106 T
(1) 2.21  10–10 J/m3 (2) 4.21  10–10 J/m3 (3) 2.09  107 T (4) 2.09  108 T
(3) 3.21  10–10 J/m3 (4) 1.21  10–10 J/m3
22. If a source of power 4 kW produces 10 20
16. Sun light falling vertically on a surface at the
photons/second, the radiation belong to a part
sea level has a intensity of 1600 Wm–2. Assuming
of the spectrum called
only 50% of the incident light is absorbed, the
(1) X – rays (2) Ultraviolet rays
radiation pressure on the surface is
(3) Microwaves (4) rays
(1) 8  10–4 Pa (2) 8  10–5 Pa
23. The velocity of all radiowaves in free space is
(3) 8  10–6 Pa (4) 8  10–7 Pa
3  10 8 ms 1 , the frequency of a wave of
17. Which of the following statements is not
wavelength 150 m is
correct?
(1) photographic plates are sensitive to (1) 45 MHz (2) 2 MHz
infrared rays (3) 2 KHz (4) 20 KHz
(2) photographic plates are sensitive to 24. An LC circuit contains inductance L = 1H and
ultraviolet rays capacitance C = 0.01 H. The wavelength of
(3) Infra-red rays are invisible but can cast electromagnetic wave generated is nearly
shadows like visible light (1) 0.5 m (2) 5 m (3) 188 m (4) 30 m
(4) infrared photons have more energy than 25. About 5% of the power of a 100 W light bulb is
photons of visible light converted to visible radiation. The average
18. Electromagnetic radiation of frequency 3  105 intensity of visible radiation at a distance of 1
MHz can be produced by which of the following m from the bulb:
wave (1) 0.4 Wm2 (2) 0.5 Wm2
(1) Radiowave (2) X-rays
(3) 0.6 Wm2 (4) 0.8 Wm2
(3) Ultraviolet (4) Microwave
26. A point source of electromagnetic radiation has
19. An electromagnetic wave passing through
an average power output of 800W. The
vacuum is described by the equation; E = E0 sin
maximum value of electric field at a distance
(kx  t) and B = B0 sin (kx  t); then
3.5 m from the source will be 62.6 V/m, the
(1) E0 = B0 (2) E0 = B0k
energy density at a distance 3.5 m from the
(3) E0B0 = k (4) E0k = B0 source will be (in joule/m­3)
526 II PUC
Electromagnetic Waves
(1) 1.73  105 (2) 1.73  106 Hints and Solutions
TASK - I
(3) 1.73  107 (4) 1.73  108
hc hc
27. An electromagnetic radiation has an energy 1. (3) E  in e V   ; 
e E
14.4 KeV. To which region of electromagnetic
spectrum does it belong? 1240 nm.eV
  11.2 nm ; It lies in UV region
11 eV
(1) Infra red region (2) Visible region
(3) X-rays region (4) ray region Energy  u 
2. (2) Momentum (P) = Speed of light c
28. The value of magnetic field between plates of  
capacitor a distance 1 m from centre, where IAt
P
electric field varied by V/m/s. c
(1) 5.56  108 T (2) 5.56  103 T 20  104  30  104  30  60
  36 104 kg ms 1
(3) 5.56 T (4) 5.56 T 3  108
29. A plane electromagnetic wave of wave intensity P
3. (3) I  Also I  c0 E 2
2
6 Wm strikes a small mirror of area 40 cm , 2
4r 2
held perpendicular to the approaching wave.
P2 50 E
The momentum transferred by the wave to the  E2  P; E 2  E1 P  E 
1 100 2
mirror each second will be
4. (4) Conceptual
(1) 6.4  107 kg-m/s (2) 4.8  108 kg-m/s
(3) 3.2  109 kg-m/s (4) 1.6  1010 N c 3 108
5. (3)     0.3 m
v 3  109
30. In the above question the radiation force on the
mirror will be dv I  current 
6. (4) 
(1) 6.4  107 N (2) 4.8  108 N dt c  capaci tan ce 
(3) 3.2  109 N (4) 1.6  1010 N I Id
  Id 4
KEY   0 A  0 A  
2
TASK - I   0 r 4
 d 
1 3 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 3
 1  4Id 9 109  4  0.1 5  103
6 4 7 2 8 1 9 2 10 4   2 
 4 0  r 102
11 3 12 4 13 2 14 1 15 4
16 4 17 4 18 1 19 4 20 2  1.8  109 Vs 1
21 3 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 1 2I
7. (2) Radiation pressure Pr 
26 3 27 4 28 4 29 3 30 3 c
Force = Pressure  Area
TASK - II
1 1 2 2 3 1 4 4 5 2 2I 2  1350
 A  104 = 0.09 N
c 3  108
6 3 7 3 8 1 9 3 10 2
11 2 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 1 Intensity
8. (1) Energy per unit volume = speed of light  c 
16 3 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 2
21 3 22 1 23 2 24 3 25 1 103
  3.3 106 J
26 4 27 3 28 1 29 4 30 4 3  108
9. (2) P0 = V0  i0 = 0.8  0.2 = 0.16 W

II PUC 527
 Objective Physics
Pi = Ii  A = 1000  103; Pi = 1 W 23. (4)
24. (4)
P   0.16 
   0  100     100  16% 25. (1)
P
 i  1 
Em 750
26. (3) Bm    2.5T in Z  direction
Vrms C 3  108
10. (4)  I d rms   Ic rms  X  Vrms C
c
P 3.9  1026
= 230  300  100 10 12
= 6.9 A  7 A I 
27. (4) surface A  2
4  3.14   6.96   1016
d E d  E.A  dE
11. (3)  I d rms  0  0  0A  5.6  107 W / m 2
dt dt dt
E EA 0 A v

 4 0  r 2  dE  1 2 28. (4) ID  0  0 
  ; I  C 0 E 0 t t t d
4  dt  2
8.85  1012  400  60 10 4
102  5  1013 ID  3 6
 1.062 104 amp
  13.8 A  14A 2  10 10
9  109  4
dV I Id
1 2 29. (3) dt  C   A
12. (4) I  0 cE 0 0
2
0.15  5 1034
2I 2 1300   1.873  109 Vs 1
E0   100 Vm1 8.85  1012  3.14  0.0144
0 c ; 8.85 1012  3  108
30. (3) P = 103  160 = 1.6  105 W
P P TASK - II
13. (2) I  2 
2 Also I  c 0 E r
 c 0 E r2
4r 4r 2 1. (1) Conceptual
2. (2) All electro magnetic waves propagate with
P 9 109  250
 2
 Er  = 50 Vm–1 same speed in free space
4r c0 3  108 1.8  1.8
E0
1 2I 2I  4 3. (1) B  c ; E 0  cB0
14. (1) I   o E 0 c ; 0   
2 0
2 0  40  c = 3  108 109 = 3  109 Vm1

9 109  8   8 1 1
 ; 0 = 77.66 NC1 4. (4) V       
3  108 o r o r

Pav E 02 800  4 107  3 108 c c2

V
15. (4) I    r r ;  rr  2
4r 2 4 o c  4  4 v

E 0 77.54 8 2
0 77.54Vm 1 ; E r    54.77 Vm 1 c2 
3 10   9  2.25
2 2 r  2 2
v  r  2 108  1 4
1 1 C
16. (4) speed V          5. (2) The e – m radiation used in the long distance
o 0 r r r
photography is I – R radiation
17. (4) 6. (3) Green house effect is mainly due the infrared
18. (1) radiation
19. (4) 7. (3) The electrons moving with very high energy,
20. (2) decelerate due to collision, they lose their energy
21. (3) in the form of X - rays
22. (4)

528 II PUC
Electromagnetic Waves
1 2 3  108
8. (1) I  U avc ; U av   0 E 0 n  2  106 Hz  2MHz
2 150
9. (3) Conceptual
1 C
10. (2) Conceptual 24. (3)   ,    C2 LC = 188 m
2 LC 
11. (2) Conceptual
25. (1) Visible power = 5W
E
12. (4) c   Average intensity of radiation at 1m
B
dq dv power 5
13. (4) Id  c  2
  0.4 Wm2
dt dt 4r 4   1
= 5  106  300  103 26. (4) Energy density at 3.5 m is given by
= 15  101 = 1.5 A 1
u   0 E m2
2
14. (4) Radiation pressure
1 2
I 1350   8.85  1012   62.6  = 1.73  108 Jm3
P   4.5 106 2
c 3  108
2 hc 6.6  1034  3  108
1 1  E0  27. (3)   
2
15. (1) u E   0 E rms  0  E 14.4  103  1.6  1019
2 2  2 
 0.8  1010 m  0.8A
1 100
  8.85  1012  = 2.21  1010 Jm3
2 2 This wave length belongs to X-ray region.
 I / 2  I  0 0 r dE 1
16. (3)  Pr reflection  28. (1) B   1010  5.56 108 T
c 2c 2 dt 9  1016  2

I I 3 I 3 1600 2U 2Sav A 2  6  40  104

 Pr  total 
      8  106 Pa 29. (4) P   
3  108
2c c 2 c 2 3  108 e c
17. (4) conceptual  1.6  1010 kg  m / s
18. (4) conceptual 30. (4)  Momentum per sec is force
19. (4) conceptual  F = 1.6  1010 Newton
20. (2) Oscillating magnetic filed
E 48
B   16 108 Wb / m 2
c 3 108 ***
21. (3) The maximum value of magnetic field is
Em 62.6
given by Bm    2.09 107 T
c 3  108
22. (1) 4  103 = 1020  hf
f = 6.03  1016 Hz
The obtained frequency lies in the range of X
rays
23. (2) Velocity of electromagnetic wave
c = 3  108 = n n = n  150 or

II PUC 529
 Objective Physics

CHAPTER Ray Optics

Reflection of light, spherical mirrors, mirror formula. Refraction of light, total internal

9
reflection and its applications optical fibres, refraction at spherical surfaces, lenses, thin lens
formula, lens-maker’s formula. Magnification, power of a lens, combination of thin lenses in
contact combination of a lens and a mirror. Refraction and dispersion of light through a
prism. Scattering of light- blue colour of the sky and reddish appearance of the sun at sunrise
and sunset. Optical instruments: Human eye, image formation and accommodation, correction
of eye defects (myopia and hypermetropia) using lenses. Microscopes and astronomical
telescopes (reflecting and refracting) and their magnifying powers.

PAST NEET PAPERS SUBTOPIC LEVEL ANALYSIS

NEET 2016 NEET 2016 Forecasting of
Year NEET 2018 NEET 2017
PHASE-I PHASE-II NEET-2019

No of
question 3 2 0 2 3
Asked
plane mirror,
astro no mial telesco pe, angle o f minimum hypermetropia normal shift, myopia
Subtopic angle o f prism & image combination deviatio n, astro no mial
& combination of lens
fo rmed in co ncave mirro r telescope & magnifiactio n & lens formulac
ofthin prism
 Ray optics is the branch of optics which is developed based on rectilinear property of light and it
deals with the optical instruments developed based on rectilinear property light.
 Law of reversibility : After any number of reflections and refractions, if the direction of light ray
is reversed, it retraces its whole path.
 Laws of Reflection at Smooth Surfaces
The incident ray, the reflected ray and the normal to the reflecting surface at the point of incidence
all lie in same plane. & The angle of reflection r is equal to angle of incidence i i.e., i = r.

Incident Normal
Reflected
ray ray

i r

Plane reflecting surface

Reflection once Reflection twice

  180 o  2 i   360 o  2
The angle of deviation in the case of reflection is     2i = 180 – 2i ;
For maximum deviation i = 0 (i.e. ray is incident normally) & for a ray moving along normal
always retraces its path. i.e. if i = 0  r = 0
 If the light is reflection, the frequency, wavelength and speed of light remain unchanged, phase
change of  if reflection takes place from denser medium but intensity decreases
 The reflection from a denser medium causes an additional phase change of  or path change of /2
while reflection from rarer medium doesn’t cause any phase change.
 For plane mirror: The power of a plane mirror is zero & focal length is infinity

530 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
 The characteristics of the image are
(i) Laterally inverted, (ii) Object distance = Image distance (iii) Height(size) of image = Height
(size) of object & (iv) The image is virtual & erect for a real object
 The image formed by a plane mirror suffers lateral-inversion, i.e., in the
image formed by a plane mirror left is turned into right and vice-versa
x x
with respect to object.
 When a watch placed in front of a plane mirror then watch is object and
Fig. 29.2
its time is object time and image of watch observed by a person standing
in front of mirror then time seen by person.
(i)Object Time = AH Image Time = 12 – AH. (ii)Object Time = AH BM Image Time = 11 - 60' – AH BM
(iii)Object Time = AH BMCS Image Time = 11 - 59' - 60" – AHBMCS
 Keeping incident ray fixed, if a plane mirror is rotated by angle , reflected ray rotates by an angle 2.
 If three mutually perpendicular mirrors are placed adjacent to each other then for a person
standing in front of them. Total number of images formed = 7
 For two mirrors inclined at an angle ‘’. Number of images formed by the mirrors for an object are
360 360
(a)  1 if = even number
 
360 360
(b)  1 , when = odd and object is placed symmetrically.
 
360 360
(c) , when = odd and object is placed unsymmetrically.
 
 If converging rays are incident on a plane mirror, real image is obtained. The point at which the
converging rays would converge if mirror were abscent is known as position of virtual object
Concave mirror Convex mirror

C
P P
I O O C I O P I
v v
Real Virtual R u R
. image object u

1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1
     
Plane mirror
v u R f u v R f
f < 0,
f > 0,
 Rules for Image Formation
 A ray passing parallel to principal axis after reflection from the mirror passes or appears to pass
through focus.

C F P F C
f f
R
R
R
f = <0 R
2 f = >0
2
II PUC 531
 Objective Physics
 A ray initially passing through or directed towards focus after reflection from the mirror
becomes parallel to the principal axis.

F
C P P F C

 A ray passing through or towards the centre of curvature retraces its path after reflection.

C P C

 A ray of light incident on pole at angle i with principal axis, gets reflected back by making same
angle i with the principal axis.

i i
i i
C P P C

 Some Important Relations for Spherical Mirror

where,
R
1. f  2 . 1 1 1 f = Focal length
2 f v u u = Object distance
I v f v f v = Image distance
3. m     I = Size of image
O u f f u O = Size of object
4. Magnification is negative for inverted image and positive for erect image
5. Focal length of mirror will remain uneffect when dipped in liquid.
 For Concave Mirror: Table : Position and nature of image for a given position of object
S.No. Position of object Ray diagram Details of image
M

P
1. At infinity C F Real inverted, very small

M
[m  (– 0)]; at focus or
in focal plane.

532 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
M
O

P
2. Between infinity & C C F Real, inverted,

M
diminished
(– 1 < m < 0) between F
M and C
O

P
3. At C C F Real, inverted, equal

(m = –1) at C
M
O M

P
4. Between F and C C F Real, inverted, large

I M
(m < – 1) beyond C
M
O

P
5. At F C F Real, inverted, very

M
large
[ m  (– )] at infinity

6. Between F and P C
Virtual, erect (m > + 1)
FO P

M
Behind the mirror
For Convex Mirror: Table: Position and nature of image for a given position of object
S.No. Position of object Ray diagram Details of image

I
1. At infinity Virtual, erect, very small

P F C
(0 < m < < + 1) at F
M
II PUC 533
 Objective Physics
M

2. Infront of mirror Virtual, erect, diminished

O P I F C

M
(m < + 1) between P and F
 Laws of Refraction (Snell’s Law): (i) The incident rays, the refracted ray and the normal to the
refracting surface at the point of incidence all lie in the same plane. (II)The ratio of the sines of the
angle of incidence i and of the angle of refraction r is a constant quantity for two given media.
sin i 2 1 1 v 
ie., sin r    1 2  v  
1 2 2

[where 12 is known as refractive index of medium (2) w.r.t. medium (1)]
 If light ray go from denser to rarer than i > r and angle of deviation = i – r & If light ray go from
rarer to denser than i < r and angle of deviation = r – i.
Incident ray Medium 1
Refractive index 1
Speed of light v1
i
Wavelength 1
Frequency f
2 > 1
Deviation = i – r Medium 2
Refractive index 2
Speed of light v2 sin = Constant
r
Wavelength 2
i–r
Frequency f
Refracted ray
REAL DEPTH AND APPARENT DEPTH OR NORMAL SHIFT
 Ray is going from medium 2 to 1 (2 > 1) Ray is going from medium 1 to 2 (1 < 2)
OP PI   OP PI 2 
 PI  1 OP  1 x  PI  OP  2 x
2 1 2 2 1 2 1 1

I

P
O
 
x I
P 
O

    
2 
 1 < 2 PI < OP  Shift  x 1     1 < 2 PI > OP  Shift  x    1
    1 

 2
 Velocity of image =  (velocity of object) Velocity of image =  (velocity of object)
 1
Velocity of fish Velocity of fish v
vB as seen by bird as seen by rest frame = f
 water
vf
= vB +

Velocity of bird Velocity of bird
as seen by fish as seen rest frame
vf = vf +  vB = vB water
534 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
 Lateral shift O
 Incident and emergent rays are parallel. x
i Medium 1 (air)
t sin(i  r ) O
 l = lateral displacement =
cos r Medium 2
r ‘ ’
for small values of i. glass
l
 1
l = t 1  
 
incident ray
 l  lmax, when i  90º emergent
ray

 O  t O O
O
‘ ’  1
 1 ‘ ’ t 1– 
t 1– 
  

t
If an object is placed at distance x from plane Now if a glass slab of thickness t is indroduced
mirror then image will at distance of x from mirror.between object and mirror than image will shift

toward object by 2t 1  1 

  

O I I
O I shift
t
x
Critical Angle
 If a ray is travelling from optically denser medium to optically rarer medium, then critical angle
may be defined as the angle of incidence in denser medium corresponding to which angle of
refraction in rarer medium is 90°.
 If 1 = refractive index of rarer medium, 2 = refractive index of denser medium & ic = critical
1
angle then 2sin ic = 1 sin 90°  sin i c 
2
TOTAL INTERNAL REFLECTION (TIR)
 When a ray of light travelling from optically denser medium to optically rarer medium is incident
at an angle greater than critical angle the ray gets completely reflected back into the denser
medium. This phenomenon is called total internal reflection.
Medium 1 No refraction
'' 90°
r
Denser Medium ic
2 (> ) i > ic ic
Reflected
light h
O h
r=
1–2
Pt. Source
r = radius of base of cone of light from the source which is able to come out.
 If any ray entering from the base suffers total internal reflection at side walls then   2 .
II PUC 535
 Objective Physics


i.e., objects below base can not be seen through side faces.

OPTICAL FIBER
The working of optical fibers is based on the phenomena of total internal reflection. It is a thin
fiber made of some transparent material like glass or plastic. The inner part of the fiber (known
as core) has refractive index 1 greater than the refractive index 2 of its outer part (known as
cladding or clad).

C 2
Clad ( 2) B r i 1

Core ( 1)  12   22
sin a 
0 0
D

A
So if a ray incident at core at an angle less than a it will suffer multiple total interval reflections
in the core (a is called angle of acceptance)
Spherical Refracting Surface
Normal

PC  R
PO   u  2  1  2  1
P C I  
O v u R
R PI   v
u
v

Glass Sphere in Air

R
 A parallel beam of light is incident on a glass sphere placed in air P I  ;CI = P’I + R
2(  1)

u=
P C
I
R P I
v
 2= u
air  1 = 1
 1 = 1
v
Solving this equation you can find v. If you want to find the position of point of convergence
of rays w.r.t. centre of the sphere, then the position is equal to v + R
 A ray of light in incident on a glass sphere as shown
Angle of incidence = 
Angle of refraction = 
On other face, angle of incidence = angle of refraction = 
Total deviation = 2 ( – )
536 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
Rules for Image Formation for Lenses
 A ray of light travelling parallel to principal axis either  2( - )

converges to principal focus or appear to diverge from the  
principal focus.
O
 A ray of light passing through optical centre goes undeviated.
Converging (Convex) lens Diverging (Concave) lens

O = optical centre O = optical centre

O O
F F

f>0 f<0

O O
(1) (2) F
F

(3) O (4)
O

(5) (6)
F F

Some Important Relations for Lenses

1 1 1 I m  0 for inverted image
 Lens formula   2. Magnification m 
v u f O m  0 for erect image
v f f v
3.In lenses, m   
u f u f
 A convex mirror or a concave lens can form a real image if object is virtual as shown.

P I
real image I O F C O O
virtual
object

 A virtual image can be photographed as camera lens forms a real image of this virtual image on
the photographic film.

II PUC 537
 Objective Physics
 If an object moves along the axis of a convex lens from infinity towards its focus with a constant
v2
speed, then vi = m2V0, For a lens vi = V0
u2
 If an object moves perpendicular to axis of a convex lens from infinity towards its focus with
a velocity V0 then vi = mVobject
LATERAL MAGNIFICATION uA
AB  v B  v A dv A B
mL   For short object mL  uB
AB uA  vB du p
B A
v2 v2 vA
For a concave mirror mL   & For a convex lens mL 
u2 u2 vB
Lens and Mirror
A point object is placed in front of a convex lens. A convex mirror is placed behind the lens, so
that final image coincides with the object itself.
Case 1 Case II

O I O I P

u v
C u v
Final image is real and inverted and coincides Final image is real and erect and coincides
with O with O
Lens Maker’s formula : (For thin lenses)

Case - I

   O I
Case I : P  1  1  1    2  1  1  1  (R1)  2 v
I1
f v u  1   R1 R2  1 (R1) 1
u v
Case - II

Case II :  3  1   3   2   2  1 O (R1)  2 (R2) I I1

v u R2 R1 1 v 3
u v
For equiconvex lens
R2 = –R, R1 = +R
3 1 2 2  1   3
 v  u  R
(1) Plano convex lens (2) Plano concave lens

R1 R2 R1 R1 R2 R1
R2 R2
or R1 = –R
or
R1= +R R1=  R1 = 
R2 =  R2 = –R R2 =  R2 = –R

538 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
1 1 1  1
 (  1)    0  (  1)    0
f R f  R
(3) Equiconvex lens (4) Equiconcave lens

R1
R1 R2 R2
R1 = – R
R1= +R
R2 = +R
R2 = –R
1 2 1  2
 (  1)   (If  = 1.5  f = R)  (  1)    (If  = 1.5  f = –R)
f R  f  R
(5) Concave convex lens (6)Convexo-concave lens (7) Sun-glasses
R1 > R2 > 0

R1 > 0 R2 > 0, R1 = R2
R1 R2 R1 R2
P=0
f=
R2 > R1 > 0
1  1 1  1  1 1 
 (  1)    0
  (  1)    0

f  R1 R2  f  R1 R2 
P1 P2
COMBINATION OF LENSES
1. In contact : f1 f2
P = P1+ P2, P is taken with sign
1 1 1
 
f f1 f 2
2. P = P1 + P2 – dP1P2 P1 P2
1 1 1 d
   (applicable only for parallel rays)
f f1 f2 f1f2 f1 f2
where d is the separation between two lenses in air
d

Power = 2P
2f 2f Rearranged P P f
cut cut as f= 2
   f  f f
3. 4.
2f 2f P=0
f=
2f 2f f f
f
P P P
2 2

5.
  

Each of the this arrangement will have same power and focal length.

II PUC 539
 Objective Physics
6. A convex lens made of more than one material may have more than Number
one focal length.
of focal lengths = Number 1

2
(a) Number of local lengths=Number of different medium = Number of images for med=3
3
There is a single focal length
2
(b)There is a single focal lenth only one image
1
 1 2

 1 2 1 2
(c) Two images   (d) One image 2 1
3 4

Silvering of a lens
 When one of the surface of lens is silvered the lens behaves as a spherical mirror.

 When a convex lens is placed on a plane mirror and the image of an object coincide with it
Focal length of lens = height of object = h1 . As the image will coincide the object only if the
rays after passing through the lens becomes parallel to the principal axis.
Image Object

h1

540 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
 A lens of focal length f and power P is kept in contact with a plane mirror, then the
combination is a mirror of focal length –f /2 and power 2P.
Prism
 It is an optical medium bounded by two plane refracting surfaces inclined to each other at a
suitable angle. Here  = (i – r1 ) + (e – r2 ) = i + e – (r1 + r2)
A
=i+e–A Angle of prism
A = r1 + r2 A

if i  1 and e  2 then for 

sin i sin e i e
  r1 r2
sin r1 sin r2 i  2 and e  1 incident emergent ray
ray 
At a particular angle of incidence  is minimum
B C
Base
when  = m, i = e  r1 = r2  A
2
i and e are interchangeable to give same deviation
Thin Prisms 

A, i, e, r1, r2 are small angles  = (– 1)A 

 The variation of  with i is unsymmetrical.  m

 Under minimum deviation, ray passes symmetrical through the prism. i i=e e i

 If prism is isosceles or equilateral, refracted ray is parallel to base of prism under minimum
deviation.
A
 If A > 2C or   cosec , there will be no emergent light whatever may be the angle of incidence.
2
 A = 2C is called limiting value of angle of prism.
 If A < C, total internal reflection at second face can never take place.
For incident ray to retrace its path after
reflection from 2nd face. A

sin i
r2 = 0 r1 = A   sin A
i r1
Angle of deviation is maximum when angle of incidence = 90º. 
Dispersion
B C D
  A 2
 4
  ... [Cauchy formula] R V
  6 A
 = ( – 1)A as V < R  V > R  V < R R

 = angular dispersion  = V – R ;  = (V – R)A White Y
ray
 (V   R )A V   R d V
Dispersive power     
 (  1)A  1  1

V   R
where d = difference in refractive index &  = mean refractive index =
2
Combination of Prisms
 = 1 + 2,  = 1 + 2
Case I : For dispersion without deviation
A 
 = 0  (  1)A  (  1)A  0
Case II : For deviation without dispersion
 = 0  (V   R )A  (V  R )A  0  A

II PUC 541
 Objective Physics
 Lenses in contact Power P  1  1  P1  P2
f1 f 2
1 2
Condition for achromatism  0 or   1P1 + 2P2 = 0
f1 f2
 P1 and P2 or f1 and f2 should be opposite sign also 1  2 as P will become zero.

f1 f2
1 1 d  f   2f1
 P    P1  P2  dP1P2 Condition for achromatism d  1 2 .
f1 f2 f1f2 1   2

f1  f2
(a) f1 and f2 can be of same or opposite sign (b) 1 = 2  d 
2

OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS f1 d f2
 Simple microscope / Magnifying glass :
It uses a single convex lens of focal length f
D
m , where u is distance of object
u
Case I : Case II :
A

A A

F
B B F B

f
(Final image at infinity) D
(Final image at least distance of distinct vision)
For relaxed eye, u  f ,
D
image at   m = >0 For strained eye, image at D  m = 1  D > 0
f f
 Compound microscope
It uses two convex lens objective (fo) and eyepiece (fe), uo = object distance from objective
(uo is close to fo)
vo = image distance from objective (close to length of tube)

542 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
vo D
mo =  (–ve) & me =
uo ue
v o D
Magnification for microscope m = mo × me = 
uo u e
Case I : Case II :

Objective lens Eye piece Objective lens Eye piece

B Fe B
Fe B
F0

A A

A
(Final image at infinity)
(Final image at least distance of distinct vision )
 vo D  L  D   vo  D L D
Relaxed eye : m      Strained eye : m  1     1  
 
uo fe fo  fe  u o  fe  fo  fe 


 Astronomical Telescope : fo is focal length of objective and fe is focal length of eye-piece.

m = mo × me here m0 < 0, me > 0., m < 0
Case I : Case II :
fo  f0  f 
For relaxed eye i.e., normal adjustment. m   For strained eye : m  1  e 
fe fe  D
Length of tube L = fo + fe length of tube L < fo + fe

Objective

Eye piece

F0 Fe B Fe B F0
B
C1 C2
A
A

A
D
f0 fe
(Final image at least distance of distinct vision)
(Final image at infinity)

II PUC 543
 Objective Physics
EXAMINATION CORNER

1. An astronomical refracting telescope will have

1 1
large angular magnification and high angular  sin i  2  ; sin i  i.e. i  45o
resolution, when it has an objective lens of 2 2
(NEET-2018) 3. An object is placed at a distance of 40 cm from
(1) Large focal length and large diameter a concave mirror of focal length 15 cm. If the
(2) Large focal length and small diameter object is displaced through a distance of 20 cm
(3) Small focal length and large diameter towards the mirror, the displacement of the
(4) Small focal length and small diameter image will be (NEET-2018)
(1) 30 cm towards the mirror
f0
A: (1)For telescope, angular magnification  (2) 36 cm away from the mirror
fE (3) 30 cm away from the mirror
So, focal length of objective lens should be large. (4) 36 cm towards the mirror
D
Angular resolution  should be large.
1.22
So, objective should h ave large focal length A: (2)
 f 0  and large diameter D.
2. The refractive index of the material of a prism 1 1 1
is 2 and the angle of the prism is 30 o . One of  
f v1 u
the two refracting surfaces of the prism is made
a mirror inwards, by silver coating. A beam of 1 1 1 1 1 1
     
monochromatic light entering the prism from 15 v1 40 v1 15 40
the other face will retrace its path (after reflec- v1  24 cm
tion from the silvered surface) if its angle of in-
When object is displaced by 20 cm towards
cidence on the prism is (NEET-2018)
mirror.
(1) 30° (2) 45° (3) 60° (4) Zero
Now, u2  20
A: (2)For retracing its path, light ray should be nor-
mally incident on silvered face. 1 1 1 1 1 1
  ;  
f v2 u2 15 v2 20
1 1 1
  ; v  60 cm
v2 20 15 2
So, image shifts away from mirror by
= 60 – 24 = 36 cm.
4. A beam of light from a source L is incident nor-
Applying Snell’s law at M,
mally on a plane mirror fixed at a certain dis-
sin i 2 tance x from the source. The beam is reflected
o

sin 30 1 back as a spot on a scale placed just above the
source L.

544 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
When the mirror is rotated through a small 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
     
angle  the spot of the light is found to move f eq f f f 1 R R 3R
through a distance y on the scale. The angle 
1 1 1 2 1 2 2
is given by (NEET-2017)    ;  
f eq f f 3 f f eq f 3 f
y y y x
(1) (2) (3) (4) 1 4
2x x 2y y  3f
f 
f eq 3 f ; eq 4
A: (1)When mirror is rotated by  angle reflected
ray will be rotated by 2  . 7. An air bubble in a glass slab with refractive in-
dex 1.5 (near normal incidence) is 5 cm deep
when viewed from one surface and 3 cm deep
when viewed from the opposite face. The thick-
y y ness (in cm) of the slab is (NEET-II 2016)
 2 ;  
x 2x (1) 8 (2) 10 (3) 12 (4) 16
A: (3) d   d1  d2    1.5  5  3   12cm
5. A thin prism having refracting angle 10° is 8. A person can see clearly objects only when they
made of glass of refractive index 1.42. This lie between 50 cm and 400 cm from his eyes. In
prism is combined with another thin prism of order to increase the maximum distance of dis-
glass of refractive index 1.7. This combination tinct vision to infinity,the type and power of
produces dispersion without deviation. The the correcting lens, the person has to use, will
refracting angle of second prism should be be (NEET-II 2016)
(NEET-2017) (1) Convex, +2.25 diopter
(1) 4° (2) 6° (3) 8° (4) 10° (2) Concave, - 0.25 diopter
A: (2)    1 A    ' 1  A '  0 (3) Concave, - 0.2 diopter
(4) Convex, + 0.15 diopter
   1 A    ' 1  A ' A: (2) Maximum distance of distinct vision = 400
 1.42  1  10o   1.7  1 A ' cm. So image of object at infinity is to be formed
at 400 cm.Use lens formula
4.2  0.7 A ' ; A '  6 o
3 1 1 1 1 1 1
   ;   ; P = -0.25 D
6. Two identical glass   g   equiconvex lenses v u f 40  f
 2
of focal length f each are kept in contact. The 9. The angle of incidence for a ray of light at a
space between the two lenses is filled with wa- refracting surface of a prism is 45o . The angle of
 4 prism is 60 o . Ifthe ray suffers minimum deviation
ter   w   . The focal length of the combina- through the prism, the angle of minimum
 3
tion is (NEET-II 2016) deviation and refractive index ofthe material of
f 4f 3f the prism respectively, are (NEET-I 2016)
(1) (2) f (3) (4)
3 3 4 o 1
(1) 45 ; (2) 30 o ; 2
1 2 1  3 2

A: (4)   g  1   ,   g   , R  f
f R R  2 1
o
1 2 2 2 (3) 45o ; 2 (4) 30 ;
    w  1    2
f1 R 3R 3f
II PUC 545
 Objective Physics
A: (2) At minimum deviation  min  2i  A (1)A  b and c; B  b and c; C  b and d;
D a and d
 min  2  45   60 (2)A  a and c; B  a and d; d  a and b;
D c and d
 min  30 o (3)A  a and d; B  b and c; C  b and d;
Refractive index of material is D b and c
  A  30  60  (4)A  c and d; B  b and d; C  b and c;
sin  min  sin   D a and d
 2   2 

 A sin  30 o  V f
sin   A: (1) m  
2 u f u
1 m=- 2 then “V” and “u” same given
o
sin 45
  2  2 f
sin 30 o
1 2   2 f  2u  f
f u
2
10. A astronomical telescope has objective and 3 f
eyepiece of focal lengths 40 cm and 4 cm =3f=- 2u 4
2
respectively. To viewan object 200 cm away
For mirror so 4 negative
from the objective, the lenses must be separated  V has to be negative
by a distance (NEET-I 2016)
12. A person standing in the centre of a room 12 m
(1)37.3 cm (2)46.0 cm
high looks into a plane mirror fixed on the wall.
(3)50.0 cm (4)54.0 cm
Then the minimum length of the plane mirror
1 1 1 for him to see the full length image of the wall
A: (4)  
V 200 40 behind him, is equal to
1 5 1 1 5 1 (1) 12 m (2) 8 m (3) 4 m (4) 6m
   
V 5 40 200 200 200 H 12
A : (3) L    4m
3 3
13. Light ray is incidenting on plane mirror. If mir-
ror is rotated at angle T then the reflected ray
will be rotated at angle

(1) 2 (2)  (3) 3 (4)
2
1 4 1
 
V 200 50
V  50  d=50+4=54 cm
11. Match the corresponding entries of column 1
with column 2. [Where m is the magnification A: (1)
produced by themirror] (NEET-I 2016)

Column-I Column-II
(A) m=-2 (a) Convex mirror i = Rotate by  angle, Initial incident angle;
(B) m=-1/2 (b) Concave mirror AOB = 2i (incident angle = reflection angle)
(C) m=+2 (c) Real image AOB'  AON '  N 'OB'
(D) m=+1/2 (d) Virtual image = i -  + i -  = 2i - 2 
546 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
 Reflected ray rotated by angle 2 
14. PQ is incident ray and RS is reflected ray of
light. Both are parallel to each other. Then
which mirror should be kept on right side so A: (4)
that it may possible ? there may be one or more
reflections are possible by mirror. r
1
sin C  , from figure sin c = 2
n h  r2
1 r 3 r
by comparison   ,
(1) plane mirror (2) convex mirror n h2  r 2 5 16  r 2
(3) plane and concave mirror  r  3 m, d  2 r  6 m
(4) concave mirror 17. Angle of prism is 60°. What will be minimum
angle of deviation for this prism ? Refractive
index of prism is 2.
A: (4) (1) 45° (2) 30° (3) 60° (4) 35°

 A  m 
Possible by one concave mirror.
sin    60 o   m 
n 
 2 sin  
15. A light ray is propagating from space to the A: (2) A  2 
sin    2  o
medium having refractive index n. If angle of  2  sin 30
inci dence is twice the angle of refraction then
1  60 o   m 
angle of incidence will be ......  sin  o
 sin 30  1/2
2 2
 
 
1 n 1 n
(1) 2 cos (2) 2 sin
2 2  60 o   m 
 sin 45 o  sin  
n  2 
1
(3) 2 sin 1 n (4) cos
2 60 o   m
o
45    m  30 o
A: (1) n1 sin  1  n2 sin  2 2
1  1  18. The refractive index of prism is 2. The mini-
sin  1  n sin  1  2 2 ,  2  2 
2 mum angle of deviation and angle of prism is
1   same for that prism. Then angle of prism will be
2 sin cos 1  n sin 1 (1) 30° (2) 45° (3) 60° (4) 90°
2 2 2
A m  A A
n   n
 cos 1  1  cos 1 ;  1  2 cos 1
n sin   sin  
2 2 2 2 2 A: (4) n   2 , 2   2 
16. A plate is placed on the surface of liquid. sin  A /2  sin  A /2 
5
Refrective index of liquid is . Source of light is sin A 2 sin  A /2  cos  A /2 
3  
sin  A /2  sin  A /2 
at depth 4 m form the surface of liquid. The
minimum diameter of plate should be .......... 1 1
 cos  A /2   ,  cos 45o 
m so that light can’t comes out. 2 2
(1) 12 (2) 8 (3) 9 (4) 6
; A /2  45 o  A  90 o

II PUC 547
 Objective Physics
19. As shown in the figure one side is silvered for
 1 
prism ABC with refractive index 2. Angle of h2  1   h2
 2 
incidence is 45°. The refracted ray is reflected
by the surface AB in the same direction, then  1  1 
 h  h1  h2  1   h1  1   h2
CAB  .........  1   2 
21. A point source of light is placed at the bottom
of a water lake. If the area of the illuminated
circle on the surface is equal to 3 times the square
of depth of the lake, the refractive index of
water is
(1) 20° (2) 10° (3) 30° (4) 25°
A: (3)   
(1)   1 (2)  1 (3)  1 (4) 1
3 3 4

h
A: (2) A  r 2  3h 2 and r 
2  1
2
h  
 r2  2  2  1     1
 1 3 3
sin i sin 45o 22. For plano-convex lens the convex surface is sil-
n , 2 vered. It’s radius of curvature is R. Find the focal
sin r sin r
length of concave mirror formed by it. n = 1.5
1 1 1
sin r    , r  30 o , AED _R _R _R
2 2 2 (1) - R (2) (3) (4)
4 2 3
 A   90 o  30 o   90 o , A  30 o 1 2  n  1 2 2n  2  2
A: (4)    = - 3/R
20. A beaker contains water upto a height h1 and f R R R
kerosene of height h2 above water so that the (where n = 1.5)  f = - R/3
total height of (water + kerosene) is (h1 + h2).
Refractive index of water is 1 and that of
kerosene is  2 . The apparent shift in the
position of the bottom of the beaker when 23. As shown in figure (i) a thin convex lens hav-
viewed from above is ing focal lenght of 10 cm is cutted in two equal
 1  1   1   1  parts. These two parts are arranged as shown
(1)  1    h2   1    h1 (2)  1    h1  1    h2
 1   2   1   2  in figure (ii). An object of height 1 cm is placed
at distance 7.5 cm from this system then height
 1  1   1   1  of image will be ........cm.
(3)  1    h1  1    h2 (4)  1    h2  1    h1
 1   2   1   2 

 1
A : (3) We know, apparent shift h   1  h
 
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 0.5 (4) 4
 Apparent shift produced by water,
A: (2) Focal length of convex lens is 10 cm So,
 1
h1  1   h1 equivalent focal length for system of its pieces.
 1 
f1 f2 10  10 h
& Aapparent shift produced by kerosene, =   5 cm , i  m
f1  f2 10  10 h o
548 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
hi f f 5 1  1 1 
  , hi  ho  1 (ii)   nB  1    
ho u  f u f 7.5  5 fB  RB  RB 
[taking negative u] = 2 cm 2
  nB  1  , But fA  f B
24. The power of convex lens in air is + 10 D. The RB
refractive index of convex lens is 1.5. If on left
2 2
side of lens is air and on right side of lens is  0.63    nB  1  
water of retractive index 1.33 then find the
0.9 RB RB
power of lens. 0.7  nB  1, nB  1.7
(1) 2.42 D (2) 3.67 D (3) 4.42 D (4) 6.70 D 26. Convex lens of focal length 25 cm and concave
1  1 1  lens of focal length 20 cm are placed co-axially
A: (4)  P   n  1    at distance d from each other. If the resultant
f  R1 R2 
power of system is zero then find d.
 1 1  (1) 5 m (2) 5 cm (3) 3 cm (4) 0.5 m
(i) Power in air Pa = (n - 1)   
 R1 R2  1 1
A: (2) P1   convex lens    4D &
1 1  f1 0.25
10   1.5  1    
 R R  1 1
P2     5D
f2 0.20
2  R1  R 
P  P1  P2  dP1 P2 ; 0 = 4 - 5 - d (4) (-5), 
 0.5  taking R   R  R = 0.1 m
R  2 
1
20 d = 1 ;  d   0.05 m  5 cm
1 1 20
(ii) P1 = (1.5 - 1)    0.5   5D
R 0.1 27. A transparent solid cylinder rod has a refractive
(iii) P2 = (1.33 - 1.5) 2
index of . It is surrounded by air. A light
3
 1   1 
    0.17      1.7 D ray is incident at the mid point of one end of
 0.1   0.1 
the rod as shown in the figure.
(iv) P = P1 + P2 = 5 + 1.7 = 6.70 D
25. For two symmetric convex lens A and B focal
lengths are same but radius of curvature are
The incident angle  for which the light ray
differ ent so that RA  0.9 RB . if nA  1.63 then
grazes along the wall of the rod is
nB  ? 1 1
 3
1
(1) 1.7 (2) 1.6 (3) 1.5 (4)4/3 (1) sin   (2) sin  
2  2 
1  1 1  1  2  1 1 
A: (1)   n  1    (3) sin   (4) sin  
f  R1 R2   3  3
3 1
1  1 1  A : (4) sin C  ; sin r  sin  90  C   cos C 
(i )   nA  1     2 2
fA  R A  RA 
sin   2 2 1  1 
 1 1   ; sin       sin 1  
 0.63     RA  0.9 RB  sin r 1 3 2  3
 0.9 RB 0.9 RB  28. A light ray is incident on a glass sphere at an
2
 0.63  angle of incidence 60° as shown. Then the
0.9 RB angles r, r ' , e and the total deviation after two
refractions are
II PUC 549
 Objective Physics
(1) 30°, 30°, 60° and 60°
(2) 60°, 60°, 30° and 30° TASK - I
(3) 60°, 30°, 60° and 30°
(4) 30°, 60°, 30° and 60° 1. A clock fixed on a wall shows time 04 : 25 : 37.
A: (4) Applying Snell’s law Its image in a plane mirror shows
sin 60  3 sin r  r  30 from symmetry (1) 07 : 43 : 32 (2) 07 : 43 : 32
 r  r  30 (3) 07 : 34 : 23 (4) 43 : 24 : 36
Again applying snell’s law at the second surface 2. A person standing in the centre of a room 12 m
1sin e  3 sin r  e  60 high looks into a plane mirror fixed on the wall.
Deviation at first surface Then the minimum length of the plane mirror
= i – r  i  r '  60  30  30 for him to see the full length image of the wall
Therefore total deviation = 60° behind him, is equal to
29. In an optical fibre, core and cladding were made (1) 12 m (2) 8 m (3) 4 m (4) 6m
with materials of refractive indices 1.5 and 3. According to Rayleigh Scattering law
1.414 respectively. To observe total internal (1) Small-sized dust particles scatter preferen
tially smaller wavelength of light
reflection, what will be the range of incident
(2) The large size dust particles scatter only light
angle with the axis of optical fibre?
(1) 0° – 60° (2) 0 – 48° (3) 0° – 30° (4) 0° – 82° of short wavelengths
(3) The light coming from sodium lamps show
12   22
A : (3)The range of incident angle sin   Rayleigh scattering very efficiently by large
0
sized dust particles.
2 2
  sin 1  1     2  [for air 0  1 ] (4) The light of only longer wavelength is scat
tered more in earth’s atmosphere.
2 2 1
  sin 1
1.5  1.414   sin  0.5006 4. Dispersive power depends on the following
(1) material of the prism
  30
30. For Galelian telescope focal length of objective (2) shape of the prism
and eyepiece 50 cm and 5 cm respectively. If in (3) size of the prism
normal condition it is used for large distance (4) size, shape and material of the prism
then it’s magnification will be ..... and tube 5. Which of the following statements are true in
length will be the context of a compound microscope?
(1) 5, 25 (2) 10, 55 (3) 10, 40 (4)10,45 cm (1) Each lens produces a virtual and inverted image.
(2) The objective has a very short focal length
f o 50
A: (4) fo = 200 cm, fe = 4 cm ( i ) m    10 & (3) The eyepiece is used as a simple magnifying glass.
fe 5
(4) The objective and eyepiece are convex and
(ii) tube length = fo - | fe | = 50 - 5
concave lenses respectively.
(eye piece is concave lens) = 45 cm
15. The depth of a container is t. In this container
the oil with retrective index n1 is filled up to
half depth and for remaining half depth water
of refractive index n2 is filled. What will be
virtual depth of an object placed at the bottom
of container ?

550 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
2t n1 n2 2t  n1  n2  1 1 1 n1
(1) (2) (1) sin (2) sin  
n1  n2 n1 n2 n  n 

t  n1  n2  t n1n2 1 1 1 1
(3) tan (4) cos
(3) (4) 2 n  n n n
2 n1 n2  1 2
11. In an optical fibre, core and cladding were made
7. A point source of light is placed at the bottom
with materials of refractive indices 1.5 and
of a water lake. If the area of the illuminated
1.414 respectively. To observe total internal
circle on the surface is equal to 3 times the square
reflection, what will be the range of incident
of depth of the lake, the refractive index of
angle with the axis of optical fibre?
water is
(1) 0° – 60° (2) 0 – 48° (3) 0° – 30° (4) 0° – 82°
   12. The magnifying power of an astronomical tele
(1)   1 (2)  1 (3)  1 (4) 1
3 3 4 scope is 5, the focal power of its eye piece is 10
8. A green light is incident from the water to the diopters. The focal power of its objective (in
air-water interface at the critical angle    . diopters) is
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
Select the correct statement.
13. A bird in air diving vertically down over a tank
(1) The entire spectrum of visible light will come
with speed 6 cm/s. The base of the tank is
out of the water at an angle of 90° to the normal
silvered. The fish in the tank is rising upward
(2) The spectrum of visible light whose
along the same line with speed 4cm/s.
frequency is less than that of green light will
come out of the air medium
(3) The spectrum of visible light whose
frequency is more than that of green light will [Take  water  4 / 3 ] then
come out to the air medium
(4) The entire spectrum of visible light will come (1) The speed of the image of fish as seen directly
out of the water at various angles to the normal by the bird is 9cm/s upwards
9. Angle of prism is 60°. What will be minimum (2) The speed of the image of bird relative to the
angle of deviation for this prism ? Refractive
fish looking upwards is 12cm/s downwards
index of prism is 2.
(3) Both (1) and (2) are correct
(1) 45° (2) 35°
(3) 60° (4) 30° (4) Both (1) and (2) are false
10. A ray of light propagating inside prism parallel 14. A ray of light passes through an equilateral
prism such that the angle of incidence is equal
to the base incident on the hypotenuse of prism
to the angle of emergence and each one is equal
of right angled prism. If refractive index of
to 3/4th the angle of prism. The angle of
material of prism is n then for total internal
deviation is
reflection by hypotenuse the maximum value
(1) 45° (2) 39° (3) 20° (4) 30°
of the angle of base should be ......
7
15. For a prism, A = 60°,   . Then the
3
minimum possible angle of incidence, so that
the light ray is refracted from the second
surface.
(1) 30° (2) 60° (3) 90° (4) 40°
II PUC 551
 Objective Physics
16. The refractive index of the material of prism is
11 1  1 
0 (1) sin   (2) tan  
2 and its refracting angle is 30 . One of the  
refracting surfaces of the prism is made a mirror
1    1  1  1 
inwards. (3) sin    (4) co s   
   
A beam of monochromatic light enters the prism
22. An isosceles prism of angle 120° has a refractive
from the other surface and the ray retraces from
index 1.44. Two parallel rays of monochromatic
the mirrored surface.
light enter the prism parallel to each other in
The angle of incidence is
air as shown. The rays which emerge from the
(1) 300 (2) 450 (3) 600 (4) 00
opposite face.
17. A glass prism of refractive index 1.5 is placed
in water of refractive index 1.33. The minimum
value of the angle of the prism so that it will
not be possible to have any emergent ray is
[sin–1 (0.89) = 62.5°]
(1) 1500 (2) 1250 (3) 1650 (4) 1800
18. The angle of minimum deviation produced by (1)are parallel to each other
a prism is 300 .If the angle of the prism is also (2) are diverging
300 , the refractive index of the material of the (3) make an angle 2[sin–1 (0.72) – 30°] with each other
prism is (4) make an angle 2 sin–1 (0.72) with each other
23. The principal section of a glass prism is an
(1) 2 (2) 3
isosceles triangle ABC with AB — AC. The face
(3) 2 
sin 15 
0

(4) 2 co s 15 
0
AC is silvered. A ray of light is incident
19. A ray of light is incident normally on one of the normally on the face AB and after two
refracting surfaces of a prism of refracting angle reflections, it emerges from the base BC
0
60 .The emergent ray grazes the other refracting perpendicular to the base. Angle BAC of the
surface. The refractive index of the material of prism is
the prism is (1) 30° (2) 36° (3) 60° (4) 72°
(1) 1.3 (2) 1.4 (3) 1.155 (4) 1.45 24. A crown glass prism of angle 5° is to be
20. The minimum deviation produced by a hollow combined with a flint glass prism in a such a
prism filled with a certain liquid to be 30 . The
0
way that the dispersion is zero. The refractive
light ray is also found to be refracted at angle indices for violet and red lights are 1.523 and
0 . The refractive index of the liquid is
30 1.514 respectively for crown glass and for flint
glass are 1.632 and 1.614, then the angle of the
3 3
(1) 2 (2) 3 (3) (4) flint glass prism is
2 2
(1) 10° (2) 2.5° (3) 2° (4) 5.45°
21. A ray of light incident on the hypotenuse of a
25. Parallel rays are incident on a transparent
right angled prism after travelling parallel to
sphere along its one diameter. After refraction,
the base inside the prism is incident on second
these rays converge at the other end of this
refracting surface. If '  ' is the refractive index
diameter. The refractive index for the material
of material of prism, the maximum value of the
of sphere is
base angle for which light is totally reflected
from the hypotenuse is (1) 1 (2) 1.5 (3) 1.6 (4) 2

552 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
26. A telescope consisting of an objective of focal
 1    2  1 
length 60 cm and single eye lens of focal length (3)  R (4)  R
  2  1    2  1 
5 cm is focused on a distant object in such a
way that parallel rays emerge from the eye 30. The focal length of a biconvex lens is 20 cm and
piece. its refractive index is 1.5. If the radii of
If the object makes an angle of 20 at the curvatures of two surfaces of lens are in the
objective, the angular width of the image is ratio 1 : 2 then the larger radius of curvature is
(1) 10 0 (2) 24 0 (3) 50 0 (4) 60 0 (1) 10 cm (2) 15 cm (3) 20 cm (4) 30 cm
27. A fish is near the centre of a spherical water 31. Given a  g =3/2 and a  w =4/3. An equi-
 4 convex lens with radius of each surface equal
fish bowl filled with water    . to 20 cm is placed in the water. Then its focal
 3
length is
A child stands in air at a distance 2R (R is the (1) 20 cm (2) 30 cm (3) 40 cm (4) 80 cm
radius of curvature of the sphere) from the 32. A plano convex lens has a thickness of 6 cm.Its
centre of the bowl. At what distance from the radius of curvature is 25 cm. When its curved
centre would the child’s nose appear to the fish surface is kept on a horizontal surface and
situated at the centre: viewed from the top, its bottom appears to be
(1) 4R (2) 2R (3) 3R (4) 4R raised by 2 cm. The focal power of lens is
28. A beam of diameter ‘d’ is incident on a glass (1) 1 D (2) 4 D (3) 2D (4) 3D
hemisphere as shown. If the radius of curvature 33. The refractive index of a convexo-concave lens
of the hemisphere is very large in comparision is 1.5 and its radii of curvatures are 20 cm, 25
to d, then the diameter of the beam at the base cm. The focal power of lens is
hemisphere will be (1) +0.5 D (2) -0.5 D (3) +2 D (4) -2 D

 
34. A convex lens of glass  g  1.45 has a focal

length f a in air. The lens is immersed in a liq

uid of refractive index  1  1.3. The ratio of the

3 d 2 fliquid / f a is
(1) d (2) d (3) (4) d
4 3 3
(1) 3.9 (2) 0.23 (3) 0.43 (4) 0.39
29. Where would an object be placed in a medium 35. A thin convex lens made from crown glass
of refractive index 1 , so that its real image is    3/ 2  has focal length f. When it is
formed at equidistant from sphere of radius R measured in two different liquids having
and refractive index  2 which is also placed in refractive indices 4/3 and 5/3. It has the focal
the medium of refractive index 1 as shown in lengths f 1 and f 2 , respectively. The correct
figure? relation between the focal lengths is
(1) f1 = f2 < f
(2) f1 > f and f2 becomes negative
(3) f2 > f and f1 becomes negative
(4) f1 and f2 both become negative
36. Diameter of a plano-convex lens is 6 cm and
  2  1   2 
(1)  R (2)  R thickness at the centre is 3mm. If speed of light

 2  1  
 2   1  in material of lens is 2 × 10 8 m/s, the focal
length of the lens is
II PUC 553
 Objective Physics
(1) 15cm (2) 20cm (3) 30cm (4) 10cm 3. The refractive index of glass is 1.520 for red light
37. An astronomical telescope has an angular and 1.525 for blue light. Let D1 and D2 be the
magnification of magnitude 5 for distant objects. angles of minimum deviation for red and blue
The separation between the objective and the lights, respectively, in a prism of this glass. then
eye piece is 36 cms and the final image is formed (1) D 1 can be less than or greater than D 2
at infinity. The focal length f0 of the objective
depending upon the angle of prism.
and fe of the eye piece are
(2) D1 > D2
(1) f 0  45 cm and f e  9 cm
(3) D1 = D2 (4) D1 < D2
(2) f 0  50 cm and f e  10 cm
4. Two lenses of powers 15D and +5D are in
(3) f 0  7.2 cm and f e  5 cm
contact with each other. The focal length of
(4) f 0  30 cm and f e  6 cm
38. Two plano-concave lenses of glass of refractive the combination is
index 1.5 have radii of curvatures 20 cm, 30 (1) 10cm (2) +20 cm (3) +10cm (4) 20cm
cm. They are placed in contact with curved 5. A thin convex lens made from crown glass
surface towards each other and the space  3
between them is filled with a liquid of refractive     has focal length f. When it is measured
 2
index 4/3. The focal length of the system is in two different liquids having refractive indices
(1) 48 cm (2) 72 cm (3) 12 cm (4) 24 cm
4 5
39. The refractive index of a lens meterial is  and and , it has the focal lengths f 1 and f 2
3 3
focal length f. Due to some chemical changes
in the material, its refractive index has respectively. The correct relation between the
increased by 2%. The percentage decrease, in focal lengths is:
focal length for   1.5 will be (1) f2 > f and f1 and becomes negative
(1) 4% (2) 2% (3) 6% (4) 8% (2) both f1 and f2 become negative
40. A parallel beam of monochromatic light falls (3) f1 = f2 < f
on a combination of a convex lens and a (4) f1 > f and f2 becomes negative
concave lens of focal lengths 15 cm & 5 cm 6. A ray of light refracts from medium 1 into a
respectively. If the light emerges parallel from thin layer of medium 2, crosses the layer and is
the concave lens. The distance between two incident at the critical angle on the interface
lenses is between the medium 2 and 3 as shown in the
(1) 20 cm (2) 3 cm (3) 10 cm (4) 45 cm figure. If the angle of incidence of ray is  , the
value of  is
TASK - II
1. A thin glass (refractive index 1.5) lens has
optical power of 5D in air. Its optical power
in a liquid medium is
(1) 1 D (2) 25D (3) 5/8 D (4) 1 D
2. A fish looking up through water sees the outside
world contained in a circular horizon. If the
refractive index of water is 4/3 and the fish is
12cm below the surface, the radius of this circle 18 1 13 
(1) sin   (2) sin  
(in cm) is 9  18 
36 1 13  18
(1) 4 5 (2) 36 5 (3) 36 7 (4) (3) sin   (4) sin  
7  16   13 
554 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
7. A magnifying glass has f = 12 cm. To produce 5 4 7 6
maximum angular magnification the object (1) (2) (3) (4)
4 3 4 5
should be placed at a distance of -(Least distance 15. The radius of curvature of a thin planoconvex
of clear vision = 25 cm) lens is 10 cm and the refractive index of its glass
(1) 71 cm (2) 68 cm (3) 8.4 cm (4) 8.1 cm is 1.5. If the plane surface is silvered , then it
8. A simple microscope consists of a concave lens will behave like a
of power 10D and a convex lens of power 15 (1) concave mirror of focal length 10 cm
D. Its magnification at near point is (least (2) concave mirror of focal length 20 cm
distance of distinct vision, D=25cm) (3) convex mirror of focal length 10 cm
(4) convex mirror of focal length 20 cm
(1) 2.25 (2) 5 (3) 10 (4) 20
16. ACB is a right-angled glass prism of refractive
9. A compound microscope is of magnifying power
index 1.5. B and C are 600 ,300 and 900
100. The magnifying power of its eyepiece is 4.
respectively. A thin layer of liquid is on the
The magnification of its objective is
AB. For a ray of light which is incident normally
(1) +25 (2) -25 (3) -30 (4) +30 on AC to be totally reflected at AB, the
10. A compound microscope has a magnifying refractive index of the liquid on AB should be
power of 100 when the image is formed at (1) 1.5 (2) 1.4 (3) 1.3 (4) 1.2
infinity. The objective has a focal length of 0.5 17. A certain prism is that to produce minimum
cm and the tube length is 6.5 cm. Then the focal deviation of 380 . It produces a deviation of 440
length of the eye-piece is when the angle of incidence is either 420 or 620 .
(1) 2 cm (2) 2.5 cm (3) 3.25 cm (4) 4 cm The refractive index of material of prism is
11. The focal length of an equi-convex lens is (1) 1.51 (2) 1.33 (3) 1.62 (4) 1.732
greater than the radius of curvature of any of 18. The maximum value of index of refraction of a
the surfaces. Then, the refractive index of the material of prism which allows the passage of
material of the lens is light through it when the refracting angle of
prism is A is
(1) greater than zero but less than 1.5
(2) greater than 1.5 but less than 2.0 A A
(1) 1  sin 2 (2) 1  cos2
(3) greater than 2.0 but less than 2.5 2 2
(4) greater than 2.5 but less than 2.0
12. A myopic person can not see objects lying A A
(3) 1  tan 2 (4) 1  cot 2
beyond 2m. The focal length and power of the 2 2
lens required to remove this defect will be 19. A thin prism deviates blue and red rays through
(1) 1m and 0.5D (2) -2m and -0.5D 10° and 6° respectively. Another prism deviates
(3) 0.5m and 0.5D (4) -0.5, and 0.5D same colours through 8° and 4.5° respectively.
13. A person wears glasses of power 2.0D. The The ratio of dispersive powers of the prism is
defect of the eye and the near point of the person (1) 5 : 4 (2) 4 : 5 (3) 25 : 28 (4) 5 : 28
without the glasses will be 20. Two thin prims are combined to form an
(1) Nearsighted, 50 cm (2) Farsighted, 50cm achromatic combination. For prism I, A = 4°,
(3) Nearsighted, 250 cm(4) Astigmatism, 50 m  R  1.35 , Y  1.40, V  1.42 for prism II
14. A convex lens of focal length 30 cm, is made of 'R  1.7, Y'  1.8 and 'R  1.9 then the prism
5 angle of II prism and the net mean deviation
a material of refractive index . When it is
3 are
placed in a liquid its focal length is increased (1) 1.4°, 0.48° (2) 2.4°, 0.8°
by 50 cm. The refractive index of the liquid is (3) 0.4°, 0.48° (4) 1.4°, 0.24°
II PUC 555
 Objective Physics
21. The diagram shows five isosceles right angled 27. Three immiscible liquids of densities d1 > d2 >
prism. A light ray incident at 90° at the first d3 and refractive indices 1 > 2 > 3 are put in a
face emerges at same angle with the normal beaker. The height of each liquid column is h 3.
from the last face. Then the relation between A dot is made at the bottom of the beaker. For
the refractive indices is near normal vision, find the apparent depth of
the dot

h 1 1 1  h 1 1 1 
2 2 2
(1)       2     2 2 (1) 6        (2) 6       
1 3 5 2 4  1 2 3   1 2 3 

(2) 12   22   32  2   42   52
h 1 1 1  h 1 1 1 
2 2 2 2 2 (3) 3        (4) 3       
(3)       2    
2 3 4 1 5  1 2 3   1 2 3 

(4)  32   42   52  2  12   22 28. A double convex lens, made of a material of

22. A denser medium of refracative index 1.5 has refractive index 1 is placed inside two liquids of
a concave surface with respect to air of radius refractive indices 2 and 3 as shown. 1 2 >
of curvature 12 cm. An object is situated in the 3. A wide, parallel beam of light is incident on
denser medium at a distance of 9 cm from the the lens from the left. The lens will give rise to
pole. Locate the image due to refraction in air
(1) A real image at 8 cm
(2) A virtual image at 8 cm
(3) A real image at 4.8 cm
(4) A virtual image at 4.8 cm
23. A thin glass (refractive index 1.5) lens has opticl (1) a single convergent beam
power of –5D in air. Its optical power in a liquid (2) two different convergent beams
medium with refractive index 1.6 will be (3) two different divergent beams
(1) 1D (2) –1D (3) 25D (4) –25D (4) a convergent and a divergent beam
24. An object is placed 40 cm from a concave mirror 29. A compound microscope has two lenses. The
of focal length 20 cm. The image formed is magnifying power of one is 5 and the combined
(1) real, inverted and same in size magnifying power is 100. The magnifying
(2) real, inverted and smaller in size power of the other lens is
(3) virtual, erect and larger in size (1) 10 (2) 20 (3) 50 (4) 25
(4) virtual, erect and smaller in size 30. In a terrestrial telescope, the focal length of
25. A concave mirror gives an image three times as
objective is 90 cm, of inverting lens is 5cm and
larger as the object placed at a distance of 20
of eye lens is 6cm. If the final image is at 30 cm,
cm from it. For the image to be real, the focal
then the magnification will be
length should be
(1) 21 (2) 12 (3) 18 (4) 15
(1) 10 cm (2) 15 cm (3) 20 cm (4) 30 cm
26. When an object is kept at a distance of 30 cm 31. An equi convex lens of focal length 10 cm is cut
from a concave mirror, the image is formed at into two equal halves by cutting along a plane
a distance of 10 cm. If the object is moved with perpendicular to the principal axis. The two
–1
a speed of 9 m s , the speed with which image pieces are put 10 cm apart with curved surfaces
moves is facing each other.
(1) 10 m s –1
(2) 1 m s -1 The focal length of the new combination is
(3) 9 m s –1
(4) 0.9 m s –1 (1) 8 cm (2) 20 cm (3) 40/3 cm (4) 10 cm

556 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
32. A plano convex lens of focal length 30 cm has (1) 5 to 500 cm (2) 12 to 250 cm
its plane surface silvered. An object is placed (3) 17 to 500 cm (4) 17 to 250 cm
40 cm from the lens on the convex side. The 38. The focal length of a convex lens is 10 cm. The
distance of the image from the lens is magnifying powers when it is used as a
(1) 18 cm (2) 24 cm (3) 30 cm (4) 40 cm magnifying glass to form the image at (i) near
33. The two surfaces of a concave lens, made of point and (ii) far point are
glass of refractive index 1.5 have the same radii (1) 2.5, 3.5 (2) 3.5, 4.5
of curvature R. It is now immersed in a medium (3) 4.5, 3.5 (4) 3.5, 2.5
of refractive index 1.75, then the lens 39. In a compound microscope, the intermediate
(1) becomes a convergent lens of focal length 3.5R image is
(2) becomes a convergent lens of focal length 3.0R (1) Virtual erect and magnified
(3) changes as a divergent lens of focal (2) Real erect and magnified
length 3.5R (3) Real, inverted and magnified
(4) changes as a divergent lens of focal (4) Virtual, erect and reduced
length 3.0R 40. An astronomical telescope has a large
34. The dispersive powers of the materials of two aperture to
lenses forming an achromatic combination are (1)Reduce spherical aberration
in the ratio of 4 : 3. Effective focal length of the (2)Have high resolution
two lenses is +60cm then the focal lengths of (3)Increase span of observation
the lenses should be (4)Have low dispersion
(1) –20cm, 25cm (2) 20cm, –25cm]
(3) –15cm, 20cm (4) 15cm, –20cm KEY
35. The focal length of a lens of dispersive power
TASK - I
0.45 which should be placed in contact with a
convex lens of focal length 84 cm and dispersive
1 3 2 3 3 1 4 1 5 2
power 0.21 to make the achromatic combination 6 3 7 2 8 2 9 4 10 4
from the two lenses, in cm is 11 3 12 2 13 3 14 4 15 1
(1) 45 (2) 90 (3) 180 (4) –180 16 2 17 2 18 4 19 3 20 1
36. The two surfaces of a biconvex lens has same
21 4 22 3 23 2 24 2 25 4
radii of curvatures. This lens is made of glass of
26 2 27 3 28 4 29 3 30 4
refractive index 1.5 and has a focal length 10
cm in air. The lens is cut into two equal halves 31 4 32 3 33 2 34 1 35 2
along a plane perpendicular to its principal axis 36 3 37 4 38 2 39 3 40 3
to yield two plano-convex lenses. The two TASK - II
pieces are glued such that the convex surfaces 1 3 2 4 3 4 4 1 5 4
touch each other. If this combination lens is
immersed in water (refractive index = 4/3), its
6 3 7 4 8 1 9 2 10 3
focal length (in cm) is 11 1 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2
(1) 5 (2) 10 (3) 20 (4) 40 16 4 17 1 18 4 19 3 20 1
37. A person can see clearly objects between 15 and 21 1 22 3 23 3 24 1 25 2
100 cm from his eye. The range of his vision if 26
2 27 4 28 4 29 2 30 3
he wears close fitting spectacles having a power
31 3 32 2 33 1 34 4 35 4
of 0.8 diopter is
36 4 37 3 38 4 39 3 40 2
II PUC 557
 Objective Physics
Hints and Solutions
o  60 o   m 
TASK - I  sin 45  sin  
 2 
1. (3)Time in the mirror = 12  04 : 25 : 37 =7:34:23
H 12 60 o   m
2. (3) L    4m 45o    m  30 o
3 3 2
3. (1)conceptual
4. (1)Dispersive power does not depend on the
shape and size of the prism. It depends only on
the material of the prism. 10. (4)
5. (2)In compound microscope both objective and
eyepiece are convex lenses. An objective lens is
of small focal length and eyepiece is of large focal Incident angle on hypotanous is C = 90 -  max
length.
6. (3)Virtualdepth =
1 1 1 1
t /2 t /2 t  1 1  n  n2  n  o  , cos  max 
    t 1 sin C sin  90  max
cos max n
n1 n2 2  n1 n2  2 n1n2
1 1
;  max  cos
n
h
7. (2) A  r 2  3h 2 and r 
2  1 12   22
11. (3) The range of incident angle sin  
0
h2  
 r2   2  1     1 2 2
2
 1 3 3   sin 1  1     2  [for air 0  1 ]

1 b 2 2
8. (2)Here, sin C  and nwater  a    sin 1 1.5  1.414 
nwater 2
 sin 1  0.5006  ;   30
f 0 pe 10
12. (2) m    2
f e p0 5
If frequency is less, then  is greater and hence
RI n(water) is less and therefore critical angle 13. (3)The apparent velocity of fish w.r.t bird
increases. So, they do not suffer reflection and V 3
 Vb  f  6  4   9cm / s 
come out at angle less than 90° of the air  4
medium. The app.velocity of bird w.r.t. fish
 A  m   60 o   m  4
sin   sin    V f  Vb  4  6   12cm / s 
 2  2   2  3
n
9. (4)  A sin 30 o
sin  
2

1  60 o   m 
  sin 30  1/2 
o
 sin  14. (4)
2  2 

Relation amongthe (i), (e), (A) and   

558 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
3 3 1 g
i  e  A   ; 4  60  4  60  60   (or) sin C  and  
 w
45° + 45° = 60° +  (or)   30  w 1.33
15. (1)In case of the minimum incidence angle for
 sin C    0.89  C  62.5
 g 1.5
emergent ray to refract is shown below.
 Amin  2C  125
 A  Dm 
sin  
18. (4) Dm  A  30 0 ;   2 
sin  A / 2 

sin A

i2 = 90°, r2 = c, i1 = imin = ? sin  A / 2     2cos  A / 2   2 cos 15 
19. (3) i1  r1  0 ; i2  90  r2  c  A ;
1 3
 sin c   1 1
 7    1.150
sin c sin A
Applying snell’s law at Ist face,

7
1 sin imin  sin r1
3
Here, r1 + r2 = A  r1  A  r2  A  C

sin r1  sin  A  C   sin A cos c  cos A sin c

20. (1) A  2r  60 , Dm  2i  A  30  2i  60
3 2 1 3 31
       sin i
2 7 2 7 7 2  i  45   sin r 2
7  3  1  1 21. (4)for TIR i  c ; 90    c ; sin  90     sin c
sin  imin        sin imin 
3  7  2  2
1 1
 imin  30 cos      cos 1  
 
16. (2)From figure r2  0 and r1 + r2 = A
 r1  A  30
1
1 sin i1   sin r1  sin i  2   i  45
2 1
max  cos 1  

22. (3)The diagrammatic representation of the
given problem is shown in figure.
17. (2)For no emergent ray from a prism Amin  2C
From figure it follows that i  30

From Snell’s law, we can write (or)

II PUC 559
 Objective Physics
1.44 sin 30 4
sin r   0.72 1
1  2 1  2  1 4 1 3
      v  2 R
1 v u R 3v  R R
Now,   r  i  sin  0.72   30 ;
The image is formed on the same side the nose
  2     2 sin 1  0.72   30
of child ( N ' is the image of nose) = 3R from the
23. (2)From the figure centre.
28. (4)Applying the formula for spherical curves
surface:

i1  90   90  A  A &

  90  2i1  90  2 A 3
 2 1  2  1 1
  3 1 2
 i2  90    90   90  2 A  2 A v u R     v  3R
2v  R
   90  i2  90  2 A Let x be the diameter of the light falling at base.
From the geometry of the figure
d 3R 2
A + 2A + 2A = 180° ;  A  36  (similar triangle concept)  x  d
x 2R 3
24. (2)
1   2 ;  V   R  A   V   R  A
1 1 1
29. (3)For Ist surface, u = –u, 1  1 ,
  0.09   0.18  A '  A '  2.50  2   2 , R   R,V  V '
From
2 1  2  1     1
25. (4)    2 1  2 ......... 1
v u R v u R
For IInd surface, the image formed by Ist surface
u  ,V  2 R, R   R, 1  1,  2 ? acts as object, so that
 2 1  2  1 u  v ', v  u , R   R, 1   2 ,  2  1
  ;
V u R
 2 1 2  1  2  2 1  2  1
    2  1 From   ;
2R  R 2 v v R
 2  2 2  R   2  2 1  2 1   2
  .............(2)
 f0  60 u v' R
26. (2) m        24
Adding (1) & (2)
 fe 2 5
27. (3)Here nose of the boy is the object & fish is 21    1   u  1 R .......... 3
the observer. So  2   w and 1   a  1 .
 2 2   
u  R   2  1
Applying the formula of refraction at curved
surface. u = –R and R = +R
R1 1 R
30. (4)   R1  2 sign convection
R2 2 2
R1 = + R2 & R2 = –R2

1 1 1 
    1   
f  R1 R2 
560 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
1 2 1 1  3  1 1  1 1
  1.5  1     R2  30cm    1       f  2x
20  R2 R2  f  2   R1 R2  f 2x

1  3  1 1  1 1 1
31. (4)    1    f  20cm ; where,  
f  2  20 20  x R1 R2
In case of liquid, where refractive indices are
f '   g  1
  f '  80cm 4 5
f  l  g  1 and , we get
3 3
Focal length in first liquid,

1  s  1 1 
  1  
32. (3) f1  l1  R1 R2 

1  3/ 2  1
 1
 1  1
x  t 1    2  6 1     
3 f1  4 / 3  x  F1 is positive
    2 Nature of lens is not change.
100 100 100 1 1 1 1
P     1  1.5  1   2D     f1  4 f
f R 25 f1 8 x 4  2 x  4 f
Focal length in second liquid,
3 
33. (2) 1  s  1 1  1  2  1 
 1       1  
f 2   / 2  R1 R2  ; f 2  5   x 
3 
100  1 1   f 2 is negative. Nature of lens change
P  100    1   
f  R1 R2  i.e., convex behave as concave.
2
 1 1  2 2 2  t
 100 1.5  1   36. (3) R = d + (R  t) ; R  d  R  1  
2 2 2
  R
 20 25 
 5 
P  100  0.5   = –0.5D
 20  25 

1
   Lens  1 K
f Air
34. (1) 1   Lens  ;
  1 K
f liq  liq  2
d2 2t R   3 
90
 15cm
1 2  1 ;
fliq 1.45  1 0.45 R R 2   0.3 6
   1.3  3.9
f Air  1.45  0.15  1
  1 1 1  1  3  1 
 1.3      1    ;    1  ;
f  R 1 R 2  f  2  15 
35. (2)According to lens maker’s formula, when the F = 30cm
lens in the air

II PUC 561
 Objective Physics
40. (3)For convex lens the image distance v1 = f1
f0
37. (4) m   5  f 0  5 f e and L  f  f  36
fe 0 e

 f0  30cm, f e  6cm

 This image formed by convex lens acts as

38. (2) object for concave lens. Thus the object distance
for it is u2 = –u2 = (d – f1) ;
–f2 = d – f1  d  f1  f 2  15  5  10cm
For Ist lens   1.5, R1  , R2  20cm TASK - II
 2  1 1 
1 1 1  1 1  1. (3) P     1 R  R 
    1     1.5  1     1  1 2 
f1  R1 R2    20 
1 0.5 1  1.5   1 1  5 1 1
  
 5    1     
 1   R1 R 2  0.5 R 1 R 2
f 20 40
For IInd lens (liquid lens between two plano 1 1
   10
concave lens) R1 R 2
4
  , R1  20cm, R2  30cm  1.5 
 1  10  
 10  10  5
3 Again, P    D
 1.6  1.6 8
1  1 1   4  1 1 
    1       1   h 12 36
f2  R1 R2   3  20 30  r   cm
2
2. (4)  1 16 7
1
1 5  1  1 9
 
3 60 f 2 36 3. (4) D = (  1) A
For IIIrd lenses   1.5, R1  30cm, R2   D1 = (r  1) A; D2 = (v  1) A
1  1 1  0.5 1 r < v  D1< D2
 1.5  1    
f3  30   30 60 4. (1) P = D1 + D2 = 15 + 5 = 10
1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f =  m  10cm
       P 10
f f1 f 2 f3 40 30 60
3
9  10  6 5 360 5. (4) Given   (crown glass) and focal length
   f   72cm 2
360 360 5 = f Focal length f1 when lens is placed in liquid
4
1  2   of refractive index 1 
39. (3)     1   ;  100  2 3
f R  Focal length = f2 when lens is placed in liquid
   100  2  2  1.5 5
of refractive index  2 
f  3
100   100 Using lens maker’s formula
f  1
f 2 1.5 1   1 1 
 100%   6%    1  
f 1.5  1 f1  1  R1 R 2 

562 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
1  3 / 2  1 1  1 1 1  1
   1       f  R, so, 2    1  1 i.e.,    1 
f1  4 / 3   R 1 R 2  8  R 1 R 2  2
(or)    1  0.5 (or)   1.5
1    1 1 
Similarly, f     1 R  R  Focal length of convex lens is positive. So,
2  2  1 2 
 cannot be negative, hence  should be greater
1  3 / 2  1 1  1  1 1  than zero but less than 1.5.
   1      
f 2  5 / 3   R 1 R 2  10  R 1 R 2  12. (2) u  , V  2m ,

1  3  1 1  1 1 1 
1 1 1 1
   f  2m ; P   0.5 D
And f   2  1  R  R   2  R  R  f V u f
  1 2   1 2 

Hence, f1 = 4 f and f2 =  5 f. 100 1

13. (2) f    50cm It is +ve thus it is hyper
6. (3)As the light ray incident at critical angle, P 2
metropia (or) farsightedness.
 1.3
sin C  3   
 2 1.8 
fl  1 
  
1.3 1.8 1.3 13 14. (2) f    ; fl  f  50cm
 sin r   sin       1 
1.8 1.6 1.8 16  l 
1  13  (given)  fl  80cm
   sin  16 
 
5
7. (4)For maximum magnification final image at 1
80 3 4

/////////////////
least distance of distinct vission    l 
30  5 / 3  3
V = –D, u = –u   1
 l 
1 1 1 1 1 1
      u  8.1cm 15. (2)
f V u 12 25 u
8. (1)P = –10 + 15 = 5D R f R
fl  F  l   20cm
100 100    1 2 2    1
 f    20cm ;
P 5 16. (4) r1 = i1 = 0 and A = r1 + r2  r2  A  60
D 25 for TIR, r2 > c
M  1  1  2.25
f 20   
 sin r2  sin c  sin c  l 
9. (2)m = –100, me = 4 , m = m 0me   g 
m 100
 mo    25 l
me 4  sin 60 
 g   g sin 60   l
LD 6.5  25
10. (3) M   100   f e  3.25
f0 fe 0.5  f e
3
1 1 1   l  1.5 
11. (1)Focal length of lens     1    2
f  R1 R2 
For equiconvex lens , R1   R, R2   R 1.732
  l  1.5   l  1.299   l  1.2
R 2
f 
2    1 in given options it is less than 1.299.

II PUC 563
 Objective Physics
17. (1)   i1  i2  A  44  42  62  A  A  60  V  4.8cm
 A  Dm   60  38  1 1 1 
sin  23. (3)     1    .......... (i)
 sin   fa  R1 R2 
  2   2   1.51
A  60  1 1 
sin sin    1.5  1    and
2  2  R1 R2 
1 1 1   g   m  1 1 
18. (4) A  2C ;   sin c  sin A / 2     ......  ii  ;
  f m   m   R1 R2 
 cosec  A / 2   1  cot 2  A / 2  1  1.5   1 1 
 1   
DB  DR D  DR f m  1.6   R1 R2 
19. (3)   and Dy  B ;
Dy 2
10  6 1 8  4.5 3.5 f m 1.5  1
1   , 2   Thus,   8 (or)
8 2 625 6.25 f a  1.5 
  1
350 14 1 25  1.6  1
    f m  8  f a  8  = 1.6 m
625 25 2 28 5
20. (1)Condition for achromatic combination
 1 1   1.6
   ;  V   R  A   V   R  A '  f a  P   5 m   Pm  f  1.6  1D
' '

  m

 A' 
1.42  1.35  40  1.40
24. (1) Image formed is real, inverted and same in
1.9  1.7 size because object is at the centre of curvature
of the mirror.
 NET     '   Y  1 A   Y'  1 A '
25. (2) Magnification,
= (1.40 – 1)40 ~ (1.8 – 1)1.40 = 0.480.
f  3  f
m
21. (1)Applying Snell’s law at each interface:
f u f   20   f  15 cm
1 × sin 90  1 sin r1 ........... (i) 26. (2)
2 2 2
1 sin  90  r1    2 sin r2 1 1 1 dv  v du
  ;   
 v  v
dv    du 10    30  v  1ms1
u v f dt  u dt  u  9
  2 sin r2  1 cos r1 ........... (ii)
h h h
 2 sin  90  r2   3 sin r3 ........... (iii) 27. (4) x1  3 , x 2  3 , x 3  3 ;
1 2 2

3 sin  90  r3    4 sin r4 Apparent depth of the dot = x1 + x2 + x3

h 1 1 1 
  4 sin r4  3 cos r3 ........... (iv) = 3     
 1 2 3 
 4 sin  90  r4   5 sin r5 ........... (v)
28. (4)conceptual
5 sin  90  r5   1 sin 90  1  5 cos r5 .... (vi)
m 100
On squaring and adding the above equations 29. (2) m = mo  me ie., mo    20
me 5
12   32   25  2   22   24
f o  f e  90  6 
2 1  2  1 1 1.5 1  1.5 30. (3) m  f 1  D   1    18.75
22. (3)   ;   e   6  25 
v u R v 9 12

564 II PUC
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
1 f f 4 4
 1 1  f   f2
2 f 2 f2 3 (or) 1 3
4 1
31. (3) f2  f2 
1 3 3
 
From eq(i) 60 2 4 4 ;
 f2   f2
3 3
1 1 1 d 1 1 10
      4
f f1 f 2 f1 f 2 20 20 20  20 f2 = 15cm  f1    15  20cm
3
1 3 40 35. (4) Here, 1  0.45 , 2  0.21 and f 2  84cm
   f '  cm
f ' 40 3 As the lens are kept is contact it is achromatic
32. (2)When plane surface is silvered from its
///////////////// condition.
effective focal length 1 f1 0.45 f
      1
f 2 f2 0.21 84
F  15cm ;
2 45  84
 f1    180cm
1 1 1 21
for mirror  
F u v 36. (4)
For this combination,
1 1 1
;    V  24cm  1 1 
15 40 v 1
  a  g  1    ...... (i)
F  R1 R2 
Now, if this combination is immersed in liquid,

33. (1) 1 1 1 
then   1  g  1    ...... (ii)
F'  R1 R2 
From lens maker’s formula 
F'

 a  g  1

1.5  1 or F '  0.5

1 1 
f  a  g  1 3  f 9 
  1
1 1.5 2 
  m  g 1    Now m  g  g    1 8 
f  R1 R2   m 1.75  4 
3 
For concave lens as shown in the figure, in this
F'
case R1 = –R and R2 = +R  0.5  8 ; f '  0.5  8  10  40cm
f
1  1.5  1 1  0.25  2
  1      100
f  1.75  R R  1.75R 37. (3) f   125cm
0.8
 f  3.5R 1 1 1 1 1 1
The positive sign shows that the lens behaves ;     
f v u 125 V1 15  V  17cm
as a convergent lens.
1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1  
34. (4) P  P1  P2   ;   125 V2 100  V2  500cm
f1 f 2 60 f1 f 2 
D 25 D 25
1 f f 38. (4) M 1  1  f  1  10  3.5; M 2  f  10  2.5
 1 2 ........... (i)
60 f1 f 2
39. (3) 40.(2)
According to equation,

II PUC 565
 Objective Physics

CHAPTER Wave Optics

Wavefront and Huygens’ principle, reflection and refraction of plane

10
wave at a plane surface using wavefronts. Proof of laws of reflection and refraction
using Huygens’ principle. Interference, Young’s double hole experiment and
expression for fringe width, coherent sources and sustained interference of
light.Diffraction due to a single slit, width of central maximum. Resolving power
of microscopes and astronomical telescopes. Polarisation, plane polarized light;
Brewster’s law, uses of plane polarized light and Polaroids.
PAST NEET PAPERS SUBTOPIC LEVEL ANALYSIS
NEET 2016 NEET 2016 Forecasting of
Year NEET 2018 NEET 2017
PHASE-I PHASE-II NEET-2019

No of
question 2 2 1 2 1
Asked
brewster's law refractive index first secondary visibility of fringes malus law &
Subtopic & angular in YDSE & maxima in & diffraction due a fringe width in
fringe width malus law diffraction single slit YDSE
WAVE THEORY OF LIGHT
 This theory was enunciated by Huygen in a hypothetical medium known as luminiferrous ether.
WAVE FRONT
 The locus of all points of the medium which are vibrating in the same phase(state of vibration), is
called the wave front or A wavefront is the locus of all the particles which are in phase.
 Depending upon the shape of the source of light, wave front can be classified into three types.

Plane WF
Spherical WF
Cylindrical WF

Light ray Light rays

Point source
Line source

 A spherical wave front is produced by a point source of light, because the locus of all points which
are equidistant from the point source is a sphere.
 A cylindrical wavefront is produced by a linear source of light like slit, because all the points
equidistanct from a linear source lie on the surface of a cylinder.
 A point or a linear source produces a plane wave front at a infinity large distance.
 A divergent or a convergent beam gives rise to a spherical /cylindrical wavefront whereas a parallel
beam of light gives rise to a plane wavefront but at large distances from a source a portion of spheri-
cal or cylindrical wavefront is a plane wavefront.Refraction in form of Wave Fronts

Type of wave front Inte nsity Am plitude

(i) Sph eri ca l wavefront 1 1
I 2 A
r r
(ii) cyl indrica l wav efront 1 1
I A
r r
(iii) Pl ane w avefr ont I  ro A r o

r = dista nce from the source

566 II PUC
Wave Optics
CHARACTERISTIC OF WAVEFRONT
(a) The phase difference between various particles on the wavefront is zero.
(b) These wavefronts travel with the speed of light in all directions in an isotropic medium.
(c) A point source of light always gives rise to a spherical wavefront in an isotropic medium.
(d) In an anisotropic medium it travels with different velocities in different directions.
 This principle can be used to geometrically construct the position of new wavefront at a given
instant of time if the position of wave front at an earlier instant of time was known.
 Using this priniple Huygen successfully proved laws of reflection, refraction and phenomenon of
interference.
Phase / Phase difference / Path difference / Time difference
 Phase : The argument of sine or cosine in the expression for displacement of a wave is defined as
the phase. For displacement y = a sin  t ; term  t = phase or instantaneous phase
 Phase difference () : The difference between the phases of two waves at a point is called phase
difference i.e. if y 1  a1 sin  t and y 2  a 2 sin ( t   ) so phase difference = 
 Path difference () : The difference in path length’s of two waves meeting at a point is called

path difference between the waves at that point. Also   2   
T
 Time difference (T.D.) : Time difference between the waves meeting at a point is T.D.  
2
 The difference in the paths traversed by the two light waves at the time of arrival at a point is called
path difference.( x )
 The difference in the phase angles expressed in radians between the two waves at the time of arrival
2
at a point is called phase difference    .   x

Huygen's Principle
 The Dutch physicist Christian Huygen in 1678, suggested a convincing wave theory of light. He
assumed light as a mechanical wave propagating in a hypothetical medium called ether.
According to Huygen
 Every point on a given wavefront (known as primary wavefront) acts as a source of new
disturbances called secondry wavelets, which propagates in all directions in a homogenious
medium with same speed.
 A tangential surface to these secondry wavelets in forward direction gives you the position of
new wavefront called secondary wavefront.
PRINCIPLE OF SUPER POSITION.
 When two or more than two waves superimpose over each other at a common particle of the
medium then the resultant displacement (y) of the particle is equal to the vector sum of the
displacements (y1 and y2) produced by individual waves. i.e. y  y 1  y 2
Interference of light
 The phenomenon of Modification in the intensity of light due to redistribution of light energy in
the region of superposition of two or more light waves is known as Interference of light.
 Due to interference of light, the intensity of light is not uniform through out the area of observa-
tion, at some places the intensity will be minimum & at some places it will be maximum.
 Interference is exhibited by longitudinal waves or transverse waves or by mechanical waves.
(a) Constructive interference : When resultant intensity is greater than the sum of two individual
wave intensities [I > (I1 + I2)], then the interference is said to be constructive.
(b) Destructive interference : When the resultant intensity is less than the sum of two individual
wave intensities [I < (I1 + I2)], then the interference is said to destructive.
II PUC 567
 Objective Physics
 There is no violation of the law of conservation of energy in interference. Here, the energy from the
points of minimum energy is shifted to the points of maximum energy.
TYPES OF SOURCES
1. Coherent source : Two sources are said to be coherent if they emit light waves of the same wave
length and start with same phase or have a constant phase difference.
2. Incoherent source: Two independent monochromatic sources, emit waves of same wave length. But
the waves are not in phase. So they are incoherent. This is because, atoms cannot emit light waves in
same phase and these sources are said to be incoherent sources.
 By using two independen laser beams it has been possible to record the interference pattern.
 The coherent sources may be both real or both virtual or one real & the other virtual.
 The distance between two coherent sources must be small & in the order of the wavelength of light.
 Methods to obtain coherent sources :
Coherent sources can be obtained by employing following methods.
 Division of wavefront
The wavefront is divided into two or more parts by use of mirrors, lenses or prisms.
P S1
S1
S2
S2
YDSE Lloyd's mirror Fresnel biprism
 A wavefront can be divided into two parts using a opaque screen with two small openings.
Ex : Young’s double slit experiment.(real sources),Billet’s split lens (two real images of a source formed
by split lens),Lloyd’s mirror.(one virtual & one real) &Fresnel biprism/mirrors.(virtual sources)
Division of amplitude
 The amplitude of incoming beam is divided into two or more parts by partial reflection or refraction.
These divided parts travel different paths and are finally brought together to produce interference.
 Ex: The brilliant colour seen in a thin film of transparent material like soap film, oil film, michelson's
interferro meter, Newtons' ring etc.
Interference with incoherent sources :
 If the sources are incoherent, interference takes place but we cannot observe any fringe pattern. The
phase difference between the two sources changes so rapidly and randomly that the interference
maxima and minima are not observed by the eye and the screen appears to be uniformly illuminated

In this case resultant intensity is just sum of the two intensities. I  I1  I2

Interference of 'n' Coherent waves :
 If there are 'n' coherent waves each of intensity I0 then the resultant maximum intensity is

I  I1  I 2  I 3  ........ I n 2   I 0  I 0  I0  ........ I 0 2  n I0 2  n 2I0

 If there are 'n' incoherent waves each of intensity I0 then the resultant intensity is
I = I1 + I2 + I3 + ........... + In ; I = I0 + I0 + I0 + ........... + I0 = nI0

(i) A  A 2  A 2  2A A cos (ii) If A1 = A2 =a then A  2a cos
1 2 1 2 2
2 
(iii)   1   2  2 1 2 cos  (iv) If I1 =I2 =I0 then I  4I 0 cos
2
Where  is the phase difference between them as they meet.

568 II PUC
Wave Optics
Imax  Imin
 Average Intensity Iav =  I1  I2  a 12  a 22
2
I w a2
Intensity width of slit (amplitude)  I  w a2  I  w  2
1 1 1
 2
2 2 a 2
 (i) Ratio of maximum and minimum intensities :
 I max 
 1
2 2
2 2 I1 a1  I min 
I max  I1  I 2   I1 / I 2  1 
   a1  a 2   a1 / a 2  1    
  
  
  a /a 1 &  I2 a2  I max 
I min  I1  I 2   I / I 1
 1 2   a1  a 2   1 2   1 
 I min 
 (ii) If two waves having equal intensity (I1 = I2 = I0) meets at two locations P and Q with path
difference 1 and 2 respectively then the ratio of resultant intensity at point P and Q will be

1   
cos 2 cos 2  1 
IP 2    

IQ    
cos 2 2 cos 2  2 
2   
 Fringe visibility is a measure of intensity contrast between the bright and dark bands.
With the help of visibility, knowledge about coherence, fringe contrast an interference pattern is

I max  I min I1 I 2
obtained. V  2 If I min  0 , V  1 (maximum)
I max  I min (I1  I 2 )
i.e., fringe visibility will be best. Also if I max  0, V  1 and If I max  I min , V  0
S .N o . Con str uctiv e inter fe ren ce Destru ctive in te rfe re nce
1 W hen th e w av es m ee ts a p oint w it h W hen t he wa ve me et s a poin t w ith
sa m e p ha se, con st ru cti ve in te rfe ren ce opp osit e ph ase, d estru cti ve
is obtai ned at th at p oin t int erfer ence i s obt ain ed at tha t p oint
(i.e. m ax im um ligh t) (i.e . m in im u m l ight )
2 Ph as e d iffere nce betw ee n the wa ves   180 o or (2 n  1)  ; n = 1, 2, ...
at the poin t of observa tion
or (2 n  1)  ; n  0,1, 2 .....
  0 o or 2 n
3 Pa th di ffere nce betw ee n the wa ves a t 
  (2 n  1)
th e poi nt of obse rva tion   n  2
(i.e. eve n mu ltip le of  / 2 ) (i.e . od d m u lti ple of  / 2)
4 Res u lta nt am p litu d e a t the po in t of Resu lt ant am p litu d e a t th e p oint of
obse rva tion w ill be m a xim u m obse rva ti on w ill be m in im um
a1  a2  Am i n  0 Am in  a1  a2
If a 1  a2  a0  Am a x  2a 0 If a1  a 2  Am in  0

5 Res u lta nt intensit y a t the p oint of Resu lt ant i ntensity a t th e p oin t of

obse rva tion w ill be m a xim u m obse rva ti on w ill be m in im um
I m ax  I 1  I 2  2 I1 I 2 I m in  I 1  I 2  2 I 1 I 2
2 2
I m ax   I1  I2  I m in   I1  I2 
If I1  I 2  I 0  I m a x  2 I 0 If I1  I 2  I 0  I m i n  0

II PUC 569
 Objective Physics
 Young’s Double Slit Experiment
P

S1 
M y
D
 d D
  O 2d
d
S C 4I0
d
x N =
D

S2

D
Screen
yd
Path difference x  d sin  for small  x 
D
 Condition for Maxima
D n
For maxima Dx = nl  y  n (n = 0, 1, 2, …) or d sin  = nl  sin  =
d d
 Shifting of fringe pattern in YDSE:
 If a transparent thin film of mica or glass is put in the path of one of the t

waves, then the whole fringe pattern gets shifted. 

 If film is put in the path of upper wave, fringe pattern shifts upward S1
and if film is placed in the path of lower wave, pattern shift downward. d C

D  S2
Fringe shift  (  1) t  (  1) t  Additional path
d 
Screen
difference  (  1)t D

(  1) t n
If shift is equivalent to n fringes then n  or t  (  1)

Shift is independent of the order of fringe
(i.e. shift of zero order maxima = shift of nth order maxima.
Shift is independent of wavelength.
 Missing wavelength in front of one of the slits in YDSE:
From figure S2P = D 2  d 2 and S 1 P  D

So the path difference between the waves reaching at P

S1 P
1/ 2
d Central
 d2 
  S 2 P  S 1 P  D 2  d 2  D  D 1  2  D S2
 D 

 1 d2  d2 D
From binomial expansion   D  1  2 2   D  2 D
 D 

570 II PUC
Wave Optics
d 2 (2n  1)  d2
For Dark at P     Missing wavelength at P 
2D 2 (2 n  1) D

d2 d2 d2
By putting n  1, 2, 3 .... Missing wavelengths are  
, , ....
D 3D 5D
 When Young's double slit experiment arrangement is kept in a medium of refractive index ‘’,

  i.e.,  < . Intensity remains same.

 When slits do not emit light of same intensity (say one of the slit is covered slightly), then
(a) Dark fringes will not be exactly dark, they become slightly brighter
(b) Bright fringes become less bright.
 When white light is used in place of monochromatic light,
(a) Central fringe will be white, as all the wavelengths are present (b) All other fringes will be
coloured (c) First maxima after central maximum will be of violet colour.
(d) Two wavelengths may have maxima at the same position given by n11 = n22, where nth
maxima of 1 coincides with n2th maxima of 2.
 Doppler’s Effect in Light: The phenomenon of apparent change in frequency (or wavelength) of
the light due to relative motion between the source of light and the observer is called Doppler’s
effect. If   actual frequency,  '  Apparent frequency, v = speed of source w.r.t stationary observer,
c = speed of light. Doppler’s shift ( ) and time period of rotation (T) of a star relates as
 2r
   ; r = radius of star.
c T
 Applications of Doppler effect
 (i) Determination of speed of moving bodies (aeroplane, submarine etc) in RADAR and SONAR.
 (ii) Determination of the velocities of stars and galaxies by spectral shift.
DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT
 Diffraction of light was first observed by Grimaldi. The bending of light around edges of an
obstacle on the enchroachment of light within geometrical shadow is known as “diffraction of
light”. Diffraction confirms wave nature of light & diffraction can be established by all types of
waves.The light waves are diffracted only when the size of the obstacle is comparable to the
wavelength of light. The amount of bending of light depends upon the size of the obstacle and
wavelength of light.
 Diffraction of light at a single slit : In case of diffraction at a single slit, we get a central bright band
with alternate bright (maxima) and dark (minima) bands of decreasing intensity as shown
P I
x 
x + x
S1 

d O
S2 d sin 3 2   2 3
  
d d d d d d
D Screen
Slit

2 D 2
 Width of central maxima  0  & angular width 
d d
2f
 Width of central maximum is  0  Where d is the distance between the slit and the screen
a
and f is focal length of lens.
II PUC 571
 Objective Physics
 Minima occurs at a point on either side of the central maxima, such that the path difference
between the waves from the two ends of the aperture is given by
n
  n  ; where n  1, 2, 3 .... i.e. d sin   n   sin  
d
 The secondary maxima occurs, where the path difference between the waves from the two ends of
the aperture is given by
  (2n  1) 
  (2n  1) ; where n  1, 2, 3 .... i.e. d sin   (2n  1)  sin  
2 2 2d
 (i) The width of central maxima  , that is, more for red colour and less for blue.
i.e.,wx as blue < red  wblue < wred
 (ii) For obtaining the fraunhofer diffraction, focal length of second lens (L2) is used.
wx  f  1/a width will be more for narrow slit
 (iii) By decreasing linear width of slit, the width of central maxima increase.
d 1
 Resolving power of a telescope : R.P .   d = diameter of objective
1.22 
 = wavelength of light,  = minimum angular separation between the objects (limit of resolution)
2 sin 
 Resolving power of microscope : R.P .   = Refractive index of medium between object
1.22
and objective;  = semi vertical angle of cone of light from the object.
o
1  1 
 Limit of resolution of a normal human eye. R.P.  1    R.P   rad
 60  60 180
D O1
  limit of resolution for the objects to be resolved
d
eye  d
D 1  D
   , i.e.,  3  10 4 O2
d 60 180 d
D
 Comparison between interference and diffraction
Interference Diffraction
Results d ue to the superposition of waves Results due to the superposition of wavelets
from two coherrent sources. from different parts of same wave front.
(single coherent source)
D All secondary fringes are of same width but
All fringes are of same width  
d the central maximum is of double the width
D
 0  2  2
d
All fringes are of same intensity Intensity decreases as the order of maximum
increases.
Intensity of all minimum may be zero Intensity of minima is not zero.
Positions of nth maxima and minima Positions of nth secondary maxima and
n D D minima
xn (Brigh t)  , xn( D ar k)  (2n  1)
d d D n D
xn ( Bright)  (2 n  1)
, xn (D ark) 
d d
Path d ifference for nth maxima   n  
for nth secondary maxima   (2 n  1)
2
Path d ifference for nth minima   (2n  1) Path difference for nth minima   n 

572 II PUC
Wave Optics
Polarisation of light
 The interference and diffraction are possible for both longitudinal and transverse waves. Whereas
the polarisation is something specific for transverse waves.
 Light is an electromagnetic wave in which oscillating entities or electric and magnetic field vectors,
The electric field vector, magnetic field vector & direction of propagation are mutually perpendicu-
lar So, the plane containing electric & magnetic field vectors are perpendicular to the direction of
propagation.
 Polarisation of wave means to confine the vibrations in a plane which is perpendicular to the direc-
tion of propagation from the vibrations taking place in all directions. In case of longitudinal waves,
the vibrations take place in the direction of propagation. Therefore, there is no question of polarisa-
tion of longitudinal waves.
Polarisation of light
 Electrical vector in the electromagnetic wave causes the sensation of sight. The properties of light are
explained by considering the electrical vector only.
 The process of confining the vibrations of the electric vectors of the light waves to one direction. or
The process of confining the vibrations of light waves to a plane.
Unpolarised light
 The ordinary light also called as unpolarised light, consists of a very large number of vibrations in all
planes with equal probability at right angle to the direction of propagation. So unpolarised light is
symmetrical about its direction of propagation.

Unpolarised light Unpolarised light

Plane polarised light OR Linearly polarised Light :

 If the electrical field vector is confined to a plane passing through the direction of propagation it is
called the plane polarised light.

plane polarised light

plane polarised light

 Polarised light, whose vibrations lie in the plane of paper are represented with Arrow components
 Polarised light whose vibrations are perpendicular to the plane of paper are represented with
Dot components.
Plane of vibration & Plane of polarisation
 The plane containing the direction of vibration and the direction of propagation of light is called
plane of vibration. (or) A plane in which vibra-
tions takes place is called the plane of vibration.
A plane of vibration B
 The plane passing through the direction of propa-
E plane
gation and containing no vibration is called plane polarised light
of polarisation. (or) A plane in which no vibra-
O'
tions occur is called plane of polarisation. unpolarised G
F
 The plane of vibration & plane of polarisation are light plane of
D C polarisation
mutually perpendicular.

II PUC 573
 Objective Physics
Malus Law
 Malus states that “the intensity of the polarized light transmitted through the analyser is
proportional tocosine square of the angle between the plane of transmission of analyser and the
plane of transmission of polarizer.” This is known as Malus law.
 It states that the intensity of the polarised light transmitted through the analyser varies as the square
of the cosine of the angle between the plane of transmission of the analyser and the plane of the
polariser.
 (i) I  I 0 cos 2  and A 2  A 02 cos 2   A  A 0 cos  ,

I0 A0
(a) If   0 o , I  I 0 , A  A 0 , (b) If   45 o , I  , A , (c) If   90 o , I  0 , A  0
2 2
Ii
 (ii) If Ii  Intensity of unpolarised light. So I 0  i.e. if an unpolarised light is converted into
2
Ii
plane polarised light, its intensity becomes half. and I  cos 2 
2
(I max  I min )
 Percentage of polarisation  (I  100
max  I min )
I0
 Therefore the intensity of polarized light after passing through analyser is I= Cos 2θ
2
Where I0 is the intensity of unpolarized light.
Ao
 The amplitude of polarized light after passing through analyser A  cos  .
2
 If 'n' polarisers are arranged so that the first and the last ones are crossed,  is the angle between any
two successive polarisers, I is the intensity of incident light then intensity of emerging light is
I
I|  cos x  where x = 2 (n-1).
2
 In case of three polarizers P1, P2 and P3. If 1 is the angle between transmission axes of P1 and P2, 2

is the angle between transmission axes of P2 and P3 . Then the intensity of emerging light from P3 is

a P1 P2 P3

I0
I cos 2 1 cos 2 2 2
2 I 1 
Cos2 1.Cos2 2
2
 Polarisation by reflection: This is the simplest method of producing plane polarised light. In 1801
Malus discovered that when ordinary light is reflected by a sheet of glass or the surface of water. It
becomes partially or completely plane polarised. The degree of polarised depends on the angle of
incidence.
 Brewster’s law :David Brewster’s in 1813 discovered that when a ray of light is completely polarised
by reflection, the reflected ray and refracted ray are at right angles to each other.(or) The reflected
and refracted rays are at right angles to each other when light is incident at the polarising angle.
 When an unpolarized light is incident on a glass plate so that the reflected & refracted rays are
mutually perpendicular then the angle of incidence is called Brewster angle.

574 II PUC
Wave Optics
unpolarised
light C 100% polarised
A perpendicular
to the plane of
p p incidence

B denser
r medium
partially m
polarised D
 The tangent of the polarising angle is equal to the refractive index of the medium.
0
 When the reflected beam is completely plane polarized ie.,  p  r  90 or r  (90   p )
1 3   1 4  
For glass-air media p  tan   57.5 & For water-air media p  tan    53
0 0

2 3
 (i) p = tan–1(  ) ;
1
(ii)   where C = critical angle
sinC
  1
(iii) tan p = ; sin p = 2  1 ; cos p = 2  1
1

 2 1

p
1
 Polarising angle depends on nature of material and colour of light.
Polaroids
 Polaroids are artificially made polarising materials in the form of sheets or plates capable of pro-
ducing strong beam of plane polarised light.
 When two polaroids are arranged one behind the other with their axis perpendicular, the light is
cutoff.
Uses of Polaroids
 They are used to produce and analyse the plane polarised beam of light.
 They are used in producing and veiwing three dimension pictures.
 Polaroids sheets are used in making sun glasses.
 Polaroids are used in window panes of a train and especially of an aeroplane.

II PUC 575
 Objective Physics
EXAMINATION CORNER

1. Unpolarised light is incident from air on a plane  

0.20 o  o
.. (i) 0.21  ... (ii)
surface of a material of refractive index ‘  ’. At 2 mm d
a particular angle of incidence ‘i’, it is found that
0.20 d
the reflected and refracted rays are perpendicu- Dividing we get, 
0.21 2 mm
lar to each other. Which of the following options
is correct for this situation? (NEET-2018)  d = 1.9 mm
3. Young’s double slit experiment is first performed
1  1 
(1) i  sin   in air and then in a medium other than air. It is
 found that 8th bright fringe in the medium lies
(2) Reflected light is polarised with its electric
where 5th dark fringe lies in air. The refractive
vector perpendicular to the plane of incidence
index of the medium is nearly (NEET-2017)
(3) Reflected light is polarised with its electric
(1) 1.25 (2) 1.59 (3) 1.69 (4) 1.78
vector parallel to the plane of incidence
D
1
1 A: (4) X1  X 5th dark   2  5  1 
(4) i  tan   2d

A: (2)When reflected light rays and refracted rays D
X 2  X8th bright  8 ; X1  X 2
are perpendicular, reflected light is polarised d
with electric field vector perpendicular to the 9 D D 16
plane of incidence. 8 ;   1.78
2 d d 9
4. The ratio of resolving powers of an optical mi-
o
croscope for two wavelengths 1  4000 A and
o
2  6000 A is (NEET-2017)
(1) 8 : 27 (2) 9 : 4 (3) 3 : 2 (4) 16 : 81
1
A: (3)Resolving power 

o
Also, tan i =  (Brewster angle) R1 2 6000 A 3
  o 
2. In Young’s double slit experiment the separation R2 1
4000 A 2
d between the slits is 2 mm, the wavelength  5. Two Polaroids P1 and P2 are placed with their
of the light used is 5896 Å and distance D axis perpendicular to each other. Unpolarised
between the screen and slits is 100 cm. It is found light I0 is incident on P1 . A third polaroid P3 is
that the angular width of the fringes is 0.20°. To kept in between P 1 and P2 such that its axis
increase the fringe angular width to 0.21° (with makes an angle 45o with that of P1 . The intensity
same  and D) the separation between the slits of transmitted light through P2 is (NEET-2017)
needs to be changed to (NEET-2018)
Io Io Io Io
(1) 2.1 mm (2) 1.9 mm (1) (2) (3) (4)
2 4 8 16
(3) 1.8 mm (4) 1.7 mm
 Io I 1 I
A: (3) I 2  cos 2 45 o  o   o
A: (2) Angular width  2 2 2 4
d
576 II PUC
Wave Optics
Io I 8. In a diffraction pattern due to a single slit of width
I3  cos 2 45o ; I 3  o ‘a’, the first minimum is observed at an angle
4 8 o
30 o whenlight of wavelength 5000 A is incident
on the slit. The first secondary maximum is
observed at an angle of (NEET-II 2016)

1 1 1 2
(1) sin   (2) sin  
4 3

1 1 1 3
(3) sin   (4) sin  
2 4
A: (4) a sin 30  
6. The interference pattern is obtained with two
coherent light sources of intensity ratio n. In 3 sin  3
a sin   ; 
Imax  I min 2 sin 30 2
the interference pattern, the ratio 3 1 3  3
I max  I min
sin    ; sin   ;   sin  
will be (NEET-II 2016) 2 2 4  4
n 2 n 9 . Two sources of intensity 2I and 8I are used
n 2 n
(1) (2) (3) 2 (4) 2 in an interference experiment. The intensity at
n1 n1  n  1  n  1
a point where the waves from two sources
I1 2 2 superimpose with a phase difference of (a) zero
A: (2)
I2
n ; I 
max  I1  I 2   
n  1 I2
(b)  / 2 and  c   is
2 2
I min   I1  I 2   n  1 I2 (1) 18 I ,10 I , 2 I (2) 5 I , 4 I , I
(3) 2 I , I , I / 2 (4) 2 I ,10 I ,18 I
Imax  I min 4 n 2 n
  A: (1) I  I1  I 2  2 I1 I 2 cos 
I max  I min 2  n  1  n  1
a)   0 , I  2 I  8I  2 2 I 8 I  18I
7. A linear aperture whose width is 0.02 cm is
placed immediately in front of a lens of focal 
b)   , I  2 I  8 I  0  10 I
length 60 cm. The aperture is illuminated nor- 2
mally by a parallel beam of wavelength 5  10  5
c)   , I  2 I  8I  2 2 I 8 I  2 I
cm. The distance of the first dark band of the
10. The ratio of amplitude of two waves is 4:3 then
diffraction pattern from the centre of the screen
is (NEET-II 2016) ratio of maximum and minimum intensity is
(1) 0.10 cm (2) 0.25 cm (1) 16:18 (2) 18:16 (3) 49:1 (4)94:1
(3) 0.20 cm (4) 0.15 cm 2
1 a 4 4
max I
 1 2 2
a a 
A: (3) a  3  a1  3 a2  I
2 min  a1  a2 
 y
A : (4)   
a f ; 2
4 
 3 a2  a 2 
   49
f  0.6  5  105 4
y   0.15 cm  a2  a2 
a 0.02 3 

II PUC 577
 Objective Physics
11. In YDSE, the intensity of the maxima is I. If the 15. In Young’s double slit experiment, the two slits
width of each slit is doubled the intensity of the act as coherent sources of equal amplitude ‘a’
maxima will be and of wavelength  . In other experiment with
(1) I/2 (2) I (3) 4I (4) 2 I the same set up, the two slits are sources of equal
I1 w1 I w1 amplitude ‘a’ and wavelength  , but are
A: (4)     I 2  2 I incoherent. The ratio of intensity of light at the
I 2 w2 I 2 2w1
mid point of the screen in the first case to that
12. In an interference pattern produced by two
in the second case is
identical slits, the intensity at the site of the
(1) 2:1 (2) 1:2 (3) 3:4 (4) 4:3
central maximum is I. The intensity at the same
A : (1)If I0 is intension of light from each slit then
spot when either of the two slits is closed is I0.
We must have I
Ic = 4I0 and Iinc = 2I0  c  2
(1) I = I0 (2) I = 2I0 I inc
(3) I = 4I0 (4) I & I0 are not related 16. In a Young’s double slit experiment, 12 fringes
are observed to be formed in a certain region of
2 
A : (3) I  4 I 0 cos  for maxima,   2 n  ;I = 4I0 the screen when light of wavelength 600 nm is
2
13. In Young’s double slit experiment, the constant used. If the light of wavelength 400 nm is used,
 the number of fringes observed in the same
phase difference between two sources is . The region of the screen will be
2
intensity at a point equidistant from the slits in (1) 12 (2) 18 (3) 24 (4) 8
terms of maximum intensity I0 is A:(2) y  n11  n2 2  12  600  n2  400  n2  18

(1) I0 (2) I0 / 2 (3) 3I0 / 4 (4) 3I0 17. In young’s double slit experiment the two
slits are illuminated by light of wavelength
2
A : (2) I  Imax cos   / 2  , here given Imax = I0 ; 58 90 0 A a nd t he an gu la r fr ing e widt h
obtained on the screen is 0.2 0 . If the whole
2  
I  I 0 cos   apparatus is immersed in water then the
2
angular fringe width will be, if the refractive
At a point equi distance from two source, the
index of water is 4/3
phase difference = phase different at sources
(1) 0.300 (2) 0.150 (3) 150 (4) 300
 2  I0  0.2
; I  I 0 cos    I 
1
i.e.,   A : (2)     0.15
2 4 2  4/3
14. The path difference between two interfering 18. The maximum number of possible interference
 maxima for slit separation equal to twice the
waves at a point on the screen is from central wavelength in Young’s double slit experiment is
6
maximum. The ratio of intensity at this point (1) infinite (2) five (3) three (4) zero
and that at the central fringe will be A: (2) d sin   n Given d  2 and for
(1) 0.75 (2) 7.5 (3) 85.3 (4) 853 maximum possible maxima sin   1  n  2 .
This only order of maxima.
2 
A : (1) I  I max cos   where No. of maxima N = (2n + 1) = (2 × 2 + 1) = 5
 2 19. In a single slit diffraction, the width of slit is 0.5
2 2   I  3 cm, focal length of lens is 40cm and wavelength
 x    cos 2   
  6 3 I max 2 4 of light is 4890Å. The distance of first dark fringe
is (nearly)
578 II PUC
Wave Optics
(1) 2 10  5 m (2) 4 10  5 m A A
(1) (2) (3) 2A (4) 2A
(3) 6 10  5 m (4) 8 10  5 m 2 2
 0 2 D f I0 A
A: (2) y     D  f  A: (4) I   A 0
2 9 a 2 2
2
4890  1010  40  102  I  A 2

 A  I  A0  2 A
y  4 10 5 m
0.5 10 2 23. The axes of the polariser and analyser are
inclined to each other at 600 . If the amplitude
of polarised light emergent through analyser is
A. The amplitude of unpolarised light incident
on polariser is
(1) A/2 (2) A (3) 2A (4) 2 2A

20. Angular width of central maxima is . When I A
2 A: (4) I  0 cos 2   A  0 cos 
a slit of width ‘a’ is illuminated by a light of 2 2
wavelength 7000 A then a =
0
A0 1
(1) 9  109 m (2) 8.9  107 m  A   A0  2 2 A
2 2
(3) 9  107 m (4) 9.8  107 m
24. Unpolarised light of intensity 32W/m2 passes
 
A: (4) a sin   n, n  1 ;    through a polariser and analyser which are at
2 4 an angle of 30° with respect to each other. The
1 10 7
a  7000  10  a  1.414  7  10 intensity of the light coming from analyser is
2
(1) 16 3W / m 2 (2) 12W / m 2
 9.8  10 7 m
(3) 16W / m 2 (4) 12W / m

2
I0 2 32  3  2
A: (2) I  cos   
   12w / m
2 2  2 
21. Unpolarized light of intensity I0 is incident on 25. The intensity of interference waves in an
a polarizer and the emerging light strikes a interference pattern is same as I . The resultant
second polarizing filter with its axis at 450 to intensity at the point of observation will be
that of the first. The intensity of the emerging
beam 
I0 I0 I0

(1) I  2 2 .I 0 1  cos  .cos  2
(1) (2) (3) I0 (4)
2 4 3 (2) I  I0 1  cos 
2
I0 I I  1  I 1  cos  1  cos 
A: (4) I   I 2  0 cos2   0     0
2 2 2  2 4 (3) I  (4) I 
I0 2I0
22. The amplitude of polarised light transmitted
through a polariser is A. The amplitude of A: (1) I  4 I cos 2   1  cos 
0 where cos   
unpolarised light incident on it is 2  2 2

II PUC 579
 Objective Physics
26. The path difference between two interfering 3) a bright slit white at the center diffusing to
 regions of different colours
waves at a point on the screen is from central
3 4) only be a diffused slit white in colour
maximum. The ratio of intensity at this point o
A: (1) Given, width of the slit  10 4 A
and that at the central fringe will be
(1) 0.25 (2) 7.5 (3) 85.3 (4) 853  10 4  10 10 m  10 6 m  1 m
2  2  2
A: (1) I  I max cos &    Wavelength of (visible) sunlight varies from
2  3 3 o o
4000 A to 8000 A .
I   2 / 3  1
  cos2    cos 2     0.25 As the width of slit is comparable to that of
Imax 2  2  4 wavelength, hence diffraction occurs with
27. A slit of width 12  107 m is illuminated by light maxima at center. So, at the center all colours
of wavelength 6000A 0 . The angular width of appear i.e., mixing of colours form white patch
the central maximum is (approximately) at the center.
(1) 300 (2) 600 (3) 900 (4) 00 30. In a Young’s double-slit experiment, the source
 6 10 7 is white light. One of the holes is covered by a
A: (2) sin       30 red filter and another by a blue fil ter. In this
a 12 107
case,
1) there shall be alterference patterns of red and
blue
2) there shall be an interference pattern for red
distinct from that for blue

Angular width  2  60 3) there shall be no interference fringes

28. A parallel beam of natural light is incident at 4) there shall be an interference pattern for red
an angle of 580 on a plane glass surface. The mixing with one for blue
reflected beam is completely linearly polarized.
A: (3) For the interference pattern to be formed on
a) The angle of refraction of the transmitted
the screen, the sources should be coherent and
beam is
emits lights of same frequency and wavelength.
b) The refractive index of the glass is
 tan 580  1.6  In a Young’s double-slit experiment, when one
0
(1) 32 , 1.6 0
(2) 3.2 , 1.6 of the holes is covered by a red filter and an-
0
(3) 32 , 1.3 0
(4) 3.2 , 1.3 other by a blue filter. In this case due to filtra-
A: (1)(a) i  r  90  r  90  58  32 & tion only red and blue lights are present.
p

In YDSE monochromatic light is used for the

(b) Tani p      tan 58  1.6
formation of fringes on the screen. Hence, in
29. Consider sunlight incident on a slit of width
o this case there shall be no interference fringes.
10 4 A . The image seen through the slit shall
1) be a fine sharp slit white in colour at the center
2) a bright slit white at the center diffusing to
zero intensities at the edges

580 II PUC
Wave Optics

TASK - I (3) in randomly oriented planes but vibrating

1. Huygen’s concept of secondary waves in phase
(1) is used to explain absorption of light by a medium (4) in mutually perpendicular planes but vibrat
(2) is a geometrical method to find the position ing in phase
of a new wavefront 8. In Young’s double slit experiment, the 8 th
(3) is used to determine the velocity of light maximum with wavelength 1 is at a distance
(4) is used to explain rectilinear propagation of light d1from the central maximum and the 6 th
2. Wavefront is the locus of all points, where the maximum with a wavelength  2 is at a distance
particles of the medium vibrate wit the same d2. Then (d 1 / d 2 ) is equal to
(1) period (2) frequency

4 2  
4 1  
3 2  
3 1 
(3) amplitude (4) phase (1) 3    (2) 3    (3) 4    (4) 4   
 1   2   1   2 
3. For light diverging from a point source,
9. Four different independent waves are
(1) the wavefront is spherical
represented by a) y1=a1 sin  1t b) y2=a2 sin
(2) the intensity decreases in proportional to the

distance squared  2t c) y3=a3 sin  3t d) y4=a4sin(  4 t+ ) The
3
(3) the wavefront is parabolic
sustained interference is possible due to
(4) the intensity at the wavefront does not de
(1) a & c (2) a & d (3) c & d
pend on the distance
(4)not possible with any combination
(1) (1) & (2) are correct (2) (2) & (3) are correct
10. The necessary condition for an interference by
(3) (2) &(4) are correct (4) All are correct
two sources of light is that:
4. The electromagnetic theory of light failed to
(1) two light sources must have the same
explain
wavelength
(1) Photo electric effect (2) Polarisation
(2) two point sources should have the same
(3) Diffraction (4) Interference
amplitude and same wavelength
5. Huygen’s wave theory is used
(3) two sources should have the same
(1) to determine the velocity of light
wavelength, nearly the same amplitude and
(2) to find the position of the wave front
have a constant phase angle difference
(3) to determine the wavelength of light
(4) the two point sources should have a
(4) to find the focal length of a lens.
randomly varying phase difference
6. Dual nature of electromagnetic radiation gets dem-
11. Interference is produced with two coherent
onstrated in the following pair of phenom ena.
sources of same intensity. If one of the sources
(1) Diffraction and reflection
is covered with a thin film so as to reduce the
(2) Photoelectric effect and interference
intensity of light coming out of it to half, then
(3) Refraction and total internal reflection
(1) Bright fringes will be less bright and dark
(4) Polarisation and diffraction
fringes will be less dark
7. Electromagnetic wave consists of periodically
(2) Bright fringes will be more bright and the
oscillating electric and magnetic vectors.
dark fringes will be more dark
(1) in mutually perpendicular planes but
(3) Brightness of both types of the fringes will
vibrat(ing with a phase difference of 
remain the same
(2) in mutually perpendicular planes but vibrat
(4) Dark region will spread completely
ing with a phase difference of  /2
II PUC 581
 Objective Physics
12. The path difference between two interfering 18. In Young’s double slit experiment, we get 60
waves at a point on screen is 70.5 times the wave fringes in the field of view of monochromatic
length. The point is light of wavelength 4000 A  . If we use mono-
(1) Dark (2) Bright chromatic light of wavelength 6000 A  , then the
(3) Not possible (4) Green in colour number of fringes obtained in the same field of
13. Two coherent waves each of amplitude ‘a’ view is
traveling with a phase difference  when (1) 60 (2) 90 (3) 40 (4) 1.5
superpose with each other the resultant 19. In the Young’s experiment with sodium light,
intensity at a given point on the screen is the slits are 0.589 m apart. What is the angular
(1) a 2 (1  cos ) (2) 4a 2 (1  cos ) width of the fourth maximum? Given that
(3) 2a 2 (1  cos ) (4) (1  cos )   589 nm .
14. To demonstrate the phenomena of interference, 1

(1) sin 3  10
6
 1

(2) sin 3  10
8

we require
(1) two sources which emit radiation of same (3) sin
1
 0.33  10 
6
(4) sin
1
 0.33  10 
8

frequency 20. A slit 5.0 cm wide is irradiated normally with

(2) two sources which emit radiation of nearly microwaves of wavelength 1.0 cm. Then the an-
same frequency gular spread of the central maximum on either
(3) two sources which emit radiation of the same side of the incident light is nearly
frequency and have a definite phase relation (1) 1/5 radian (2) 4 radian
ship (3) 5 radian (4) 6 radian.
(4) two sources which emit radiation of differ 21. A parallel beam of monochromatic light of
ent wavelength wavelength 5000 A  is incident normally on a
15. Instead of using two slits as in Young’s experi- single narrow slit of width 0.001 mm. The light
ment, if we use two separate but identical so is focused by a convex lens on a screen placed
dium lamps, which of the following occur? on focal plane. The first minimum will be formed
(1) general illumination for the angle of diffraction equal to
(2) widely separate interference (1) 0 (2) 15 (3) 30 (4) 50
(3) very bright maximum 22. Two coherent sources are placed 0.9 mm apart
(4) very dark minimum. and the fringes are observed one metre away.
16. The path difference between two interfering The wavelength of monochromatic light used
waves at a point on a screen is 11.5 times the if it produces the second dark fringe at a dis
wavelength. The point is tance of 10 mm from the central fringe will be
(1) dark (2) bright
(1) 6  10 5 cm (2) 6  10 6 cm
(3) neither dark nor bright
(4) data is inadequate (3) 6  10 7 cm (4) 1.2  10 4 cm
17. In Young’s double slit experiment carried out 23. A double slit experiment produce interference
with light of wavelength   5000 A  , the dis- fringes for sodium light. The fringes are 0.4 A
o

tance between the slits is 0.2 mm and the screen apart in air. The angular fringe separation if the
is at 200 cm from the slits. The central maxi- entire arrangement is immersed in water.
mum (taking the central maximum as zeroth o 1.6 o
(1) 1.6 A (2) A
maximum) will be at x equal to 3
(1) 1.67 cm (2) 1.5 cm (3) 0.5 cm (4) 5.0 cm o
(3) 0.3 A (4) None
582 II PUC
Wave Optics
24. Angular width of the central maximum is mea- 30. In an interference experiment using waves of
sured in a Fraunhoffer diffraction pattern. The same amplitude, path difference between the

slit is illuminated using light of wavelength waves at a point on the screen is . The ratio
o 4
6000 A . When the slit is illuminated using light of intensity at this point with that at the central
of another wavelength, the angular width de bright fringe is
creases by 30%. The wavelength of this light is (1) 1 (2) 0.5 (3) 1.5 (4) 2.0
o o o o
(1) 5460 A (2) 7800 A (3) 4200 A (4) 6500 A 31. At two points P and Q on a screen in Young’s
25. In a Young’s double slit experiment, 12 fringes double slit experiment, waves from slits S1 and
are observed to be formed in a certain region of 
S2 have a path difference of 0 and respec
the screen when light of wavelength 600 nm is 4
used. If the light of wavelength 400 nm is used, tively. The ratio of intensities at P and Q will be
the number of fringes observed in the same (1) 2 : 1 (2) 2 : 1 (3) 4 : 1 (4) 3:2
region of the screen will be 32. Diffraction effects are more pronounced or
(1) 12 (2) 18 (3) 24 (4) 8 easier to notice in the case of sound than in the
26. The path difference between two interfering case of light waves, because
waves at a point on a screen is 11.5 times the (1) sound travels faster than light
wavelength of light used. That point will be (2) sound waves have a smaller wavelength
(1) dark (2) bright (3) sound waves are of longer wavelength
1 (4) sound waves are longitudinal
(3) times less intense than that of the source
11.5 33. It is difficult to observe diffraction in case of light
(4) 11.5 times brighter than the intensity of the waves, because
source (1) light waves can travel through vaccum
27. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the wave- (2) peed of light is more
length of red light used is 7.8  10 7 m and that (3) light waves are transverse in nature
of blue light used is 5.2  10 7 m. When both are (4) wavelength of light is small
used, the minimum value of n for which the a 34. In the experiment of diffraction at single slit, if
blue fringe coincides with mth red fringe, is slit width is decreased, the width of central
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4 maximum
28. In Young’s double slit experiment, the distance (1) increases in Fresnel diffraction but decreases
of the screen is increased four times and dis- in Fraunhoffer diffraction
tance between two coherent sources is reduced (2) decreases in Fresnel diffraction but increases
to half. The fridge width will in Fraunhoffer diffraction
(1) increase by 2 times (2) increase by 8 times (3) increases in both Fresnel and Fraunhoffer
(3) decrease by 8 times (4) decrease by 2 times diffraction
29. The wavelength of the light used in Young’s (4) decreases in both Fresnel and Fraunhoffer
double slit experiment is  . diffraction
The intensity at a point on the screen where the 35. Diffraction pattern is observed using green light.
 When green light is replaced by red light
path difference is is I. If I o denotes the maxi
6 (1) no change is observed
mum intensity, then the ratio of I and I o is (2) bands become narrower and crowded
(1) 0.866 (2) 0.5 (3) bands become broader and well separated
(3) 0.707 (4) 0.75
(4) bands disappear

II PUC 583
 Objective Physics
36. Resolving power of a telescope increases with 3 2  3 
(1) Increase in focal length of eye piece (1) x  , I 0  4 I 0 cos  
4  4 
(2) Increase in focal length of objective
(3) Increase in aperture of eye piece 3 2  3 
(2) x  , I  I 0 cos  
(4) Increase in aperture of objective 4  4 
37. Two luminous point sources separated by a 3 2  3 
(3) x  , I 0  I 0 cos  
certain distance are at 10 km from an observer. 4  4 
If the aperture of his eye is 2.5  10 3 m and the
3
wavelength of light used is 500 nm, the distance (4) x  , I  4 I 0 cos 2  2 
4
of separation between the point sources are just 2. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the fringe
seen to be resolved is pattern is observed on a screen placed at a
(1) 12.2 m (2) 24.4 m distance D. The slits are separated by d and are
(3) 2.44 m (4) 1.22 m illuminated by light of wave length  . The
38. A beam of light strikes a piece of glass in this distance from the central point where the
angle of incidence of 60 and the reflected beam intensity falls to one fourth the maximum is
is completely plane polarised. The refractive D D D D
(1) (2) (3) (4)
index of glass is 3d 2d d 4d
3. In an Young’s double slit experiment, light with
(1) 3 (2) 2 3 (3)  3 /2  (4) 3/2
  546 nm is used. The first order maximum is
39. Choose the correct statement. found to be at 2.50. The slit separation is
(1)the Brewster’s angle is independent of (1) 12.5  m (2) 1.25  m
wavelength of light. (3) 125 mm (4) 125  m
(2)the Brewster’s angle is independent of the 4. Monochromatic green light of wavelength 550
nature of reflecting surface nm illuminates two parallel narrow slits
(3)the Brewster’s angle is different for different 7.7  m apart. The angular deviation  of third
wavelengths order (for m = 3) bright fringe (a) in radian and
(4)Brewster’s angle depends on wavelength but (b) in degree
not on the nature of reflecting surface. (1) 21.6, 12.40 (2) 0.216, 1.24 0
40. Polaroid glass is used in sun glasses because : (3) 0.216, 12.4 0 (4) 216, 1.240
(1) it reduces the light intensity to half on ac- 5. The two coherent sources of equal intensity
count of polarisation produce maximum intensity of 100 units at a
(2) it is has fashionable point. If the intensity of one of the sources is
(3) it has good colour reduced by 36% by reducing its width, then the
(4) it is cheaper intensity of light at the same point will be
TASK - II (1) 90 (2) 89 (3) 67 (4) 81
1. In Young’s double slit experiment, the constant 6. In the Young’s double slit experiment , the in-
3 tensities at two points P1 and P2 on the screen
phase difference between two sources is .
2 are respectively I1 and I 2 . If P1 is located at
Path difference and the intensity at a point the centre of a bright fringe and P2 is located at
equidistant from the slits in terms of maximum a distance equal to qurter of fringe width from
intensity I0 is P1 , then I1 / I 2 is
(1) 2 (2) 1/2 (3) 4 (4) 16
584 II PUC
Wave Optics
7. A beam of unpolarised light is incident on a (1) 3 : 2 (2) 2 : 1 (3) 2 :1 (4) 4 : 1
tourmaline crystal. The intensity of the emergent 13. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the
light is I0 . The emergent light is incident on intensity at a point where the path difference
another tourmaline crystal. It is found that no is  / 6 (  being the wavelength of the light
light emerges out of the second crystal. If now, used) is I. If I0 denotes the maximum intensity,
the first crystal is rotated through 450 , the then I/I0 is equal to
intensity of the light emerging through the (1) 1/ 2 (2) 3 / 2 (3) 1/2 (4) 3/4
second crystal will be 14. When an unpolarised light of intensity I 0 is
(1) Zero (2) 0.25 I 0 (3) 0.50 I 0 (4) 0.75 I 0 incident on a polarising sheet, the intensity of
8. Unpolarized light of intensity 32Wm  2 passes the light which does not get transmitted is
through three polarizers such that the (1) 1/2 I0 (2) 1/4 I0 (3) zero (4) I0
transmission axis of the last polarizer is crossed 15. Assuming human pupil to have a radius of 0.25
with that of the first. The intensity of final cm and a comfortable viewing distance of 25
emerging light is 3Wm  2 . The intensity of light cm, the minimum separation between two ob-
transmitted by second polarizer will be jects that human eye can resolve at 500 nm
 2  2
(1) 32Wm (2) 12Wm (3) 8Wm (4) 4Wm  2  2
wavelength is
9. A polariser and analyser are oriented so that (1) 1 m (2) 30  m ( 3) 100 m (4) 300  m
maximum amount of light is transmitted. To 16. In the Young’s double slit experiment, the
what fraction of intensity of light transimitted resultant intensity at a point on the screen is
when analyser is rotated throught 450 . 75% of the maximum intensity of the bright
(1) 25% (2) 20% (3) 30% (4) 35% fringe. Then the phase difference between the
10. A polarizer and an analyzer are oriented so that two interfering rays at that point is
the maximum amount of lights is transmitted. (1)  / 6 (2)  / 4 (3)  / 3 (4)  / 2
Fraction of its maximum value is the intensity 17. The diameter of objective of a telescope is 1m.
of the transmitted light reduced when the Its resolving limit for the light of wavelength
analyzer is rotated through (intensity of incident 4538 Å, will be
light = Io ) (a) 300 , (b) 450and (c) 600 (1) 5.54 × 10–7 rad (2) 2.54 × 10–4 rad
(1) 0.375 I0, 0.25 I0, 0.125 I0 (3) 6.54 × 10–7 rad (4) None of these
(2) 0.25 I0, 0.375 I0, 0.125 I0 18. In Young’s double slit experiment, the 10 th
(3) 0.125 I0, 0.25 I0, 0.0375 I0 maximum of wavelength 1 is at a distance of
(4) 0.125 I0, 0.375 I0, 0.25 I0 y 1 from the central maximum. When the
11. An analyser is inclined to a polariser at an angle wavelength of the source is changed to  2 , 5th
of 300 . The intensity of light emerging from the maximum is at a distance of y2 from its central
maximum. The ratio  y1 / y2  is
1
analyser is th of that is incident on the 21 2 2 1 2
n
(1) (2) (3) (4)
polariser. Then n is equal to 2 1 2 2 21
(1) 4 (2) 4/3 (3) 8/3 (4) 1/4 19. A plane wave of wavelength 6250A0 is incident
12. At two points P and Q on screen in Young’s normally on a slit of width 2  102 cm . The
double slit experiment, waves from slits S1 and width of the principle maximum of diffraction
S 2 have a path difference of 0 and  / 4 , pattern on a screen at a distance of 50 cm will
respectively. The ratio of intensities at P and Q be
will be
II PUC 585
 Objective Physics
(1) 312  10 cm
3 (2) 312.5  10 cm
4 25. A parallel beam of microwave ( = 0.5 mm) falls
(3) 312 cm (4) 312.5  10 cm
5 on Young’s double slit set up. The slit separation
20. Two polaroids are oriented with their is 1  103 m. At a point P on the screen placed
transmision axes making angle of 300 with each parallel to plane of slits at a distance 1.0 m I
other. The percentage of incident unpolarised order minimum is seen. The co-ordinate of point
light is transmitted P in metres is
(1) 37% (2) 37.5% (3) 3.36% (4) 36.5%
3 1 2 1
21. An unpolarized beam of light of intensity I0 is (1) m (2) (3) (4)
4 15 15 4
incident on a group of three polarizing sheets
26. A beam of natural light falls on a system of 6
which are arranged in such a way that the
polaroids, which are arranged in succession
transmission axis of each polarizing sheets makes
such that each polaroid is turned through 30
an angle of 30 with that of the preeciding sheet.
with respect to the preceding one. The
The fraction of the incident light intensity I
percentage of incident intensity that passes
transmitted by the III polarizer will be
through the system will be
3I 3I 9I 9I (1) 100% (2) 50% (3) 30% (4) 12%
(1) 0 (2) 0 (3) 0 (4) 0
8 2 32 8 27. At what angle to the horizon the sun be for its
22. Light of wavelength 4500 Å is incident normally reflected rays from the surface of pond to be
on a slit of width 0.15 mm. half of the angular completely polarised. (  of water = 1.33)
width of the central maximum in the diffraction
(1) 16o 561 (2) 26 o 561 (3) 36 o 561 (4) 46 o 56 1
pattern on a screen 10 m away is about
28. Unpolarised light of intensity 32 W / m2 passes
(1) 0.085 (2) 0.17 (3) 0.34 (4) 0.68
through a polarised and analyser which at an
23. In a Young’s double slit experimental set up
angle of 30o with respect to each other. The in-
shown, a thin sheet of transparent material is
tensity of the light coming from analyser is
kept in front of S1 . Owing to this, the fringe
(1) 16 3 W / m 2 (2) 24 W /m2
pattern
(3) 16 W /m2 (4) None
29. The angle between polarised and analyser is
30o . The ratio of intensity of incident light and
transmitted by the analyser is
(1) 3 : 4 (2) 4 : 3 (3) 3 :2 (4) 2: 3
30. The critical angle of a certain medium is
(1) shifts upwards
(2) shifts downwards 3
sin 1   .
(3)shifts either upwards or downwards 5
depending on the thickness of the sheet The polarising angle of the medium is
(4) remains unaltered 1  4  1  3 
(1) tan   (2) tan  
24. In a YDS set up, the distance between the plane 3 4
of the slits and the screen is increased by 20% 1  5  1  4 
and the distance between the slits is increased (3) tan   (4) tan  
3
  5
by 50%. Then the percentage change in fringe 31. Light is travelling from denser medium to rarer
width is medium. Polarising angle of incident at the sur
(1)I 80% (2) 20% (3) 66% (4) 44% face is

586 II PUC
Wave Optics
(1) equal to 45o (2) greater than 45o 39. In Young’s double slit experiment, we get 60
(3) less than 45o (4) zero fringes in the field of view of monochromatic light
32. Plane polarized light is passed through an of wavelength 4000 Å . If we use monochromatic
analyser and the intensity of emerging light is light of wavelength 6000 Å, then the number of
reduced by 75%. Optical vibrations make an fringes obtained in the same field of view is
angle  with the axes of analyser. Then 0 is (1) 60 (2) 90 (3) 40 (4) 1.5
(1) 60 o (2) 45o (3) 30o (4) 58o 40. In Young’s double slit experiment, both slits
33. An unpolarised beam of intensity I o is incident having same intensity. There are certain con-
on a pair of nicols making an angle of 60 o with secutive points on the screen P,Q, R, S having
each other. The intensity of light emerging from equal intensity (they are not maxima or
the pair is minima), such that PQ=QR=RS. Then choose
the correct option(Let I 0 be the maximum in
Io Io Io
(1) (2) (3) I o (4) tensity). Assume (D >> d >> l, D >> y)
4 8 2
34. An unpolarised light is incident on a system of I0
two crossed polaroids A and B. Now the sec (1) Intensity at these points must be 2
ond Polaroid B is rotated by 30o towards A. Per-
(2) Intensity at these points must be I 0
centage of light transmitted through the system 2
is
3
(3) Intensity at these points is I 0
(1) 50% (2) 30% (3) 25% (4) 12.5% 4
35. An unpolarised beam of intensity I o falls on a (4) Intensity at these points may have any value
Polaroid. The intensity of the emergent light is
KEY
(1) I o /4 (2) zero (3) I o /2 (4) I o
TASK - I
36. The axes of the polariser and analyser are
inclined to each other at 600 . If the amplitude 1 2 2 4 3 1 4 1 5 2
of polarised light emergent through analyser is 6 2 7 4 8 2 9 4 10 3
A. The amplitude of unpolarised light incident 11 1 12 1 13 3 14 3 15 1
on polariser is 16 1 17 2 18 3 19 1 20 1
A 21 3 22 1 23 3 24 3 25 2
(1) (2) A (3) 2A (4) 2 2A
2 26 1 27 3 28 2 29 4 30 2
37. Four different independent waves are
31 1 32 3 33 4 34 3 35 3
represented by (i) y 1  a1 sin t (ii) y 2  a 2 sin 2 t
36 4 37 3 38 1 39 3 40 1
 
(iii) y 3  a 3 cos t (iv) y 4  a 4 sin t   With which TASK - II
 3
two waves interference is possible 1 2 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 4
(1) In (i) and (iii) (2) In (i) and (iv) 6 1 7 3 8 2 9 1 10 1
(3) In (iii) and (iv) 11 3 12 2 13 4 14 1 15 2
(4) Insufficient data to predict 16 3 17 1 18 1 19 1 20 2
38. Two waves of equal amplitude and frequency
21 3 22 2 23 4 24 2 25 2
interfere each other. The ratio of intensity when
the two waves arrive in phase to that when they
26 4 27 3 28 2 29 2 30 3
arrive 90  out of phase is 31 3 32 1 33 2 34 4 35 3
(1) 1 : 1 (2) 2 : 1 (3) 2 : 1 (4) 4 : 1 36 4 37 4 38 3 39 3 40 2
II PUC 587
 Objective Physics
HINTS & SOLUTION 18. (3) : n1 1  n2 2 or n2  n1  1 / 2  ;
STUDENT TASK - I
n2  60   4000 /6000   40 .
1. (2) It is a geometrical method to find the posi
tion of new wave-front. n  D xn n 
19. (1) : xn  or 
2. (4) Over the wave front all the points are in same 2d D 2d
phase.
n  3  589  10 9
3. (1) Due to the point source light propagates in sin    ;
 2 d 0.589
all directions symmetrically and hence,
wavefront will be spherical. If power of the   sin 1 3  10 6  
sources is P, then intensity of the source will be
20. (1) Angular spread of the central maximum on
P
I where, r is radius of the wavefront at  1
4 r 2 either side of the incident light   radian.
anytime. d 5
4. (1) Photo electric effect 21. (3) : For a narrow slit, d sin   n 
5. (2) 
6. (2) Photoelectric effect is a particle phenomenon
 sin  
d
 n  1 or
and interference is a wave phenomenon.
5000  10 10
7. (4) In mutually perpendicular planes but vibrat sin    0.5
0.001  10 3
ing in phase.
8. (2)Position of nth maxima from central maxima   sin 1  0.5   sin 1  1/2   30
is given by 22. (1)Given that

d1 n 8 4  1 
d  0.9 mm  0.09 cm; D  1 m  100 cm
n D  1 1  1   
xn   x n  n   
d d 2 n 2 2 6 2 3  2  Yn  10 mm  1 cm ; n  2
9. (4) (2n1)D Y 2d 120.09
10. (3) Yn    n   6105 cm
2d (2n1)D (22 1)100
11. (1)
12. (1) D
23. (3) Fringe width,   ; Let  A and  w are
2d
13. (3)
the fringe widths in air and water respectively.
14. (3) two sources which emit radiation of the same
frequency and have a definite phase relation ship  D  D
 A  A  (1) and  w  w  (2)
15. (1) : The superimposing waves will not have a 2d 2d
constant phase difference. Hence there will be (1)   
general illumination. eq  A  A But A  
(2)  W W W
 A 4 0.4 o
16. (1) Path difference  11.5   23         W  0.3 A
2 W 3 W
So, the path difference is odd, [(23)] multiple of o
 /2 .  6000 A o
24. (3)    Hence,  /
  /  4200 A
Thus there will be destructive interference. 0.7  
Hence the point would be dark. If  decreases by 30-%, then  must have de
n D creased by 30%.
3  5000  108  200
17. (2) : x  or x3  cm o
2d 0.02   '  6000  30% of 6000  4200 A .
= 1.5 cm.
588 II PUC
Wave Optics
25. (2) y  n11  n2 2  12  600 35. (3) Distance of nth secondary maxima from cen

 n2  400  n2  18 D 
tral maximum is xn  (2n  1) . When green
26. (1) When the path difference is odd half inte- d 2
gral multiple of  , destructive interference takes light is replaced by red light, then wavelength
place. of light increases. Hence bands become broader
and well separated.
m blue 5.2  10 7 2
27. (3) m red  nblue     36. (4)
n red 7.8  10 7 3
s 1.22  s 1.22  5  107
; m = 2 and n = 3. 37. (3) d   ;  ;
r d 10  10 3 2.5  10 3
D
28. (2) Interference fringe width   s  2.44m
d
The distance of the screen (D) is increased four 38. (1) :   tan  or   tan 60  3 .
times and distance between two coherent 39. (3)
sources (d) is reduced to half, then
40. (1) it reduces the light intensity to half on ac
(4D) D count of polarisation
 ' 8  8
d /2 d
2 2   TASK - II
29. (4)       60 o ;
  6 3 1. (2) As the point is equidistant from two slits.
2
I  I o cos ( /2) Phase difference between the light waves at the
2
point is equal to phase difference between them
I  3  3 at slits.
 cos 2 (30 o )      0.75
I0  2  4
  3 3
 Path difference x     ;
 2   2    2 2 2 4
30. (2)        
     4 2
   3 
1 I  Imax cos 2    I 0 cos 2  
2
I R  4 I cos ( /2)  4 I    2 I 2  4 
2
IR 1 2  I max 
2. (1) I  I max cos   ;  I max cos 2  
IC  4I ; I  2 2 4 2
C

31. (1) When  1  0, then 1  0  1  1

cos 2     cos   
  2   2 4 2 2
When  2  then 2    2 
4    2   2
2
  rad    rad
I R  4 I o cos ( /2) ; I 1  4 I o 2 3 3
 I1 4I o 2   2  D D
I 2  4 I o cos 2
 2Io   x      y  x 
4 I2 2Io 1 2 2 3 3 d 3d
32. (3) Sound waves are of longer wavelength.   D 

33. (4) Wavelength of light is small 3. (1)       
D d  d 
34. (3) Since width of the central maxima is
9
2 D  546 10
 where d is the width of the slit.  2.5   ; d  12.5  10 6 m
d 180 d
Therefore as slit width decreases width of the y  n
central maxima increases. 4. (3)    
D D d
II PUC 589
 Objective Physics
3  550 109  nd  I2 1
  y   = 0.216   100%   100%  25%
7.7 106  d  I0 4

180 2
rad (or)   0.216   12.4 I0 Io  3 
 10. (1) I  cos  ; I 1  
2
  0.375 I0
2 2  2 
I max 100
5. (4) I  I 0    25units & 2 2
4 4 I  1  I 1
I2  o    0.25 I0 ; I 3  o    0.125 I0
64 64 2 2 2 2
I2  I0   25  16units
100 100
I0 I I
2 2 11. (3) I  cos 2   0  0 cos 2  30  ;
Imax   I1  I 2   25  16  = 81 units 2 n 2
1 1 3 8
2    n
6. (1) I1  Imax  4 I 0 ; I 2  4 I 0 cos   n 2 4 3
2 12. (2)Let I0 be intensity of light emitted from the
 D 1 D D  source, then Resultant intensity
y   x   .   x   x  ;
4 d 4 d d 4 I  4 I 0 cos 2  / 2  I1  4 I 0 cos 2 0 / 2  4 I 0
2 2  
 x  .     0 Now, x   / 4
  4 2
2 2  
  I 4I    x    
I 2  4 I 0 cos    2 I 0  1  0  2
2
  4 2
4 I2 2I0
  2 
2 I0
2 and I 2  4 I 0 cos
2
 2 I 0    x 
7. (3) I 2  I1 cos   I 0 cos 45  4   
2
 I1 : I 2  2 :1
I0 2 2
8. (2) I 2  cos 1 , I 3  I 2 cos 2 2
2
13. (4)Phase difference   Path difference i.e.,

2   2
   As, I  Imax cos   (or)
 6 3 2
I0 I sin 2 2 I  I  3
 I3  cos 2 , cos 2 2 (or) I 3  0  cos2   (or)  cos 2   
2 2 4 I max 2 I0 6 4
32 sin 2 2 3  Imax  I 0 
3  sin 2   2  60
2 4 2
14. (1) I  I 0 cos 2  ; Intensity of polarised light
I0 2 32 2
   30  I 2  2 cos 1  2 cos  30   I 0 / 2  Intensity of untransmitted light

32 3 I0 I0
   12 w / m 2  I0  
2 4 2 2

I0 2 I0 2 I0 1.22 1.22   500  109 m 

9. (1) I1  ; I 2  I1 cos    cos  45   R.P  
2 2 4 15. (2) 2  sin   1 
2  1  
 100 

590 II PUC
Wave Optics
21. (3)The initial intensity of the light beam is I0 .
The intensity of light emerging from the first
I0
polarizing sheet is
2
 3.05  105 m  30  m
 The intensity of light from the II polarizer,
16. (3)Given, IR = 75% of Imax  3 I I  I 3 3I  3
max
4 I   0  cos 2 30  0   0  cos 30  
2 2 4 8  2 
3 

4
 4a 2   3a 2  4a 2 cos 2  3a 2
2
 The intensity of ight from the III-polarizer,
3I 0 3I  3  9I
I  cos 2 30  0    0
 3  3 8 8  4  32
cos 2   or  cos 
2 4 2 2 22. (2) Condition for secondary minima,
   a sin  = m, m = 1, 2, 3,…….. when  is small,
   or   
2 6 3
and for the I-minimum,
1.22
17. (1)Resolving limit d   4.5 107
a a      4
 3 103 radian
1.5 10
1.22  4538 10 10
  5.54  10 7 rad 180
  3  103   0.17
1 
18. (1)Position fringe from central maxima (Angular width of central maximum = 2)
n1 D 23. (4)Conceptual
y1  Given, n = 10
d D
24. (2)   ;
101 D d
 y1  ......... (i)
d 20
D'  D  D  1.2D ;
5 2 D 100
For second source y2  ......... (ii)
d 50
d'  d  d  1.5d ;
101 D 100
y1
 d y1 21 D '  D  1.2  
 y 2 5 2 D  y    '   0.8  0.8
2 2 d' d  1.5 
d
 Percentage charge
10 2
2 D 2  6250 10  50  10   
19. (1)  0     1  100  1  0.8   100  20%
d 2 102 102 

 312  105 m  312  103 cm
 1
I0 25. (2) d sin   path difference   n    for
20. (2) I1  ;  2
2
 1  0.5 1  1
I 3I minimum or sin    n    n  
I 2  I1 cos   0 cos 2 30  0
2
 2  1.0 2  2
2 8
1
I2 3 I2 300 For I minimum n = 0  sin   giving
   100%  %  37.5% 4
Fraction
I0 8 I 0 8

II PUC 591
 Objective Physics
1 1 34. (4) When B is rotated towards A by 30o , angle
tan   or D tan   y  m
15 15 between A and B is 60 o .
I0 5 Io I I
26. (4) I 
2
cos2   I
2
cos 2   o cos 2 60  o ;
2 8
2 5 I
I o  3   243   100  0.125  100  12.5%
     I o  12.5% I o  Io 
2  2   2048 35. (3) When unpolarised light is incident on a
 
Polarised then   0 o
27. (3)If ‘ i ’ is the polarising angle for water,
Io I
o o 1
I cos 2  ; I  o
tan i    1.33  i  53.06  53 4 2 2
A0
 angle of the sun to the horizon 36. (4) A1  A0 cos 45  ;
2
 (90  i )    90  53o 4 1  36 o 561 A
A2  cos 
28. (2) Intensity of light, 2
37. (4) Since the sources are independent,
I  Io cos2  32cos2 (30o )  32 ( 3/2)2  24 W /m2 interference will not occur unless they are
coherent (such as laser beams etc).
29. (2) According to Malus law, I  I o cos 2 
So, insufficient data to predict.
Where  is the angle between analyser and 38. (3) Resultant intensity I  4 I cos 2 ( / 2)
0
I 1 1 4
polariser  I  cos 2   cos 2 30o  3 I1 cos 2 (1 / 2) cos 2 0 2
   
o I2 cos ( 2 / 2) cos 2 (90 / 2) 1
2

 I : I o  4:3 39. (3) n11  n2 2  60  4000  n2  6000

 n2 = 40
1
30. (3) n  tan i  ;
sin C
 3  3
cot i  sin c  sin  sin 1    
  5  5 40. (2)

5 1  5 
tan i  ; i  tan  
3 3  2 
31. (3) If light travels from rarer to denser then By symmetery   ; I  I 0 cos ;
2 4
nd
 tan  I = I0/2
nr
If light travels from denser to rarer then
nr n
 tan  ; Since r  1 then  45o
nd nd
32. (1) I  I o cos 2  ; 0.25 I o  I o cos2  ;

cos   1 2 ;   60o ***

33. (2)
Io Io I 1 I
I cos 2   I cos 2 60  o    o
2 2 2 4 8

592 II PUC
Dual Nature of Radiation And Matter

CHAPTER Dual Nature of Matter and Radiation

Photoelectric effect, Hertz and Lenard’s observations; Einstein’s

11
photoelectric equation- particle nature of light. Matter waves- wave nature of
particles, de Broglie relation. Davisson-Germerexperiment (experimental details
should be omitted; only conclusion should be explained).

PAST NEET PAPERS SUBTOPIC LEVEL ANALYSIS

NEET 2016 NEET 2016 Forecasting of
Year NEET 2018 NEET 2017
PHASE-I PHASE-II NEET-2019

No of
question 2 2 2 2 2
Asked
de-Brodlie momentum & de-Broglie
de-B ro glie wavelength wavelength in terms wavelength & de-bro gle wavelength in
Subtopic &einsteins pho to electric
temperature & work
stopping terms o f po tential &
equatio n threshold Heisenberg's principle
function potential wavelength
 Electron emission
 The liberation of electrons from the surface of a metal is known as electron emission.
 A certain minimum amount of energy is required by an electron to eject from the metal surface is
known as Work function.
 The work function depends on the properties of the metal & the nature of its surface. eg: Cs :2.14
eV, K:2.3 eV, Na: 2.75 eV, Ca: 3.2 eV etc.
 There are four different modes of electron emission depending upon the way in which external
energy is supplied. (i) Thermionic emission (ii) Photoelectric emission & (iii) Field emission
 Thermionic emission : The process of emission of electrons from the surface of a metal by supply-
ing sufficient energy in the form of heat is known as thermionic emission(the process of electron
emission due to heat supplied).
 The emitters are usually the surface of tungsten, thoriated tungsten, metallic oxides of strontium,
barium etc.
 Thermionic emission is used to obtain electron beams in cathode ray tubes, television sets, electron
microscope etc.
 Photo emission : The process in which electrons are emitted from the metal surface when light or
radiation of suitable wavelength or frequency is incident on the surface of certain metals is called
photoemission. or photoelectric emission
 The liberation of electron from a metal surface exposed to electromagnetic radiation of suitable
frequency is called photoemission.
 The liberated electrons are known as photoelectrons. Photo emission is observed in photo cell.
 Field emission : The process of emission of electrons from the surface of the metal due to the
application of a strong electric field is known as field emission(the process of emission of electrons
from a metal surface by applying a strong electric field).
 This can take place at low room temperature hence it is also known as cold cathode emission.
 The number of electrons emitted depends on the nature of the metal and strength of the applied
electric field. Field emission is observed in spark gaps.
II PUC 593
 Objective Physics
 Quantum theory of radiation:
 The quantum theory of radiation was first proposed by Max Planck in 1901 to explain the distribu-
tion of energy in the black body spectrum. Later it was extended by Einstein to all types of radiation.
 According to Planck’s theory, the emission or absorption of thermal energy is not a continuous
process but it is a discrete packets of energy called photons or quanta.
 Einstein in 1905, applied the idea of quantisation to radiant energy by postulating that
(i) Light energy is not emitted continuously process but in discrete packets of energy called pho-
tons or quanta.
(ii) The quanta carry a specific amount of energy, E is given by E  h . where h is Planck’s constant
&  is the frequency of radation.
 Properties of Photons
 The rest mass of a photon is zero and it is not a physical quantity but effective mass,
E hf h
m 2
 2 
c c c
 Photon is not deflected by electric and magnetic fields so it is neutral.
 The elementary quantum of energy is called photon.
 Photon travels with a velocity of light.The energy of photon depends on the frequency.
 Photon exhibits both particle and wave nature.Photons obey Heinsenberg’s uncertainity principle.
 Number of emitted photons :
The number of photons emitted per second from a source of monochromatic radiation of
P P P
wavelength  and power P is given as, n    ;
E hf hc where E = energy of each photon.
 Intensity of lght (I) :
Energy crossing per unit area normally per second is called intensity (I) of incident light
E P E 
I     P  power 
At A  t 
P P 1
At a distance ‘r’ from a point source of power P, intensity is given by I   2
I  2
A 4 r r
P 1
For a linear source, I   I  where l length of a cylinder at a distance r from the source.
2 rl r
PHOTOELECTRIC EFFECT
 The photoelectric effect was first observed by Heinrich Hertz in 1887 and it was investigated in
detail by Whilelm Hallwachs and Philipp Lenard. Eister and Geitel discovered the photoelectric
effect in 1889 which is caused by visible light on alkali metals like sodium and potassium.
 The phenomenon of emission of electrons from a metal surface when radiation of suitable frequency
is incident on it is known Photoelectric effect. The electrons liberated due to photoelectric effect are
called photoelectrons. The current due to photoelectrons is called photoelectric current or photocur-
rent. The substances which emit the photoelectrons are called photoemissive substances.
 In a photoelectric effect light energy is converted into electrical energy.
(i) Zinc, cadmium, magnesium etc respond to ultraviolet rays
(ii) Alkali metals like sodium, potassium, caesium etc. respond to visible light.
(iii) Heavy metals like gold, silver etc.respond to X rays
(iv) Semiconductor devices like transistors respond to infrared rays.

594 II PUC
Dual Nature of Radiation And Matter
 Photoelectric effect is one-one phenomenon ie., one photon of light is capable of ejecting one elec-
tron only.
 Time-delay effect: There is no timelag between incidence of radiation and emission of photoelec-
trons ie., as soon as light is incident on the metal, photoelectrons are emitted.
 Photoelectric effect supports quantum theory of light.
 For the photo electric effect the light of short wavelength
lig h t o f s a m e w a v e le n g th
(or high frequency) is more effective than the light of long
wavelength (or low frequency) e
C e A
e
 Hallwach’s & Lenard’s Experimental Study of Photo-
M ic ro
electric effect: A m m e te r
 Photoelectric effect can be studied using the apparatus V

shown in the figure.

 Photocurrent depends on the following factors K
(i) intensity and frequency of incident radiation - +
(ii) potential difference between the anode & the cathode
(iii) nature of the photosensitive material
 Experimental results of the photoelectric emission:
 The time lag between the incidence of radiation and the emission of a photoelectron is very small,
less than 10"9 second.
 For a given metal and frequency of incident radiation, the rate at which photoelectrons are ejected
is directly proportional to the intensity of the incident light.
 For a given metal, there exists a certain minimum frequency of incident radiation below which no
photoelectrons can be emitted. This frequency is called the threshold frequency.
 For a given metal of particular work function, increase in frequency of incident beam increases the
intensity of the photoelectric current.
 Above the threshold frequency, the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectron is inde-
pendent of the intensity of the incident light but depends on the frequency of the incident light.
 Effect of intensity of incident light :
By Increasing the intensity of incident light (keeping frequency constant) the number of photo elec-
trons emitted and hence photoelectric current increases. but the maximum kinetic energy of photo
electrons do not change i.e. value of stopping potential remains unchanged.
 Intensity I  no. of incident photons  no. of emitted photo electrons in 1 second
1 1
 photo electric current   distance  2 (for a point like source)   distance  (for a linear source)

 Effect of potential :

II PUC 595
 Objective Physics
 when collector C is kept positive with respect to photo sensitive surface S, the emitted photo
electrons are attracted to collector C and amount of current passing through the micro ammeter.
At certain value of positive potential difference, when all the emitted electrons are collected, in-
creasing the potential difference further has no effect on the current. This current is known as
saturation current. when the C is made negative with respect to S, on increasing this negative
potential, the number of photo electrons reaching the collector (value of photo electric current)
gradu- ally de creases.
 For some specific negative potential of the collector, even the most energetic electrons are unable
to reach collector, then photo electric current becomes zero. This minimum specific negative po-
tential of C with respect to S is known as stopping potential or cut off potential V0 
 If the value of stopping potantial is V0 , then the energy required for electron to cross this potential
barrier is, EV0
1 2
If maximum speed of photo electron is vmax , then eV0  mvmax
2
 Effect of frequency :
If frequency of incident light   f 0  is in-
creased, the maximum kinetic energy of
emitted photo electrons increased. i.e.the
value of stopping potential is also in-
creased but photo electric current remains
constant.
 Effect of photo sensitive surface :
When the photo sensitive surface is
changed by keeping frequency and intensity of incident
light constant, the graph of stopping, potential V0   fre-

quency  f  found to be straight line and pasallel to each

other. which intersects the X-axis (frequency axis) and the
Y-axis at different points. Which shows that the values of
threshold frequencies are different for different metals but
h
slope of the graph   is equal for all the metals.
e
It is clear from the graphs, the value of threshold frequency
and work function for metal-2 are more than for metal-1
 Work Function () : It is the minimum energy of photon required to liberate an electron from a
metal surface.
 Threshold Frequency (0) : The frequency of incident radiation below which photoelectric effect
does not take place. h0 = .
 Stopping Potential (V 0) : The smallest magnitude of anode potential which just stops the
photocurrent is called the stopping potential. If the stopping potential is V0 then eV0 = KEmax.
 Kinetic energy of a photoelectron
 Kinetic energy of electron increases with the frequency of the incident radiation, but independent
of the intensity of incident radiation.
 The maximum kinetic energy with which an electron is emitted from a metal surface is indepen-
dent of the intensity of light and depends upon its frequency.

596 II PUC
Dual Nature of Radiation And Matter
 In photo electric effect all the emitted photoelectrons do not have same kinetic energy. The Kinetic
energy ranges from 0 to K.Emax

potential (V )
0
stopping
Cs K Na Al Cu

0 0/ 0/ 0/ 0/

O
frequency of incident ()
radiation
 With increase in frequency, the maximum kinetic energy of emitted photoelectrons Kmax increases
linearly but it is not directly proportional to it.
 The graph between KEmax and incident frequency is a straight line with slope h, the intercept on the
negetative side of K.Emax gives work function.
 Maximum Kinetic energy of the electron emitted is equal to the product of stopping potential Vs and
electron charge ie., Kmax = eVs .
 Frequency of the incident radiation is doubled, then the maximum KE of the emitted photoelectrons
will be more than doubled.
 Einstein’s photoelectric equation :
 The classical electromagnetic wave theory failed to explain the phenomena of photoelectric emis
sion.
 In 1905, Albert Einstein made use of Planck’s quantum theory of radiation and developed the fa
mous photoelectric equation which satisfactorily explained the photoelectric emission.
 If the energy gained by an electron due to the absorption of a photon is in the excess of workfunction
of the photometal the excess of energy manifests as kinetic energy of emitted electron. The energy of
photon is spent in two ways: A part of energy of photon is used to workfunction of the metal & The
remaining part of photon is utilised as kinetic energy of emitted photoelectron.
 From the law of conservation of energy ,
Energy of incident photon = work function + maximum kinetic energy of photoelectron. Einstein’s
photoelectric equation is given by

1 hc hc 1
(i) E  W  K E (ii) h  h o  mvmax (iii)   mvmax
2  o 2
This is known as Einstein photoelectric equation.
Where W: work function, E: energy of incident photon, K E : kinetic energy of the photoelectron ,
h: planck’s constant,  : frequency of incident photon  o : threshold frequency, m: mass of an
electron,  : wavelength of incident photon, o : threshold wavelength, c : speed of electron & v :
velocity of a photoelectron. This is known as Einstein photoelectric equation.
 Einstein photoelectric equation was experimentally verified by Millikan.
 The photoelectric equation brought two Noble prizes one for Einstein who wrote a paper on it and
another for Millikan who verified it.
 Interestingly Einstein got the Noble prize in 1921 for his explanation of photoelectric effect rather
than for his more famous theory of relativity.
1 1
 The kinetic energy of the photoelectron is given by KE max  hc   
 0 
II PUC 597
 Objective Physics
 The K.E. of the emitted electron

1 2 1 1  2h(    0 ) 2hc   0   
mVmax  h(   0 )  hc  –  & Vmax  
2   0  m m  0
 When two light waves of different frequencies 1 and  2 incident on same emitter surface then
V12  E max 1 h  W   0
the ratio of the maximum KE of emitted electrons is  1  1
V2  E max 2
2
h 2  W 2  0
 When a light wave of certain frequency is allowed to incident on two different emitter surfaces
successivelly, then the ratio of the maximum KE of emitted electrons is
V12  Emax 1 h W1    01
  
V22  Emax 2 h W2    02
 Relation between stopping potential and frequency :
1 2
According to definition of stopping potential, mvmax  eV0
2
1 1 
eV0  h  f  f 0   hc    ;
  0 

hc  1 1  1 1  h hf hf 0
 V0      12375    In the graph of V0  f ; V0   f  f 0   
e   0    0  e e e
h
comparing above equation with equation of straight line; y  mx  c , slope is found to be and
e
 hf 0
intercept on X-axis is f 0 and intercept on Y-axis is is obtained.
e
 Matter (de-Broglie) Wave ; According to de-Broglie a moving material particle some times acts as a
wave and some times as a particle. The wave associated with moving particle is called matter wave
or de-Broglie wave and it propagates in the form of wave packets with group velocity.
h h h 1 1 1
 de-Broglie wave length :         where h planck’s constant,
P mv 2 mE P v E
m  mass of the particle, v  speed of the particle, E=kinetic energy of particle.
 de-Broglie wavelength associated with the charged particle :
The kinetic energy of a charged particle accelerated through a potential difference of V volt,

1 h h h
E mv 2  qV .  Hence de-Broglie wavelength,    
2 P 2mE 2 mqV
 For electron, for proton, for deuteron, and  - particle it is given by
12.27 0 0.286 0 0.202 0 0.101 0
 A,   A,   A,   A.
V V V V
2 r
 De - Broglie wavelength associated with orbital electron in the nth orbit  
n
 de-Broglie wavelength associated with uncharged (netural) particle :

598 II PUC
Dual Nature of Radiation And Matter
0.286  10 10 0.286
neutron  m A
E  in eV  E  in eV 
Energy of thermal neutron at ordinary temperature
3 h h h
E kT    
2 2 mE 3 3mkT
 2m   kT 
2 
where T = Absolute temperature, k Boltzmann’s constant  1.38  10 23 JK 1

6.62  10 34 25.17 o

 thermalneutron   A
3  1.67  10 27  1.38  10 23 T T
 Ratio of wavelength of photon and electron :
hc  hc 
The wavelength of a photon of energy E is given by, P   E  
E  
While the wavelength of an electron of kinetic energy K is given by,

h  c 2 mc 2 K
e   P  2 mK 
2 mK e E E2
 Davission and Germer Experiment : This experiment proves the wave like nature of an electron.

In this experiment using Bragg’s law, from the formula 2 d sin   n , the wavelength found
o
to be 1.67 A .

o
 
which is near to the de Broglie wavelength of electron    1.65 A  . Which shows wave like nature
 
of electron.
 Heisenberg’s Uncertainty principle : According to Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle, If the uncer-
tainty in the x - cordinate of the position is ‘x and uncertainty in the x- cordinate of its momentum
h h
is P , then x p  (in one dimension)  x p  h where h
2 2
Now, If x  0, then p   & p  0 then , x  
Similarly, the uncertainty in the measurements of Energy and time for a particle using above prin-
ciple, E. t  h
 If the radius of the nucleus is r then uncertainty in the position of proton inside the nucleus is
h h h h
x  2r  d Hence the uncertainty in momentum of proton is p  x  d  2r  4 r
For a particle if the uncertainties in the measurement of angular momentum and angular
displacement are L and  respectively.then from Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle, L .  h

II PUC 599
 Objective Physics
EXAMINATION CORNER

1. An electron of mass m with an initial velocity 1

h 0  mv12 ... (i)
 2
V  V0 i V0  0  enters an electric field
 1
E  E0 i  E0  constant  0  at t = 0. if 0 is its h  5 0   h 0  mv22
2
de-Broglie wavelength initially, then its de- 1
Broglie wavelength at time t is (NEET-2018) 4 h 0  mv22 .... (ii)
2
(1) 0 t (2) 0
1 v12 v1 1
  Divide (i) by (ii),  2  
 0  4 v2 v2 2
 eE0 

(3)  eE   (4) 0  1  t 3. The de-Broglie wavelength of a neutron in ther-
  1  0 t    mV0 
 mV0   mal equilibrium with heavy water at a tempera
ture T (Kelvin) and mass m, is (NEET-2017)
h
A : (3)Initial de-Broglie wavelength 0  h h
mV0 (1) (2)
mkT 3mkT
2h 2h
(3) (4)
3mkT mkT
A: (2) de-Broglie wavelength
eE0
Acceleration of electron a  h
m h 
h  3 
Velocity after time ‘t’  2m  kT 
mv 2 m  KE 
h h 2 
 eE   
V   V0  0 t  So, mV  eE  h
 m  m  V0  0 t  
 m 
3mkT
h 0 4. The photoelectric threshold wavelength of sil-
 
 eE   eE0  ver is 3250 × 10–10 m. The velocity of the elec
mV0 1  0 t  1  mV t 
 mV0   0  tron ejected from a silver surface by ultraviolet
light of wavelength 2536 × 10–10 m is (Given h
2. When the light of frequency 2 0 (where  0 is
= 4.14 × 10–15 eVs and c = 3 × 108 ms–1)
threshold frequency), is incident on a metal
(NEET-2017)
plate, the maximum velocity of electrons emit
(1)  6 × 105 ms–1 (2)  0.6 × 106 ms–1
ted is v1 . When the frequency of the incident (3)  61 × 103 ms–1 (4)  0.3 × 106 ms–1
radiation is increased to 5 0 , the maximum A: (1 & 2) Both answers are correct.
velocity of electrons emitted from the same plate
0  3250  10 10 m ;   2536  10 10 m
is v2 . The ratio of v1 to v2 is (NEET-2018)
(1) 4 : 1 (2) 1 : 4 (3) 1 : 2 (4) 2 : 1 1242 eV  m
  3.82 eV
1 1 325 nm
A: (3) E  W0  mv 2 ; h  2 0   h 0  mv12
2 2 1242 eV  nm
h   4.89 eV
253.6 nm
600 II PUC
Dual Nature of Radiation And Matter
KEmax   4.89  3.82  eV  1.077 eV A: (1) De-Broglie wavelength is given by
h h
1 e   for electron
mv 2  1.077  1.6  10 19 p 2 m.E
2
De-Broglie wavelength of photon is given by
v  0.6  106 m / s
h h hc
5. Electrons of mass m with de-Broglie wave P     1 E 1 E
P E E ; e  . 
length » fall on the target in an X-ray tube. The P 2 mE c c 2 m
c
cutoff wavelength  0  of the emitted X-ray is
8. When a metallic surface is illuminated with
(NEET-II-2016)
radiation of wavelength  , the stopping
2mc 2 2h potential is V. If the samesurface is illuminated
(1) 0  (2) 0 
h mc with radiation of wavelength 2  , the stopping
2m2c 2  3 v
(3) 0  (4) 0   potential is . The threshold wavelengthfor the
h2 4
A: (1) Momentum metallic surface is: (NEET-I 2016)

h p2 h2 hc 5
P E   (1) 4 (2) 5 (3)  (4) 3
 2m 2 m 2
0 2
A: (4)In photo electric effects
2
hc 2mc
 0  2m 2  hc
h 2
h eV0  48  W ; eV0  W

6. Photons with energy 5 eV are incident on a
cathode C in a photoelectric cell. The maximum hc V hc
eV   W …(i) ; e   W ….(ii)
energy of emitted photoelectrons is 2 eV. When  4 2
photons of energy 6 eV are incident on C, no hc  hc 
From (i) and (ii)  W  4 W 
photoelectrons will reach the anode A, if the   2 
stopping potential of A relative to C is
hc 2 hc hc hc
(NEET-II-2016) W   4 W ; 3W   W
   3
(1) +3 V (2) +4 V (3) -1 V (4) -3 V
A: (4) Emax  E   hc hc
  max  threshold wavelength 3
max 3
2 eV  5 eV      3 eV
9. A point surce causes photoelectric effect from
Now eV0  E   = 6 eV - 3 eV = 3 eV
a small metal plate. Which of the following
So stopping potential is -3 V curves may represent the saturation
7. An electron of mass m and a photon have same photocurrent as a function of the distance
energy E. the ratio of de-Broglie wavelengths between the source and the metal?
associatedwith them is: (NEET-I-2016)
1 1
1  E 2  E 2
(1)   (2)  
c  2m   2m 
1
1 1  2m  2 (1) a (2) b (3) c (4) d
(3) c  2 mE  2 (4)  
c E  A: (4)

II PUC 601
 Objective Physics
10. A photometal is illuminated by lights of
wavelengths 1 and 2 respectively. The
maximum kinetic enegies of electrons emitted
in the two cases are E1 and E2 respectively. The
work function of metal is.
E2 1  E12 E11  E2 2
(1) (2) Identify the pairs of curves that correspond to
1 1  2
(1) different material (2) same intensity of
E11  E22 E2 2  E11 incident radiations.
(3) 1  2 (4) 1  2 (1) Curve 1 and 3, Curve 2 and 4
(2) Curve 1 and 2, Curve 3 and 4
hc
(3) Curve 1 and 4, Curve 2 and 3
1 E1  W0  2 E1  W0
 (4) Curve 1 only, Curve 2 and 4
A : (4) c E2  W0 
 
1 E2  W0 A: (1) (1) Curves 1 and 3 (different materials due
2
to different stopping potentials)
E2  2  W0  2  E11  W0 1 (2) Curves 2 and 4 (same intensity due to same
 E2 2  E11  W0  1   2  current)
13. When the mass of an electron becomes equal to
E2  2  E11 thrice its rest mass, its speed is
 W0 
1   2
2 2 2 1 1
11. Light rays of wavelengths 6000 A and of (1) c (2) c (3) c (4) c
3 3 3 4
photon intensity 39.6 watts/m2 is incident on
a metal surface. If only one percent of photons A : m0 m0
(1) m  ; 3m0 
incident on the surface emit photo electrons, v2 v2
1 1
then the number of electrons emitted per second c2 c2
per unit area from the surface will be
v2 1 2 2
[ Planck constant = 6.64 x 10-34 J - S;  1 2
 V  C
c 9 3
Velocity of light = 3 x 108 ms-1]
14. The de Broglie wave present in fifth Bohr orbit is
(1) 12 x 1018 (2) 10 x 1018
(3) 12 x 1017 (4) 12 x 1015 (1) 2)
n hc n hc  P
A : (3) p  ; IA   I   (3)
t  t   A
(4)
n I  39.6  6000 1010
  A : (3) L  2rn  n
At nc 6.64  1014  3  108
15. The correctness of velocity of an electron moving
n N 1  n  17
 12 1019 but e     12  10 w ith velocity 50 ms-1 is 0.005%. The accuracy
At At 100  At 
with which its position can be measured will be
12. The graph shown in figure show the variation
(1) 4634  103 m (2) 4634  105 m
of photoelectric current (i) and the applied
(3) 4634  106 m (4) 4634  108 m
voltage (V) for two different materials and for
two different intensities of the incident 0.005  50
A : (2)Here, v   0.0025ms 1
radiation. 100

602 II PUC
Dual Nature of Radiation And Matter
h 1.034  1034 12400(in eV ) 12400
x    4634  10 5 m (ii)
E   1.9eV
31
mv 9.1 10  0.0025   in A0  6520
16. If the uncertainity in the position of an electron 19. The de-broglie wavelength of an electron and
is 10-10 m, then the value of uncertainity in its the wavelength of a photon are same. The ratio
-1
momentum (in kg-ms ) will be between the energy of the photon and the
-24 -24
(1) 3.33 x 10 2) 1.03 x 10 momentum of the electron is
-24 -20
(3) 6.6 x 10 4) 6.6 x 10 (1) h (2) c (3) 1/h (4) 1/c
h 1.034  10 34 hc
A : (2) p  
x 1010 A : (2) E E 
 1.034  1024 kg  ms 1 e   ph ; ph  ph  ph  C
meV  h  h
17. (a) Name the experiment for which the adjacent   e
graph, showing the variation of intensity of  e 
scattered electrons with the angle of scattering 20. Photons of energy 2.0 eV fall on a metal plate
  was obtained. and release photoelectrons with a maximum
(b) Also name the important hypothesis that was velocity V. By decreasing  by 25% the
confirmed by this experiment. maximum velocity of photoelectrons is doubled.
The work function of the metal of the material
plate in eV is nearly
(1) 2.22 (2) 1.985 (3) 2.35 (4) 1.80
E2 1  
  
(1) (a) Davission and Germer experiment A: (4) E1 2   25  3
(b) de Broglie hypothesis 100
(2) (a) Photo electric effect 4 1
 E2   2eV  mv 2  E  W0 
(b) de Broglie hypothesis 3 2
(3) (a) Thermionic emission 2
 V1  E1  W0
(b) de Broglie hypothesis   
 V2  E2  W0
(4) (a) Photocell
(b) de Broglie hypothesis 1 2  w0
 8
A : (1) conceptual 4 8  w   w0  8  4 w0
18. A laser used to weld detached retains emits light 3
0 3
with a wavelength 652 nm in pulses that are of
8 16 16
20ms duration. The average power during each  3w0  8    W0   1.8eV
3 3 9
pulse is 0.6W. The energy in each pulse and in a
21. If the energy of a particle is reduced to one
single photon are
fourth, then the percentage increase in its de
(1) 7.5 1015 eV , 2.7eV (2) 6.5 1016 eV , 2.9eV Broglie wavelength will be
(3) 6.5 1016 eV , 2.7eV (4) 7.5  1016 eV ,1.9eV (1) 41% (2) 141% (3) 100% (4) 71%

A: (4) (i) E  pt  0.6  20  103  1.2  102 J 2 E1 E1 

A: (3)    2 2
1.2 102 1 E2 E1 / 4 1
 19
eV  7.5  1016 eV
1.6 10  2 
  1  100%  100
 
II PUC 603
 Objective Physics
22. The two lines A and B shown in figure are the hc
graphs of the de Broglie wavelength  as a 
3
107  0.4 107   2hc 106
1
function of ( V is the accelerating 25. The graph between the stopiing potential V0 
V
potential) for two particles having the same and 1/   is shown in figure, 1 , 2 and 3 are
charge. work functions. Which of the following is
correct

Which of the two represents the particle of

heavier mass ? (1) 1 : 2 : 3  1: 2 : 3
(1) A (2) B
(2) 1 : 2 : 3  4 : 2 :1
(3) Both A and B (4) Data insufficient
(3) tan  is directly proportional to hc / e , where
1
A: (1) Slope  h is Planck’s constant and c is the speed of light
m (4) ultraviolet light can be used to emit
23. The uncertainity in the position of a particle is photoelectrons from metal 2 and metal 3 only.
equal to the de-Broglie wavelength. The
hc
uncertainity in its momentum will be A : (3)    Q1 : Q2 : Q3  1: 2 : 4
0
h 2h  3
(1) (2) (3) (4) hc 1
 3 h 2h  Scope for metal  2  nm
e 0.002
h h
A: (3)  p    2  500nm  visible
x 
24. When a metal surface is illuminated by light of 26. A point source causes photoelectric effect from
wavelengths 400 nm and 250 nm, the a small metal plate. Which of the following
maximum velocities of the photoelectrons curves may represent the saturation
ejected are V and 2V respectively. The work photocurrent as a function of the distance
function of the metal is between the source and the metal?
i i
(1) 2hc x 106 J (2) 1.5hc x 106 J
6 6
(3) hc x 10 J (4) 0.5hc x 10 J

1 2 hc (1) (2)
mv  w0
2 1 t
1 2 hc  t
A: (1) mv   w0 1 2 hc ; i
2  m  2v   w0 i
2 2
(3) (4)
hc 4hc 4 1
 w0   4 w0 ; 3w0  hc    t
2 1  1 2  t
A: (4)As distance  ses. I  ses.
hc  4 1 
- w0   9
 9 
I
P
3  400  10 250 10   i
4 r 2

604 II PUC
Dual Nature of Radiation And Matter
27. The stopping potential as a function of the hc 1 2
frequency of the incident radiation is plotted A: (4)   W0  2 mvmax
for two different photoelectric surfaces A and Assuming W0 to be negligible in comparison
B. The graphs show that work function of A is
hv 2 1 1
A B to i.e. vmax   vmax 
V   
(On increasing wavelength  to 4  , v max
becomes half).

30. When the kinetic energy of an electron is
(1)Greater than that of B increased, the wavelength of the associated
(2)Smaller than that of B wave will
(3)Equal to that of B (1)Increase (2) Decrease
(4)No inference can be drawn about their work (3)Wavelength does not depend on the kinetic
functions from the given graphs energy
A: (2)From the given graph it is clear that if we (4) None of the above
extend the given graph for A and B, intercept
h h 1
of the line A on V axis will be smaller as A: (2)    ;  
p 2mE E
compared to line B means work function of A
(h and m = constant)
is smaller than that of B.
TASK - I
28. The dependence of the short wavelength limit
1. The momentum of a photon is 3.3 10 29 kg 
min on the accelerating potential V is
m/sec. Its frequency will be
represented by the curve of figure
(1) 3  103 Hz (2) 6  103 Hz
B
log  min (3) 7.5 1012 Hz (4) 1.5 1013 Hz
A 2. The momentum of a photon is 2  1016 gm cm/
C sec. Its energy is
log V
(1) 0.61 1026 erg (2) 2.0  1026 erg
(1)A (2)B
(3)C (4)None of these (3) 6  10 6 erg (4) 6  10 8 erg
3. Dual nature of radiation is shown by
hc hc
A: (1) min  log.min  log  log V (1) Diffraction and reflection
eV e
(2) refraction and diffraction
hc
 log min   log V  log (3) Photoelectric effect alone
e
(4) photoelectric effect and diffraction
This is the equation of straight line having slope
4. The momentum of a photon of an
hc electromagnetic radiation is 3.3  1029 kg m s
(–1) and intercept log on  log e min axis
e 1
. What is the frequency of the associated
29. Assuming photoemission to take place, the
wave? (h = 6.6  1034 J s ; c = 3  108 m s1)
factor by which the maximum velocity of the
(1) 1.5  1013 Hz (2) 7.5  1012
emitted photoelectrons changes when the
wavelength of the incident radiation is (3) 6.0  103 Hz (4) 3.0  103 Hz
increased four times, is 5. Of the following, the graph which represents
(1)4 (2)1/4 (3)2 (4)1/2 the variation of energy (E) of a photon with
wavelength () of the radiation is

II PUC 605
 Objective Physics

(1) (2)

(1) A and B will have same intensities while B

and C will have different frequencies
(2) B and C will have different intensities while
(3) (4) A and B will have different frequencies
(3) A and B will have different intensities while
B and C will have equal frequencies
6. An electric lamp of 60 W emits a radiation of (4) B and C will have equal intensities while A
wavelength 6625 Å. The number of photons and B will have same frequencies
emitted from the source per second is 11. A photocell is illuminated by a small bright
(1) 1020 (2) 3.2  1020 source placed 1m away. When the same source
(3) 2  1020 (4) 4.2  1020 of light is placed 0.5 m away, the number of
electrons emitted by photo cathode would
7. Photon of frequency v has a momentum
(1) decrease by a factor of 4
associated with it. If c is the velocity of radiation,
(2) increases by a factor of 4
then the momentum is
(3) decrease by a factor of 2
(1) hv / c (2) v/c (3) hc (4) hv / c2 (4) increase by a factor of 2.
8. Two identical photo cathodes receive light of 12. The surface of a metal is illuminated with the
frequencies f 1 and f 2 . If the velocity of the light of 400 nm. The kinetic energy of the ejected
photoelectrons(of mass m) coming out are photoelectrons was found to be 1.68 eV. The
respectively v1 and v2, then work function of the metal is (hc = 1240 eV nm)
(1) 3.09 eV (2) 1.41 eV
2h
2 2
(1) v1  v 2   f1  f 2  (3) 1.51 eV (4) 1.68 eV
m
13. If source of power 4 kW produces 1020 photons/
1/2
 2h  second, the radiation belongs to a part of the
(2) v1  v 2    f1  f 2  
m  spectrum called
(1) -rays (2) X-rays
2h
2 2
(3) v1  v 2   f1  f 2  (3) ultraviolet rays (4) microwaves
m
14. The surface of a metal is illuminated with the
1/2
 2h  light of 400 nm.
(4) v1  v 2    f1  f 2   The kinetic energy of the ejected photoelectrons
m 
was found to be 1.68 eV. The work function of
9. The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons
them metal is (hc = 1240 eV. Nm)
emitted from a surface when photons of energy
(1) 3.09 eV (2) 1.41 eV
6 eV fall on it is 4 eV. The stopping potential, in
(3) 1.51 eV (4) 1.68 eV
volt, is
15. If the distance of 100 W lamp is increased from
(1) 2 (2) 4 (3) 6 (4) 10 a photocell, the saturation current ‘I’ in the
10. In a photoelectric experiment anode potential photocell varies with distance ‘d’ as
is plotted against plate current. (1) i  d2 (2) i  d (3) i  1/d (4) i  1/d2
606 II PUC
Dual Nature of Radiation And Matter
16. If we express the energy of a photon in KeV 24. An electron of mass m and charge e initially at
and the wavelength in angstroms, then energy rest gets accelerated by a constant electric field
of a photon can be calculated from the relation E. The rate of change of de Broglie wavelength
(1) E  12.4 h (2) E  12.4 h /  of this electron at time t ignoring relativistic
(3) E  12.4 /  (4) E  h effects is

17. A particle of mass m and charge q is accelerated h eht  mh h

(1) e E t 2 (2) (3) e E t 2 (4) e E
through a potential difference V. Then the de E
Broglie wavelength associated with it, is 25. The magnitude of the de-Broglie wavelength ()
h of electron (e), proton (p), neutron (n) and 
h
(1)   (2)   mqV particle () all having the same energy of 1
mv
MeV, in the ascending order is
h hq
(3)   2mqV (4)   (1) e, p, n, (2) e, n, p,
2mV
(3) , n, p,e (4) p, e, ,n
18. A proton and an -particle are accelerated
26. The de Broglie wavelength of a neutron is 
through the same potential difference. The ratio
when its kinetic energy Ek is .when its kinetic
of their de Broglie wavelengths will be
energy is increases 4 Ek is. Then corresponding
(1) 1: 1 (2) 1 : 2 (3) 2 : 1 (4) 2 2 :1
de Broglie wavelength is
19. The de Broglie wave length corresponding to a
 
particle of mass m, charge q and velocity v is (1) 4  (2) 2  (3) (4)
2 4
hq hmv mh h 27. The energy that should be supplied to an
(1) (2) (3) (4)
mv q qv mv electron to reduce its de Broglie wavelength
20. The wavelength of an electron of energy 10 ke from 1010 meter 0.5  1010 m will be
V will be (1) four times the initial energy
(1) 0.12 Å (2) 1.2 Å (3) 12 Å (4) 120 Å (2) equal to the initial energy
21. The potential difference through which an (3) twice the initial energy
electron should be accelerated, so that its de (4)thrice the initial energy
Broglie wavelength becomes 0.5 Å is 28. A beam of electrons is used in an young double
(1) 6022 V (2) 602.2 V
slit experiment. The slit width is d. When the
(3) 60.22 V (4) 6.022 V
velocity of electron is increased, then
22. If E and p are the energy and the momentum
(1) no interference is observed
of a photon respectively, then on increasing the
(2) fringe width increases
wavelength of photon
(3) fringe width decreases
(1) p and E both will decrease
(4) fringe width remains same
(2) p and E both will increase
29. A particle of mass M at rest decays into two
(3) p will increase and E will decrease
particles of masses m1 and m2, having non-zero
(4) p will decrease and E will increase
23. If a photon and an electron have same de velocities. The ratio of the de-Broglie
Broglie wavelength, then wavelengths of the particles, 1 / 2, is
(1) Both have same kinetic energies (1) m1/m2 (2) m2/m1
(2) proton has more kinetic energy than electron
(3) 1.0 (4) m 2 / m1
(3) electron has more kinetic energy than proton
(4) both have same velocity
II PUC 607
 Objective Physics
30. Momentum of a photon of energy 1 MeV in kg 37. Photons of 5.5eV energy fall on the surface of
m s1 will be the metal emitting photoelectrons of maximum
kinetic energy 4.0 eV. The stopping voltage
(1) 5  1022 (2) 0.33  106
required for these electrons is
(3) 7  1024 (4) 1022 (1) 5.5 V (2) 1.5 V (3) 9.5 V (4) 4.0 V
31. Rest mass of photon is 38. Maximum velocity of the photoelectrons
(1) zero (2) 13.6 eV emitted by a metal surface is 1.2  106 m s1 .
(3) 1 MeV (4) 3.1  1027 kg Assuming the specific charge of the electron to
32. Photoelectric effect can be explained by be 1.8  1011 C kg1, the value of the stopping
(1) corpuscular theory of light potential in volt will be
(2) wave nature of light (1) 2 (2) 3 (3) 4 (4) 6
(3) Bohr’s theory 39. Which one of the following property does not
(4) quantum theory of light support wave theory of light?
33. Which of the following waves can produce (1) Light obeys laws of reflection and refraction
photoelectric effect? (2) light waves get polarized
(1) ultrasound (2) infrared (3) light shows photoelectric effect
(3) radio waves (4) X-rays. (4) light shows interference.
34. In photoelectric effect, the KE of electrons 40. A light whose frequency is equal to 6  1014 Hz
emitted from the metal surface depends upon is incident on a metal whose work function is 2
(1) intensity of light eV. (h = 6.63  1034 Js, 1 eV = 1.6  1019 J). The
(2) frequency of incident light maximum energy of the electrons emitted will
(3) velocity of incident light be
(4) both intensity and velocity of light (1) 2.49 eV (2) 4.49 eV
35. The graph between intensity of light falling on (3) 0.49 eV (4) 5.49 eV
a metallic plate (I v) with the current (i) TASK - II
generated is 1. The energy that should be added to an electrons
to reduce its de-Broglie wavelength from 1nm
to 0.5 nm is
(1) four times the initial energy
(1) (2) (2) equal to the initial energy
(3) twice the initial energy
(4) thrice the initial energy
2. The kinetic energy of an electron gets tripled,
then the de Broglie Wavelength associated with
it changes by a factor
(3) (4)
1 1
(1) (2) 3 (3) (4) 3
3 3
36. 4eV is the energy of the incident photon and
3. G. P. Thomson experimentally confirmed the
the work function is 2 eV. The stopping
existence of matter waves by the phenomena
potential will be
(1) Diffraction (2) Refraction
(1) 2V (2) 4V (3) 6V (4) 2 2 V
(3) Polarization (4) Scattering

608 II PUC
Dual Nature of Radiation And Matter
4. The de Broglie wavelength associated with an 13. If the kinetic energy of the particle is increased
electron acceleration by a potential of 64V is to 16 times its previous value, the percentage
(1) 1.227 nm (2) 0.613 nm change in the de-Broglie wavelength of the
(3) 0.302 nm (4) 0.153 nm particle is
5. The de-Broglie wavelength of a particle moving (1) 60 (2) 50 (3) 25 (4) 75
with a velocity 2.25  108 m/s is equal to the 14. If alpha particle, proton and electron move with
wavelength of photon. The ratio of kinetic the same momentum, then their respective de
energy of the particle to the energy of the photon Broglie w av elengths , p, e are related as
is (velocity of light is 3  108 m/s) (1)  = p = e (2)  < p < e
(1) 1/8 (2) 3/8 (3) 5/8 (4) 7/8 (3)  > p > e (4) p > e > 
6. According to de-Broglie, the de-Broglie 15. The photoelectric work function
wavelength for electron in an orbit of hydrogen (1) Is different for different materials
atom is 10–9 m. The principle quantum number (2) Is same for all metals
for this electron is (3) Depends upon frequency of the incident light
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4 (4) Depends upon intensity of the incident light
7. The de-Broglie wavelength of a neutron at 27oC 16. The approximate wavelength of a photon of
is . What will be its wavelength at 927oC energy 2.48 eV is
(1)  / 2 (2)  / 3 (3)  / 4 (4)  / 9 (1) 500 Å (2) 5000 Å (3) 2000 Å (4) 1000 Å
8. The kinetic energy of an electron with de-Broglie 17. Wavelength of a 1 keV photon is
wavelength of 0.3 nanometer is 1.24  10 9 m. What is the frequency of 1 MeV
(1) 0.168 eV (2) 16.8 eV photon?
(3) 1.68 eV (4) 2.5 eV  1  1.24  1015 Hz  2  2.4  10 20 Hz
9. The de-Broglie wavelength of a proton (charge
= 1.6  1019 C, mass = 1.6  1027 kg) accelerated  3  1.24  10 18 Hz  4  2.4  10 23 Hz
through a potential difference of 1 kV is 18. If the energy of a photon is 10 eV, then its mo
(1) 600 Å (2) 0.9  1012 m mentum is
(3) 7 Å (4) 0.9 nm  1  3.33  10 23 kg  m / s
10. If the kinetic energy of the particle is increased
 2  3.33  10 25 kg  m / s
by 16 times, the percentage change in the de
Broglie wavelength of the particle is  3  3.33  10 29 kg  m / s
(1) 25% (2) 75% (3) 60% (4) 50%
 4  3.33  10 27 kg  m / s
11. The de-Broglie wavelength of the electron in the
19. Threshold wavelength for sodium is
ground state of the hydrogen atom is _____ 7
6  10 m. Then photoemission occurs for light
(radius of the first orbit of hydrogen atom = 0.53
Å) of wave length  if
(1) 1.67 Å (2) 3.33 Å (3) 1.06 Å (4) 0.53 Å  1    6  10 7 metre  2    6  10 7 metre
12. The de-Broglie wavelength of neutrons in
 3    5  10 14 metre
thermal equilibrium at temperature T is
(4) Frequency  5  10 14 hertz
3.08 o 0.308 o
(1) A (2) A 20. The work function for Al, K and Pt is 4.28 eV,
T T
2.30 eV and 5.65 eV respectively. Their respec
0.0308 o 30.8 o
(3) A (4) A tive threshold frequencies would be
T T
II PUC 609
 Objective Physics
(1) Pt > Al > K (2) Al > Pt > K 27. Neglecting variation of mass with velocity, the
(3) K > Al > Pt (4) Al > K > Pt wavelength associated with an electron hav ing
21. If the frequency of light incident on a metallic a kinetic energy E is proportional to
plate be doubled, how will the maximum ki- 1

1

netic energy of the photoelectrons change?  1  E 2  2  E  3  E 2  4  E 2

(1) It becomes more than double 28. The de Broglie wavelength  associated with a
(2) It becomes less than double proton increases by 25%, if its momentum is
(3) It becomes exactly double decreased by P0 . The initial momentum was
(4) It does not change P P
22. When a metallic surface is illuminated with light  1  4 P0  2  40  3  5 P0 4 0
5
of wavelength  , the stopping potential is x
volt. When the same surface is illuminated by 29. If in a photoelectric cell, the wavelength of inci-
light of wavelength 2 , the stopping potential dent light is changed from 4000 Å to 3000 Å
then change in stopping potential will be
x
is . Threshold wavelength for the metallic sur (1) 0.66 V (2) 1.03 V (3) 0.33 V (4) 0.49 V
3
30. Find the number of electrons emitted per sec
face is
ond by a 24 W source of monochromatic light
4 8
 1  2  4  3  6 4 of wavelength 6600 Å, assuming 3% efficiency
3 3
for photoelectric effect (take h = 6.6 × 10 -34 Js)
23. The de Broglie wavelength of an electron in the 19 17
 1  48  10  2  48  10
nth Bohr orbit is related to the radius R of the
 3  8  1019  4  24  10 17
orbit as 31. For same energy, find the ratio of
3 photon and electron (Here m is mass of electron)
 1  n   R  2  n   R
2
2m 1 2m 1 2m 1 2m
 3  n  2 R  4  n  4 R  1 c 2 3 2 4
E c E c E c E2
24. A photon and an electron both have wavelength
o 32. Figure shows four situations in which an elec-
1A . The ratio of energy of photon to that of tron is moving in electric / magnetic field. In
electron is
which case the de Broglie wavelength of elec
(1) 1 (2) 0.012 (3) 82.7  4  10 10 tron is increasing?
25. The wavelength of matter waves is independent
of
(1) Mass (2) Velocity
(3) Momentum (4) Charge
26. Choose the only correct statement out of the
following 33. A photosensitive metallic surface is illuminated
(1) Only a charged particle in motion is accom alternately with lights of wavelength 3100 Å
panied by matter waves and 6200 Å. It is observed that maximum speeds
(2) Only subatomic particles in motion are ac of the photoelectrons in two cases are in ratio 2
companied by matter waves : 1. The work function of the metal is (hc = 12400
(3) Any particle in motion, whether charged or eVÅ)
uncharged, is accompanied by matter waves 4 2
(4) No particle, whether at rest or in motion, is (1) 1 eV (2) 2 eV  3  eV  4  eV
3 3
ever accompanied by matter waves
610 II PUC
Dual Nature of Radiation And Matter
34. The work function of a metallic surface is 5.01 (1) Metal 1 may be gold and metal 2 may be
eV. The photo electrons are emitted when light cesium
of wavelength 2000 Å falls on it. The potential  2 1  2 , if metal -1 is gold and metal-2 is ce-
difference applied to stop the fastest photo elec sium
-15
trons is [h = 4.14 × 10 eV s]  3  1   2 , for any two metals
(1) 1.2 volt (2) 2.24 volt
 4  1   2 , if metal -1 and metal-2 are gold and
(3) 3.6 volt (4) 4.8 volt
copper respectively
35. The stopping potential V for photoelectric emis-
38. Variation of momentum of particle (p) with as-
sion from a metal surface is plotted along Y-
sociated de-Broglie wavelength    is shown
axis and frequency  of incident light along X
correctly by
axis. A straight line is obtained as shown.
Planck’s constant is given by

(1) Slope of the line

(2) Product of slope on the line and charge on
the electron
(3) Product of intercept along Y-axis and mass 39. Violet light is falling on a photosensitive mate-
of the electron rial causing ejection of photoelectrons with
(4) Product of slope and mass of electron maximum kinetic energy of 1 eV. Red light fall-
36. How many photons are emitted by a laser source ing on metal will cause emission of photoelec
of 5  10 3 W operating at 632.2 nm in 2 s? trons with maximum kinetic energy (approxi-
mately) equal to
 
h  6.63  10 34 Js
(1) 1.2 eV
 1  3.2  10 16  2  1.6  10 16 (2) 0.9 eV
 3  4  10 16
 4  0.4  10 16 (3) 0.5 eV
37. V (stopping potential) is plotted against (4) Zero, that is no photoemission
40. For a proton accelerated through potential dif-
1
, where  is wavelength of incident radia ference of one volt, kinetic energy gained in eV

is
tions, for two metals
(1) 1 (2) 1840
1
 3  4  931.5  10 6
1840

II PUC 611
 Objective Physics
KEY  The graph of E v/s  is rectangular hyperbola.
TASK - I 6. (1) Number of photons emitted per second is
1 4 2 3 3 4 4 1 5 2 60
6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 10 4 n  2 1020 photons per second
31019
11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 4
E h
16 3 17 3 18 4 19 1 20 1 7. (1) P = =
c2 c
21 2 22 1 23 3 24 1 25 3
1 2hf 2hf 0
26 3 27 1 28 3 29 3 30 2 8. (1) mv 2  hf  hf 0 (or) v 2  
2 m m
31 1 32 4 33 4 34 2 35 2
2hf1 2hf 0 2hf 2hf
36 1 37 4 38 3 39 3 40 3 v12    or  v 2  0  0
m m m m
TASK - II
2h
1 1 2 3 3 1 4 4 5 2 v12  v 22   f1  f2 
m
6 3 7 1 8 2 9 2 10 2
k max
11 2 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 1 9. (2) V0 
e
16 2 17 2 18 4 19 2 20 1
K max 4eV
21 1 22 2 23 3 24 3 25 4 Stopping potential V0    4V
e e
26 3 27 3 28 3 29 2 30 4
10. (4) B and C have equal saturation currents, so
31 1 32 2 33 3 34 1 35 2
they have equal intensities. A and B have same
36 1 37 3
38 39 1 4 40 1 stooping potential (at which I = 0). So they have
HINTS & SOLUTION
same frequencies.
TASK - I
1
11. (2) Number of photelectrons  intensity 
h pc r2
1. (4) p   
c h 2 2
n1  r2   0.5  1
29
3.3  10  3 10 8
    
  1.5  1013 Hz n2  r1   1  4
6.6  1034
E hc hc
2. (3) p   E  p  c  2  1016  (3 1010 ) 12. (2) K max   wo  w0   K max
c  
 6 106 erg. 1240
  1.68  3.10  1.68  1.42 eV
3. (4) Photoelectric effect establishes the particle 400
nature of radiation (i.e., quantum nature) and nhc
diffraction establishes the wave nature of 13. (2) p  n  hv  
radiation 20
10  6 10 34  3  108
h c c  cP     4.5  109 m
4. (1)   and     V     4 103
p v I  h 
14. (2) Energy of incident light
8 29
3  10  3.3 10
V  1.5 1013 Hz 12400 12400
6.6 1034 E   3.1 eV
 
o
4000  E  W0  K max
5. (2) The energy of a photon is given by  A

hc 1  3.1  W0  1.68  W0  1.42 eV

E E
 
612 II PUC
Dual Nature of Radiation And Matter
15. (4) Intensity of incident light radiation is eE eE
inversely proportional to the square of distance 24. (1) u  0; a  ; v  u  at ; v  0  t
m m
between source of light and photosensitive
de Broglie wavelength
1
plate p. i.e., I  i  2 h h h
d   
mV m  eEt / m  eEt
hc hc
16. (3) Energy of photon E  (Joules)  (eV) Rate of change of de Broglie wavelength
 e
6.6  1034  3 108 12375 d h  1  h
E     2 
(eV ) 1.6 1019   (Å) (Å) dt eE  t  eEt 2

12.37 12.4 h 1
 E(keV)   25. (3)   ;h ; Here m  m n  m p  m e
(Å)  2mE m
De Broglie wavelength in increasing order will
1 h h
17. (3) qV  mv ; mV = 2mqV;   mv  2mqv
2

2 be   ,  n ,  p ,  e
18. (4) 1
26. (3) K.E = E k mv 2 (or) mv 2  2 m E k
1 h h 2
qV  mv 2 or mv  2qVm So   
2 mv 2qVm  De Broglie wavelength,
h 1  Ek 1
1      ; 1  
i.e   .. 2 mE k Ek  4 Ek 2
qm as V is same for both the particles. 2

h 1 1
p q m  27. (1)   2mE (or)   E (or) E k  2
so   q p mp
 2 4  2 2 k k 

2 2
E K2     1010 
h h  1   10 
 4 (or) E k  4E k
19. (1)    E k1   2   0.510  2 1

p mv
12.27 Energy to be supplies= 4E K 2  E k1  3E k1
12.27  0.1227 Å
20. (1)   Å=
v 10  103 h
28. (3) De Broglie wavelength,   , Finge
mv
12.27
21. (2)   Å= D
v width, B  as the velocity v of e  increases,
d
2
12.27 12.27 12.27  their wavelength  decreases and hence fringe
v  2
 602.2V
A2  0.5  width B decreases.
29. (3) By conservation of linear momentum
hc h
22. (1)    p 1 + p2 = 0 or p1 = p2
E p
on increasing , E and p will decrease  2 p1
|p1| = |p2|;   p  1
1 2
h h v p me
23. (3)   m v  m v ; mpvp = meve; v  m 30. (2) Energy of photon, E = 1MeV
p p e e e p

1  1 106 1.6 109 J ; Momentum of photon,

m p vp2 m  2
 me
2 m
Ep   p  e   1 E 106 1.6 1019
1 m m  Ep < Ee p   5.31022 kg ms 1
me ve 2 e  p  mp c 3 108
2
II PUC 613
 Objective Physics
31. (1) Conceptual 1
32. (4) Conceptual Since h, m remains the same,  
k
33. (4) Conceptual
34. (2) Conceptual  k 3k 
     
35. (2) Photoelectric current  Intensity of incident  k k 3
light. When no light falls on the metallic plate, 3. (1) G. P. Thomson experimentally confirmed
the existence of matter waves (de Broglie
photoelectric current is zero.
hypothesis) by demonstrating that electron
36. (1) eV0 = h  w 0 = beams are diffracted when they are scattering
2eV by the regular atomic arrays of crystals.
4eV  2eV  2eV,V0   2V 4. (4) Here, accelerating potential V = 64 V
e
The de Broglie wavelength associated with an
K max 4.0eV
37. (4) Stopping potential =   4.0 eV
e e 1.227 1.227
electron is   nm  nm  0.153 nm
38. (3) Specific charge of electron = V 64

e 1 1 2 h
 1.8 1011 C kg 1 ; K max  mv max
2
 eV0 5. (2) K particle  mv also  
m 2 2 mv

mv 2max v 2max 1 h  vh
V0    K particle    .v2 
2e 2 e / m 2  v  2 …(i)

6 2 hc

1.2 10   0.4  10  4V
K photon 

…(ii)
11
2  1.8 10
39. (3) Photoelectric effect cannot be explained on K particle v 2.25 108 3
   
the basis of wave theory pf light K photon 2c 2  3 108 8

40. (3) Frequency of light = 6  1014 Hz 2r 2  3.14  5.3  1011

6. (3) 2r  n  n   3
Energy in electron volt  1010

6  1014  6.63 10 34 1  T2

  2.49 eV 7. (1)  neutron   1
1.6  1019 T 2 T1
Work function of the metal = 2 eV
 maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons 


 273  927   1200
 2  2  
= 0.49 eV
2  273  27  300 2
TASK - II h h2
8. (2)   E
h 1 2mE 2m 2
1. (1)   ,
2mK k
34 2


 6.6 10   2.65  1018 J
1 1109 K2 K 2 9 2
   2   2   4 ; K  4K 2  9.110   0.3 10 
31
 2 0.5 109 K1 K1 2 1

= 16.8 eV
2. (3) For an electron
h h h
h 9. (2)   p  2mE  2mqV
de Broglie wavelength  
2mk
Where h = Planck’s constant, m = mass of an 6.6  1034
 
electron, k = kinetic energy of an electron 2  1.6 1027   1.6 1019  1000
614 II PUC
Dual Nature of Radiation And Matter
6.6  1034 1022 c 3 108
  0.9  1012 m f2   2.4  1020 Hz
1.6 20 2 1.24 109
h  K2 16K E
10. (2)    1   4 18. (4)Momentum =
2mK 2 K1 K c
1  100 101.610-19 16 27
 4  2  1   25 ; 4 = 100 – 25 = 75% Momentum= 8
 10  3.331027
2 4 4 310 3
11. (2) According to Bohr’s quantization condition 19. (2)   threshold
nh h 2r 20. (1) Higher work function means higher fre
mvr  or  …(i) quency as w 0  h 0  Pt  AI  K
2 mv n
De-Broglie wavelength of an electron, 21. (1) hf  w0  KEmax
h KEmax  hf  w0 ; Since w0 is constant.
 …(ii)
mv
KEmax will become more than double
2r 22. (2) From Einstein photoelectric equation.
Equating (i) and (ii), we get  
n
hc
For the first orbit, r = 0.53 Å, n = 1

   ev0  v0  stopping potential 
2  3.14  0.53
  Å  3.33Å hc hc x
1    ex ;    e On solving ;(work
 2 3
12. (4)
h 6.63  1034 hc hc  hc
  m function)   ; ; 0  4 .
2mKT 2 1.67 1027  1.38  1023 T 4 0 4
23. (3) n  2 r (According to Bohr’s theory)
30.8
 Å
T hc
24. (3) E(Photon) = &
h h 
13. (4)   
hc
p 2mE
EPhoton  2me  c
h     82.7
    0.25 % change = –75% Eelectron h 2  1  h
2m 16E  4  
 2  2me 
h
14. (1) de-Broglie wavelength,   25. (4) The wavelength of matter waves is given
p
Where symbol have their usual meanings. h
by   . Hence, it is independent of charge.
 p  p p  pe     p   e mv
15. (1) Work function is the property of material. 26. (3)
hc h
16. (2) E = 2.48 eV; E  27. (3)      E 1/2
 2 mE
hc 12400 0 2  1 25 2 5 P 5
   5000 A 28. (3)    1  ;
E 2.48 1 100 1 4 P2 4
17. (2) Wavelength of 1 keV photon is
4 P1
1 E1  2 P2  P1   P0 ;  P1   P0 ; P1  5P0
9 ; E  ; 5
1.24  10 m  E2 1
II PUC 615
 Objective Physics
29. (2) Wavelength is changed from 4000 Å to 3000
4.14  10 15 C
hc KEmax   5.01 eV
o 2000  10 10
A ;   KEmax  w0 &
1
 2.07  10 8 C  5.01 eV = 6.21 – 5.01= 1.2 eV
hc hc hc
 KEmax 2   w0 ;   KEmax  KEmax 2  KEmax
2 1 2 Stopping potential =  1.2 V
e
hc hc  hc hc  1 35. (2) h  KEmax  w0 & KEmax  eV
  eV ;      V ; V = 1.03 V
1 2  1 2  e h
h  eV  w0 ; v   w0
hc e
30. (4) Energy per photon = hf or
 h
Slope(m) = ; h = me
24 e
Number of photon’s per second = ET nE nhc p t
hf
36. (1) p    n
t t t hc
3 24
Number of electrons emitted =   
100 hc 5 103  632.2  109  2
n 34 8
 3.2  1016
hc 6.6  10  3  10
31. (1) Energy of photon =
P hc hc
37. (3) 
 632.2  10 9
hc h P 2m
P  e  ; c hc hc
E 2mE e E  eV  w0 ; eV   w0 ;
 
1
32. (2)   ; de Broglie wavelength of an elec- hc 1 w0 hc
v V   ; tan    constant
e  e e
tron depends on its velocities. Velocity of the
electron is only decreasing in the IInd case. 1
[Slope of V vs graph]

hc 1 hc
33. (3) E1    w0 ; meV 2    w0   is same for all metals.
1 2 1
38. (1)
hc 1 hc
E2    w0 ;  me 4V 2   w0 h
2 2 2  which is a hyperbolic graph like(1).
P
hc 39. (4) When violet light falls on photosensitive
 w0
1 1 hc 4 hc hc hc
  Ev  w0   1  w0
4 hc  w ;   w0    4 w0 material
v v
0 2 1
2
hc
 w0  0
4hc hc 12400  4 1  v
3 w0   ; w0    
1 2 3  1 2  as difference in energies of the violet and red
light is greater than 1 eV.
; w0  2 eV
40. (1) Kinetic energy = qV ; For one electron en
hc ergy gained is therefore = eV
34. (1) w0  5.01eV ; KEmax   5.01


616 II PUC
Atoms

CHAPTER ATOMS
Alpha- particle scattering experiments; Rutherford’s model of atom; Bohr

12
model, Bohr’s radius, orbital velocity, angular frequency, linear Frequency, time
period, potential energy,kinetic energy & total energy of an electron in nth orbit
of hydrogen atom, energy levels, hydrogen spectrum.

PAST NEET PAPERS SUBTOPIC LEVEL ANALYSIS

NEET 2016 NEET 2016 Forecasting of
Year NEET 2018 NEET 2017
PHASE-I PHASE-II NEET-2019

No of
question 1 1 1 1 1
Asked
wave number
ratio of kinetic wavelength of wavelength of
Subtopic of hydrogen Bohr's radius
& total energy lyman series hydrogen series
series
RUTHERFORD’S ATOMIC MODEL
 Rutherford, a New Zealand born physicist, suggested a model after carefully analysing the results
of alpha-particle scattering experiment.
 Alpha particle Scattering Experiment
Deflected by
small angles

-particles 

Bounced
Back

Deflected by Thin gold

large angles foil (104 atoms thick)
 Important Points and Observations
 Most of -particles went straight.
 One in 8000 deflected by an angle more than 90º.
 Atom has a lot of empty space in it.
 The entire mass and positive charge is confined to extremely small central core called nucleus, i.e.,
Rutherford discovered nucleus.

+2e v 
b
(Ze)

Nucleus

II PUC 617
 Objective Physics
1 Ze 2 cot  / 2
b
 Impact parameter (b) : 4 0  1 2 when b = 0,  = 180°
 mv 
2 
 Fraction of -particles N() scatted at a particular angle , is given as :
1
(a) N()  Z2 (b) N() 

sin 4  
2

21 1 (Ze) (2e)
 Distance of closest approach 2 mv  4 r0 n
0

m, 2e
1 2Ze 2 r0
 r0  4 1
0  2
 mv 
 2  that whole mass and positive charge is in a core, i.e., nucleus and electrons
Rutherford proposed
revolve around it in circular orbits so that electrostatic force of attraction provides centripetal force.
Drawbacks
 According to Maxwell’s theory, accelerated charges radiate electromagnetic waves and loose
energy. Therefore, when an electron revolves in circular orbit, it is subjected to centripetal
acceleration and thus, should radiate energy and the radius should decrease continuously, till it
falls into nucleus.
BOHR’S ATOMIC MODEL
 In 1913 Neils Bohr, a Danish physicist, introduced a revolutionary concept i.e., the quantum concept
to explain the stability of an atom. He made a simple but bold statement that “The old classical laws
which are applicable to bigger bodies cannot be directly applied to the sub-atomic particles such as
electrons or protons.
Postulates of Bohr’s Theory
 Electron revolves round the nucleus in circular orbits.
 Electron can revolve only in those orbits in which angular momentum of the electron about the
h nh
nucleus is an integral multiple of . i.e., mvr  where n = principal quantum number of the
2 2
orbit in which electron is revolving.
 Electrons in an atom can revolve only in discrete circular orbits called stationary energy levels (shells).
An electron in such a shell is characterised by a definite energy, angular momentum and orbit number.
While an electron is in any of these orbits it does not radiate energy although it is accelerated.
 Electrons can jump from one stationary orbit to another stationary orbit. Electrons in outer orbits
have greater energy than inner orbits. The orbiting electron emits energy when it jumps from a
higher energy state to a lower energy state and absorbs energy when it makes a jump from lower
orbits to higher orbits.
E3
E2
E1

Nucleus

618 II PUC
Atoms
E2 – E1 = h 
where, E2 = higher energy state &E1 = lower energy state and  = frequency of radiation emitted.
 Mathematical Analysis of Bohr’s Theory
Electric force of attraction provides the centripetal force
v
1 (Ze) e mv 2
 ...(i)
4 0 r 2 r r Electron

where, m = mass of electron +

Nucleus
v = velocity (linear) of electron +Ze
r = radius of the orbit in which electron is revolving
Z = atomic number of hydrogen like atom
nh
Angular momentum about the nucleus, mvr  ...(ii)
2

Z  e2  Z
 Velocity of electron in nth orbit ; v     .v 0 ...(iii)
n  2 0 h  n
c v0 1
where, v 0  = 2.2 × 106 m/s , where c = 3 × 108 m/s = speed of light in vacuum, 
137 c 137
= fine structure constant
n 2   h2 
0 n2
 Radius of the nth orbit r  Z  2
 .r0 where r = 0.53 Å.
 me  Z 0

The ratio of the radii of the orbits of hydrogen atom r1 : r2 : r3 : r4  1: 4 : 9 :16       or

 r2  4r1 , r3  9r1 and so on .
1 Ze 2 1 (Ze) ( e)
 Total energy of electron in n th orbit K.E.  mv 2  & P.E.   2 K.E.
2 8  0 r 4 0 r

Z 2  me 4  Z2

P.E. = – 2 K.E. | P.E.| = 2 K.E. E   .E
 n 2 0 where, E0 = –13.6 eV.
n 2  8 20 h 2 

 13.6 
The energy of an electron in the lowest energy states of H2(ground state energy) E n   2  eV .
 n 
2r n3
 Time period of revolution of electron in nth orbit T   2 .T0 where T0 = 1.51 × 10–16 sec.
v Z

1 Z2
 Frequency of revolution in nth orbit f   3 .f0 where f0 = 6.6 ×1015 Hz.
T n
 Magnetic field at the centre due to revolution of electron
 0I  e  e v 2
B  0  0  v Z  Z  Z3
2r 2r T 2r
;
2r B  2  B    B
r n  n2  n5
 Wavelength of photon

1  1 1 2
  R  2  2  Z where  is called wave number.
λ  n1 n 2 
RH = Rydberg constant = 1.09677 × 107 m–1 = 1.09677 × 10–3 Å–1 (for stationary nucleus).

II PUC 619
 Objective Physics
Energy Level Diagram of Hydrogen Atom
0 eV n=

–0.28 eV n=7

–0.38 eV n=6 Orbit Energy

Humphrey
n=1 E1   13.6 eV
–0.54 eV n=5
Pfund
n=2 E 2   3.4 eV
–0.85 eV n=4
Brackett n=2 E 3   1.51 eV
–1.51 eV n=3
Paschen n=4 E 4   0.85 eV

–3.4 eV n=2 n=5 E 5   0.54 eV

Balmer
n=6 E 6   0.38 eV

n E  0
–13.6 eV n=1
Lyman
 Light is emitted from the hydrogen atom only when the electron makes emmission transitions
between stationary states.
HYDROGEN SPECTRUM
Electron jumps from n2 to n1.

12400
Note: (i) Wavelength (Å) of a photon of energy (eV) is given by   Å
E (eV )
E h
(ii) Momentum of a photon of energy E p 
c 
Bohr’s theory is unable to explain the following facts:
 Any spectral line of hydrogen atom is not a single line but a collection of several lines very close
together.The structure of multielectron atoms is not explained.
 No explanation for using the principles of quantisation of angular momentum.
 No explanation for Zeeman effect. If a substance which gives a line emission spectrum is placed
in a magnetic field, the lines of the spectrum get splitted up into a number of closely spaced lines.
620 II PUC
Atoms
This phenomenon is known as Zeeman effect.
BINDING ENERGY
 Binding energy of a system is defined as the energy released when its constituents are brought
from infinity to form the system. BE = –TE.
Excitation Energy
 Energy needed to take the atom from its ground state to an excited state is called excitation energy.
e.g. The hydrogen atom in ground state needs 10.2 eV to move to its first excited state.
E excitation
E Excitation  EFinal  EInitial and VExcitation 
e
 For hydrogen atom, E1  13.6eV, E 2  3.4eV, E 3  1.51eV and so on. Let the electron be excited
from ground state (n = 1) to the first excited state (n = 2).
 Then energy required to raise the electron from n = 1 to n = 2 state is
E  E 2  E1  3.4  (13.6)  10.2 eV The corresponding excitation potential is 10.2 volt.
 The potential through which an electron should be accelerated to acquire excitation energy is called
the excitation potential. eg: The excitation potential of hydrogen atom in first excited state is 10.2
V.
 Ionisation Potential
The potential through which an electron must be accelerated to acquire ionization energy is called
ionisation potential.
The following points should be kept in mind :
 Ionisation potential of hydrogen atom in ground state is 13.6 V.
13.6Z 2
 Ionisation potential of Bohr’s atom in ground state is V.
n2
 Energy of electron in He+ ion in first excited state = 13.6 eV i.e., same as energy of electron in
hydrogen atom in ground state.
 When some energy is supplied to hydrogen sample, its atoms move to their excited state. When
they come back to ground state, a number of spectral lines are emitted.
 Let an electron jumps from n = 1 to n = N (say). Then the number of different ways in which it
N(N  1)
can come back to ground state = Number of different spectral lines = .
2
 Number of spectral lines possible when an electron makes a transition from n = N to n = M are
(N  M ) (N  M  1)
.
2
k
 If the force between an electron and a proton at a distance r varies as F  or potential energy
r4
2
k , then applying Bohr’s model of H-atom, we get k  mv …(1)
U 3
r r4 r
nh
mvr  …(2)
2
On solving we get v  n3, r  n–2, Energy  n6
 With the increase in principal quantum number the energy difference between the two successive
energy level decreases, while wavelength of spectral line increases. E'  E' '  E' ' ' ;  '   ' '   ' ' '
n=4
E, 
n=3
E,  E, 
1 1 1 1 n=2
E  E ' E ' ' E ' ' ' ;    '   ' '   ' ' '
E, 
n=1
II PUC 621
 Objective Physics
EXAMINATION CORNER

1. the ratio of kinetic energy to the total energy of 1  1 1 

an electron in a Bohr orbit of the hydrogen A: (3) R 2  2 
  h1 h2 
atom, is atom, is (NEET-2018)
Wavelength
(1) 2 : –1 (2) 1 : –1 (3) 1 : 1 (4) 1 : –2
7
A: (2) KE = –(total energy) 1  1  R 10
  R 2     0.25  107 m1
So, Kinetic energy : total energy = 1 : –1  2
  4 4
2. The ratio of wavelengths of the last line of 5.   particles are projected towards the nuclei
Balmer series and the last line of Lyman series of the different metals, with the same kinetic
is (NEET-2017) energy. The distance of closest approach is
(1) 2 (2) 1 (3) 4 (4) 0.5 minimum for
A: (3) For last Balmer series (1) Cu(Z=29) (2) Ag(Z=47)
1 1 1  (3) Au(Z=79) (4) Pd(Z=46)
 R  2  2  ; b  4
b 2   R 1 q1q2
A : (1) r   r  q1q2  r  Q and Q
For last Lyman series 4 0 ( KE ) 1 1

4 is minimum for Cu
1 1 1  b R  6. A proton strikes another proton at rest with
 R  2  2  ; l  1 ;   1 ; b  4
l 1   R l l speed Vo . Assume impact parameter to be
R zero. Their closest distance of approach is (mass
3. If an electron in a hydrogen atom jumps from of proton is m)
the 3rd orbit to the 2nd orbit, it emits a photon
e2 e2
of wavelength  . When it jumps from the 4th (1) (2)
orbit to the 3rd orbit, the corresponding wave 4 mo 2  0mo 2
length of the photon will be (NEET-II 2016) e2
(3) 2 (4) zero
16 9 20 20 m0
(1)  (2)  (3)  (4) 
25 16 7 13 A: (2)Using law of conservation of momentum &

1 1 energy.ie. , : m0 = 2m  (1)

 ' 2
A: (3)  1 1 ;  1 1  mo
2
1   e2
R 2  2  R 2  2   2 m o  
2 3  3 4  2 2  2  4 r
 1  1 mv02 e2 e2
 '  2 2 3 2  20 
4

40 r
r
 0 mv02
  ' 
  1 1  7
 2 2 7. An   particle accelerated through V volt is
3 4 
fired towards a nucleus.Its distance of closest
4. Given the value of Rydberg constant is
approach is r.If a proton is accelerated through
107 m 1 , the wave number of the last line of the
the same potential and fired towards the same
Balmer series inhydrogen spectrum will be:
nucleus,the distance of closest approach of
(NEET-I 2016)
proton will be
(1) 0.025  10 4 m 1 (2) 0.5  10 7 m 1
(1) r (2) 2r (3) r/2 (4) r/4
7 1 7 1
(3) 0.25  10 m (4) 2.5  10 m
622 II PUC
Atoms
1 q1q2 If R is the Rydberg’s constant and M is the mass
A: (1) KE = PE  q1V 
4 0 r Independent of of the atom, then the velocity acquired by the
charge of the particle projected atom is (neglect energy absorbed by the photon)
8. The impact parameter at which the scattering 3Rh 4M Rh 4M
(1) (2) (3) (4)
angle is 90o , z  79 and initial energy 10 MeV 4M 3Rh 4M Rh
is A: (4) p   mv ;
(1) 1.137  1014 m (2) 1.137  1016 m h h  1  1 3R 3hR
 17  18
 mv  v    &  ; v
(3) 2.24  10 m (4) 2.24  10 m  m  4 4m
ze 2 cot   / 2   0.511010 
A : (1) b  12. If   m is the radius of smallest
4o  E  4 
2 electron orbit in hydrogen like atom, then this
79  1.6 10 19  1 9 109
  1.137  1014 m atom is
10  1.6  1013 (1) hydrogen atom (2) He 
1 (3) Li 2  (4) Be3
9. An alpha nucleus of energy mv2 bombards a
2
n2 0.51 1010 12
heavy nuclear target of charge Ze. Then the A : (4) rn  ro ;   0.51 1010
Z 4 z
distance of closest approach for the alpha
nucleus will be proportional to  Z  4  Be3
1 1 1 13. In Bohr’s orbit of hydrogen atom m kg is mass of
(1) (2) (3) v 2 (4) an electron and e coulomb is the charge on it .The
v ze m
ratio (in SI units) of magnetic dipole moment to
1 1  2e  ze  1
A: (4) mv 2  r that of the angular momentum of electron is:
2 4o r m (1) e/2m (2) e/m (3) 2e/m (4)2e/3m
10. An orbital electron in the ground state of
er 2 w
hydrogen has the magnetic moment 1 .This A : (1)Magnetic dipole moment = & Angular
2
orbital electron is excited to 3rd excited state by
er 2 w
some energy transfer to the hydrogen atom. The
new magnetic moment of the electron is 2 , momentum = mr 2 w ; M  2  e
L mr 2 w 2m
then 14. Match the column–I with column–II
(1) 1  2 2 (2) 21   2 Column – I
(3) 161  2 (4) 41   2 (a) Radius of orbit depends on principal
qv quantum number as
A: (4)   niA  iA ,   r 2 ; (b) Due to orbital motion of electrons, magnetic
2r
field arises at the centre of nucleus is
z n2
Mvr where v & r  n proportional to principal quantum number as
n z (c) If electron is going from lower energy level to
2 n2 higher energy level than velocity of electron will

1 n1 here n1  1 & n2  4 (d) If electron is going from lower energy level
( 3rd excited state = 4 level) to higher energy level than total energy of
11. A stationary hydrogen atom emits photon electron will
corresponding to the first line of Lyman series.

II PUC 623
 Objective Physics
Column – II 17. In a Bohr atom the electron is replaced by a
(p) Increase particle of mass 150 times the mass of the
(q) Decrease electron and the same charge. If a0 is the radius
1
(r) Is proportional to 2 of the first Bohr orbit of the orbital atom, then
n2
(s) Is proportional to n that of the new atom will be
1
(t) Is proportional to a0 a0
n5 (1) 150 a0 (2) 150 a0 (3) (4)
(1) a-p, b-t, c-q, d-s (2) a-q, b-t, c-s, d-p 150 150
(3) a-s, b-t, c-q, d-p (4) a-r, b-t, c-q, d-p 1
rn  r2  m1  r2  r0
A: (3) A : (4) m r1 m2 150
15. Magnetic field at the centre (at nucleus) of the
18. In hydrogen atom, the radius of nth Bohr orbit
hydrogen like atoms (atomic number =Z) due
to the motion of electron in n th orbit is r 
is V . The graph between log  n  and log n
proportional to n
 r1 
n2 n4 Z2 Z3 will be
(1) (2) (3) (4) r 
Z5 Z n3 n5 log n  r 
log  n 
 r1 
 r1 
0 I n In  fn 
A : (4) Bn  or Bn   (1) (2)
2rn rn rn
logn logn
v / r  vn  Z / n Z3
Bn  n n   2
 5 r 
log  n  r 
log  n 
rn  rn 
2
n 2
/Z n  r1   r1 

16. If we assume only gravitational attraction (3) (4)

between proton and electron in hydrogen atom logn logn

and the Bohr’s quantization rule to be followed,

A: (1) rn  n 2
then the expression for the ground state energy
19. An electron in the ground state of hydrogen
of the atom will be (the mass of proton is M and
atom is revolving in anticlockwise direction in
that of electron is m)
the cicular orbit of radius R. The atom is placed
2 2 2 2 2 2 3
G M m 2 G M m in a uniform magnetic
(1) 2 (2) 2
h h induction B such that the
plane normal of electron
22 GM 2m3 h2 orbit makes an angle
(3) 2 (4) 2 2 2
h G M n 30o with B, as shown in
nh mv 2 Gmm Gmm figure. The torque
A : (2) mvr  and  2  mvr  experienced by electron will be
2 r v
r
ehB eh
GMm nh 2 GMm 1 2 (1) (2)
  v ;  E  mv 8m 8Bm
v 2 nh 2
eB hB
(3) (4)
1  4 2G 2 M 2 m 2  2 2G 2 M 2 m 2 8mh 8em
 m 
2  n2h2  h2 A: (1)   M  Band M  iA

( n  1 for ground state) ev

Where i  A  r2
2r
624 II PUC
Atoms

M
ev
 r 2 
 m vr  e   nh  e mv 2
A: (1) r 
1 3q 2
; mvr 
nh
2 2m  4  o r 2 2
2r 2m
using above equations, putting n = 1 ;
eh ehB
M  and   MBsin 30o  3q 2
4m 8 m v
2o h
20. According to Bohr’s theory of hydrogen atoms,
the product of the binding energy of the electron 23. The figure shows energy levels of a certain atom,
in the nth orbit an its radius in the n the orbit when the system moves from level 2E to E, a
(1) is proportional to n2 photon of wavelength 
(2) is inversely proportional to n3 is emitted. The
(3) has a constant value of 10.2e V-A0 wavelength of photon
(4) has constant value 7.2 eV-A0 produced during its
transition from level 4/3
1
A : (4) En  2 and rn  n 2
E to E level is:
n
 En rn is independent of n (1) 3  (2)3/4  (3)  /4 (4)2 
0
Hence, E1r1  13.6eV  0.53 A  0 hc
 7.2eV  A A: (1)  2E  E  E 1
1
= constant
21. When an electron in the hydrogen atom in 2 E 3
hc 4 E  
ground state absorbs a photon of energy 12.1  E  E  2 ; 1 E 1
2 3 3
eV, its angular momenturm 3
24. Any radiation in the ultra violet region of
(1) decreases by 2.11 1034 J  s
Hydrogen spectrum is able to eject
(2) decreases by 1.055  1034 J  s photoelectrons from a metal. Then the
(3) increases by 2.11 10 J  s
 34
maximum value of threshold frequency of the
(4) increases by 1.055  1034 J  s metal is, nearly
A: (3) After absorbing a photon of energy 12.1 eV (1) 3.3x1015 HZ (2) 2.5x1015 HZ
(3) 4.6 x 1014 HZ (4) 8.2x1014 HZ
electron jumps from ground state (n=1) to sec-
ond excited state (n=3).Therefore change in A: (1) Rvmax  Emax  13.6  1  1 
 2  ev ;
angular momentum. L  L3  L1  12  
13.6 1.6 1019
 h  h h vmax  34
 3.3  1015 Hz
 3   6.6 10
 2  2  25. The photon radiated from hydrogen
6.6 10 34 corresponding to 2nd line of Lyman series is
 J  s  2.11 1034 J  s absorbed by a hydrogen like atom ‘X’ in 2 nd
3.14
22. In a hypothetical system, a particle of mass m excited state. As a result then , the hydrogen
and charge -3q is moving around a very heavy like atom ‘X’ makes a transition of nth orbit.
particle charge q. Assume that Bohr’s model is (1) X=He+, n=4 (2) X=Li++, n=6
(3) X=He+, n=6 (4) X=Li++, n=9
applicable to this system.then velocity of mass th
A: Energy of n state in hydrogen is same as energy
m in first orbit is
of 3nth state in Li++.
3q 2 3q 2 3q 3q  3 1 transition in H would give same energy
(1) (2) (3) 2  h (4) 4 h
2 0 h 4 0 h 0 0 as the 9  3 transition in Li++.
II PUC 625
 Objective Physics
TASK - I
7. The electron in a hydrogen atom makes a
1. The number of -particles scattered from a
transition n = n1to n = n2 state. The time period
target nucleus is 60is N. The number of particle
of the electron in the initial state is eight times
scattered at 90 will be
in the final state. The possible values of n1 and
3N N N
(1) (2) (3) (4) N n2 are
4 4 2
(1) n1 = 8, n2 = 1 (2) n1 = 6, n2 = 2
2. When a hydrogen atom is raised from the
ground state to an excited state (3) n1 = 4, n2 = 2 (4) n1 = 8, n2 = 2
(1) P.E. increases and K.E. decreases 8. An electron is moving in an orbit of a hydrogen
(2) P.E. decreases and K.E. increases atom which there can be a maximum of six
(3) Both kinetic energy and potential energy transitions. An electron is moving in an orbit of
increase another hydrogen atom from which there can
(4) Both K.E. and P.E. decrease be maximum of three transitions. The ratio of
3. For a hydrogen atom, in which of the following the velocity of the electron in these two orbits is
transitions will the wavelength emitted photon 3 5 2 1
be minimum (1) (2) (3) (4)
4 4 1 2
(1) n = 5 to n = 4 (2) n = 4 to n = 3 9. If n is the orbit number of the electron in a
(3) n = 3 to n = 2 (4) n = 2 to n = 1 hydrogen atom, the correct statement among
4. Which of the following is true for number of the following is
spectral lines in going from Lyman series to (1) Electron energy increases as n increases
Pfund series
(2) Hydrogen emits infrared rays for the
(1) Increases (2) Decreases
electron transition from n =  to n = 1
(3) Unchanged (4) May decrease or increase
(3) Electron energy is zero for n =1
5. The radius of electron’s second stationary orbit
(4) Electron energy varies as n2
in Bohr’s atom is R. The radius of the third orbit
10. If Ep and Ek are the potential energy and kinetic
will be
energy of the electron in a stationary orbit in
R
(1) 3R (2) 2.25R (3) 9R (4) the hydrogen atom, the value of Ep/Ek is
3
(1) –2 (2) 2 (3) –1 (4) 1
6. Suppose an electron is attached towards the
11. In the n th orbit, the energy of an electron
k
origin by a force where ‘k’ is a constant and 13 .6
r E n   2 eV for hydrogen atom. The energy
n
‘r’ is the distance of the electron from the origin.
required to take the electron from first orbit to
By applying Bohr model to this system, the
second orbit will be
radius of the nth orbital of the electron is found
(1) 10 .2 eV (2) 12 .1 eV (3) 13 .6 eV (4) 3. 4 eV
to be ‘rn’ and the kinetic energy of the electron
to be ‘Tn’. Then which of the following is true 12. The ionization energy of hydrogen atom is
(1) Tn independent of n, rn  n 13.6eV,following Bhor’s theory,the energy
1 correspondimg to a transition between
(2) Tn  , rn  n 3rd and 4 th orbit is
n
(1)3.40eV (2)1.51eV (3)0.85eV (4)0.66eV
1 1
(3) Tn  , rn  n 2 (4) Tn  2
, rn  n 2
n n
626 II PUC
Atoms
13. An energy of hydrogen atom in a ground state 3 5 3 15
(1) 16  10 (2) 16  10
is-13.6eV.The energy level corresponding to the
quantum number n=2 (first excited state )in the 9 15 3 15
(3) 16  10 (4) 4  10
hydrogen atoms is
(1)-2.72eV (2)-0.85eV 20. If the wavelength of the first line of the Balmer
(3)-0.54eV (4)-3.4eV series of hydrogen is 6561 Å , the wavelength of
14. Ionization potential of hydrogen atom is 13.6 the second line of the series should be
V. Hydrogen atoms in the ground state are (1) 13122 Å (2) 3280 Å
excited by monochromatic radiation of photon (3) 4860 Å (4) 2187 Å
energy 12.1 eV. The spectral lines emitted by 21. Frequency of the series limit of Balmer series of
hydrogen atoms according to Bohr’s theory will hydrogen atom in terms of Rydberg constant R
be and velocity of light c is
(1) One (2) Two (1) 4 Rc (2) 4/Rc
(3) Three (4) Four
(3) Rc (4) Rc/4
15. The ionization potential of a hydrogen like atom
22. Whenever a hydrogen atom emits a photon in
is 12.4 V. The series limit in its absorption
the Balmer series
spectrum is nearly
(1) it need not emit any more photon
(1) 1 nm (2) 10 nm (3) 100 nm (4) 1000 nm
(2) it may emit another photon in the Paschen
16. v1 is the frequency of the series limit of Lyman
series
series v2 is the frequency of the first line of
Lyman series and v3 is the frequency of the (3) it must emit another photon in the Lyman
series limit of the Balmer series. Then series
(4) it may emit another photon in the Balmer
1 1 1 1 1 1
(1) v  v  v (2) v  v  v series
1 2 3 2 1 3
23. Ha line in the hydrogen spectrum is due to the
(3) v1 = v2 – v3 (4) v1 – v2 = v3
17. Calculate the highest frequency of the emitted transition from n th2 orbit to n1th orbit
photon in the paschen series of spectral lines of (1) n1 = 2 : n2 = 4 (2) n1 = 2 : n2 = 3
the hydrogen atom
(3) n1 = 1 : n2 = 2 (4) n1 = 1 : n2 = 3
(1) 3.7  1014 Hz (2) 9.1  1015 Hz
24. If 1 and 2 are the maximum wavelength limits
(3) 10.23  1014 Hz (4) 29.7  1015 Hz
of Lyman and Balmer series of H2 atom 1/2
18. The wave number of a photon in Brackett series
will be
9
of hydrogen atom is R . The electron has
400 5 27 5 3
(1) (2) (3) (4)
transited from the orbit having quantum 27 5 36 4
number 25. If  1 and  2 are the wavelengths of the first
(1) 5 (2) 6 (3) 4 (4) 7
member of the Lyman and Paschen series
19. An electron jumps from the 4th orbit to the 2nd
respectively, then 1 : 2 is
orbit of hydrogen atom. Given the Rydberg’s
constant R  10 5 cm 1 . The frequency in Hz of the (1) 7 : 50 (2) 7 : 108
emitted radiation will be (3) 1 : 3 (4) 1 : 30

II PUC 627
 Objective Physics
26. Electrons are excited from n = 1 to n = 4 state. 34. The ratio of the magnetic dipole moment to the
During downward transitions, possible number angular momentum of the electron in the 1 st
of spectral lines observed in Balmer series is orbit of hydrogen atom is
(1) 4 (2) 3 (3) 2 (4) 1 (1) e/2m (2) e/m (3) 2m/e (4) m/e
27. When an electron jumps from the orbit n = 2 to 35. The angular momentum of the electron in the
n = 4, then wavelength of the radiations second orbit of hydrogen atom is L. The angular
absorbed will be………. momentum in the third orbit is
(R = Ryberg’s constant)
3 2
(1) L (2) 3L (3)   L (4)   L
3R 5R 16 16 2 3
(1) (2) (3) (4)
16 16 5R 3R
36. Energy of an electron in an excited hydrogen
28. According to Bohr’s theory the moment of
atom is – 3.4 eV. Its angular momentum will be
momentum of an electron revolving in second
orbit of hydrogen atom will be
h 2h
 h  6.626 1034 J  s 
(1) 2h (2) h (3)  (4) 
(1) 1.111034 J sec (2) 1.511031 J sec
29. When an electron in hydrogen atom is excited,
from its 4th to 5th stationary orbit, the change in (3) 2.111034 J sec (4) 3.72 1034 J sec
angular momentum of electron is (Planck’s 37. The de-Broglie wavelength of an electron in the
constant: h  6 .6  10 34 J- s ) first Bohr orbit is
(1) 4. 16  10 34 J- s (2) 3. 32  10 34 J-s (1) Equal to one fourth the circumference of the
first orbit
(3) 1. 05  10 34 J-s (4) 2 .08  10 34 J-s
(2) Equal to half the circumference of the first
30. What will be the angular momentum of a
orbit
electron, if energy of this electron in H-atom is
(3) Equal to twice the circumference of the first
–1.5eV (in J-sec) orbit
(1) 1. 05  10 34 (2) 2 .1  10 34 (4) Equal to the circumference of the first orbit
(3) 3. 15  10 34 (4)  2 .1  10 34 38. The acceleration of the electron in the first orbit
31. When H2 atom, in an excited state, emits a of hydrogen atom is
photon of energy 12.1 eV, its orbital angular 42 m h2 h2 m2 h 2
momentum changes by (1) (2) (3) (4)
h3 42 mr 42 m 2 r 3 42 r 3
(1) 1.05  1034 (2) 2.11  1034 39. A neutron, a proton, an electron and an alpha
(3) 3.16  1034 (4) 4.22  1034 particle enter a region of constant magnetic field
with equal velocities. The magnetic field is along
32. The energy of an electron in an excited state of
the inward normal to the plane of the paper.
hydrogen atom is –3.4 eV. The angular
The tracks of the particles are labled in the figure.
momentum of the electron in this state is
The electron follows ____ track and alpha
(1) 0.211  1034 Js (2) 2.11  1034 Js
particle follows track ______
(3) 211  1034 Js (4) 21.1  1034 Js
33. Angular momentum of an electron in an orbit
of H atom is proportional to
1 1
(1) r (2) (3) r (4) (1) C,D (2) B, A (3) A,C (4) A,D
r r

628 II PUC
Atoms
40. The magnetic moment () of an electron 1 4 8 1
revolving around the nucleus varies with (1) (2) (3) (4)
4 1 1 8
principal quantum number n as 8. The energy state of the triply ionized beryllium
1 1 (Z = 4) that has the same radius as the ground
(1)   n (2)   (3)   n 2 (4)   2
n n state radius of the hydrogen atom is
TASK - II (1) n = 1 (2) n = 2 (3) n = 3 (4) n = 4
1. In an experiment on scattering of -particles, 9. The electron in a hydrogen atom makes a
the closest distance of approach and the impact transition from n = n1 to n = n2 state. The time
parameters are 17.32 fermi and 15 fermi period of the electron in the initial state (n1) is
respectively. The angle of scattering for the  eight times that of the final state (n 2 ). The
particles is possible values of n1and n2 are
(1) 0 (2) 30 (3) 60 (4) 90 (1) n1 = 8, n2 = 1 (2) n1 = 4, n2 = 2
2. An electron make a transition from orbit n = 4
(3) n1 = 2, n2 = 4 (4) n1 = 1, n2 = 8
to the orbit n = 2 of a hydrogen atom. What is
10. The ratio of the velocity of an electron in the
the wavelength of the emitted radiations?
first orbit of hydrogen atom and of that in the
(R = Rydberg’s constant)
first orbit of singly ionized He+ is
16 16 16 16 (1) 1 : 8 (2) 1 : 2 (3) 2 : 1 (4) 1 : 4
(1) (2) (3) (4)
4R 5R 2R 3R 11. In the Bohr’s model of hydrogen atom, the ratio
3. The wavelength of yellow line of sodium is 5896 of the kinetic energy to the total energy in the
Å. Its wave number will be nth quantum state is
10
(1) 50883 × 10 per second (1) 1 (2) +1 (3) 1/n (4) 1/n2
(2) 16961 per cm 12. An elementary particle of mass m and charge
(3) 17581 per cm (4) 50883 per cm +e is projected with velocity v at a much more
4. The angular speed of the electron in the nth orbit massive particle of charge Ze, where Z > 0.
of Bohr’s hydrogen atom is What is the closed possible approach of the
(1) Inversely proportional to n incident particle?

(2) Inversely proportional to n Ze 2 Ze 2 Ze 2 Ze 2

(1) (2) (3) (4) 
(3) Inversely proportional to n2 2 0 mv2 40 rn 80 rn 8 0 rn
(4) Inversely proportional to n 3 13. As the electron in Bohr orbit of Hydrogen atom
5. The radius of the first Bohr orbit in hydrogen passes from state n  2 to n  1 , the kinetic
atom is r. The radius of the first Bohr orbit in a energy K and potential energy U change as
singly ionized helium atom is (1) K two-fold, U four-fold
(1) 2r (2) 4r (3) r/2 (4) r/4 (2) K four-fold, U two-fold
6. The ratio of time taken by the electron to go (3) K four-fold, U also four-fold
once round the nucleus in orbits of radii r and (4) K two-fold, U also two-fold
4r of a hydrogen atom is 14. The ratio of the speed of the electron in the first
Bohr orbit of hydrogen and the speed of light is
(1) 1 : 4 (2) 1 : 8 (3) 4 : 1 (4) 8 : 1
equal to (where e, h and c have their usual
7. In an atom, two electrons move around the
meanings)
nucleus in circular orbits of radii R and 4R
respectively. The ratio of the periods of (1) 2hc/e2 (2) e 2 h/2c
revolution is (3) e 2c/2 h (4) 2e2 /hc
II PUC 629
 Objective Physics
15. Three energy levels 1, 2 and 3 of a certain atom 23. Electron in hydrogen atom first jumps from
possess energy values E1, E2, E3 such that E1 > third excited state to second excited state and
E2 > E3. If  1, 2 and 3 are the wavelengths then from second excited to the first excited
emitted corresponding to the transitions from state. The ratio of the w avelengths 1 : 2 emitted
1 to 2, 2 to 3 and 1 to 3 respectively then in the two cases is
1 2 7 27 27 20
(1) 3 = 1 + 2 (2)  3     (1)
5
(2)
20
(3)
5
(4)
7
1 2

24. Whenever a hydrogen atom emits a photon in

3

(3) 1   2  2 2 2
(4) 1   2   3 the Balmer series
2
(1)It need not emit any more photon
16. Ionization potential of hydrogen atom is 13.6
(2)It may emit another photon in the paschen series
V. Hydrogen atoms in the ground state are
(3)It may emit another photon in the lyman series
excited by monochromatic radiation of photon
(4)It may emit another photon in the Balmer series
energy 12.09 eV. According to Bohr’s theory,
25. Hydrogen ( 1 H 1 ), Deuterium ( 1 H 2 ), singly
the spectral lines emitted by hydrogen will be
ionized Helium ( 2 He 4 )+ and doubly ionized
(1) Two (2) Three (3) Four (4) One
lithium (3Li6)++ all have one electron around the
17. Energy E of a hydrogen atom with principal
nucleus. Consider an electron transition from
13.6 n = 2 to n = 1. If the wave lengths of emitted
quantum number n is given by E n   2 eV
n radiation are 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively then
The energy of a photon ejected when the approximately which one of the following is
electron jumps from n = 3 state to n = 2 state of correct
hydrogen, is approximately (1) 41 = 22 = 23 = 4(2) 1 = 22 = 23 = 4
(1) 1.5 eV (2) 0.85 eV (3) 1 = 2 = 43 = 94
(3) 3.4 eV (4) 1.9 eV
(4) 1 = 22 = 33 = 44
18. Energy required for the electron excitation in
26. According to Bohr’s theory of hydrogen atoms,
Li++ from the first to the third Bohr orbit is
the product of the binding energy of the electron
(1) 12.1 eV (2) 36.3 eV
in the nth orbit an its radius in the n the orbit
(3) 108.8 eV (4) 122.4 eV
(1) is proportional to n2
19. The ratio of minimum wavelengths of Lyman
(2) is inversely proportional to n3
and Balmer series will be
(3) has a constant value of 10.2e V-A0
(1) 5 (2) 10 (3) 1.25 (4) 0.25
(4) has constant value 7.2 eV-A0
20. Minimum energy required to take out the only
27. Magnetic moment due to the motion of the
one electron from ground state of He+ is
electron in nth energy state of hydrogen atom
(1) 13.6 eV (2) 54.4 eV
(3) 27.2 eV (4) 6.8 eV is proportional to
21. The ionization energy of Li++ is equal to (1) n (2) n0 (3) n5 (4) n3
(1) 9 hcR (2) 6 hcR 28. Magnetic field at the centre (at nucleus) of the
(3) 2 hcR (4) hcR hydrogen like atoms (atomic number =Z) due
22. The wavelength of the first line of Lyman series to the motion of electron in n th orbit is
of hydrogen atom is equal to that of the second proportional to
line of Balmer series for a hydrogen like ion. n2 n4 Z2 Z3
The atomic number Z of hydrogen like ion is (1) (2) (3) (4)
Z5 Z n3 n5
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 1 (4) 2
630 II PUC
Atoms
29. The photon radiated from hydrogen excited state can make a transition to second
nd
corresponding to 2 line of Lyman series is excited state by emitting a photon of energy
nd
absorbed by a hydrogen like atom ‘X’ in 2 10.20 eV. The value of n and z are given
excited state. As a result then , the hydrogen (Ionization energy of hydrogen atom is 13.6eV)
th
like atom ‘X’ makes a transition of n orbit. (1) n = 6 and z =3 (2) n = 3 and z = 6
+ ++
(1) X=He , n=4 (2) X=Li , n=6 (3) n = 8 and z = 4 (4) n = 4 and z = 8
+ ++
(3) X=He , n=6 (4) X=Li , n=9 35. Let  1be the frequency of the series limit of the
30. Consider a hydrogen-like atom whose energy Lyman series and  2 be the frequency of the
2
13.6 Z first line of the Lyman series and  3 be the
in nth excited state is given by E n 
n2 frequency of the series limit of Balmar series,
When this excited atom makes a transition from then
excited state to ground state, most energetic (1)  1 -  2=  3 (2)  2 -  1=  3
photons have energy Emax= 52.224 eV and least (3) 2  3=  1+  2 (4)  1 +  2=  3
energetic photons have energy Emin= 1.224eV. 36. The electric potential between a proton and an
Find the atomic number of atom and the state
of excitation. r
electron is given by V  V0 l n ,where r0 is a
(1) Z=2; n=5 (2) Z=2, n=4 r0
(3) Z=3, n=6 (4) Z=4, n =6 constant. Assuming Bohr’s model to be
31. Monochromatic radiation of wavelength  is applicable, write variation of rn with n, n being
incident on a hydrogen sample in ground
the principal quantum number
state.Hydrogen atoms absorb a fraction of light
(1) rn  n (2) rn  1/ n
and subsequently emit radiation of six different
wavelengths. Find the value of  . (3) rn  n 2 (4) rn  1/ n 2
(1) 80 nm (2) 97.5 nm
37. The binding energy of an electron in the ground
(3) 105 nm (4) 60 nm
state of He-atom is E0  24.7eV . The energy
32. A hydrogen atom emits a photon corresponding
required to remove both the electrons from the
to an electron transition from n=5 to n=1. The
atom is
recoil speed of hydrogen atom in nearly equal to (1) 24.6 eV (2) 79.0 eV
(1) 10-4 m/s (2) 2x10-2 m/s (3) 54.4 eV (4) none of these
(3) 4 m/s (4) 8x10-2 m/s 38. In hydrogen atom, the radius of nth Bohr orbit
33. In a Bohr atom the electron is replaced by a
particle of mass 150 times the mass of the  rn 
is Vn . The graph between log   and log n
electron and the same charge. If a0 is the radius  r1 
of the first Bohr orbit of the orbital atom, then will be
that of the new atom will be log
r n
r 
log   n
 
 r1   r1 
a0 a0
(1) 150 a0 (2) 150 a0 (3) (4) (1) (2)
150 150
34. A hydrogen like atom (atomic number Z) is in a log n log n

higher excited state of quantam number ‘n’. r 

r 
log  n 
log  n   r1 
This excited atom can make a transition to the  r1 

first excited state by emitting a photon of energy (3) (4)

27.2eV. Alternatively the atom from the same log n
logn

II PUC 631
 Objective Physics
39. An electron in the ground state of hydrogen  1 
4

atom is revolving in anticlockwise direction in N

 
sin 4
  0  / 2    2   1  16  4
the cicular orbit of radius R. The atom is placed N sin 4  60 / 2   1  4 4
in a uniform magnetic induction B such that  
2
the plane normal of electron orbit makes an N
angle 30o with B, as shown in figure. The  N 
4
torque experienced by electron will be
1 2
2. (1) Then V  R   n  n
n
1 1
P.E   and K.E. 
r r
As r increases K.E decreases but P.E increases
3. (4) According to Bohr’s theory the wavelength
of radiation emitted from hydrogen atom is
ehB eh eB hB
(1) (2) (3) (4) 1 1 1
8m 8Bm 8mh 8em
given by   R  n 2  n 2 
40. The ratio between total accelertion of the  1 2

electron in singly ionized helium atom and Then minimum for minimum value of n1 and n2.
hydrogen atom (both in ground state) is Hence n = 2 to n = 1
(1) 1 (2) 8 (3) 4 (4) 16 4. (2) Maximum number of spectral lines are
KEY observed in Lyman series
TASK - I r(n 2) 4
2
5. (2) r  n  r  ; r(n 3)  9 R  2.25 R
1 2 2 1 3 4 4 2 5 2 (n 3) 9 4
6 1 7 3 8 1 9 1 10 1 6. (1) According to Bohr theory,
11 1 12 4 13 4 14 3 15 3 h nh
16 4 17 1 18 1 19 3 20 3 mvr  n v
2 2mr
21 4 22 3 23 2 24 1 25 2
mv 2 k m  n 2h 2  k
26 3 27 4 28 3 29 3 30 3 and r    
r r  4 2 m 2 r 2  r
31 2 32 2 33 3 34 1 35 3
36 3 37 4 38 3 39 3 40 1 1 2 1  n2h2 
 rn  n ; K.E.  T  mv  m 
TASK - II 2 2  4 2 m 2 r 2 
1 3 2 4 3 2 4 4 5 3 n2
6 2 7 4 8 2 9 2 10 2 Tn 
r2
11 1 12 1 13 3 14 4 15 2 But as r  n therefore T  n
16 2 17 4 18 3 19 4 20 2 7. (3) As T  n 3 , we get
21 1 22 4 23 4 24 3 25 3
T1 64
26 4 27 1 28 4 29 30 1 
T2 8 for n1 = 4 and n2 = 2
31 2 32 3 33 4 34 1 35 1
n  n  1
36 1 37 2 38 1 39 1 40 2 8. (1) Number of transition is given by
2
HINTS & SOLUTION
TASK - I n  n  1
i.e., 6  i.e., n = 4
1 2
N
1. (2) 
sin 4  
632 2 II PUC
Atoms
 n  1 n 17. (1) The frequencies of the emitted photon in the
also 3  i.e., n = 3
2 Paschen series are given by
1 v n 3 v 3
as v  ,   i.e.,  1 1 
n v n 4 v 4 V  RC  2  2 
9. (1) 3 n 
1 Ze 2 1 Ze2 E p Where n = 4, 5, 6,………….
10. (1) E P   . and E k  ;  2
The highest frequency corresponds to n = 
40 r 80 r Ek
RC 1.097  107  3  108
 vhighest  
9 9
= 0.37  19 S = 3.7  1014S1 (or) 3.7  1014 Hz
5 1

18. (1) For a Bracket Series

11. (1)  1 1  9 1 1 
v  R 2  2  R  R  2 
 4 n  400  16 n 
9  1 1 
  2 
400  16 n 
13.6
12. (4) E3    1.51 eV ;
9 1 1 9 16 2 400 20
2
   ; n  n 5
13.6 n 16 400 400 16 4
E4    0.85 eV E4  E3  0.66 eV
16 1  1 1  3R
19. (3)  R 2  2 
13.6 13.6  2 4  16
13. (4) E n   2
  3.4 eV
n 4 16 16
  105 cm
14. (3) Final energy of electron = –13.6 + 12.1 = 1.51 3R 3
eV w hich corresponds to 3rd level. i.e., n = 3
c 3 1010 9
Hence number of spectral lines emitted n    1015 Hz
 16
Frequency 105 16
n  n  1 3  3  1 3
  3
2 2 20. (3) The wavelength of spectral line in Balmer
hc 1 1 1
15. (3)  12.4 e series is given by R 2  2
  2 n 
hc 6.625 1034  3 108 For first line of Balmer series, n = 3
i.e.,   
e 12.4 12.4 1.6 10 19 1  1 1  5R
 R 2  2
= 1  107 = 100  109= 100 nm 1  2 3  36
1 1 For second line n = 4
16. (4) v  Rc  n 2  n 2  we get
 1 2 1  1 1  3R
 R 2  2 
2  2 4  16
1 1  1 1  3
v1  Rc     RC ; v 2  RC     RC
1   1 4  4  2 20 20
   2   6561  4860 Å
1 27 27
1 1  1
v3  RC     RC
4  4  1 1
21. (4)   R  n 2  n 2  Where n1 = 2, n2 = 
RC  1 2
Clearly v1  v 2   v 3 ; v1 – v2 = v 3
4

II PUC 633
 Objective Physics
1 R c RC 13 .6
  ; f  30. (3) Energy of electron in H atom En  2 eV
n
 4  4
22. (3) From n = 2 electron jumps gives a photon 13 .6 13 .6
 1 . 5   n2  3
n2 1 .5
23. (2) Since Ha is the first member of Balmer series
Now angular momentum
 n1 = 2 and n2 =3
h 3  6.6  1034
 L  n   3.15 1034 J  sec
1 1  3 2 2  3.14
24. (1)   R  1  2 

 R
1   2  4 31. (2) Here, 12.1 eV is the difference in the 3rd orbit

  1 1 5 and 1st orbit energies

 R 2  2   R
2  2 3  36 1 6.6  1034
1 5 L   3h  h    2.111034
Divide the above two equations,   27 2 3.1
2

1 1 1 2 13.6
32. (2) n   4 i.e., n = 2
25. (2)   R  n 2  n 2  3.4
 1 2 

For 1st member of Lyman series nh 2  6.625 1034

mvr   = 2.11  1034 Js1
2 2  3.142
n1  1, n 2  2 1
nh
1  1 3 1 3 33. (3) mvr  and r  n 2
 R 1  2   R  ;  R 2
1  2  4 1 4
 Angular momentum  mvr  r
For 1st member of Paschan series
34. (1)Magnetic dipole moment of the electron in
 1 1 
n1 = 3, n2 = 4. 2;  R 2  2  eh
2 3 4  the 1st orbit is M  …(i)
4m
1 7R 1 7 4 7 Angular momentum of the electron in the 1st
i.e.,  ;   
 2 144  2 144 3 108
h
orbit is L  …(ii)
or 1 :  2  7 :108 2
26. (3) Balmer series is related with n = 2, so n = 4 M eh 2 e
Divide (i) by (ii)   
to n = 2 there will be two spectral lines L 4m h 2m
nh
1 1 1 35. (3) Angular momentum  ; Thus, for an
2
27. (4) Using   R  n 2  n 2  2h h
 1 2
electron in the 2nd orbit, L  
2 
1  1 1  3R 16
R 2  2  or   R For an electron in the 3rd orbit,
  2 4  16 3
3h 3
L  ; L  L
 h  2 2
28. (3) Angular momentum L  n  
 2  36. (3) The electron is in the second orbit (n = 2)
h h Hence
For this case, n = 2, L  2 

2 
nh 2h 6.6 1034
29. (3) Change in the angular momentum L    2.11 1034 J-sec
2 2 
n 2 h n1 h h
L  L 2  L1    L  (n 2  n1 ) nh nh h nh
2 2 2 37. (4) mvrn   prn    rn 
2 2  2
6 . 6  10 34
 (5  4 )  1 . 05  10 34 J - S
2  3 . 14
634 II PUC
Atoms
2rn v 1
 , for first orbit n  1 so   2r1 4. (4)   . Further, v  and r  n 2 ;
n r n
= circumference of first orbit
 1 
2
   3 
v n 
38. (3) Centripetal acceleration, a  . According
r
5. (3) The expression for radius of the orbit in the
nh
to Bohr atom model, v  n 2 h 2 0
2mr nth state rn 
mZe 2
2

a 
 nh / 2mr  . For first-orbit, n = 1
r n2 r  n 2  Z  1 r r
rn  ,  He   He  2H    rHe  H 
Z rH  ZHe   n H  2 2 2
h2
a
4 2 m 2 r 3 6. (2) T  n 3 and r  n 2  n  r
39. (3)
n1 r r 1
40. (1) Magnetic moment    IA ;  1  
n2 r2 4r 2
e e ev
I   3 3
T  r  2r T1  n1   1  1
      
 v  T2  n 2   2  8
evA 1 A 1 7. (4) We have for an orbital electron T 2  R 3 .
  v  ,  r1  r  n 2 ;      n 2 
2r n r n
T12 R3 1 T 1
TASK - II  2
 3
or 1 
T2  4R  64 T12 8
1. (3) The impact parameter (2) and the distance
of closest approach (r 0 ) are related as n2 n 2H n 2Be n 2Be ZBe 4
8. (2) r  ; rH  rBe   ;  
r0  Z Z H ZBe n H2 ZH 1
b cos  
2 2  n Be  2

   2b  r 17.32  fm  9. (2) In hydrogen atom, T  n3

cot    ; tan    0   0.5773
 2  r0  2  2b 2 15  fm  3 3
T1  n1  8 n 
    or   1 
 T2  n 2  1  n2 
 tan 1  0.5773  30   60
2
2. (4) Here n1 = 2, n2 = 4 n1 2
or n  1 or n1 = 2n2
2
1 1 1
Wave number, v    R  n 2  n 2   The correction option is (2) in which n1 = 4
 1 2
and n2 = 2
 1 1  3R 16
R      10. (2) The orbital velocity of an electron is given
 4 16  16 3R
3. (2) Wave number Ze 2 v1 H  1e 2 / 2 1 h 0  1
v ;   2 
by 2nh 0 v1 He  2e / 2 1 h0  2
1 1  
   16961 per cm
 5896  108
11. (1) Total energy En = EP + Ek

II PUC 635
 Objective Physics
En
But Ep = 2 Ek  En = 2 (Ek) + Ek = Ek  E  1
k

12. (1) At the distance of closed approach, Initial

K.E of the particle
= P.E of the particle and the massive nucleus

hc Energy of incident radiation = 12.09 eV

E 
  Energy gained by the electron
= P.E of the particle and the massive nucleus = –12.09 – (13.6) = 1.51 eV

1 1 Ze  e Ze 2 13.6 13.6
mv 2  . or r0  En   2
   1.51 eV  n 2  9
2 40 r0 20 mv2 n 1.51
n = 3  3 spectra lines are emitted
13.6
13. (3) U  2E, K  E and E   2  eV . 13.6
n 17. (4) E 2    3.4 eV
22
14. (4) Speed of electron in nth orbit (in CGS)
13.6
2Ze 2 E3    1.5 eV
vn  (k = 1) 32
nh
E = E3  E2
For first orbit H1 ; n = 1 and Z = 1
= –1.5 + 3.4 = 1.9 eV
2 2
2e v 2e 2 2
So v    13.6  3 13.6  3
h c hc 18. (3) E1   2
E3   2
1  3
hc
15. (2) E 
 2  1  13.6  9  8
E  E 3  E1  13.6  3 1   
From the energy level diagram  9 9
 E  108.8 eV
19. (4)

E1  E3 = (E1  E2) + (E2  E3)

hc hc hc 1  1 Minimum wavelength is for highest energy

  ;  
 3 1  2  3 1  2 n = 1  n = , energy = E0
1 2 n = 2  n = , energy = E0/4
 3 
 1  2   Balmer line has 4 times the wavelength

16. (2) Ionisation potential = 13.6 V  Ratio of minimum wavelength is 1/4 = 0.25

 Ionization energy = 13.6 eV 20. (2) Ionization energy, E = 13.6 Z2 eV

For He+, Z = 2

636 II PUC
Atoms
 E = 13.6  (2)2 = 13.6  4 = 54.4 eV  1 1 1
++
  
21. (1) Ionisation energy of Li = 9 hcR 1 4 3 9 4  2
Ionization energy = RchZ2 = Rch(3)2 (as Z = 3 26. (4) En 
1 2
2 and rn  n
for Li++) = 9 hcR n
 En rn is independent of n ;
22. (4) The first line of Lyman series of hydrogen
1 1 1 
R 2  2
0
Hence, E1r1  13.6eV  0.53 A  
atom,
L 1 2  0
 7.2eV  A = constant
The second line of Balmer series of hydrogen
1 Magnetic Moment e
2  1 1 
like ion   RZ  22  42  27. (1)
B   Angular Momentum 2 m
 Magnetic Moment  angular momentum
 3
 L   B  R  RZ2  Z2  4 or Z  2
4 10  nh 
M n  L  2 
 
0 I n In  fn 
28. (4) Bn  or Bn  
2rn rn rn
23. (4)
v / r  vn  Z / n Z3
Bn  n n   2
 5
rn  rn 
2
n 2
/Z n

hc  1 1 
E1   13.6  2   29. (4)Energy of nth state in hydrogen is same as
2 ....(i)
1   3  4   energy of 3nth state in Li++.
 3 1 transition in H would give same energy
hc  1 1  as the 9  3 transition in Li++.
E2   13.6  2  2  ....(ii)
2   2   3  30. (1)Maximum energy is liberated for transition
Dividing eqn (ii) by eqn (i) E n  1 and minimum energy for
En  En 1 Hence.
1 1
  1 1 
1 20
 4 9  E  13.6Z   2  2 
2 1  1 7  n1 n2 
9 16
 1 
24. (3) since in spiral series of an hydrogen Emax  13.6 Z 2  1  2  -----(1) &
 n 
atom.lymen series lies lower Balmer series
 1 1
1 2 1 1 Emin  13.6Z 2   
25. (3)  Rz  2  2    n  1 2 n 2  ---(2)
 1 2   
1 2 1 2
1
 R 1  3 / 4  ,  R 1  3 / 4  1
1 2 Emax n2

Emin 1 1 ---- (3)
1 2 1 3 
 R  2   3 / 4  ,  R  3  3 / 4   n  1
2
n2
3 4

II PUC 637
 Objective Physics
Emax 52.224 nh
  42.67  mK rn   rn  n
Emin 1.224 2π
Check with given ‘n’ values  n  5 ; Z = 2 37. (2)The total energy required to make the electron
31. (2) The atom is excited to n = 4 state free from nucleus is the sum of the energy
hc required to separate the electrons from the
 E4  E1  12.75 eV    97.5nm influence of each other and the energy required

to separate the electrons from the influence of
h 1  1 nucleus, i.e., Total required energy = BE of
32. (3) v  ;  R 1  ;
m   25  electron in He atom + ionization energy of He
atom
h h  1 
v  R 1  
m m  25    24.6  13.6  22  eV
6.6 1034 1.09 107  24    2 4 .6  5 4 .4  e V  7 9 e V
    4m / s
1.6 1027  25 
38. (1) rn  n 2
1 r m r
rn  2  1  r2  0 39. (1)   M  Band M  iA Where
33. (4) m r1 m2 150
ev
1 1  2 i  A  r2
34. (1)  E1  27.2  (13.6)   2  z 2r
4 n 
1 1  M
ev
 r 2 
 m vr  e   nh  e
 E2  10.2  (13.6)   2  z 2 2r 2m 2 2m 
9 n 
By solving we get n = 6 & z = 3 eh 2hB
M  and   MBsin 30o 
35. (1)Series limit for Lyman series 4m 8 m
2
 n1  2 & n2   v2  a   z 
40. (2) a 
1/ z  or  a  z
3
Series limit for Balmar series  n1  2 & n2   r
for 1st line of lyman series  n1  1, n2  2 3
a 2
 1   8
v1 v
a2  1 
3
n2
v2
n 1 ***
E1  E2  E3 ; hv1  hv2  hv2  v3  v1  v2

r
36. (1) U  eV  eV0 ln   ;
r 0 

 dU eV r K
F F  0 0 F 
dr r r

mv 2 K nh
 but mvr  ;
rn rn  mv  mK n
2π
638 II PUC
Nucei

CHAPTER Nuclei
Composition and size of nucleus, atomic masses, isotopes, isobars;

13
isotones. Radioactivity- alpha, beta and gamma particles/ rays and their
properties decay law. Mass-energy relation, mass defect; binding energy per
nucleon and its variation with mass number, nuclear fission and fusion.

PAST NEET PAPERS SUBTOPIC LEVEL ANALYSIS

NEET 2016 NEET 2016 Forecasting of
Year NEET 2018 NEET 2017
PHASE-I PHASE-II NEET-2019

No of
question 1 1 1 1 1
Asked

closest distance of mean life & half

Subtopic decay law decay law approach of nucleus
half life
life

 Nucleus was discovered by Rutherford. It is the core of an atom. It is made of protons and
neutrons.
mn  1.6749286  10 27 kg ; MP = 1.6726231 × 10–27 KG
Mass is also written in form of energy E = mc2
1 a.m.u. = 1.6605402 × 10–27 kg = 931.5 MeV/c2
A A  mass number Z  atomic number
Nucleus is represented by Z X (Protons  Neutron) (Protons)
 Isotopes: same number of protons but different number of neutrons. 92 U 235 , 92U 238
 Isobars : Same mass number but different atomic number. 82 Pb 214 , 83 Bi 214
 Isotones : Same number of neutrons but different atomic number.
 Isomers:For nuclei Z, A, N are same but radio active properties are different.
 Some Important Points :
 Positive charge is densely concentrated at the center of atom forming its nucleus.
 Nucleus contains most of the mass of an atom although its is very small. (Rnucleus  10–4 Ratom).
 Atom is mostly empty space, electrons are confined only to a limited part of this empty space.
 Nuclear mass = (Atomic number) (mass of proton) + (Neutron number) (mass of neutron)
M = ZmP + Nmn
 The net charge of the nucleus is q = +Ze
 The average radius of a nucleus is given by R = R0A1/3 where R0 = 1.2 × 10–15 m = 1.2 fm,
A = atomic mass number If R1 and R2 are the radii of the nuclei of mass numbers
1 1
R1 R0 A1  A1  3
3
A1 and A2 respectively, then    
R2 R A 3  A2 
1
0 2
 The density of a nucleus is of the order of 1017 kg/m3. This value is same for the nuclei of all atoms
i.e. the density of a nucleus does not depend on mass number.

II PUC 639
 Objective Physics
NUCLEAR FORCE
 To bind nucleons together, there must be a strong attractive force of different kind. It must be
strong enough to overcome the repulsion between nuclear protons. Initially, the nuclear force
was thought as a fundamental force. But the actual picture is that it is a spill-over effect of the
“strong force” that binds quarks together to form neutrons and protons.
 Some Important Points :
 These are short range forces. They become negligible for distance more than 10 fm. This is called
Nuclear Range.
 They are much stronger than electromagnetic forces (50 - 60 times stronger) at reparation less than
1 fm. They are independent of charge.
 The nuclear force is same between a Proton – Proton and Neutron – Neutron or Neutron –
Proton.
 This is not a central force.
 It depends on the spin. Same spin means greater force.
 Nuclear forces are derived from quark-quark interaction.
 Protons, neutrons and mesons can experience strong nuclear force.
 Electrons, neutrino, antinutrino do not experience strong nuclear force.
 Neutrino, antineutrino can experience weak nuclear force.
Principle of equivalence
 (i) The energy equivalent of mass m is given by E = mc2
 (ii) The mass equivalent of energy E is given by m = E/c2
 
1eV  1.602 10 19 C 1volt   1.602 10 19 J . 1amu  1.66  10 27 Kg & 1amu  931.5 MeV
 Mass defect : The difference between the sum of the mass of nucleons forming the nucleus and its
rest mass. ie., m  Z m p   A  Z  mn  M N
BINDING ENERGY
 The amount of energy needed to separate the constituent nucleons to large distances is called
binding energy.
 If the nucleons are initially well separated and are brought to form the nucleus, this much energy
is released.
BE  ( Zm p   A  Z  mn  M N ) c 2 (where M = mass of nucleus and N = A – Z : No of neutrons)
 If mass defect is in kg, then BE  ( m  c2 ) / 1.6  10 19 eV
 If mass defect is in amu, then BE  m  931 MeV
Binding energy
Binding energy per nucleon (specific binding energy) 
Atomic mass number
Binding Energy Curve
 B.E./nucleon is very low for light nuclei. This means
energy will be released if two nuclei combine to form
a single middle mass nucleus. The release of energy
in a fusion process is based on this fact.
Likewise, the low B.E. for heavy nuclei
indicates that if a single heavy nucleus breaks
up into middle mass nuclei, energy will be
released. Release of energy is fission process is
based on this fact.

640 II PUC
Nucei
 MeV 
 Ebn is maximum   8.8  for the nucleus of (Fe) [A = 56] & Ebn is small for A < 30 and A > 170.
 nucleon 
 For 30 < A < 170 Ebn is almost constant. These nuclei are the most stable. It is due to the
saturation property of the nuclear forces.
 When heavy nucleus (A > 170 ) gets divided in two lighter nuclei, energy released, this
process is called nuclear fission.
 Two lighter nuclei (A < 10) are fused to form a heavier nucleus and energy is produced, this
process is called nuclear fusion.
 The energy to be supplied to separate a nucleon from a nucleus is called separation energy.
m MeV
 Mass defect per nucleon is called packing fraction (f). f   Ebn  fc 2 or f  931.48 .
A necleon
Properties of neutron
 Neutrons was discovered by Chadwick.
(a) Electrical or magnetic field do not have any effect on their path. Hence they are called neutral
particles.
(b) Penetrating power is more and ionising power is less.
(d) They are stable in nucleus and unstable out of the nucleus.
(e) The half-life period is 12 minutes.

(f) The disintegrate according to the reaction 0 n1 11 H   e n 0  
 Neutrons are the best projectiles used for bombardment.
Nuclear Reactions.
 The general expression for the nuclear reaction is as follows.
X  a  C  Y  b  Q
(Parent nucleus) ( Incident particle) (Compound nucleus) (Compound nucleus) (Product particles ) (Energy)

Here X and a are known as reactants and Y and b are known as products. This reaction is known as
(a, b) reaction and can be represented as X(a, b) Y
 Q value or energy of nuclear reaction
The energy absorbed or released during nuclear reaction is known as Q-value of nuclear reaction.
Q-value=(Mass of reactants – mass of products)c2 in J = (Mass of reactants– mass of products) amu
If Q < 0, The nuclear reaction is known as endothermic. (The energy is absorbed in the reaction)
If Q > 0, The nuclear reaction is known as exothermic (The energy is released in the reaction)
conservation in nuclear reactions:mass number, charge number, momentum, energy & spin.
NUCLEAR FISSION
 The process in which a heavy nucleus splits into two lighter nuclei of comparable masses releas ing
two or three neutrons and a large amount of en ergy is known as nuclear fission.
92 U
235
is 92 U 235  0 n 1  56 Ba 141  36 Kr 92  30 n 1  200MeV
 Average energy released per each fission of U 235 is 200 MeV.
 Average energy released per each nucleon of U 235 is 0,83 MeV.
 Nuclear chain reaction
A nuclear chain reaction is a self propagating process in which the number of neutrons produced
in fission goes on increasing rapidly almost in geo metrical progression unit the entire fissile mate-
rial disintegrates. Nuclear chain reaction can be controlled or uncontrolled.
 In a controlled chain reaction, the rate of reaction is kept under check by constantly removing a

II PUC 641
 Objective Physics
certain number of neutrons by absorption. This is the principle of a nuclear reactor.
 In a uncontrolled chain reaction, the rate of reaction is not controlled. Millions of atoms break up
in a millionth of a second, releasing vast amount of destructive energy. This is the principle of a
nuclear bomb.
 Reproduction factor :The ratio of rate of production of neutrons to the rate of loss of neutrons
rate of production of neutrons
K 
rate of loss of neutrons
(i) If K = 1 ; rate of production of neutrons= rate of loss of neutrons. Then the fission process is said to
be critical and the chain reaction is said to be under control. This is the principle behind nuclear
reactor
(ii) If K > 1 ; rate of production of neutrons is greater then rate of loss of neutrons. Then the fission
process is said to be supercritical and the chain reaction is said to be uncontrolled. This is the prin-
ciple behind atomic bomb
(iii) If K < 1 ; rate of production of neutrons is less than rate of loss of neutrons. Then the fission
process is said to be sub critical and the chain reaction gradually comes to an end
NUCLEAR REACTOR: A device in which a nucleus fission chain reaction is sustained & controlled in
order to produce nuclear energy, radioisotopes or new nuclides.
Requirements for a nuclear reactor :
 Fissionable fuel : Natural uranium contains 0.7% of radioactive isotope (235U92) and remaining
238
99.3% of 92 U . Thus uranium is enriched to increase percentage of radioactive isotope to about 3%.
 Neutron leakage : Fraction of neutrons lost due to leakage is controlled by using large reactor core.
 The neutron energy : Fission is induced by slow moving neutrons (also called thermal neutrons).
So, they are slowed down by using moderator. Heavy water is used for this purpose. Graphite is
best moderator.
 Control rods – A series of rods made up of cadmium or Boron are used to regulate the availability
of neutrons available for fission, so that the pace of the fission reaction can be controlled.
 Coolant – A fluid is circulated through the core and the moderator, which extracts energy
generated within the reactor and prevents the increase in temperature.
NUCLEAR FUSION
cold coolant
When two light nuclei fuse or combine to
form a heavy nucleus then the reaction is
called nuclear fusion reaction. To bring
the light nuclei within the separation of
about a femtometre so that they can fuse
together . 1H2 + 1H
2
 2He4 +
24Mev.
One needs a very high temperature (about hot coolant
few million degree celsius) to carry out
nuclear fusion. Fusion is the main source of energy in the sun.
 Some important facts about nuclear reactions
 (Net mass of reactants) > (Net mass of the products)
 (Total Binding energy of the reactants) < (Total Binding energy of the products)
 (specific binding energy of reactants) < (specific binding energy of products)
 (Total number of nucleons before the reaction) = (Total number of nucleons after the reaction)

642 II PUC
Nucei
 (Energy per fission) > (energy per fusion)
 (Energy per unit mass in fission process) < (Energy per unit mass in fusion process)
nE
 The power output of a nuclear reactor is given by P  .
t
where n is number of fissions taking place in time t & E is energy released per fission
NEx
 The power output of the nuclear reactor in terms of mass number is given by P  where x
At
is mass of a nuclear fuel, A is mass number undergo fission in a time of ‘t’ sec, & E isenergy released
perfission & N is the Avogadro number.
RADIOACTIVITY: It is the property by virtue of which a heavy element disintegrates itself without
being forced by any external agent to do so. Discovered by Henry Bacquerel in 1896.
Radioactivity is not affected by temperature, pressure or chemical combination. There is
absolutely no way to predict whether any given nucleus in the sample will decay during the next
second. All have an equal chance. It obeys the law of probability. The nuclei of unstable atoms
decay spontaneously and  -particles,  -particles and  -rays are emitted by them.
 Soddy’s group displacement laws
A radioactive element emits an α or β -particle at any time, never both at the same time during
this process both the energy & charge is conserved. This was first observed in 1913 by Soddy &
Fajan. Soddy formulated the following two laws.
The general equation which represents  - &  -decay is as follows :

z X A α 
decay
 z- 2 Y A-4  2 He4 Eg: 92 U238 α
 decay
 90Th234  2He4

z X A   
 decay z 1 YA  -1e0 Eg: 90 Th234    91Pa234  -1e0
 decay

-decay Z  
X 4 Z  1 Y 4  e    ;
32 32 64 64
(a) – decay 15 P  16 S  e   (b) + decay 29
Cu  28 Ni  e  

Actually in – decay, n  p + e– +  (Antineutrino) & in + decay p  n + e+ +  (neutrino).

(The above decay shows that neutrons and protons are not fundamental particles)
Antineutrino and neutrino cannot be detected easily. Its concept was introduced to conserve
angular momentum.
   rays : They are electromagnetic waves.
 Photon of   rays emitted during the transition of nucleus from higher energy state to lower
hc
energy state, wavelength   .
E
 When nucleus emits  and  particles it is in a excited state, according to need, by emitting
photon of   ray comes to a stable state.
 All these raido active radiations affect the photographic plate, produce fluorescence.
 Law of Radioactive Disintegration: “At any instant the rate of decay
of radioactive atoms is proportional to the number of atoms present
at that instant”
N t
dN dN dN t  0  N  N 0 
  N    dt ;     dt ttN N 
dt dt N0
N 0  
N t
  ln N N   t 0 ;  ln N  ln N 0  t
0

II PUC 643
 Objective Physics
N  N
 ln     t   e   t  N  N 0 e  t
 N0  N0

Similarly, M  M 0e  t where M0 = Initial mass, M = mass after disintegration.

 Activity of a radioactive element
 The rate of decay of a radioactive substance is called the activity (A) of the substance.
 The SI unit of radioactivity is Becquerel (abbreviated as Bq). ie.,One Becquerel is disintegration per
second.
 The other commonly used units are 1 Ci  3.7  1010 Bq , 1 Rd  106 Bq ,
1 mCi = 3.7 10 7 disin tegration / sec ond &1  Ci = 3.7 10 4 disin tegration / sec ond
dN 0.693NA m
(i) A  N (ii) Ao  No (iii) A  A 0et (iv) A 
dt AT

where Ao = maximum initial activity;A = activity after time t,  = decay constant, NA = Avogadro
number, m = mass of material, A = atomic weight of material, T = half life of material.
 Half life :
 The time interval in which the number of nuclei of radioactive element becomes half of its value at
 
the beginning, is called half life of that element   1  .
 2 
N0 N0   1   1  1
N  N 0 e  t , t   1 and N   N0e 2 1
 2 e 2
2e 2

2 2 ; 2
ln 2 0.693
 ln 2   1   1  
2 2  
 Half life of different radio active elements are from 10-7 s to 1010 Yr.
0 1
N 1 t  1 N0 N  1
 t0 time N  N0    time N   
N0  2  2 2 N0  2 
2 3
t  2 1 N0 N 1 t  3 1 time N  N 0  N   1 
time N      
2 4 N0  2  2 8 N0  2 

n t given time
t  n 1 N  1 n 
time 
    . Where 1 Half life
2 N0  2  2

Time undecayed part Decayed part

t= 0 100 % 0%
t  1 50 % 50 %
2
t  2 1 25 % 75 %
2

t  3 1 12.5 % 87.5 %
2

t  4 1 6.25 % 93.75 %
2

644 II PUC
Nucei
 Mean life :
 Mean life of a radioactive substance is defined as the ratio of the total life time of all individual par
ent atoms to the total number of such atoms present in a sample.
Mean life is the reciprocal of decay constant
Sum of the lives of all the atoms 1
  
Total number of atoms 
1 t1/2
a)   b)   c)   1.44  t1/ 2
 0.693 N
ln
N N0 Slope = – 
ln
 From N  N 0 e  t  N0
  slope of the line shown in the graph
t
t
N
i.e. the magnitude of inverse of slope of ln N vs t curve is known as mean life (t).
0

 Mean life is about 44% more than that of half life. Which gives us t > T(1/2)
 Half life and mean life of a substance doesn’t change with time or with pressure, temperature etc.
 Application : Let R1 be activity of radioactive substance at t = T1 and R2 be the activity at t = T2,
then R1 = N1 and R2 = N2
R1  R 2 ( R1  R 2 )T
Number of nuclei disintegrated in (T2 – T1) is N1  N 2  
 ln 2
where T is the half life of radioactive substance.
 After one mean/average life N = 37% of N0 (0.37 N0)
 In two mean/average life N = 0.135 N0.
 log N = log N0 – t & log R = log R0 – t
log N
N or R
log N0
N0 or R0 –lt
N = N0e Slope = –
–lt
R = R0e t
N0/2 or R0/2
0.37 N0
t
T1/2 Tav

 Application
 A radio active material is produced at a constant rate P. If  is the disintegration constant of the
radioactive material, then
Number of Nuclei of radioactive material at t = 0 ; N (t = 0) = 0
P P
Number of Nuclei of radioactive material at t = N (t = ) = 

This is also the maximum number of nuclei that can be formed. N(t)
 For the emission of  &  , Total decay constant  t      

1 1 1 1 1 1 t
    
 t      Similarly,  1 t   1    1   
2 2 2

II PUC 645
 EXAMINATION CORNER

1. For a radiactive material, half-life is 10 minutes. A: (1)At the distance of lowest approach, total K.E.
If initially there are 600 number of nuclei, the of  -particle changes to P.E. so
time taken (in minutes) for the disintegration of
1 KQ.q K  ze  2 e 
450 nuclei is (NEET-2018) mv 2  
2 r r
(1) 30 (2) 10 (3) 20 (4) 15
A: (3)Number of nuclei remaining 4K ze 2 1 1
r 2
r ; r
= 600 – 450 = 150 mv m m
t t
5. After the emission of one  -particle followed
n 2
N  1  150  1  t1/2  1   1  t1/2 by two  -particles from 238
 ;  ;     92 U , the number of
N 0  2  600  2  2 2 neutrons in the newly formed nucleus is
(1) 140 (2) 142 (3) 144 (4) 146
t  2t1/2  2  10 = 20 minute
238 234 4 0
A: (2) 92 U 92 X  2 He  21 e ;
2. Radioactive material ‘A’ has decay constant ‘8  ’
no of neutrons=234-92=142
and material ‘B’ has decay constant ‘  ’. Ini tially
6. Half life period of radium is 1600 years. 2 gm
they have same number of nuclei. After what
of radium undergoes decay and gets reduced
time, the ratio of number of nuclei of material
to 0.125 gms in
1 (1) 3200 years (2) 25600 years
‘B’ to that ‘A’ will be ? (NEET-2017)
e (3) 8000 years (4) 6400 years
1 1 1 1 125 1
(1) (2) (3) (4) A: (4) m0  2 gm, m  0.125 gm  
 7 8 9 1000 8
A: (2) T1/ 2  1600 years, t  ?
3. The half-life of a radioactive substance is 30 min- M0 2
t  nT1/ 2 and  2n   2n
utes. The time (in minutes) taken between 40% M 1/ 8
decay and 85% decay of the same radioactive  2n  2 4  n  4  t  6400 years
substance is (NEET-II 2016) 7. After a certain lapse of time, the fraction of
(1) 15 (2) 30 (3) 45 (4) 60 radioactive polonium undecayed is found to be
A: (4) Number of active nuclei falls from 60% to 15% 12.5% of initial quantity. The duration of this
1 1 time lapse is (if the half-life of polonium is 138
So sample becomes th  2 th days)
4 2
So number of half-lives = 2 (1) 414days (2) 407 days
Time t  2  30  60 minute (3) 421 days (4) 410 days
4. When an  -particle of mass ‘m’ moving with N 125 1
A: (1)   , T1/ 2  138 days ;
velocity ‘v’ bombards on a heavy nucleus of N 0 100 8
charge ‘Ze’, itsdistance of closest approach from N0
 2n  8  n  3
the nucleus depends on m as: (NEET-I 2016) N
 t  nT1/ 2  3  138  414days
1 1 1
(1) (2) (3) 2 (4)m
m m m
646 II PUC
Nucei
8. Two radioactive substances X and Y initially 11. No. of uranium 235 nuclei required to undergo
contain an equal number of atoms. Their half- fission to give 9 x 1013 joule of energy is
lives are 1 hour and 2 hours respectively. Then (1) 2.8125 x 1024 (2) 28.125 x 1024
the ratio of their rates of disintegration after two (3) 281.25 x 1024 (4) 28215 x 1024
hours is n 3
A: (1) W0  2 , W  2  4   32 gm
(1) 1:1 (2) 2:1 (3) 1:2 (4) 2:3
(1) 200MeV  1 fission
dN 0.693 A T N
A: (1) A   N  N  1  2 1 9  1013 J  ?  E  NE1 
dt T1/ 2 A2 T1 N 2
Number of fissions
t 2
& t  2h, n1    2 9 1013
T1 1 = 24
200 106  1.6  1019  2.81 10
t 2
n2   1 ; 12. In a thermo nuclear reaction 103 Kg of
T2 2
hydrogen is converted into 0.99  103 kg of
N N N N A 2 N /4 helium. If the efficiency of the generator is 50%,
N1  n0  0 , N 2  n0  0  1   0 1
2 1
4 2 2
2 A2 1 N 0 / 2
the electrical energy generated in KWH is
9. 1 g of a radio active substance disintegrates at
(1) 105 (2) 1.5 105 (3) 1.25 105 (4) 1.3 105
the rate of 3.7  1010 disintegrations per second.
E
The atomic mass of the substance is 226. A: (3)   out  Eout  Ein  mc 2
Ein
Calculate its mean life.
50
(1) 1.2  10 5 s (2) 1.39 1011 s    0.01 103   9  1016 J
100
(3) 2.1  10 5 s (4) 7.194  1010 S
45 1010
 m N   kwh  1.25  105 kwh
m 36 105
A: (4) A  N   N a   n    1
M  M Na  13. The amount of energy released in the fusion of
no of modes two 1H2 to form a 2 He4 nucleus will be
mN a 1 [Binding energy per nucleon of 1H2 = 1.1 Mev
 A .
M  4
Binding energy per nucleon of 2 He
=7 Mev]
mN a 1103  6 1023
  3 (1) 8.1 MeV (2) 5.9 MeV
MA 10  226  3.7  1010
(3) 23.6 MeV (4) 2 MeV
 7.19  1010 sec
A: (3) 1 H 2 1 H 2 2 He4  Q
10. A radio active isotope having a half life of 3 days
E = B.E. of products - B.E. of reactants
was received after 9 days. It was found that there
= 4(7) - 4(1.1) = 23.6 MeV
was only 4 gms of the isotope in the container.
14. A nucleus splits into two nuclear parts having
The initial weight of the isotope when packed
radii in the ratio 1:2. Their velocities are in the
was
ratio
(1) 8 g (2) 64 g (3) 48 g (4)32 g
(1) 8:1 (2) 6:1 (3) 4:1 (4) 2:1
t 9 W0
n    3; W  n A: (1) m1v1  m2v2 ;
A: (4) t1 3 2 3 3
2 m1  R1  V2 V R  8
    1  2  
W0  2n , W  23  4   32 gm m2  R2  V1 V2  R1  1

II PUC 647
 Objective Physics
15. The isotope 238
U decays successively to form (Avogadro’s number  6.023  10 23 )
92

234 234 234 230 226

(1) 8.202  1012 J (2) 8.202  108 J
90 Th, 91 Pa, 92 U, 90 Th and 88 Ra , The
(3) 8.202  1010 J (4) 8.202  1014 J
radiations emitted in these five steps are
(1)  ,  ,  ,  ,  (2)  ,  ,  ,  ,  mN a 1 6.023  10 23
A: (3) E  NE1  E1   200
(3)  ,  ,  ,  ,  (4)  ,  ,  ,  ,  M 235
238 234 234 234 230 226  5.126  1023 Mev
A: (3)     
    
 Th 
 Pa   Th 
 Ra
92
90 91 90 88
92
 5.126  1023  1.6 1013 J  8.2  1010 J
16. A nucleus X initially at rest, undergoes alpha 20. The ratio of the amounts of energy released as a
decay according to the equation result of the fussion of 1 kg hydrogen  E1  and
232 A U 236  E2  will be
z X 90 Y   .What fraction of the total fission of 1 kg of 92

energy released in the decay will be the (1) 1.28 (2) 3.28 (3) 5.28 (4) 7.28
kinetic energy of the alpha particle A: (4)Energy relesed for nucleon in fussion = 7.28
90 228 228 1 (energy released per nucleon in fission)
(1) (2) (3) (4) E1  7.28 E2
92 232 232 2
21. A radioactive sample can decay by two different
K.E A  4
A: (2)   Where A  232  processes. The half-life for the first process is
K.E A
T1 and that for the second process is T2 . The
17. A nucleus with mass number 220 initially at rest
effective half-life T of the radioactive sample is
emits an   particle. If the Q value of the
reaction is 5.5MeV then the kinetic energy of the
1 1 1
(1) T  T1  T2 (2)  
  particle is T T1 T2
(1) 4.4 MeV (2) 5.4 MeV T T T T
(3) T 1 2 (4) T 1 2
(3) 5.6 MeV (4) 6.5 MeV T1T2 T1T2
 A4 216 dN 1
A: (2) K.E   Q   5.5  5.4MeV A: (2)   N ;   1   2   
 A  220 dt T
22. The half life of a radioactive substance is 20
221
18. 87 Ra undergoes radiorctive decay with a half minutes.The approximate time interval
life of 4 days. The probability that a Ra nucleus
will disintegrate in 8 days is
 t2  t1  between the time t2 , when 2/3 of it has
(1) 1 (2) 1/2 (3) 1/4 (4) 3/4 decayed and time t1 and 1/3 of it had decayed is
t (1) 14 minutes (2) 20 minutes
8 N
A: (4) n    2 ; N o  2n N ; o  22  4 (3) 28 minutes (4) 7 minutes
t1/2 4 N
No A: (2)At t1 2  1 & At t2 1  1 t -t1=20 mins.
Remaining atoms = N  ; Dacayed atoms 3t
2 1/20 t
3 2 2/ 20
; 2
4 23. A sample of radioactive material has mass m,
N 3N o decay constant  and molecular weight M.
 N o  N  No  o 
4 4 Avagadro constant = NA . The activity of the
No  N 3 sample after time t will be
 Probability of decay  N 
4
o  mN A    t  mN A   t
19. The energy released by the fission of 1 g of 235 U (1)  e (2)  e
 M   M 
in joule, given that the energy released per fission
is 200 MeV.
648 II PUC
Nucei
(1) 36% (2) 64% (3) 60% (4) 40%
 mN A    t m
(3) 
 M 
e (4)


1  e  t  A: (1)
t  0 N o  100% N o  N  0%
N Am
A: (2) activity =  N o e   t where No  t  1 hr N o  80% N o  N  20%
M
24. The half-life of a radioactive sample is T. If the t  2 hr N o  64% N o  N  36%
activities of the sample at time t 1 adn t2 ( t1 < t2) are C14
28. A piece of wood is found to have the 12
R1 and R2 respec tively, then the number of atoms C
disintegrated in time t2  t1 is proportional to ratio to be 0.5 times of that in a living plant
(1)  R1  R2  T (2)  R1  R2  T The number of years back the plant died will
be (Half life of C14 = 5,580 years)
R1 R2 R  R
(3) T (4)
1 2 (1) 2,790 years (2) 5,580 years
R1  R2 T (3) 11,160 years (4) 27,900 years
A: (1)Activity R   N so that
 N0 1 
R1   N1 and R2   N 2 A: (2)n = 1 half life  t  nT   21  
 N 0.5 
0.6931 29. The fraction f of radioactive element decayed
R1  R2    N1  N 2    N1  N 2 
T change with respect to time (t). The curve
 R1  R2  T representing the correct variation is
N1  N 2  ; N1  N 2   R1  R2  T
0.6931
25. A nucleus with mass number 220 initially at rest f f
emits an  - particle. If the Q value of the
reaction is 5.5 MeV, calculate the kinetic energy
of  -particle.
(1) O t ( 2 )
(1) 4.4 MeV (2) 5.4 MeV O
t
(3) 5.6 MeV (4) 6.5 MeV
A: (2) K1  K 2  5.5 MeV f f

From conservation of linear momentum

1/ 2 1/ 2
 2K1 (216m)   2 K 2 (4m)  (3)
O
(4)
O
t t
 K 2  54 K1
From the above K 2  5.4 MeV A: (3) N  N 0 e t ;
26. 3 rutherfords of a radioactive isotope of half
N  N  N 
life equal to 3 days was received after 12 f  0
N0
   1 e
t
 
days. Initial isotope packed was  N0 
(1) 48 rutherfords (2) 12 rutherfords as t  s, f  s exponentially
(3) 25 rutherfords (4) 36 rutherfords 30. A radioactive nucleus can decay by two different
W0 n  t  12  4 processes .The half lives of the first and second
A: (1) W  n , t 3
2 1 decay processes are 5x10 3 and 10 s years
2
respectively Then the effective half-life of the
 
Wo  W 2 N  2 4 W  16  3  48
nucleus is
27. 20% of a radio active element disintegrates in
(1) 105xl05yrs (2) 4762 yrs
1hr. The percentage of the radio active 4
(3) 10 yrs (4) 47.6yrs
element disintegrated in 2hrs will be

II PUC 649
 Objective Physics
A: (2)   1   2 8. After a certain lapse of time, the fraction of
radioactive polonium undecayed is found to be
T1T2 5 103  105 5 105
T    5000 y  4762 y 12.5% of initial quantity. The duration of this
T1  T2 5 103 1  20 105
time lapse is (if the half-life of polonium is 138
TASK - I days)
1. A nucleus x 235 splits into two nuclei having the (1) 414days (2) 407 days
mass numbers in the ratio 2:1. The ratio of the (3) 421 days (4) 410 days
radii of those two nuclei is 9. Two radioactive substances X and Y initially
(1) 2:1 (2) 1:2 (3) 21/3:1 (4) 1:21/3 contain an equal number of atoms. Their half-
2. The binding energy per nucleon of C12 is 7.68 lives are 1 hour and 2 hours respectively. Then
MeV and that of C13 is 7.47 Mev. The energy the ratio of their rates of disintegration after two
required to remove one neutron from C13 is hours is
(1) 495 MeV (2) 49.5 MeV (1) 1:1 (2) 2:1 (3) 1:2 (4) 2:3
(3) 4.95 MeV (4) 0.495 MeV 10. 1 g of a radio active substance disintegrates at
3. The binding energy per each nucleon in the the rate of 3.7  1010 disintegrations per second.
neighbourhood of medium nuclei is 8.5 MeV and The atomic mass of the substance is226. Calculate
the binding energy per each nucleon is about 7.6 its mean life.
MeV in the neighbourhood of Uranium. The
(1) 1.2  10 5 s (2) 1.39 1011 s
energy released in the fission of U 236 is
(3) 2.1  10 5 s (4) 7.194  1010 S
(1) 212 eV (2) 212 MeV
(3) 2.12 MeV (4) 0.9 MeV 11. The mass of one curie of U 234 is
4. After the emission of one  -particle followed (1) 3.7  1010 g (2) 3.7  10 10 g
by two  -particles from 238 (3) 6.25  10 34 g (4) 1.438  10 11 g
92 U , the number of
12. A radio active isotope having a half life of 3 days
neutrons in the newly formed nucleus is
was received after 9 days. It was found that there
(1) 140 (2) 142 (3) 144 (4) 146
was only 4 gms of the isotope in the container.
5. A radioactive nucleus undergoes a series of
The initial weight of the isotope when packed
decays according to the sequence
  
was
A   A1   A2   A3 . If the mass
(1) 8 g (2) 64 g (3) 48 g (4)32 g
number and atomic number of A3 are 172 and 238 undergoing
13. The half life of 92 U   decay is
69 respectively, then the mass number and
atomic number of A is 4.5 109 years. Its activity of 1 g sample is
(1) 56, 23 (2) 180, 72 (3) 120, 52 (4) 84, 38 (1) 1.23 104 Bq (2) 2.4 105 Bq
22
6. Ne nucleus, after absorbing energy, decays into
(3) 1.82 106 Bq (4) 4.0  10 8 Bq
two  - particals and an unknown nucleus. The
14. No. of uranium 235 nuclei required to undergo
unknown nucleus is
fission to give 9 x 1013 joule of energy is
(1) Carbon (2) Nitrogen
(1) 2.8125 x 1024 (2) 28.125 x 1024
(3) Boron (4) oxygen
(3) 281.25 x 1024 (4) 28215 x 1024
7. Half life period of radium is 1600 years. 2 gm of
15. The energy supplied by a power plant is 40
radium undergoes decay and gets reduced to
million kilowatt hour. It is supplied by
0.125 gms in
annihilation of matter, the mass that is
(1) 3200 years (2) 25600 years
annihilated is.
(3) 8000 years (4) 6400 years

650 II PUC
Nucei
(1) 1.6 gm (2) 1.6 kg (1) About 1/3 of substance disintegrates
(3) 1.6 mg (4)1.6 amu (2) About 2/3 of the substance disintegrates
3
16. In a thermo nuclear reaction 10 Kg of (3) About 90% of the substance disintegrates
3
hydrogen is converted into 0.99  10 kg of (4) Almost all the substance disintegrates
helium. If the efficiency of the generator is 50%, 24. Three fourth of the active decays in a radioactive
the electrical energy generated in KWH is sample in 3/4 sec. The half life of the sample is
(1) 105 (2) 1.5 105 (3) 1.25 105 (4) 1.3 105
1 3 3
17. In nuclear fusion,One gram hydrogen is (1) sec (2) 1 sec (3) sec (4) sec
2 8 4
converted into 0.993gm.If the efficiency of the
25. In a sample of radioactive material, what
generator be 5%,then the energy obtained in
percentage of the initial number of active nuclei
KWH is
will decay during one mean life
(1) 8.75103 (2) 4.75103
(1) 69.3% (2) 63% (3) 50% (4) 37%
(3) 5.75103 (4) 3.73103 26. A radioactive material has an initial amount 16
18. The amount of energy released in the fusion of
gm. After 120 days it reduces to 1 gm, then the
two 1H2 to form a 2 He4 nucleus will be half-life of radioactive material is
2
[Binding energy per nucleon of 1H = 1.1 Mev (1) 60 days (2) 30 days
(3) 40 days (4) 240 days
Binding energy per nucleon of 2 He4 =7 Mev]
27. A nucleus with Z = 92 emits the following in a
(1) 8.1 MeV (2) 5.9 MeV
sequence: ,  ,  , , , , , ,  ,  , ,  ,  ,  .
(3) 23.6 MeV (4) 2 MeV
The Z of the resulting nucleus is
19. Highly energetic electrons are bombarded on a
(1) 74 (2) 76 (3) 78 (4) 82
target of an element containing 30 neutrons. The
28. A radioactive sample S1 having the activity A1
ratio of radii of nucleus of target to helium is 14.
has twice the number of nuclei as another sample
The no.of protons is
S2 of activity A2. If A2 = 2 A1, then the ratio of
(1) 25 (2) 26 (3) 56 (4) 30
half life to S1 to the life of S2 is
20. A nucleus splits into two nuclear parts having
(1) 4 (2) 2 (3) 0.25 (4) 0.75
radii in the ratio 1:2. Their velocities are in the
29. A nucleus of mass number 220, initially at rest,
ratio
emits an -particle. If the Q value of the reaction
(1) 8:1 (2) 6:1 (3) 4:1 (4) 2:1
is 5.5 MeV, the energy of the emitted -particle
21. Sun radiates energy at the rate of 3.6x1026J/ s.
will be
The rate of decrease in mass of sun is (Kgs -1).
(1) 4.8 MeV (2) 5.4 MeV
(1) 12 x 1010 (2) 1.3 x 1020
(3) 5.5 MeV (4) 6.8 MeV
(3) 4 x 109 (4) 3.6 x 1036 4
30. An alpha particle ( He) has a mass of 4.00300
22. Consider the nuclear reaction:
amu. A proton has mass of 1.00783 amu and a
X 200  A110  B90  energy The binding neutron has mass of 1.00867 amu respectively.
energy per nucleon for X 200 , A110 and B90 is The binding energy of alpha particle estimated
from these data is the closest to
respectively 7.4MeV, 8.2MeV and 8.2Mev. The
(1) 27.9 MeV (2) 23.3 MeV
energy released is
(3) 35.0 MeV (4) 20.4 MeV
(1) 200MeV (2) 160MeV
31. The daughter nucleus formed in a radioactive
(3) 110MeV (4) 90MeV
decays process is also radioactive.
23. In a mean life of a radioactive sample

II PUC 651
 Objective Physics
Let P and d be the decay constants for parent
m2
and daughter nuclei and N P and N d be the (1) m1/m2 (2) m2/m1 (3) 1 (4)
m1
number of atoms of parent and daughter nuclei
at an instant of time t. The condition under which 38. After 280 days, the activity of a radioactive
the number of daughter nuclei becomes constant sample is 6000 dps. The activity reduces to 3000
is dps after another 140 days. The initial activity of
the sample in dps is
 p d p Nd
(1) N  N (2)   N (1) 6000 (2) 9000 (3) 3000 (4) 24000
p d d p
39. A radioactive sample with half-life of 1 month
(3)  p   d  N p  N d carries a label “activity = 2 C as on date…..”.
(4) the number of daughter nuclei cannot become The activity of the sample after 4 months is
constant (1) 1.0 Ci (2) 0.5 Ci (3) 0.25 Ci (4) 0.125 Ci
32. The half-life of a radioactive material is 8 hours. 40. A small volume of solution which contains a
If 20% of the sample remains active after time t, radio isotope of radium has an activity of 10,000
its 10% of the sample remain active after disintegrations per minute when it was injected
(1) (t + 2) hour (2) (t + 4) hour to the patient. After 30 hours, if 1 cm3 of blood is
(3) (t + 6) hour (4) (t + 8) hour found to have an activity of 0.5 disintegrations/
33. The half-life of a radioactive substance X is 2 minute, the volume of the blood of the patient is
years. This element decays into another stable (assume that the sodium is uniformly distributed
element Y. The ratio of the atoms of X and Y in the blood and half life of sodium is 15 hours)
was found to be 1 : 4 after the time t. The value (1) 50 cm3 (2) 5000 cm3
of t in years is between (3) 0.5 m3 (4) 5 m3
(1) 2 and 4 (2) 3 and 6 (3) 6 and 8 (4) 4 and 6 TASK - II
34. A radioactive sample S1 having an activity of 5 1. The radius of Cu64 nucleus in Fermi is (given
29
Ci has twice the number of nuclei as another R0 = 1.2  1015 m)
sample S2 which has an activity of 10 Ci. The (1) 4.8 (2) 1.2 (3) 7.7 (4) 9.6
half lives of S1 and S2 can be 27
2. If the nuclear radius Al is 3.6 Fermi, the
(1) 20 yr and 5 yr, respectively approximate nuclear radius of 64Cu in Fermi is
(2) 20 yr and 10 yr, respectively (1) 2.4 (2) 1.2 (3) 4.8 (4) 3.6
(3) 10 yr each 3. A nucleus ruptures into two nuclear parts which
(4) 5 yr each have their velocity ratio equal to 2 : 1. What will
35. The half life of radon is 4 days, 10 gram of be the ratio of their nuclear size (nuclear radius)
random after 16 days will reduce to (1) 21/3 :1 (2) 1: 21/3 (3) 31/2 :1 (4) 1: 31/2
(1) 2.5 gram (2) 0.625 gram 4. The masses of neutron and proton are 1.0087
(3) 1.625 gram (4) 0.25 gram a.m.u. and 1.0073 a.m.u. respectively. If the
36. In a radioactive disintegration, the ratio of the neutrons and protons combine to form a helium
initial number of atoms to the number of atoms nucleus (alpha particles) of mass 4.0015 a.m.u.
present at an instant equal to its mean life is The binding energy of the helium nucleus will
(1) 1/e (2) e (3) e2 (4) 1/e2 be (1 a.m.u.= 931 MeV)
37. A particle of mass M at rest decays into two (1) 28.4 MeV (2) 20.8 MeV
particles of masses m1 and m2 having non-zero (3) 27.3 MeV (4) 14.2 MeV
velocities. The ratio of the de-Broglie
wavelengths of the particles 1/2 is
652 II PUC
Nucei
5. If the binding energy per nucleon in Li7 and He 4 The binding energy of alpha particle estimated
nuclei are respectively 5.60 MeV and 7.06 MeV, from these data is the closest to
7 4
then energy of reaction Li  p  2 2 He is (1) 27.9 MeV (2) 23.3 MeV
(1) 19.6 MeV (2) 2.4 MeV (3) 35.0 MeV (4) 20.4 MeV
235
(3) 8.4 MeV (4) 17.3 MeV 14. When 92 U undergoes fission, 0.1% of its
6. In a mean life of a radioactive sample original mass is changed into energy. How much
(1) About 1/3 of substance disintegrates energy is released if 1kg of 92 U 235 undergoes
(2) About 2/3 of the substance disintegrates fission
(3) About 90% of the substance disintegrates (1) 9 1010 J (2) 9 1011 J
(4) Almost all the substance disintegrates (3) 9 1012 J (4) 9 1013 J
7. Three fourth of the active decays in a radioactive 15. Energy released in the fission of a single 92 U 235
sample in 0.75 sec. The half life of the sample is nucleus is 200 MeV. The fission rate of a
235
92 U
fuelled reactor operating at a power level
1 3 3
(1) sec (2) 1 sec (3) sec (4) sec of 5W is
2 8 4
(1) 1.56  1010 s1 (2) 1.56  1011 s1
8. In a sample of radioactive material, what
(3) 1.56  1016 s1 (4) 1.56  1017 s1
percentage of the initial number of active nuclei
16. The functions of moderators in nuclear reactor
will decay during one mean life
is to
(1) 69.3% (2) 63% (3) 50% (4) 37%
(1) Decrease the speed of neutrons
9. A radioactive material has an initial amount 16
(2) Increase the speed of neutrons
gm. After 120 days it reduces to 1 gm, then the
(3) Decrease the speed of electrons
half-life of radioactive material is
(4) Increase the speed of electrons
(1) 60 days (2) 30 days (3) 40 days (4) 240 days
17. The equation 41 H1  2He4++ + 2e+ + 26 MeV
10. A nucleus with Z = 92 emits the following in a
represents
sequence:
(1) -decay (2) -decays
,  ,  , , , , , ,  ,  , ,  ,  ,  . The Z of
(3) Fission (4) Fusion
the resulting nucleus is
18. A freshly prepared radioactive sample of half-
(1) 74 (2) 76 (3) 78 (4) 82
life 4 hours emits radiation of intensity which is
11. A radioactive sample S1 having the activity A1
64 times the safe level. The minimum hours after
has twice the number of nuclei as another sample
which it would be safe to work with it is
S2 of activity A2. If A2 = 2 A1, then the ratio of
(1) 4 (2) 6 (3) 12 (4) 24
half life to S1 to the life of S2 is
19. The binding energy per nucleon of 3Li7 is 5.6 MeV
(1) 4 (2) 2 (3) 0.25 (4) 0.75
and that of 2He4 is 7.06 MeV. The energy released
12. A nucleus of mass number 220, initially at rest,
during the reaction 3Li7 + 1H1  22 He4 + Energy,
emits an -particle. If the Q value of the reaction
is
is 5.5 MeV, the energy of the emitted -particle
(1) 1.726 MeV (2) 17.26 MeV
will be
(3) 0.1726 MeV (4) 172.6 MeV
(1) 4.8 MeV (2) 5.4 MeV
20. The half life period of radium is 1600 years. The
(3) 5.5 MeV (4) 6.8 MeV
fraction of a sample of radium that would remain
13. An alpha particle (4He) has a mass of 4.00300
after 6400 years is
amu. A proton has mass of 1.00783 amu and a
neutron has mass of 1.00867 amu respectively. 1 1 1 1
(1) (2) (3) (4)
4 2 8 16

II PUC 653
 Objective Physics
21. The radioactivity of a certain radioactive element 29. After two hours, one- sixteenth of the starting
drops to 1/64 of its initial value in 30 seconds. amount of a certain radioactive isotope remained
Its half life is undecayed. The half life of the isotope is
(1) 2 seconds (2) 4 seconds (1) 15 minutes (2) 30 minutes
(3) 5 seconds (4) 6 seconds (3) 45 minutes (4) 1 hour
22. The ratio of half-life times of two elements A and 30. The half life period of a radioactive substance is
5 min. The amount of substance decayed in 20
TA
B is T . The ratio of respective decay constant min will be
B
(1) 93.75% (2) 75% (3) 25% (4) 6.25%
A 31. Radon (Rn) decays into Polonium (Po) by
 B is emitting an   particle with half-life of 4 days.
TB TA TA  TB TA  TB A sample contains 6.4 1010 atoms of Rn . After
(1) T (2) T (3) T (4) T 12 days, the number of atoms of Rn left in the
A B A A
sample will be
23. If T is the half life of a radioactive material, then
(1) 3.2  1010 (2) 0.53  1010
T (3) 2.1 1010 (4) 0.8  1010
the fraction that would remain after a time is
2
32. In the uranium radioactive series, the initial
1 3 1 2 1 nucleus is 92 U 238 and the final nucleus is 82 Pb206 .
(1) (2) (3) (4)
2 4 2 2 When the uranium nucleus decays to lead, the
24. The half life of a radioactive element which has number of   particles emitted will be
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 4 (4) 8
1 m
only of its original mass left after a lapse of 33. A nucleus n X emits one  and one  particles.
32
The resulting nucleus is
60 days is
(1) n X m4 (2) n 2 Y m4 (3) n 4 Z m4 (4) n 1 Zm4
(1) 12 days (2) 32 days
34. The half life of 131 I is 8 days. Given a sample of
(3) 60 days (4) 64 days
131 at time t = 0, we can assert that
25. A radio-isotope has a half- life of 5 years. The I
(1) No nucleus will decay before t = 4 days
fraction of the atoms of this material that would
(2) No nucleus will decay before t = 8 days
decay in 15 years will be
(3) All nuclei will decay before t = 16 days
(1) 1/8 (2) 2/3 (3) 7/8 (4) 5/8
(4) A given nucleus may decay at any time after
26. If the half life of a radioactive sample is 10 hours,
t=0
its mean life is
35. Half life of a radioactive element is 10 days. The
(1) 14.4 hours (2) 7.2 hours
time during which quantity remains 1/10 of
(3) 20 hours (4) 6.93 hours
initial mass will be
27. What is the respective number of  and 
(1) 100 days (2) 50 days
particles emitted in the following radioactive
(3) 33 days (4) 16 days
decay 90 X 200 80 Y168
36. At any instant the ratio of the amount of
(1) 6 and 8 (2) 8 and 8 (3) 6 and 6 (4) 8 and 6 radioactive substances is 2 : 1. If their half lives
28. In a radioactive decay, the half-life of radioactive be respectively 12 and 16 hours, then after two
substance is t1/2 = 69.3 sec. The decay constant is days, what will be the ratio of the substances
1 1
(1) 0.01 sec (2) 0.1 sec (1) 1 : 1 (2) 2 : 1 (3) 1 : 2 (4) 1 : 4
(3) 10 sec1 (4) 1 sec1
654 II PUC
Nucei
37. The activity of a radioactive sample is measured HINTS & SOLUTION
as 9750 counts per minute at t = 0 and as 975 TASK - I
counts per minute at t = 5 minutes. The decay 1/ 3
R1  2 
constant is approximately 1. (3) R  A1 / 3  
R2  1 
(1) 0.230 per minute (2) 0.461 per minute
2. (3) Energy required = 13  7.47 - 12  7.68
(3) 0.691 per minute (4) 0.922 per minute
= 4.95 MeV
38. A radioactive substance has a half-life of 1 year. 3. (2) Energy released per fiision is 200 MeV
The fraction of this material, that would remain 4. (2) 92 U 238 92 X 234  2 He 4  21 e 0 ;
after 5 years will be no of neutrons=234-92=142
  
1 1 1 4 5. (2) A   A1   A2   A3 ;
(1) (2) (3) (4)
32 5 2 5 180 1 e0
180 2 He
4

72 X  73 X  71 X 176 ;

39. A radioactive sample has half-life of 5 years.
4
2 He
Probability of decay in 10 years will be 71 X 176  69 X 172
22 4
(1) 100% (2) 75% (3) 50% (4) 25% 6. (1) 10 Ne  22 He 6 c12
40. If half-life of a substance is 3.8 days and its
125 1
quantity is 10.38 gm. Then substance quantity 7. (4) m0  2 gm, m  0.125 gm  
1000 8
remaining left after 19 days will
; T1/ 2  1600 years, t  ?
(1) 0.151 gm (2) 0.32 gm
M0 2
(3) 1.51 gm (4) 0.16 gm t  nT1/ 2 and 2n   2n
M 1/ 8
KEY
 2n  24  n  4  t  6400 years
STUDENT TASK - I
1 3 2 3 3 2 4 2 5 2 N 125 1
8. (1)   , T1/ 2  138 days ;
6 1 7 4 8 1 9 1 10 4 N 0 100 8
11 4 12 4 13 4 14 1 15 1 N0
 2n  8  n  3
16 3 17 1 18 3 19 2 20 1 N
21 3 22 2 23 2 24 3 25 2  t  nT1/ 2  3  138  414days
26 2 27 3 28 1 29 2 30 1 dN 0.693 A T N
31 2 32 4 33 4 34 1 35 2 9. (1) A   N  N  1  2 1
dt T1/ 2 A2 T1 N 2
36 1 37 1 38 4 39 4 40 2
t 2 t 2
STUDENT TASK - II & t  2h, n1    2 ; n2    1 ;
1 2 3 4 5
T1 1 T2 2
1 3 2 1 4
6 2 7 3 8 2 9 2 10 3 N0 N 0 N N A 2 N /4
N1  n1
 , N 2  n02  0  1   0 1
2 4 2 2 A2 1 N 0 / 2
11 1 12 2 13 1 14 4 15 2
16 1 17 4 18 4 19 2 20 4 m  m N 
10. (4) A  N   N a   n    1
21 3 22 1 23 3 24 1 25 3 M  M Na 
26 1 27 4 28 1 29 2 30 1 mN a 1
31 4 32 4 33 4 34 4 35 3 no of modes  A  .
M 
36 1 37 2 38 1 39 2 40 2
mNa 1103  6 1023
  3 10
 7.19 1010 sec
MA 10  226  3.7 10
11. (4) 1 cubic = 3.7  1010 disintegration per sec
 N  3.7  1010

II PUC 655
 Objective Physics
3
Nm 3.7  1010  234 m1  R1  V2
m  23
 1.43  1011 gm 20. (1) m1v1  m2v2 ;   
Na 6.023  10 m2  R2  V1
12. (4) 3
V R  8
t 9 W0  1  2  
n    3; W  n ;W0  2n , W  23  4  32 gm V2  R1  1
t1 3 2 dE dm 2 dm
2 21. (3)  .c ; 3.6  1026   9  1016 ;
dt dt dt
13. (4) Activity or rate of decay is dm
 4 109 kg / s
0.693 mN a dt
A  N   ;
T1/ 2 M 22. (2) E  E product  Ereac tan ts

0.693 1 10 3  6.023  1023  110  8.2  90  8.2  200  7.4

A   4  10 8
Bq = 200  0.8  160 Mev
4.5 109 238
14. (1) 200MeV  1 fission 1
23. (2) By using N  N 0e t and t   

9  1013 J  ?  E  NE1 
N0 N
9 1013 Substance remains  N   0.37N 0  0
Number of fissions = e 3
200 106  1.6  1019
N 0 2N 0
 2.81 1024  Substance disintegrated  N 0  
3 3
15. (1) E  40  106  36 105 J ; E  mc 2
3
40  106  36  105  m  9  1016 24. (3) th active decay takes place in time
4
 m  1.6  103 kg
3 3
Eout  2(T1/2 )  T1/2  sec
t  2(T1/2 ) 
 Eout  Ein  mc 2 4 8
16. (3)  
Ein 25. (2) Number of atoms remains undecayed
50 N  N 0e t
   0.01 103   9  1016 J
100 Number of atoms decayed = N 0 (1  et )
10
45 10
 kwh  1.25  105 kwh  1
   1
36 105  N 0 1  e    N 0 1   = 0.63 N = 63% of N
   e 0 0
5 5
17. (1) E  mc 2   0.007  103  9  1016 J
100 100 t/T1/2
120
N 1  1   1  T1/2
35  9 108 26. (2)     
 kwh  8.75  103 kwh N0  2   16   2 
36 105
120

18. (3) 1
H 2 1 H 2  2 He4  Q ; 4
 1   1  T1/2 120
    4  T1/2  30
E = B.E. of products - B.E. of reactants 2
    2 T1/2
= 4(7) - 4(1.1) = 23.6 MeV
1/3 27. (3) ZResuting nucleus  92  8  2  4  1  2  1  78
R1  A1 
19. (2) As R  R0 A1/3    0.693
R2  A2  28. (1) Activity, A  N  N,
T
1/3 1/3
R  A A Where T is the half life of a radioactive sample
    14    
1/3

RHe  4  4 A1 N1 T2
  
 A  56 (or) Z  A  N ; Z  56  30  26 A 2 T1 N 2

656 II PUC
Nucei
T1 A 2 N1 2A1 2N 2 4  log 2  T1
      T  half life   Given, N1  2N 2  T  4
T2 A1 N 2 A1 N2 1    2

29. (2) Kinetic energy of the emitted -particle t 16

35. (2) Number of half lives, n    4;
A4 T 4
is KE   Q ; Here, A = 220, Q = 5.5 MeV
A 1 1 10
m  m0 n
m  10g  4   m  0.625 g
220  4 2 2 16
 KE    5.5 MeV  5.4 MeV
220 t 1 1 N 1
36. (1) N  N 0e when t  Tm    N 0 e  N  e
30. (1) M  2  m p  m n   m He  0.0300amu 0

37. (1) From law of conservation of momentum, P1

E = M C2 = 0.03  931 MeV  27.9 MeV = P2 (in opposite directions)
31. (2) When the rate of disintegration of daughter
h
nuclei is equal to the rate of its formation, the Now de-Broglie wavelength is given by   ,
p
number of daughter nuclei, present in the
where h = Planck’s constant
samples remains constant. Rate of disintegration Since magnitude of momentum (p) of both the
of parent nuclei = Rate of formation of daughter
1
 dN   dN  particles is equal, therefore 1   2 or   1
nuclei  dt      P N P  d Nd 2

  parent  dt  daughter 38. (4) Activity reduces form 6000 dps to 3000 dps
p Nd in 140 days. It implies that half-life of the
 
d Np radioactive sample is 140 days. In 280 days (or
1
 N 1 1  N 1 1 two half-lives) activity will remain th of the
   20%   n1 and    10%   n2 ; 4
 N 0 t 5 2  N 0 2 10 2
initial activity.
 N / N0 1 2 n2
39. (4) Initial velocity A0 = 2Ci
32. (4)  N / N   2  2n1
0 2
1 1 1
 2n2  2n1.21  2n1 1  n 2  n1  1 Activity after 4 months A  A 0 t/T
 2  4/1  3
2 2 2
A = 0.125 Ci
t t 40. (2) The activity of the total volume of the
  1  t  t  T   t  8  hours
T T substance, A = 0.5  V
Nx 1 1 1 104
33. (4) N  4 , where Nx and Ny are the numbers of A  A0 n
 104 30/15  2  2500
y 2 2 2
atoms of X and Y left after time t. The number of disintegrations/minute; But A = 0.5  V
“N0  Nx = Ny; N0 = Nx + Ny = Nx + 4Nx = 5Nx 2500 = 0.5  V  V = 5000 cm3
TASK - II
Nx 1 N x 1 1
 ;   n  2n  5 1. (1) Nuclear radius R = R0A1/3
N0 5 N0 5 2
Where R0 is a constant and A is the mass number
This indicates that the value of n is between 2
and 3. Therefore, the value of t lies in between 4 RCu = (1.2  1015m)(64)1/3 = (1.2  1015m) (43)1/3
year (n1T = 2  2) and 6 year (n2T = 3 2) = 4.8  1015 m = 4.8 fm; ( 1 fm = 1015 m)
1/3
1 R 2  A2   64 
1/3
4
34. (1) Activity of S1  (activity of S2) 2. (3) R = R0(1)1/3;     
2 R 1  A1   27  3
1 1 N 2 T1 2N1 4
or 1N1  2   2 N 2  or   2N or T  N R 2  3.6   4.8
2 1 2 2 3
II PUC 657
 Objective Physics
3. (2) As momentum is conserved, therefore 220  4
1/3 1/3
 KE    5.5 MeV  5.4 MeV
m1 A1 V2 1 R1  A1  1 220
          1: 21/3
m 2 A 2 V1 2 R 2  A 2  2 13. (1) M  2  m p  m n   m He  0.0300amu
4. (1) B.E. = mc2 =   931 MeV E = M C2 = 0.03  931 MeV  27.9 MeV
 [2(1.0087  1.0073)  4.0015]  931  28.4 MeV 0.1
7 4
2
14. (4) E  mc , m   103 kg
5. (4) B.E. of Li  39.20 MeV and He  28.24 MeV 100
Hence binding energy of 2He 4  56.48 MeV  E  103  (3  108 ) 2  103  9 1016  9 1013 J
Energy of reaction  56.48  39.20  17.28 MeV Energy
15. (2)  200 MeV  200 106  1.6 1019 J
1 Fission
6. (2) By using N  N 0e t and t   
 5 11
Fission rate  200 MeV  1.56 10 fission/sec.
N0 N
Substance remains  N   0.37N 0  0
e 3 16. (1) In nuclear reactors the moderators are used
N 0 2N 0 to decrease (slowdown) the speed of neutrons.
 Substance disintegrated  N 0   Heavy water, graphite is used for the purpose.
3 3
While heavy water is the best moderator.
3
7. (3) th active decay takes place in time 17. (4) According the question, hydrogen is
4
converted into helium and two positrons and
3 3
t  2(T1/2 )   2(T1/2 )  T1/2  sec energy. Hence, this reaction corresponds fusion.
4 8
n 6 n
8. (2) Number of atoms remains undecayed 1 1 1 1
18. (4)    or     
64  2  2 2
N  N 0e t
 n = 6; Time to work safely = 6  4 = 24 hours
Number of atoms decayed = N 0 (1  et ) 19. (2) 3Li7 + 1H1 = 2  2 He4; Energy, E = (2 EHe  ELi)
1
    1 ELi = 7  5.6 MeV = 39.2 MeV
 N 0 1  e    N 0 1   = 0.63 N = 63% of N
   e 0 0
EHe = 4  7.06 MeV = 28.24 MeV
t/T1/2
120 E = (2  28.24  39.2) MeV = 17.26 MeV
N 1  1   1  T1/2
9. (2)      6400
N0  2   16   2  4
N  1  1600  1  1
20. (4) Fraction      
4
120 N0  2   2  16
 1   1  T1/2 120
    4  T1/2  30 t/T 30/T
2 2 T1/2 1 N0 1
21. (3) N  N 0     N0  
10. (3) ZResuting nucleus  92  8  2  4  1  2  1  78 2 64 2
30
0.693 T  5sec
11. (1) Activity, A  N  N, 6
T
Where T is the half life of a radioactive sample ln 2 ln 2
22. (1) T1/2     T
A1 N1 T2 T1 A 2 N1 2A1 2N 2 4 1/2
       
A 2 T1 N 2 ; T2 A1 N 2 A1 N2 1 ln 2 ln 2  T
 A  , B   A  B
12. (2) Kinetic energy of the emitted -particle TA TB  B TA
23. (3) Fraction remains after n half lives
A4
is KE   Q ; Here, A = 220, Q = 5.5 MeV
A
658 II PUC
Nucei
N 1 1
n t/T
N 1 1
n t/T 1 N0 2.303  T1/2 N
    t ln t log10 0
;
N 0  2   2  N 0  2   2   N 0.693 N
N0
N0 1
60/T
60  10, T1/2  10 days, t  33.23 days
24. (1)  N0   5  T  12 days N
32  2 T
36. (1) Number of half lives in two days four
15/5
N 1 1 2  24
25. (3)     Decayed fraction substance 1 and 2 respectively are n1 = 4
N0  2  8 12
n
1 7 2  24 1
1  and; n 2   3 ; By using N  N 0   
8 8 1.6  2
H alf life 10
26. (1) Mean life    14.4 hours 1
1 n
1
4
0.6931 0.6931
N1 (N 0 )1  2  2  2  1
A  A ' 200  168     
27. (4) n    8 N 2 (N 0 ) 2  1  n 2 1  1 3 1
4 4    
 2 2
n   2n a  Z  Z '  2  8  90  80  6
37. (2) A  A 0 e t  975  9750 e 5  e5  10
0.693
28. (1) T1/2     0.01 sec 1  5  log e 10  2.3026log10 10  2.3026

t/T 2/T 4 2/T    
N 1  1  1 1 1
29. (2)          5
N0  2   16   2   2  2 38. (1) Number of half lives n  5
1
 T  0.5 hour = 30 minutes n 5
N 1 N 1 1
N Now      
30. (1) Fraction of material decayed  1  N N0  2  N 0  2  32
0
10
t/T1/2 20 39. (2) Number of half lives n   2,
1 1 5 1 15 5
1   1   1   93.75%
2 2 16 16 2
N 1 1
now  
31. (4) In the given case, 12 days = 3 half lives N 0  2  4
Number of atoms left after 3 half lives.
N 1 3
1 Fraction decayed  1  N  1  4  4
 6.4  10  3  0.8  1010
10
0
2
3
A  A ' 238  206  In percentage  100  75%
32. (4) n    8 4
4 4
  19
33. (4) n X m  n 2 X m4  n 1 Zm4 40. (2) Number of half lives n   5;
3.8
34. (4) Number of nuclei decreases exponentially
n
 dN  N 1
and Rate of decay   Now 
N  N 0e t   N N 0  2 
 dt 
Therefore, decay process lasts up to t = . 5 5
N 1 1
Therefore, a given nucleus may decay at any time      N  10.38     0.32 gm
10.38  2  2
after t = 0.
t N0
35. (3) N  N 0e  ln  t
N
II PUC 659
 Objective Physics

CHAPTER Electronic Devices

Energy bands in solids (qualitative ideas only), conductors, insulators
and semiconductors; semiconductor diode- I-V characteristics in forward and

14
reverse bias, diode as a rectifier; I-V characteristics of LED, photodiode, solar
cell, and Zener diode; Zener diode as a voltage regulator. Junction transistor,
transistor action, characteristics of a transistor; transistor as an amplifier
(common emitter configuration) and oscillator. Transistor as a switch. Logic
gates Basic & combination gates (OR, AND, NOT, NAND and NOR) with
truth tables & circuit symbols.
PAST NEET PAPERS SUBTOPIC LEVEL ANALYSIS
NEET 2016 NEET 2016 Forecasting of
Year NEET 2018 NEET 2017
PHASE-I PHASE-II NEET-2019

No of
question 3 3 3 3 3
Asked
CE amplifier, CE amplifier, CE amplifier, CE amplifier, CE amplifier,
forward bias
Subtopic pn junction & pn junction & zener diode & photodiode &
pnjunction &power
digital circuit gain digital circuit digital circuit digital circuit
On the basis of electrical conductivity the solids are classified as :
 Metals : They possess very low resistivity or high conductivity.
( is of the order of 10–2 to 10–8 -m).
 Insulators : They have high resistivity (  108 -m).
 Semiconductors : They have resistivity intermediate to metals and insulators.
(  105 to 100 -m).
(a) Elemental semiconductor:Si & Ge (b)Compound semiconductor : CdS, GaAs, anthracene,
polyaniline etc.
ELECTRICAL CONDUCTION IN SOLIDS
 In metallic conductors like Al, Cu etc., the outer orbit electrons are shared by all the atoms and the
metallic crystal can be visualized as positive inner cores embedded in a regular fashion in a sea of
shared electrons. Such electrons are called free electrons. A small electric field causes the flow of
these free electrons in the direction of positive potential and current starts flowing.
For insulators, the bonding situation is very much different. The outermost electrons remain bound
to their parent atoms almost at all temperatures and very high energies are required for these
electrons to break away. Thus the electrical conduction remains almost nill under the moderate
values of electric field.
 In semiconductors, on the contrary, at moderate temperatures, due to thermal excitations, the
bonded electrons let themselves free and wander freely to give moderate values of conductivity.
But at very low temperatures (near 0 K), the conductivity of the semiconductors is zero.
Band theory of solids
 The electrons in inner orbit of atom are bounded with nucleus so there is no change in their energy
levels but the electrons in outer orbit are shared with other atoms so there is the change in their
energy levels.
 For the electron in crystal different energy levels are available then the energy of electron in
independent atom. These energy levels are called Energy Band.
660 II PUC
Semiconductor Electronics
 Electron can transit in any level of upper band as per energy gained by it and it behave as free
electron and take part in conduction process. So this upper band is called conduction band.
 The energy difference between minimum energy of conduction band and maximum energy of
valence band is called band gap. Band gap is represented by Eg .
 In the band gap region of energy any energy lavel does not exist. It implies electron cannot possess
energy in this rigion. This region is called forbidden gap.
 In semiconductors the valence band is completly filled and conduction band is completely empty at
0K.
Explanation of conductor, insulator and semiconductor based on band theory
Conductors Insulator semiconductor

Energy CB CB CB
Energy
VB
Eg > 3 eV Eg < 3 eV
VB T=0K

Band overlap
 Conductor : In conductor the conduction-band and valence-band superpose to each other. There is
no farbidden gap in conductors.
 Insulators : Forbidden gap is large in insulators ( Eg > 7eV). The insulator like diamond the forbidden
ga is of 6 eV.
 Semiconductor : Forbidden gap is small in semiconductor ( Eg < 3eV). In silicon it is of 1.1 eV.
 Intrinsic Semiconductors
As we know that Si and Ge have four valence electrons. In its crystalline structure, every Si or Ge
share one of its four valence electrons with each of its neighbours. These shared electron pairs are
referred to as forming a valence bond. Figure (a) shows 2-dimensional representation of Si or Ge
structure. It is an idealised picture in which no bonds are broken. Such a situation arises at low
temperature. As the temperature increases, thermal energy available to the electron helps them to
break away (becoming free electron for conduction).
(Thermally generated
free electron)

+4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4
Hole at site 1
(electron vacancy)

+4 +4 +4 +4 Site 1 +4 +4

Site 2
+4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4

+4 Si or Ge Covalent +4 Si or Ge
bond
Bonding electrons

(a) (b)
II PUC 661
 Objective Physics
In intrinsic semiconductors, the number of free electrons (ne) is equal to number of holes (nh). The
ne and nh are the negative and positive “intrinsic charge carriers”. Thus ne = nh = ni.
In semiconductors, current flows due to motion of free electrons as well as holes. The total current
is the sum of the electron current Ie due to thermally generated electrons and the hole current Ih.
ie.,I = Ie + Ih
 Extrinsic Semiconductors
When a small amount of a suitable impurity (about 1 ppm) is added to a pure semiconductor, the
resulting semiconductor is called extrinsic semiconductor. Addition of impurity atoms to pure
semiconductor is called doping.
By adding pentavalent impurity (also called donor impurity) additional conduction electrons are
created while the dopant atoms themselves become ionised positive cores. By adding Trivalent
impurity (also called acceptor impurity), addition holes are created and acceptor atoms themselves
become ionised negative cores.
 The crystal retains an overall charge neutrality. ni2  ne .nh
 For n-type semiconductor ne > nh. As ne.nh = constant  nh is suppressed.
 For p-type semiconductor nh > ne. As ne.nh is constant.  ne is suppressed.
 Instrinsic Semiconductors : A semiconductor in pure form.
CB
Eg < 3 eV
T=0K

The following points should be kept in mind :

 In instrinsic semiconductor, at 0 K, VB is completely filled and CB is completely empty.
 Instrinsic semiconductor is pure insulator at 0 K.
 At temperature above 0 K (say room temperature) VB is partially empty and CB is partially filled.
Therefore it can conduct at room temperature.

Eg < 3 eV T>0K
VB

 With increase in temperature, number of free electrons in conduction band increases as n = n0–Eg/
2kT. Therefore, conductivity of semiconductors increases exponentially with increase in temperature.


O T(k)
 Jumping of an electron from VB to CB is equivalent to breaking up of a bond and creation of
electron- hole pair.
 Extrinsic Semiconductors : A semiconductor in which impurity is added is called extrinsic
semiconductor.

662 II PUC
Semiconductor Electronics
N-type semiconductor P-type semiconductor
a. Pentavalent impurity is added a. Trivalent impurity is added

CB CB
eeeeeeeee
Donor energy hhhhhhhhh Acceptor energy
b. level b. level
VB VB

c. ne >> nh but ni2 = ne.nh c. nh >> ne but ni2 = ne.nh

d. Electrically neutral d. Electrically neutral
Conductivity :  = e[nee + nhh].
where, ne = number density of conduction electrons, nh = number density of holes
ve
me = mobility of electron = (ve = drift velocity, E = electric field)
E
vh
h = mobility of holes =
E
P-N Junction
Idf
Inet = 0
Idr
P N
P N – D
– +
h h – E + e e
h h h e e e P L
e – +
e e h – h
h h
e
h e e e
h h
 h
e
h –
–
–
L
E
T
A
Y
E
+ e
+
e

– I R + h
h h h e e e h h – O + e e
P N
– N
– +

 Due to concentration difference, diffusion of holes from P to N and diffusion of electrons from N
to P takes place.
 P side attains lower potential. N side attains higher potential.
 An electric field directed from N-side to P-side is created.
 No free charge carriers are left in a small region near the junction. This is called Depletion layer.
 Diffusion Current : A current flows from P-side to N-side due to diffusion of e’s from N-side
to P-side. This is due to majority charge carriers.
 Drift Current : A current flows from N-side to P-side due to drifting of newly created charge
carriers.
 For an unbiased P-N junction. Idf = Idr. i.e., Inet = 0.
 Diffusion current increases with decrease in strength of electric field and vice versa.
 Drift current is fairly independent of electric field unless it is very very strong. In this situation,
the electric field may cause breaking up of bonds and large amount of drift current flows in a
circuit. This situation is called break down. Break down depends on doping.
 Zener breakdown : When doping is very high, Zener breakdown takes place.
 Avalanche Breakdown : When doping is not so high, Avalanche breakdown takes place.
 Biasing of a P-N-junction h h–
– +
+e e
–
e – + h
 Forward Bias h h–
– +e e
– +
e – + h
a. Electric field strength in the depletion layer decreases. h h–
–
+e e
– +
–
b.Idf > Idr P I N df
I dr
c. Thickness of depletion layer decreases. I =I –I net df dr

d. P-N junction offers low resistance in forward biasing.

II PUC 663
 Objective Physics
I (mn)

R =  V/ I (dynamic resistance)

Zener
voltage

V (Reverse) Knee V (Forward)

voltage

– +
h h–
– +e e
I ( A) – +
– +e e
h h–
–
 Reverse Bias – +
+
–
a. Electric field strength in the depletion layer increases. h h– +e e
– +
–
b. Idr > Idf P I N df
I
c. Thickness of depletion layer increases. I =I –I
dr

net dr df

d. P-N junction offers high resistance in reverse biasing.

TYPES OF JUNCTION DIODES
 Breakdown Diode (Zener diode and Avalanche diode) : The circuit shows the use of a breakdown
diode. If the supplied voltage is more than breakdown voltage, the current through the diode may
vary but potential difference across it remains constant. Therefore the output voltage is a regulated
supply, which does not vary for a range of load resistance RL.
+

Unregulated
voltage supply
RL Regulated
voltage supply
–
 Photodiode : It is used in reverse bias. When a photodiode is illuminated with light photons having
energy h > Eg, it creates electron-hole pair in the depletion region causing an increase in drift
current.
 Solar Cell : It converts solar energy into electrical energy. No external voltage is applied here.
Active junction area is kept large. The materials most commonly used for solar cell are silicon and
Ga As. The solar radiations received by us has a maxima near 1.5 eV. So, semiconductors with Eg
< 1.5 eV are more useful so that they can absorb a maximum of radiation. Si has Eg of the order
of 1.1 eV and Ga As has Eg ~ 1.5 eV. Ga As is better than silicon as its absorption coefficient is
more.
 Light Emitting Diode (LED) : They are used in forward bias and emit radiations by spontaneous
emission. When electron falls from higher to lower energy level containing holes, energy in the
form of radiation is released. This is called radiative transition.
 Diode Laser : These are low power lasers used as optical light source in optical communication. When
a forward bias is applied to a diode, a current flows. At low current, there is spontaneous emission
in all directions. As the bias is increased, a threshold current is reached at which stimulated emission
occurs which creates laser action.
Types of diodes and their symbols :

 P-N Junction diode :

 Zener diode :

664 II PUC
Semiconductor Electronics

 Light emitting diode (LED) :

 Photo diode :

 Solar cell :

DIODE AS RECTIFIER : A DEVICE TO CONVERT AC INTO DC.

 Half wave rectifier

I0
I0 Irms 
I0 2
Input RL Output I
Imean  0

Step down I rms
form factor   1.57
transformer Imean

 Important points :
a. Input frequency = Out put frequency. b. Maximum Efficiency = 40.6%
2
ac component I rms
c. Ripple factor r   2
 1  1.21 .
dc component I mean
 Full Wave Rectifier

Output I0
Input I0 I0 Irms 
Output
RL 2
2I 0
Centre tap Imean 

transformer
a. Out put frequency = 2 × input frequency b. Maximum Efficiency = 81.2%.
c. Ripple factor r = 0.48.
TRANSISTOR(BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTOR)
Transistor was invented by John Bardeen, walter Barten and William Schocky. Transistor is a device
made up of two PN Junction diodes. Transistor is prepared by placing a thin chip of semiconductor
of opposite type between two same type of semiconductors. It have three regions : Base Region (B),
Emitter region (E) and collector region (C). Base (B) and collector (C) are in reversed bias mode
and emitter (E) and Base (B) are in forward biased condition.
Transistor are of two types :
 (1) P-N-P Transistor : (2) N-P-N Transistor

II PUC 665
 Objective Physics
 Some Important Points :
 Arrow (in the above diagram) represents the direction of flow of emitter current or flow of majority
charge carriers.
 Emitter is heavily doped.  Base is made thin and lightly doped.  Collector is moderately doped.
 When E-B junction is forward biased and C-B junction is reverse biased the transistor is called in
active state.
 When both E-B and C-B junctions are reverse biased the transistor is called in cut-off state.
 Transistor is used in active state in an amplifier.
 Ie = Ib + Ic
Three different types of circuit in case of a transistor : (1) Common Base (CB) (2) Common Collector
(CC) (3) Common Emitter (CE)
 Common-Base (CB) Amplifier
Ie Ic Ie Ic

Input RL V0 output RL output

Ib Ib
VEE VCC VCC
VEE

vi = Vi sin t v0 = V0 sin t

V0
Vi

Input Output

 Important points related to CB-Amplifier :

 Input and output are in same phase.
Ic RL
 DC current gain   .  Resistance gain Rg  .
Ie Ri

I c
 Power gain Pg = Av × ac.  AC current gain  ac  .
I e

V0
 AC voltage gain Av  .  Av = ac × Rg.
Vi

I c
 Transconductance g m  . Av = gm × RL
Vi

 Common-Emitter (CE) Amplifier Ie  Ib  Ic

PNP NPN
Ic Ic

Ie RL Ib RL
Output Output

Input

VBB VCC VBB VCC

666 II PUC
Semiconductor Electronics
Input vi = Vi sin t Output v0 = V0 sin (t ± )

Vi

V0

 Important Points related to CE-Amplifier

 There is phase reversal of 180°.
Ic I c
 DC current gain   . AC current gain ac  .
Ib I b
V0
 AC voltage gain Av  .
Vi
 AC power gain = ac × Av [maximum in CE mode]
RL
 Resistance gain Rg  (Ri = input resistance).
Ri
1 1 I c
  1   < 1,  > 1  Trans conductance g m 
  Vi
 Applications of Transistor
 (i) As a switch (ii) As an amplifier (iii) As an oscillator
1
 Equations of oscillating Frequency f  2 ,
LC L = Inductance C = Capacitance
LOGIC GATES: Number of probability in logic gates is 2 n , Where n = number of Inputs
In the following diagrams (a), (b) and (c) respectively represent the truth table, the symbol and
the equivalent electrical circuit.
 OR Gate : Y = A + B
A B Y Y
0 0 0 A
0 1 1 Y=A+B A
1 0 1 , ,
1 1 1 B B

(a) (b) (c)

AND Gate : Y = A .B
A B Y
0 0 0 A Y
0 1 0 Y = A.B
1 0 0 , , A B
B
1 1 1

(a) (b) (c)

NOT Gate : Y = A
Y
A Y
0 1 A
, ,
1 0
(a) (b) (c)

II PUC 667
 Objective Physics
 NAND : Y  A.B  A  B

A
A.B A.B
A B A.B A.B Y
B
0 0 0 1
0 1 0 1
1 0 0 1 , A , A B
A.B
1 1 1 0
B
(a) (b) (c)
 NOR : Y  A  B  A.B

A
A+B A+B
Y
A B A+ B A+B
B
0 0 0 1 A
0 1 1 0
, A , B
1 0 1 0 A+B
1 1 1 0
B

(a) (b) (c)

 XOR Gate : Y  A.B  A.B
A B A B A.B A.B A.B+A.B
0 0 1 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 0 1
1 0 0 1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 0 0 0
(a)
A A A.B
B
A.B+A.B

A
B
(b)
B A.B
 XNOR Gate : Y  ( A .B  A.B )  A .B  A.B  ( A  B ). ( A  B )
A B Y
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
(a) (b)

668 II PUC
Semiconductor Electronics
EXAMINATION CORNER

1. In the circuit shown in the figure, the input volt- (3) Affects only reverse resistance
age V1 is 20 V, VBE  0 and VCE  0 . The values (4) Affects the overall V - I characteristics of p-
n junction
of I B , IC and  are given by (NEET-2018)
A: (4)Due to heating, number of electron-hole pairs
will increase, so overall resistance of diode will
change.
Due to which forward biasing and reversed
biasing both are changed.
3. In the combination of the following gates the
output Y can be written in terms of inputs A
and B as (NEET-2018)
(1) I B  20  A, IC  5 mA ,   250
(2) I B  25  A , IC  5mA ,   200
(3) I B  40  A , I C  10 mA ,   250
(4) I B  40  A,IC  5 mA,   125 (1) A  B  A  B (2) A  B  A  B
A: (4) VBE  0 , VCE  0 , Vb  0 (3) A  B (4) A  B

A: (2)


Y  A B  A B 
4. In a common emitter transistor amplifier the
 20  0  audio signal voltage across the collector is 3 V.
IC  ; I C  5  10 3  5 mA
4  10 3 The resistance of collector is 3 k. If current
Vi  VBE  I B RB ; Vi  0  I B RB gain is 100 and the base resistance is 2 k, the
voltage and power gain of the amplifier is
20  I B  500  10 3
(NEET-2017)
20 (1) 200 and 1000 (2) 15 and 200
IB   40  A
500  10 3 (3) 150 and 15000 (4) 20 and 2000
IC 25  10 3 A: (3) Current gain     100
   125
I b 40  10 6 Voltage gain
2. In a p-n junction diode, change in temperature Rc 3
 AV     100   = 150
due to heating (NEET-2018) Rb 2
(1) Does not affect resistance of p-n junction Power gain = AV  = 150 (100) = 15000
(2) Affects only forward resistance

II PUC 669
 Objective Physics
5. In a common emitter transistor amplifier the (NEET-II-2016)
audio signal voltage across the collector is 3 V.
The resistance of collector is 3 k. If current
gain is 100 and the base resistance is 2 k, the
voltage and power gain of the amplifier is
(NEET-2017) (1) 2.5 A (2) 10.0 A
(1) 200 and 1000 (2) 15 and 200 (3) 1.43 A (4) 3.13 A
(3) 150 and 15000 (4) 20 and 2000 A: (1) D1 is reverses biased

A: (3) Current gain     100 10V

D2 is forward biased I  2  2   2.5 A
 
Rc 3
Voltage gain  AV     100   = 150 9. What is the output Y in the following circuit,
Rb 2
when all the three inputs A, B, C are first 0 and
Power gain = AV  = 150 (100) = 15000 then 1? (NEET-II 2016)
6. Which one of the following represents forward
bias diode? (NEET-2017)

(1) (1) 0,1 (2) 0, 0

(3) 1, 0 (4) 1, 1
(2)
A: (3) Output Y =  A.B  .C  A  B  C
When A,B,C are 0  Y = 1
(3)
When A,B,C are 1  Y = 0
10. Consider the junction diode as ideal. The value
(4)
of current flowing through AB is (NEET-I 2016)
A: (1) In forward bias, p-type semiconductor is at
higher potential w.r.t. n-type semiconductor.
7. For CE transistor amplifier, the audio signal
voltage across the collector resistance of 2 k (1)0 A (2) 102 A (3) 101 A (4) 103 A
is 4 V. If the current amplification factor of the 10 2
transistor is 100 and the base resistance is 1 k A: (2) VA  V3  4   6   10  i  1000  10 A
then the input signal voltage is (NEET-II-2016) 11. A npn transistor is connected in common emit-
(1) 10 mV (2) 20 mV ter configuration in a given amplifier. A load
(3) 30 mV (4) 15 mV resistance of 800 is connected in the collector
4V 4V circuit and the voltage drop across it is 0.8 V. If
A: (2) RC  2 kV0  4V ; I C    2mA
RC 2 k the current amplificationfactor is 0.96 and the
input resistance of the circuit is 192  , the volt-
IC I
   100  I B  C 5
 2  10 A age gain and the power gain of theamplifier
IB 100 will respectively be: (NEET-I 2016)
5
Vin  I B Ri  2  10  1k  20mV (1)4, 3.84 (2)3.69, 3.84 (3)4, 4 (4)4, 3.69
8. The given circuit has two ideal diodes connected  RC 
as shown in the figure below. The current flow A: (1) Voltage gain =  .  
 RB 
ing through the resistance R1 will be
670 II PUC
Semiconductor Electronics
 80  96  8 n1  concentration of electron hole pair = 1019 m 3
V  0.96  ; V  4 n0  concentration of electron,
 192  192
And power gain of the amplifier is p0  concentration of holes = 1021 atom m 3
2
 ac .Av =0.96×4 =3.84  1019   10 21  n0  n0  1017 m3
12. To get output 1 for the following circuit, the
15. A P-N junction diode can withstand currents
correct choice for the input is: (NEET-I 2016)
up to 10 mA. Under forward bias, The diode
has a potential drop of 0.5 V across it which is
assumed to be independent of current.The maxi-
mum voltage of the battery used to forward bias
the diode when a resistance of 200 is con
(1)A=0,B=1,C=0 (2)A=1,B=0,C=0
nected in series with it is
(3)A=1,B=1,C=0 (4)A=1,B=0,C=1
(1) 2.5V (2) 2.6V (3) 2.7V (4) 2.8V
A: (4)
E  Vb
A: (1) i 
R
 E  iR  Vb  10  103  200  0.5  2.5V
16. A cell of emf 4.5V is connected to a junction
13. Figure shows the practical realisation of a logic diode whose barrier potential is 0.7V. If the
gate. Identify the logic gate
external resistance in the circuit is 190  , the
current in the circuit is
(1) 20 mA (2) 2m A (3) 23mA (4) 200mA
A: (1) V =4.5- 0.7=3.8V ; R  190 ,
V 3.8
i=   20mA
R 190
17. Two ideal junction diodes D1, D2 are connected
as shown in the figure. A 3V battery is connected
(1) NAND (2) NOR (3) XOR (4) XNOR between A and B. The current supplied by the
A: (1)The inputs A and B are both high when zero battery if its positive terminal is connected to A is
signal is observed only. Hence it is as NAND
gate.
14. A Ge specimen is doped with Al. The concen-
tration of acceptor atoms is 10 21 atoms / m 3 .
(1) 0.1A (2) 0.3 A (3) 0.9 A (4) 90 A
Given that the intrinsic concentration of elec-
A: (2)If positive terminal is connected to A, D1 is
tron -hole pairs is 1 0 1 9 / m 3 , the concentration
in forward bias and D2 is in reverse bias.
of electrons in the specimen is
(1) 1017 / m3 (2) 1015 / m3 V 3
So 20W is ineffective.  i    0.3 A
(3) 10 / m
4 3 (4) 10 / m
2 3 R 10
A: (1)When Ge specimen is doped with Al, then 18. Find the effective resistance between A and B
concentration of acceptor atoms is also called
2 4
concentration of holes. Using formula,
2 A
ni  n0 p0 where B

3
6

II PUC 671
 Objective Physics
(1) 5/18  (2) 9/5  (3) 18/5  (4) 5/9  22. For a logic 0101 the waveform is
A: (3)Use Wheat stones bridge principle (it through
(1) (2)
6  9 18
diode is 0)  Reff =  
69 5 (3) (4)
19. In the figure shown the potential drop across A: (1)
the series resistor is 23. Match the following Column I with Column II
2K Column I Column II
90 V
12 0V 20K

(i) n -p-n transistor A)

(1) 30 V (2) 60 V (3) 90 V (4) 120 V

A : (1) Vin  V  VZ  V  Vin  Vz  30V (ii) p-n-p transistor B)
20. A 220V ac supply is connected between points
A and B (Fig). What will be the potential
difference V across the capacitor? (iii) Light emmiting diode C)

(iv) Zener diode D)

(1) I-A,II-B,III-C, IV-D

(1) 220V (2) 110V (3) 0V (4) 220 2V
(2) I-D, II-A, III-B, IV-C
A: ( 4 ) C a p a c it o r o n ce g e t s ch a r g e d u p t o
(3) I-C, II-D, III-B, IV-A
maximum pot ential . After t hat for any
(4) I-B, II-A, III-C, IV-D
other lesser value of p.d across A and B
A: (3)
diode is reverse biased and it does not allow
charge to flow in opposite direction. 24. In the following circuit find I1 and I2

Vmax
FromVrms   Vmax  Vrms 2
2
 220 2 volts
21. A common emitter transistor amplifier has a
(1) 0, 0 (2) 5 mA, 5 mA
current gain of 50. If the load resistance is 4k  ,
(3) 5 mA, 0 (4) 0, 5 mA
and input resistance is 500  , the voltage gain
A: (4)
of amplifier is
25. The logic circuit shown below has the input
(1) 100 (2) 200 (3) 300 (4) 400
waveforms ‘A’ and ‘B’ as shown.
RL Pick out the correct output waveform
A: (4) AV  
Ri
 =50, RL  4 103  , Ri  500 

RL 4  103
Voltage gain Av    50   400
Ri 50

672 II PUC
Semiconductor Electronics
13
 5  1.28  10  100  6.4  10 J
11
Input A
27. For inputs (A, B) and output (Y) of the following
gate can be expressed as

Input B

(1)

 1  A  B  2  A.B  3 A  B  4  A  B
A: (1)
(2)

(3)

28. For a CE-transistor amplifier, the audio signal

voltage across the collector resistance of 2k is
(4) 2V. Suppose the current amplification factor of
the transistor is 100. Find the input signal
A: (1) voltage and base current, if the base resistance
26. Find the current produced at room temperature is 1k .
in a pure germanium plate of area 2  10 m 4 2
(1) 0.02V (2) 0.01V (3) 0.03V (4) 0.04V
and of thickness 1.2  10 m when a potential A : (2) Here; v  2V ,   100,
 3
0
of 5 V is applied across the faces. Concentration
RC (collector resistance) = 2 k , RB  1 k 
of carriers in germanium at room temperature
is 1.6  106 per cubic metre. The mobilities of v0  RC   RB   1 
As Av      , vi  v0   
electrons and holes are 0.4m 2V 1s 1 and v1  RB   RC    
0.2m 2V 1s 1 respectively. The heat energy
 1k    1 
generated in the plate in 100 second is   2V      0.01V
(1) 2.4 1011 J (2) 3.4  1011 J  2 k    100 
(3) 5.4  1011 J (4) 6.4  1011 J 29. For the transistor circuit shown below, if b=100,
voltage drop between emitter and base is 0.7 V
A: (4) n e  n h  n i
then value of VCE will be
  ni e  e  h   1.6  1.6  0.6  1013
Current produced in germanium plate.
V 
I  JA   E . A     A
d 
Heat generated in the plate, H  V  I  t

II PUC 673
 Objective Physics
sity of electrons. For given semiconductor ni =
(1) 10 V (2) 5 V (3) 13 V (4) 0 V 1.5  1016 m-3.
5  0 .7
A: (3) ib   0 .5 mA  Ic   Ib  100  0 .5 mA (1) 3  109 m-3 (2) 4  109 m-3
8.6
By using (3) 5  108 m-3 (4) 6  10-9 m-3
4. Find current flowing through 5  resistance,
VCE  VCC  I c RL  18  50  10 3  100  13V
(Consider both the diodes as an ideal diodes)
30. In the following common emitter configuration
an NPN transistor with current gain b = 100 is
used. The output voltage of the amplifier will be

(1) 10 mV (2) 0.1 V (3) 1.0 V (4) 10 V (1) 2.0 A (2) 1.0 A (3) 0.5 A (4) 0
5. Current flowing through the given circuit, I =.....
Output voltage
A: (3)Voltage gain  Input voltage A. (consider all the diodes as an ideal diodes)
 Vout = Vin  Voltage gain
 Vout = Vin Current gain  Resistance gain
LR 10
= Vin  b  R = 10 3  100  1  1V .
BE

(1) 0.5 A (2) 1 A (3) 1.5 A (4) 2 A

TASK - I 6. Current drown from the battery in given cir cuit
is, I = ......(Diode D1 and D2 are ideal diode)
1. A pure silicon block is connected with battery of
2V emf at temperature 300 K. The length of cross
section is 10 cm and cross sec tional area is
1.0  10 4 m2 . How much electric current will flow
through this block ? Mobility of electron is 0.14
m2 V-1 s-1 and num ber density is 1.5  1016 m-3.
(1) 6.72  10-4 A (2) 6.72  10-5 A 5 5 5 5
(3) 6.72  10-6 A (4) 6.72  10-7 A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A
40 50 10 20
2. Find the number density of impurity atom 7. In the given circuit with 220 V (rms) AC volt
added to convert pure Silicon semiconductor age source a diode and a capacitor are con-
having conductivity 6400 1m1 , in to n type nected in series, then what will be the volt age
semiconductor. across two plate of capacitor ?
Mobility of electron is 0.133 m2V 1s1 , Neglect
proporation of holes in conductor.
(1) 3  1022 m-3 (2) 3  1023 m-3
(3) 3  1024 m-3 (4) 3  1021 m-3
3. When in the given semiconductor Indium im- (1) 720 V (2) 110 V
purity is added the number density of holes is (3) 311.1 V (4) 110 2v
obtained 4.5  1023 m-3, then find number den-
674 II PUC
Semiconductor Electronics
8. Current flowing in the given circuit, I = (D1 and (1) 0 (2) 9.65 mA
D2 are ideal diode) (3) 10.0 mA (4) 10.36 mA
14. In the following circuit P-N junction diodes D1,
D2 and D3 are connected between A and B. Con
sider diodes as an ideal diodes. Arrange
resistance obtained in the circuit when sup-
ply voltage is connected across A and B of
5 5 1 5 following values
(1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A
6 7 2 4 (i) -10 V, -5 V (ii) -5 V,-10 V (iii) -4 V, -12 V
9. What will be the potential difference between
two terminal of 2  resistance in the given
circuit ? consider diode as an ideal diode.

(1) (i) < (ii) < (iii) (2) (iii) < (ii) < (i)
(3) (ii) = (iii) < (i) (4) (i)  (iii) < (ii)
(1) 10 V (2) 0 V (3) 20 V (4) 12 V
15. In a full wave rectifier circuit operating from
10. If in the given circuit when the voltage across
50Hz mains frequency, the fundamental fre
two ends A and B is 15 V and Zener break-
quency in the ripple would be
down voltage is 6 V then the potential differ
(1) 50 Hz (2) 25 Hz (3) 100 Hz (4) 70.7 Hz
ence across two ends of resistor R will be .....
16. The pieces of Aluminium and Silicon are placed
in closed room at 280 K temperature, then
which of the following statement is corrent ?
(Initial temperature is 300 K)
(1) Resistance of both decreases.
(2) Resistance of both increases.
(3) Resistance of Aluminium decreases, but
(1) 6 V (2) 11 V (3) 9 V (4) 17 V
resistance of silicon increases
11. The LED is working with 6 V battery and resis-
(4) Resistance of Aluminium increases, but
tance R. When 10 mA current is passes through
resistance of silicon decreases
it the voltage drop obtained is 2 V, then value
of R will be 17. The rms value of AC signal in half wave rectifier is
(1) 40 k  (2) 4 k  (3) 200  (4) 400  (1) Equal to value of DC
12. The wavelength of light incident on photo di- (2) Less then value of DC
 
ode is 1700 nm, then it.s energy gap Eg will (3) Greater then value of DC
be how much ? (4) Zero
(1) 0.073 eV (2) 1.20 eV 18. Which diode is in forward bias from the
(3) 0.73 eV (4) 1.16 eV following ?
13. Find the current flowing in the following cir
cuit. Consider diode as an ideal diode. (1)

(2)

II PUC 675
 Objective Physics
(3) 5 mA, 75 A, 66.6
(3) (4) 10 mA, 200  A, 50
24. AC Current gain for N-P-N common emitter
circuit is 150. Input resistance of transisstar is
(4)
500  . To obtain power gain equal to 1000 for
19. In an N - P - N common emitter amplifier when this circuit, find the value of load resis tance.
load resistance is 18 k the voltage gain (1) 93.75 (2) 22.22  (3) 200  (4) 300 
obtained is 270. If input resistance of circuit is 25. For common emitter transistor the current gain
3 k then what will be transconductance and is 0.98. If input and output load resistance
current gain for that ? are 70  and 5 k  respectively then find volt
(1) 0.015  , 45 (2) 0.03  , 25 age gain and power gain.
(3) 0.02  , 20 (4) 0.04  , 20 (1) 2200, 15700 (2) 400, 217150
20. In an N . P . N common base transistor circuit (3) 2500, 121500 (4) 3500, 171500
4 % electrons from emitter combines with holes 26. The current gain for a transistor is 50. When it
in base. If collector current is 24 mA then find is used as common emitter it.s input resis tance
emitter current and current gain. is 1 k  and maximum value of input voltage
(1) 40 mA, 0.85 (2) 20 mA, 0.93 is 0.01V, then find value of collector current at
(3) 25 mA, 0.96 (4) 30 mA, 0.96 that time.
21. The base current changes by 250  A when 175 (1) 500  A (2) 50 mA (3) 0.5  A (4) 0.5mA
27. In common base amplifire input resistance and
mV input signal is applied to CE amplifire. If
load resistance are 3  and 24  respectively.
output voltage is 5V then find output
If current gain is 0.6, then find voltage gain.
resistance  RL  and voltage gain for that.
(1) 0.48 (2) 48 (3) 4.8 (4) 480
(1) 1 k  , 10 (2) 3 k  , 12.5 28. In common base transistor amplifier current
(3) 70 k , 28.8 (4) 0.7 k , 28.8 gain is 0.5. Emitter current is 7mA then find
22. In N-P-N common emitter amplifier input volt- base current.
(1) 5.5 mA (2) 4.5 mA (3) 2.5 mA (4) 3.5 mA
age is changed by 200 mV, the collector current
changes by 5 mA. Current gain in this cir cuit is 20
29. In transistor oscillator circuit, L  2 mH and
100. What should be the value of load resistance 
to obtain power gain equal to 5000 ? C  0.02  F , then find resonance frequency of
(1) 3000  (2) 2000  (3) 1000  (4) 4000  os cillator
23. In the circuit, given in figure keeping voltage at (1) 25 mHz (2) 25 kHz (3) 2.5 kHz(4) 250 kHz
30. Find output Y for following circuit :
base resistance RB , equal to +15V, voltage
VBE and VCE both becomes zero, then find
I c , I  and  for that circuit.

(1) 0 (2) 1 (3) 0, 1 (4) 1, 0

31. As shown in the figure the combination of OR
gate and short circuited NAND will be have as
which gate ?

(1) 7 mA, 250 mA, 38.7

(2) 5 mA, 50  A, 100
676 II PUC
Semiconductor Electronics
(1) NOT gate (2) OR gate (1) Y  AB  B (2) Y  AB  B A
(3) NAND gate (4) NOR gate
32. Find output Y for following circuit.
(3) Y  AB  B 
(4) Y  A  B .B
38. For the given combination of gate which op tion
from the following is correct ?

(1) AB  X (2) A  B  X

(1) 0 (2) 1
(3) A B  X (4) A  B  X
(3) Between 0 and 1 (4) can’t say any thing
39. Following combination of gates will behave as
33. Following combination will behave as which gate ? which gate ?

(1) AND gate (2) NAND gate

(3) OR gate (4) XOR gate (1) AND gate (2) XOR gate
34. In the following circuit combinations output at (3) NOR gate (4) NAND gate
A, B and C are respectively........ 40. The resistance of P-N junction in forward and
reverse bias are respectively.... , and.....
(1) (1) 100  , 10 6  (2) 10 6  , 100 
(3) 10 2  , 10 6  (4) 10 6  , 10 2 
41. The value of thresold voltage for Ge and Si are
(2) respectively .... and .....
(1) 0.7 V, 0.3 V (2) 0.4 V, 0.5 V
(3) 0.3 V, 0.8 V (4) 0.3 V, 0.7 V
(3) 42. P-Side is earthed for a P.N junction diode and .3V
electric potential is givnen to N-side then diode
(1) 0, 1, 1 (2) 0, 1, 0 (3) 1, 1, 0 (4) 1, 0, 1 (1) Will not conduct electric current
35. Which gate will be obtained by combination of (2) Will pass electric current partially
following gates ? (3) Will conduct electric current
(4) will breakdown
43. In P-N junction diode the depletion region is
formed due to
(1) XOR (2) AND (3) NAND (4) OR
(1) Driffing of holes
36. Which gate will be obtained by combination of
(2) Diffution of constituent ions
following gates ?
(3) Driffing of electrons
(4) Displacement of impurity ions
44. For a transistar   0.95. If change in emitter
(1) NOT (2) NAND (3) XOR (4) OR current is 10 mA then change in base cur rent
37. Which of following is correct option for given will be
combination of gates ? (1) 10.5 mA (2) 0.5 mA
20
(3) 9.5 mA (4) mA
19

II PUC 677
 Objective Physics
45. In common base amplifire the input resistance (3) v will increase but n will decrease
is 4  and load resistance is 32  .   0.5, then (4) both n and v will decreases
what will be voltage gain ? 3. If a small amount of antimony is added to
(1) 2 (2) 8 (3) 4 (4) 8 germanium crystal
46. For a transistor   0.95. . If change in emitter (1) it becomes a p-type semiconductor
current is 100 mA then calculate change in (2) the antimony becomes an acceptor atom
(3) there will be more free electrons than holes
collector current.
in the semiconductor
(1) 90 mA (2) 100 mA(3) 80 mA (4) 95 mA
(4) its resistance is increased
47. For common base amplifier and common-emit-
4. By increasing the temperature, the specific
ter amplifire the phase difference between in put
resistance of a conductor and a semiconductor
and output voltage are respectively ... & .... .
(1) increases for both (2) decreases for both
(1) 0, 180 o (2) 180 o , 0 (3) 0 o , 0 o (4) 180 o , 180 o (3) increases, decreases (4) decreases, increases
48. Diffusion current in a p-n junction is greater 5. A strip of copper and another of germanium
than the drift current in magnitude are cooled from room temperature to 80K. The
(1) if the junction is forward-biased resistance of
(2) if the junction is reverse-biased (1) each of these decreases
(3) if the junction is unbiased (2) copper strip increases and that of germanium
(4) in no case decreases
49. In a p-n junction diode not connected to any (3) copper strip decreases and that of
circuit germanium increases
(1) the potential is the same everywhere (4) each of these increases
(2) the p-type side has a higher potential than 6. Carbon, silicon and Germanium atoms have
four valence electrons each. Their valence and
the n-type side
conduction bands are separated by energy band
(3) there is an electric field at the junction
gaps represented by (E g) C, (E g) Si and (E g) Ge
directed from the n-type side to p-type side
respectively. Which one of the following
(4) there is an electric field at the junction
relationship is true in their case?
directed from the p-type side to n-type side
50. A common emitter amplifier has a voltage a (1)  E g C   E g Si (2)  E g C   E g Si
gain of 50, an input impedance of 100 and
(3)  E g C   E g Si (4)  E g C   E g Ge
an output impedance of 200. The power gain
of the amplifier is 7. Pure Si at 500K has equal number of electron
(n e) and hole (nh) concentrations of 1.5  1016
(1) 500 (2) 1000 (3) 1250 (4) 100
m–3. Doping by indium increases nh to 4.5  1022
TASK - II
m–3. The doped semiconductor is of
1. At absolute zero, Si acts as
(1) n –type with electron concentration
(1) non- metal (2) metal
ne = 5  1022 m–3
(3) insulator (4) None of these
(2) p – type with electron concentration
2. An electric field is applied to a semiconductor.
ne = 2.5  1010m–3
Let the number of charge carriers be n and the
(3) n – type with electron concentration
average drift speed be v. If the temperature is
ne = 2.5  1023 m–3
increased
(4) p – type having electron concentration
(1) both n and v will increase
ne = 5 109 m–3
(2) n will increase but v will decrease

678 II PUC
Semiconductor Electronics
8. On doping germanium with donor atoms of 16. In which of the following statements, the
density 1017 cm–3 its conductivity mho/ cm will obtained in impure semiconductors is p-type?
be [Given : e = 3800 cm2/ V – s and ni = 2.5  (1) Germanium is doped with bismuth
1013 cm –13 ] (2) Silicon is doped with antimony
(1) 30.4 (2) 60.8 (3) 91.2 (4) 121.6 (3) Germanium is doped with gallium
9. The ratio of electron and hole currents in a (4) Silicon is doped with phosphorus
semiconductor is 7/4 and the ratio of drift velocities 17. In V-I characteristic of a p-n junction, reverse
of electrons and holes is 5/4, then the ratio of biasing results in
concentrations of electron and holes will be (1) leakage current
(1) 5/7 (2) 7/5 (3) 25/49 (4) 49/25
(2) the current barrier across junction increases
10. The intrinsic conductivity of germanium at 27
(3) no flow of current
is 2.13 mno m–1 and mobilities of electrons and
(4) large current
holes are 0.38 and 0.18 m2 V–1s–1 respectively.
18. In reverse biasing
The density of charge carriers is
(1) large amount of current flows
(1) 2.37  1019 m–3 (2) 3.28 1019 m–3
(2) potential barrier across junction increases
(3) 7.83  1019 m–3 (4) 8.47  1019 m–3
11. In a p-type semiconductor the acceptor level is (3) depletion layer resistance increases
saturated 60 meV above the valance band. The (4) no current flows
maximum wavelength of light required to 19. Zener diode is used for
produce a hole will be (1) amplification (2) rectification
(1) 0.207  10–5 m (2) 2.07  10–5 (3) stabilization (4) all of the above
(3) 20.7  10–5 m (4) 2075  10–5 m 20. Filter circuit
12. In a p-n junction having depletion layer of (1) eliminates a.c. component
thickness 106 m the potential across it is 0.1 V. (2) eliminates d.c. component
The electric field is (3) does not eliminate a.c. component
(1) 107 V/m (2) 10–6 V/m (4) None of these
(3) 105 V/m (4) 10–5 V/m 21. Barrier potential of a P-N junction diode does
13. In a reverse biased diode when the applied not depend on
voltage changes by 1 V, the current is found to (1) doping density (2) diode design
change by 0.5 A. The reverse bias resistance (3) temperature (4) forward bias
of the diode is 22. When p-n junction diode is forward biased then
(1) 2  105 (2) 2  106  (1) both the depletion region and barrier height
(3) 200  (4) 2 
are reduced
14. The forbidden gap in Ge is 0.72 eV, Given, hc =
(2) the depletion region is widened and barrier
12400 eV-Å. The maximum wavelength of
height is reduced
radiation that will generate electron hole pair is
(3) the depletion region is reduced and barrier
(1) 172220 Å (2) 172.2 Å
height is increased
(3) 17222 Å (4) 1722 Å
(4) Both the depletion region and barrier height
15. Copper and Germanium are cooled from room
temperature to 100 K. Then, the resistance of are increased
(1) germanium increases, copper increases 23. The average value of output direct current in a
(2) germanium decreases, copper increases half wave rectifier is
(3) germanium decreases, copper decreases (1) I0 /  (2) I0 / 2 (3) I0 / 2 (4) 2I 0 / 
(4) germanium increases, copper decreases

II PUC 679
 Objective Physics
24. Of the diodes shown in the following diagrams, 30. In a transistor
which one is reverse biased? (1) the emitter has the least concentration of impurity
(2) the collector has the least concentration of impurity
(1) (2) (3) the base has the least concentration of impunity
(4) all the three regions have equal
concentration of impurity
(3) (4) 31. Current gain in common emitter configuration
is more than 1 because
25. When the forward bias voltage of a diode is
(1) Ic < Ib (2) Ic < Ie (3) Ic > Ie (4) Ic > Ib
changed from 0.6 V to 0.7 V, the current
32. Operating point of a transistor is
changes from 5 mA to 15 mA. Then its forward
(1) zero signal value of VCC and Ib
bias resistance is
(2) zero signal value of Ic
(1) 0.01  (2) 0.1 1 (3) 10  (4) 100 
(3) zero signal value of VCC
26. A diode having potential difference 0.5 V across
(4) zero signal value of IC and VCE
its junction which does not depend on current,
33. A transistor is essentially
is connected in series with resistance of 20 
(1) a current operated device
across source. If 0.1 A current passes through
(2) power driven device
resistance then what is the voltage of the
(3) a voltage operated device
source?
(4) resistance operated device
(1) 1.5 V (2) 2.0 V (3) 2.5 V (4) 5 V
34. In a common base mode of transistor, the
27. If the forward bias on p-n junction is increased
collector current is 5.488 mA for an emitter
from zero to 0.045 V, then no current flows in
current of 5.60 mA. The value of the base
the circuit. The contact potential of junction i.e.,
current amplification fact () will be
VB is
(1) 49 (2) 50 (3) 51 (4) 48
(1) zero (2) 0.045 V
35. A transistor has a base current of 1 mA and
(3) more than 0.045 V (4) less than 0.045 V
emitter current 90 mA. The collector current
28. Two ideal diodes are connected to a battery as
will be
shown in the circuit. The current supplied by
(1) 90 mA (2) 1 mA (3) 89 mA (4) 91 mA
the battery is 36. In a common base mode of a transistor, the
collector current is 5.488 mA for an emitter  =
60, R o = 5000 and internal resistance of a
transistor is 500 . The voltage amplification
of amplifier will be
(1) 500 (2) 460 (3) 600 (4) 560
37. For a common base amplifier, the values of
(1) 0.75 A (2) zero (3) 0.25 A (4) 0.5 A resistance gain and voltage gain are 3000 and
29. The diffusion current in p-n junction is from 2800 respectively. The current gain will be
(1) 1.1 (2) 0.98 (3) 0.93 (4) 0.83
the
38. What is the voltage gain in a common emitter
(1) n – side to the p-side amplifier, where input resistance is 3  and load
(2) p-side to the n-side resistance 24 ,  = 0.6 ?
(3) n-side to the p-side if the junction is forward biased (1) 8. 4 (2) 4. 8 (3) 2. 4 (4) 480
and in the opposite direction if it is reverse biased 39. The current gain of a transistor in common base
(4) p-side to the n-side if the junction is forward- mode is 0.995. The current gain of the same
biased and in the opposite direction if it is transistor in common emitter mode is
(1) 197 (2) 201 (3) 198 (4) 199
reverse biased
680 II PUC
Semiconductor Electronics
40. The transfer ratio of transistor is 50. The input
resistance of a transistor when used in C. E.
(Common Emitter) configuration is 1 k.The
peak value of the collector A.C current for an (1) XOR gate (2) AND gate
A.C input voltage of 0.01 peak is (3) NAND gate (4) OR gate
(1) 100 A(2) 0.01 mA (3) 0.25 mA(4) 500 A
41. In transistor, the change in base current from 49. The following truth table with A and B as inputs
100 A to 125 A caused a change in collector is for ______ gate
current from 5 mA to 7.5 mA, keeping collector
– to – emitter voltage constant at 10 V. What is A B Output
the current gain of the transistor? 1 0 1
(1) 200 (2) 100 (3) 50 (4) 25 1 1 0
42. In common emitter amplifier, the current gain is
0 1 1
62. The collector resistance and input resistance
are 5 k and 500  respectively. If the input 0 0 0
voltage is 0.01 V, the output voltage is
(1) NOR (2) AND (3) OR (4) XOR
(1) 0.62 V (2) 6.2 V (3) 62 V (4) 620 V
43. A common emitter amplifier has a voltage gain 50. The output of an OR gate is connected to both
of 50, an input impedance of 100  and an the inputs of a NAND gate. The combination
output impedance of 200 . The power gain of will serve as
the amplifier is (1) AND gate (2) NOT gate
(1) 500 (2) 1000 (3) 1250 (4) 50 (3) NAND gate (4) NOR gate
44. An n-p-n transistor can be considered to the KEY
equivalent to two diodes, connected. Which of
TASK - I
the following figures is the correct one?
1 4 2 2 3 3 4 3 5 3
6 2 7 3 8 3 9 2 10 3
(1) (2) 11 4 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3
16 3 17 2 18 2 19 1 20 3
21 4 22 2 23 3 24 2 25 4
26 1 27 3 28 4 29 2 30 1
(3) (4)
31 4 32 1 33 1 34 3 35 2
45. If -current gain of a transistor is 0.96. What is 36 4 37 3 38 1 39 4 40 1
the value of  -current gain of the transistor? 41 4 42 3 43 2 44 2 45 3
(1) 0.49 (2) 48 (3) 4.9 (4) 5 46 4 47 1 48 1 49 3 50 3
46. In a transistor connected in a common emitter TASK - II
mode, R0 = 4 kW, Ri = 1 kW, Ic = 1 A and Ib = 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 5 3
20 A. The voltage gain is 6 1 7 4 8 2 9 2 10 1
(1) 100 (2) 200 (3) 300 (4) 400 11 2 12 3 13 2 14 3 15 4
47. In a transistor connected in a common emitter
16 3 17 1 18 2 19 3 20 1
mode, R0 = 4 k, Ri = 1 k, Ic = 1 mA and Ib =
21 3 22 1 23 1 24 4 25 3
20 mA. The voltage gain is 26 3 27 3 28 4 29 2 30 3
31 4 32 4 33 4 34 1 35 3
(1) 100 (2) 200 (3) 300 (4) 400
36 3 37 3 38 2 39 4 40 4
48. Following diagram performs the logic function of 41 2 42 2 43 3 44 2 45 2
46 2 47 2 48 2 49 4 50 4
II PUC 681
 Objective Physics
HINTS & SOLUTION
TASK - I
V V 2
1. (4) E     20 Vm 1 ,A  10 4 m 2
d l 0.1 6. (2)
Vd
e   Vd   e E  0.14  20  2.8 ms 1
E D2 diode is in forward bias while D1 diode is in
I e  neAVd reverse bias, as circuit shown in figure. So,
branch of D1 diode has infinite resistance while
 1.5  1016  1.6  10 19  10 4  2.8 ;
taking resistance of D2
I e  6.72  10 7 A  current in the circuit is, (According V = IR)
2. (2)
5
 6400 5 = I (30 + 20), I = A
ne   23 3 50
 e e 0.133  1.6  10 19  3.0  10 m
Vo
2 ni2 7. (3) Vrms   Vo  2 Vrms  2  220
3. (3) n in n
e h  n e  2
nh
= 1.4142  220 = 311.1 V
16 2


 1.5  10   5  10 8 m3
23
4.5  10
4. (3) Diode B is in reverse bias in given circuit.
Thus, equivalent circuit is as follow : 8. (3)

In given circuit diode D2 is in reverse bias while

diode D1 is in forward bias.
 according to V = IR, 6 = I (6 + 6);
V = IR. 5 = I (5 + 5) ; 5 = I (10) 6 1
I   A
1 12 2
I A  0.5 A
2 9. (2) Here diode D is in reverse bias. So circuit is
5. (3) In given circuit D1 is in reverse bias and D2, open circuit. So, current is not flowing, Accord
D3 are in forward bias so, equivalent circuit is ing to V = IR, V = 0  2 = 0.
as follow. 10. (3) VAB = VR + VZ  15 = VR + 6
V  VR = 15 - 6 = 9 V
11. (4) V = VLED + VR, V = 6 V ;6 = 2 + I R,
VLED = 2V
4 4 4000
IR  4, R   3
  400 
1 10  10 10
hc 6.62  10 34  3  108
 5  5  20 200 20 12. (3) Eg   eV
 R    &  1700  109  1.6  1019
5  5  20 30 3
= 0.73 eV
V 10 30 13. (3) Here diode D2 is in reverse bias in given
V  IR  I   3  I = 1.5 A
R 20 20 circuit so current will not flow. However, tak
ing zero resistance of D1 diode,
682 II PUC
Semiconductor Electronics
E = IR  20 = I  2000 ; AP 5000
AV    50 ;
20 1 Ai 100
I   10 mA
2000 100 AV
14. (3) (i) VA = -10 V, VB = -5 V ; AV  gm RL ,  RL 
gm ...(1) ;
R R 3
R AB  R    R 50
4 4 2 RL   2000 
R R R 0.025
(ii) VA = -5 V, VB = -10 V; R AB     R 23. (3) (i) For input circuit 15 - 200  103 I = 0
4 2 4 B

R R R 15
(iii) VA = -4 V, VB = -12 V; R AB    R  200  10 3 I B  15,  I B 
4 2 4 200  10 3
15. (3)  I B  7.5  10 5 A
16. (3) With decreasing temperature, resistance of
metal decreases. Thus, Resistance of Alumi-  I B  75  10 6 A  75  A
num decrease when resistance of silicon in (ii) For output circult : 15 - 3  103 IC = 0 ;
crease. 3  10+3 IC = 15
vo 15
17. (2)According to Vrms = , vo is output volt  IC   5  10 3 A  5 mA
2 3  10 3
age. Vrms is input. Here output is DC voltage. IC 5  10 3
(iii)  =  5
,  B  0.666  10 2
 vo  2 vrms I B 7.5  10
18. (2) In A, C, D, N-type semiconductor is at  B  66.6
high potential and P-type semiconductor is at
AP 1000 100 RL
Low potenctial. 24. (2) (i) AV =   ...(i) AV  Ai
 A, C, D diode in reverse bias while B diode Ai 150 15 ri
is in forward bias. A 100 500
 RL  V ri    22.22 ;
AV 270 2 Ai 15 150
19. (1) (i) gm = R  18  10 3  1.5  10  0.015 mho
L
 RL  22.22 
3
AV ri 270  3  10
 ii     0.015  3  10 3  45  0.98
RL 18  10 3 25. (4)     49
1   1  0.98
20. (3) (i) IC = 96 % IE ,  IC = 0.96 IE; IC = 24 mA,
RL 49  5  10 3
24 I 24 (i) AV =    3500
 IE   25 mA  ii   C   0.96 ri 70
0.96 IE 25
21. (4) (i) ri & (ii) A P =  A V  49  3500  1,71, 500
VBE 175  10 3 VBE 0.01 I
=  6
 0.7  10 3  0.7 k  26. (1) I B    10 5 A , B  C
I B 250  10 ri 1000 I B
VCE 5  IC    I B  50  105 A
(ii)AV = 
VBE 175  10 3
 500  10 6 A  500  A
 0.0286  10 3  28.8  AV  28.8 RL 24
27. (3) AV   ,  AV   0.6  4.8
I C 5  10 3 ri 3
g
22. (2) m    0.025 mho
VBE 200  10 3
II PUC 683
 Objective Physics
IC I output of AND gate is A · B. Hewever,
28. (4)   ,  0.50  C  IC  3.5 mA ; this output is input for NOT gate.
IE IE
 output X = A  B
IB = IE - IC = 7-3.5 = 3.5 mA
39. (4) output of G1 is A and output of G2 is B are
1
1  inputs for NOR gate. so output of NOR gate
29. (2) f  20 3 6
2 LC 2  2  10  0.02  10 is A  B . So, output is Y  A  B  A  B .
= 0.25  105 = 25  103 = 25 kHz Which is Boolean equation for NAND gate.
30. (1)Gate 1 is NOT gate and Gate-2 is AND 40. (1)
gate. So, output of NOT gate is B = A, gate-2 is 41. (4)
AND gate so Y = A · B = A · A  0 42. (3) Current flow because of forward bias.
43. (2) Diffusion of constituent of ions
31. (4) Truth table
IC I E  I B
44. (2)    
IE IE
10  I B
 0.95   I B  0.5 mA
10

 NOR gate Ro 32
45. (3)  AV     AV   0.5  A  4
32. (1) Lower NOT gate reversing input and gives Ri 4 V

zero. output of G3 is 1. From second NOT gate, IC I

input of G1 is 1, output of G1 is 1 so output of G2 46. (4)     0.95  C  I  95 mA
I E 100 C

is 0.
47. (1)
,
33. (1) Y  A  B, Y  Y ,  A  B  A  B = AND gate 48. (1) Conceptual
49. (3) At junction a potential barrier/depletion
34. (3) (1) layer is formed with n-side at higher potential
and p side at lower potential. Therefore, there
is an electric field at the junction directed from
the n-side to p-side
(2)

(3)

output of A, B, C are 4 1, 1, 0... 50. (3) Voltage gain =   Impedance gain

35. (2) Y ,  A  B, Y  Y ,  A  B  A  B 200
 50       25 . Also, Power gain
100
36. (4) Y ,  A  B, Y  Y ,  A  B  A  B
2 200
37. (3) Here output of NAND gate is A  B. = 2  Impedance gain   25   1250
100
TASK - II
However, this output A  B and B are inputs
1. (3) Semiconductors are insulators at low
for OR gate. So output Y = A  B  B temperature.
38. (1) Here A and B are inputs of AND gate. So,
684 II PUC
Semiconductor Electronics
2. (1) As electric field is applied electrons present V 1
   2  106 
in semiconductor will drift opposite in the I 0.5 106
direction of electric field
hc 12400 o

3. (3) When small amount of antimony 14. (3) Energy gap, E g    17222 A
 0.72
(pentavalent) is added to germanium crystal
15. (4) Resistance of conductor decreases while
then crystal becomes n-type semiconductor.
those of semiconductors increases on cooling
Therefore, there will be more free electrons that 16. (3) Conceptual
holes in the semiconductor.
17. (1) Leakage current is the name given to the
4. (3) The resistivity of conductor increases with
reverse current.
increase in temperature. The resistivity of 18. (2) In the reverse biasing of p-n junction, the
semiconductor decreases as the temperature
voltage applied supports the barrier voltage
increases.
across junction, which increases in width of
5. (3) Copper is a conductor so its resistance depletion layer and hence increases its
decreases on decreasing temperature as thermal
resistance
agitation decreases whereas germanium is 19. (3) Zener diode is used as a voltage regular i.e.,
semiconductor, therefore on decreasing for stabilization purposes.
temperature resistance increases.
20. (1) Filter current a. c. component of rectified
6. (1) Due to strong electronegativity of carbon. voltage obtained from p-n junction as a rectifier.
7. (4) n i2  n en h 21. (3) Barrier potential depends on, doping density,
(1.5  1016)2 = n0 (4.5  1022) ne = 0.5  1010
temperature, forward/reverse bias but does not
or ne = 5  109 Given nh = 4.5  1022  nh >> ne depend on diode design.
 Semiconductor is p-type and ne 22. (1) Both the depletion region and barrier height
= 5  109 m3
are reduced.
8. (2) Conductivity  = niee = 1017  (1.6  1019)  23. (1) The average value of output direct current
3800 = 60.8 mho/cm in a half wave rectifier is = (average value of
9. (2) I = nA evd or I µ nvd
current over a cycle)/2 = (2I0/)/2 = I0/
I e n e ve n I v 7 4 7 24. (4) Positive terminal is at lower potential (0V)
  or e  e  h   
Ih n h v h n h Ih v e 4 5 5 and negative terminal is at higher potential 5V.
1 25. (3) Forward bias resistance
10. (1) Conductivity,    e  n e e  n h  h 

V   0.7  0.6   0.1  10
19
i.e., 2.13 = 1.6  10 (0.38 + 0.18)ni  3
I 15  5  mA 10  10
(Since in intrinsic semi-conductor, ne = nh = ni)
 density of charge carriers, ni
2.13
 19
 2.37 109 m 3
1.6  10  0.56
26. (3)
34 8
hc 6.62  10  3  10 5
11. (2)   E   60  103  1.6  1019   2.07  10 m
V = V + IR = 0.5 + 0.1  20 = 2.5 V
V 0.1 27. (3) When no current flows at the junction plane,
12. (3) E    105 Vm 1
d 106 then contact potential of junction plane is equal
13. (2) Reverse resistance to the forward voltage applied = 0.045 V

II PUC 685
 Objective Physics
28. (4) Here D1 is in forward bias and D2 is in reverse [IB = 125 A  100 A = 25 A IC = 7.5
mA  5 mA = 2.5 mA]
bias so, D1 will conduct and D2 will not conduct.
Vo R o 5 103  62
Thus, no current will flow through DC ; 42. (2)     10  62  620
Vin R in 500
V 5 1
I   Amp VO = 620  Vin = 620  0.01 = 6.2 V
R 10 2  VO = 6.2 volt
29. (2) Conceptual
43. (3) Power gain = voltage gain  current gain
30. (3) In transistor base is least doped, so that most
of electrons emitted (in case of npn) from
V I V2 R 100
emitter reach to collector and less number of  VG .I G  0 . 0 02 . i  50  50   2500  1250
Vi Ii Vi R 0 200 2
electrons are destroyed due to recombination
with holes in base. 44. (2) Figure (2) is correct
Ic 45. (2) By constants (or parameters) of a transistor
31. (4)   I  1 or Ic > Ib where  and  are the AC current gains of a
B
transistor in the common-base configuration
32. (4) Operating point of a transistor is zero signal
and in the common-emitter configuration
value of Ic and VCE
33. (4) A transistor is a current operating device in respectively.
which the emitter current controls the collector  0.96
 
current. 1   1  0.96
34. (1) IC = 5.488 mA, Ie = 5.6 mA 0.96 96
Where  = 0.96,  = ?    48
5.488  0.02 2
 ,   49
5.6 1  I c R 0
35. (3) IC = IE – IB = 90 – 1 = 89 mA 46. (2) Voltage gain A v  I  R
b i
36. (3) Voltage amplification
103 4 1000
R 5000     200
A v   0  60  600 20 106 1 5
Ri 500
A V 2800 47. (2)
37. (3) Current gain,   A  3000  0.93
R R  1  4  103  4000
Av   0   3  3 
  200
RL 24  R i  20  10  1 10  20
38. (2) Voltage gain, A V   R  0.6  3  4.8
i

39. (4) Current gain in common emitter mode 48. (2)

 0.995 0.995
    199 X  AB
1   1  0.995 0.005
Vs 0.01  Y  X  AB
5
40. (4) i B  R  103  110 A Y = AB by Demorgan theorem
in ic  This diagram performs the function of AND
Now  of transistor is defined as ac  i
or ic = 50  105 = 500 A
b gate.
49. (4) For an XOR gate, output is high when odd
I C
41. (2) Current gain  I when VCE is constant. number of input are high
B
50. (4)
2.5 103
 6
 0.1 103  100
25 10
686 II PUC
Summary of Annotations